

































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Class PC XIII 

Book . L 4 3 3 

/?z 3 

Gopyiight N n _ 


COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT. 










* 


» 

’ ■ 

' 

. 








■ • 








I 










' 





/ 




/ 



































- 






V 



- 

• ; I . ' V ■ 


























r.. . 






. 




V 







■ 






t 

■ 

■ 





BEGINNING FRENCH 


REVISED 


with Summary of Grammar 


BY . 

BARRY CERF 

\\ 

AND 

W. F. GIESE 


of the University of Wisconsin 


PEN-AND-INK DRAWINGS BY 

J. ORMSBEE 



NEW YORK 

HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY 



rpC/ * 1 ' 1 

x (j 4” 3 a 


Copyright, 1919, 1921, 1923 

BY 

HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY 
July, 1923 




^ #• 
u #> ' 


" » 


PRINTED IN THE U. S. A. 


AUC 28 ’23 


©C1A752663 

I SMt t 


PUBLISHERS’ NOTE 

In the 1923 edition the International System of 
Phonetics has been substituted for the symbols used 
in the first edition of the book, and a few other 
changes of a minor character have been made in 
the text. 

























































' 































* 












































*■ 


* 











• , 









, 

. 










































1 <> . • 











• 


l- 













■ 






PREFACE 


Beginning French is strictly an introductory book in¬ 
tended for first year work in schools and colleges. 

Grammatical theory has been cut down to what seems to 
the authors the irreducible minimum. Much that is ordi¬ 
narily included in similar books has been omitted. Atten¬ 
tion is concentrated on a few cardinal facts in the hope that 
the student will thus acquire a sure knowledge of these, in 
place of the usual vague smattering of many rules. 

A small concrete vocabulary of about 800 words dealing 
with matters of every-day life has been used. These are so 
constantly repeated that the student is expected to end by 
handling the whole list with perfect readiness. The vocabu¬ 
lary of each lesson runs to about twenty words only, to be 
learned once for all. 

The book, while insisting on a thoroughly mastered back¬ 
ground of grammatical discipline, encourages oral work in 
the class-room, and emphasizes the importance of repeated 
drill on the simplest elements and constructions of colloquial 
French. The principle of imitation has been utilized to an 
unusual extent. The Drills enable the student to study in¬ 
telligently and to make sure that he rightly understands and 
applies his precepts. The Dialogues offer him the oppor¬ 
tunity to do this in a larger and freer way — a thing which, 
without such guidance, he usually finds impossible. It is 
hoped they will particularly appeal to teachers who em¬ 
phasize oral work in the class-room, as they furnish not only 
subject-matter but a practicable device for preparation. 

For the sake of variety, much more material for practice 
has been furnished than is needed. The teacher may pick 
and choose. Each lesson is divided into two parts, the first 

iii 


IV 


PREFACE 


sufficient in itself, the second supplementary. The latter 
may be largely or entirely omitted by those who desire only 
a rapid survey of the elements of French — or it may be 
reserved for use in going through the book a second time. 

So far as is compatible with its purely elementary char¬ 
acter, the French text offers to the student consecutive in¬ 
stead of disconnected matter, a feature whose advantages 
are now so commonly recognized as to require no comment. 
The Readings should be read aloud with accuracy and ani¬ 
mation, and only occasionally and partly translated. The 
Resumes, prepared in advance, may be given with closed 
books, the teacher pronouncing the words one by one and 
calling on the first volunteer to amplify. They should not 
be allowed to consume much time. 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

Introduction 

Pronunciation. 3 

Table of Sounds. 6 

Rules for Pronunciation. 7 

Nasalization. 12 

Length of Vowels. 13 

Observations on Vowels — on Consonants. 14 

Numerals — Stress. 16 

Syllabification — Linking — Elision. 17 

Diacritical Marks. 18 

Alphabet — Exercises. 19 

LESSON 

I. L’ficoLE. 25 

Gender; Number; Definite Article. 

II. L’Ecole. 29 

Contraction of Article; Use of Est-ce que. 

III. L’Ecole. 33 

Present Indicative (First Conjugation); Models for 
Questions; Indefinite Article. 

IV. L’Ecole. 38 

Feminine Adjectives; Plural of Adjectives; Posi¬ 
tion. 

V. Review . 43 

VI. La Maison. 45 

Imperative; Negative. 

VII. La Maison. 49 

Present Indicative (avoir); Relative Pronoun; 

II y a, voila. 

VIII. Le Jardin. 54 

Irregular Feminine Adjectives; Present Indicative 
(Second Conjugation). 

IX. La Famille . 60 

Possessive Adjectives; Possession, 
v 





















VI 


CONTENTS 


LESSON PAGE 

X. Review. 64 

XI. La Famille . 66 

Present Indicative (Third Conjugation); Interrog¬ 
ative Pronoun. 

XII. La Rue. 70 

Past Participle; Past Indefinite. 

XIII. Le Restaurant. 76 

Some, any (before nouns). 

XIV. La Gare. 81 

Present Indicative (etre); Past Indefinite (with 
etre). 

XV. Review. 87 

XVI. La Gare. 88 

Future; Interrogative Pronoun. 

XVII. Le Magasin. 94 

Adverbs of Quantity; En. 

XVIII. La Gare.100 

Conjunctive Pronouns (Direct Object); Chez. 

XIX. Le Magasin.106 

Conjunctive Pronouns (Indirect Object). 

XX. Review.112 

XXI. L’Eglise.114 

Present Participle, etc.', Prepositions with Infini¬ 
tive. 

XXII. Chez le Marchand de Tabac.120 

(Table) Conjunctive Pronouns; Disjunctive Pro¬ 
nouns. 

XXIII. Les Jours de la Semaine.125 

This, that (adjectives). 

XXIV. L’Heure . . ..132 

Idioms; On; Numerals (1-12); The Clock. 

XXV. Review.138 

XXVI. Les Metiers.140 

Possession; Some (any); Present Indicative (faire). 

XXVII. Le Temps; Les Saisons.146 

Imperfect Indicative; Its Use; Idioms. 




















CONTENTS vii 

LESSON PAGE 

XXVIII. A la Campagne .152 

Comparison of Adjectives and of Adverbs; Nu¬ 
merals (13-20). 

XXIX. La Famille .160 

Numerals (above 20); Savoir. 

XXX. Review .166 

XXXI. La Posts .168 

Conditional; Aller; Conditions. 

XXXII. L’Hotel .174 

Negatives; Some (any); Pouvoir, Prendre; Irreg¬ 
ular Verbs (stem). 

XXXIII. Le Magasin. 183 

Imperative (with pronoun objects); Adverbs; Venir. 

XXXIV. Les Mois . .191 

Idioms; Faire, Dire. 

XXXV. Review .199 

XXXVI. Le Theatre. 201 

Agreement of Participles; Idioms; Ce qui; Lire, 
Ecrire. 

XXXVII. La Toilette. 208 

Reflexive Verbs; Conduire, Croire. 

XXXVIII. La Toilette .216 

Reflexive Verbs; Sentir, etc. 

XXXIX. La Caserne .222 

Order of Personal Pronouns; Voir, Vouloir. 

XL. Review .230 

XLI. Chez le Medecin .232 

Present Subjunctive (regular and irregular verbs); 

Uses. 

XLII. La Pension .242 

Present Subjunctive: further uses; Irregular forms; 
Connaitre, Mettre. 

XLIII. La Maison . 249 

Demonstrative Pronouns; Possessive Pronouns; 
Recevoir, Devoir. 


















Vlll CONTENTS 

LESSON PAGE 

XLIV. Une Lettre: Le Paquebot, La Douane.258 

Summary of Interrogative and Relative Pronouns; 
Craindre, Ouvrir. 

XLV. Review.. . 268 

Past Definite; Imperfect Subjunctive.270 

Schemes for Verb Drill. 272 

APPENDIX 

Paradigms of Regular Verbs.275 

Paradigms of Auxiliary Verbs.278 

Table of Irregular Verbs.281 

Compound Verbs (List) .294 

Class-room Words and Phrases.296 

Useful Phrases for Memorizing ..299 

Summary of Grammar.305 

Vocabularies.349 

Index. 373 















PRONUNCIATION 


Preliminary Remarks. —The observations in §§ 1-14 are intro¬ 
duced here as an aid to teachers and students who desire to utilize 
a few of the elementary data of phonetic science as a supplement 
to the usual method of learning to pronounce by approximate 
English equivalents as given in § 15. Those who prefer to rely on 
the Table of Sounds will accordingly omit these preliminary re¬ 
marks and pass to § 15. 


1. VOWEL SOUNDS 


FRONT BACK 

( High) Close fj] [w] 

[i] [y] [u] 

[e] [0] r el [o] 
te] [ob] [o] 

(Low) Open [a] [a] 


( High) Close 


(Low) Open 


2. [i], [e], [e], [a] are front vowels, pronounced with the 
tongue in the front of the mouth. They are progressively 
less close and more open , pronounced with the tongue pro¬ 
gressively less high in the mouth and the mouth pro¬ 
gressively wider open. The corners of the mouth are 
progressively less far apart, being very far apart for [i]. 

Practise this series, beginning first with [i], then with [a]. 

Practise the following: [ti] [te] [te] [ta], [ta] [te] [te] [ti]. 

3* [a], [o], [o], [u] are back vowels, pronounced with the 
tongue in the back of the mouth. They are progressively 
less open and more close, pronounced with the tongue pro¬ 
gressively higher in the mouth and the mouth progressively 
less open. They are rounded , the lips forming a round 
opening progressively narrower, till with [u] it reaches the 
shape used for whistling. 

Practise this series, beginning first with [a], then with [u]. 

Practise [ba] [ba] [bo] [bu], [bu] [bo] [bo] [ba]. 

Combine the two series, running first from [i] to [u], then from 
[u] to [i]. 

Practice the series [ti] to [bu] and [bu] to [ti]. 

3 


4 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


4. The front vowels are unrounded. 

[i] rounded gives [y], 

[e] rounded gives [0], 

[e] rounded gives [oe]: 

[y] = tongue position of [i], lip position of [u] 1 
[0] = tongue position of [e], lip position of [o] 

[oe] = tongue position of [e], lip position of [o] 

Practise the series of rounded front vowels, as follows: [di] [dy], 
[de] [do], [de] [doe]. 

Practise [dy] [do] [doe], [doe] [do] [dy]. 

5. [0] and [oe] when short and unstressed will have the 
sound indicated by [ 0 ]. This sound can hardly be pro¬ 
nounced alone, since a vowel pronounced alone is stressed. 

Practise: venir, demi, ce bon ami. 

6. If the breath sent from the lungs encounters an ob¬ 
stacle (partial or complete stoppage), the sound produced is 
a consonant; if the breath is unobstructed, the sound is a 
vowel, [i] and [u] are pronounced with the tongue very 
high in the mouth. If the tongue is raised slightly more, 
something like a consonant is produced: [i] becomes the semi, 
consonant [j] and [u] becomes the semi-consonant [w]. 

Practise pronouncing [i] [j], [u] [w]; [ti] [tje], [ku][ kwo]. 

7. Nasal Vowels. If the oral vowels [a] [e] [ 0 ] [oe] are 
pronounced so that the breath passes not only through the 
mouth but partly also through the nose y the result is the 
nasal vowels [a] [e] [5] [de]. 

Practise pronouncing [a] [a], [e] [e], [ 0 ] [ 5 ], [oe] [tie]; practise also 
these sounds preceded by [p]. 

The nasal sound represented by [e] is really intermediate be¬ 
tween [e] and [a], nearer [a] than [e]. Most books write the 
sound [g]. We have adherred to the usual practise. 

* When [y] precedes a vowel, the two are united in a single syllable, [y] 
being shortened. The second vowel of the diphthong is accented: lui [lyi]. 


PRONUNCIATION 


5 


8. French vowels are all pure vowels, that is, a single 
sound; English vowels are really diphthongs; e.g. English o 
in so is really the sound [o] followed by something like the 
sound [u], a in car is approximately [al followed by [ 9 ]. 
This subsidiary sound, called a “ glide,” should be carefully 
avoided in pronouncing French. 

French vowels should be pronounced sharply and clearly 
with distinctly marked lip movements. 

Pronounce the vowel sounds preceded by [m], first in the 
English, second in the French manner. Note the greater 
tenseness, sharpness and clearness of the French sounds. 

CONSONANT SOUNDS 

9. Consonants, like vowels, are more clearly and sharply 
pronounced than in English. 

10. In pronouncing the “explosive” consonants, [p] [b] 
[t] [d] [k] [g], avoid the laxness of the corresponding English 
sounds. Be careful not to omit the explosion. This is par¬ 
ticularly important when the sound is final, for here the 
explosion is omitted almost entirely in English. 

For [p] and [b] bring the lips together sharply and part 
them with a distinct explosion. 

For [t] and [d] bring the tip of the tongue sharply against 
the upper teeth and release it with a distinct explosion. 

Practise pronouncing cap, aube, batte, grande, flaque, dogue. 

11. The sound [p] is like the English ni in union, but be 
careful not to make two sounds; don’t pronounce un-yon: 
dignite (pronounce di-gni-te, not din-yi-te). 

12. The usual French r is the so-called “uvular r,” 
pronounced by movement of the uvula, somewhat as in the 
German word ach. The “uvular r” can be learned only by 
imitation. The “tip-trill r” is sounded by vibration of the 


6 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


tip of the tongue. It can be more readily acquired than the 
“ uvular r,” but is usually lost as the student begins to talk 
easily. 

13. In pronouncing English [1], the tongue is loose in the 
mouth. For the French [1], bring the tongue sharply against 
the upper teeth. Compare English long and French long. 

The correct pronunciation of [1] is particularly important 
when the sound is final. Compare English tell and French 
tel. 

14. For [s] [z] [f] [v] [m] [n] [$] [ 3 ] remember the general 
rule, that French consonants are pronounced with quick, 
distinct lip and tongue movements. 


15. TABLE OF SOUNDS 

VOWELS 

SYMBOL SOUND 

[a] like a in ‘mat’ 1 : dame [dam], lady 

[a] like a in ‘father’: pate [part], paste 

[e] like a in ‘mate’: ble [ble], wheat 

[e] like e in ‘met’: tres [tre], very 

[a] like e in ‘the 2 man’: le [la], the 

[i] like ee in ‘meet’: ici [isi], here 

[ 0 ] like aw in ‘paw’: soldat [sal-da], soldier 

[o] like o in ‘note’: tot [to], soon 

[u] like 00 in ‘b oot': vous [vu], you 

[y] pronounce the ee in ‘meet’ [i] and round the lips to the whistling 
position: du [dy], of the 

[ 0 ] pronounce the a in ‘mate’ [e] and round the lips to the whistling 
position: peu [po], little 3 

[ce] pronounce the e in ‘met’ [e] and round the lips to the whistling 
position: peur [poe:r], /ear 3 

1 This [a] should not be pronounced too “flat”; it is really intermediary 
between the sounds of ‘mat’ and ‘father,’ considerably nearer mat, however. 

2 Pronounce thuh man, not thee man. 

3 The beginner may pronounce both [0] and [oe] like u in ‘ burr.’ 


PRONUNCIATION 


7 


• NASAL VOWELS 

[e] like the a in ‘sang’ without the final consonantal sound: 
vin [vg], wine; see § 7 

[5] like the o in ‘song’ without the final consonantal sound: 
bon [bo], good 

[oe] like the u in ‘snng’ without the final consonantal sound: 
un [cfe], one, a 

[a] like the a in ‘palm’ pronounced nasally: enfant [a-fa], child 


CONSONANTS 

[j] like y in ‘yes’: ciel [sjel], heaven 1 

[w] like w in ‘wet’: oui [wi], yes; louer [lwe], to praise 2 

[$] like ch in ‘Chicago’: chef [$ef], chief 

[ji] like ni in ‘union’: signe [sip], sign; see § 11 

[3] like s in ‘pleasure’: je [30], I 

[s] like s in ‘sing’: son [so], his 

[z] like z in ‘zone’: rose [ro:z], rose 

Pronounce the other consonants as in English. 

[:] indicates that the vowel it follows is long: rose [ro:z], rose 


RULES FOR PRONUNCIATION 
VOWELS 

16 . [a], called “open a,” is written as follows: 

1. &: toe [a:m], soul ; pite [pa:t], paste . 

Except in verb endings: nous donntoes [nu do-nam], 
we gave; vous donnates [vu do-nat], you gave. 

2 . a before the sound [z], i.e. before s between vowels: base 

[ba:z], basis; occasion [o-ka-zjo]. 

3. a before the ending -tion [—sj 5]: nation [na-sjo], station 

[sta-sjo]. 


» The beginner may pronounce [j] like [i]: [si-el] for [sjel]. 
* The beginner may pronounce [w] like [u]: [lu-e] for [lwe]. 


8 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


4. a before silent final s: pas [pa], not , step; matelas [ma-to-la], 
mattress. 

Except in verb endings: tu as [ty a], thou hast; tu don- 
neras [ty do-no-ra], thou shalt give. 

17. [a], called “close a,” is the usual sound of the French a. 
The letter a is to be pronounced [a] except in the cases noted 
under [a]: patte [pat], paw; la [la], the; parler [par-le], to speak 

Note, oi is pronounced [wa]: loi [lwa], law; oiseau [wa-zo], 
bird. 1 

18. [e], called “close e,” is written as follows: 

1. e: ble [ble] wheat; verite [ve-ri-te], truth. 

2. ai as verb ending; cf. [e] 2: j’ai fee], I have; je donnai [39 do-ne], 

I gave; je donnerai [39 do-no-re], I shall give. 

3 . e before all silent final consonants except t; cf. [e] 3 : donner 

[do-ne], to give; les [le], the, them; clef [kle], key. 

19. [e], called “open e,” is written as follows: 

1. e, e, ei: pere [pc:r], father; j’achete fea-Set], I buy; 

tete [test], head; vous etes [vu zet], you are; peine 
[pen], pain; neige [ne:3], snow. 

2 . ai except as verb ending; cf. [e] 2: je donnais [39 do-ne], I was 

giving; je donnerais [39 do-no-re], I should give; vrai [vre], 
true; mais [me], but. 

3 . e before a silent final t or ts; cf. [e] 3 : effet, effets [e-fe], 

effect, effects; gilet fei-le], waistcoat. 

Note, et [e], and; est [e], is. 

4 . e before a pronounced final consonant: fer [fe:r], iron; autel 

[o-tel], altar. 

5 . e before more than one consonant; cf. [9] 2 : rester [res-te], 

to remain; terrain [te-re], land. 2 

Except before consonant +1 or + r; see [9] 3. 

Note, x=ks or gz (see § 50 ); it counts as two consonants. 
* oignon [o-jio], onion; poignard [po-jia:r], poniard. 

2 femme [fam], woman; solennel [so-la-nel], solemn; -emment as an ad¬ 
verbial ending is pronounced [-a-ma]: ardemment [ar-da-ma], ardently; 
recemment [re-sa-ma], recently: dessus [do-sy], above: dessous [do-su], 
underneath; messieurs [mesjo], Messrs.; res- as a prefix is pronounced [ro-]: 
ressembler [ro-sa-ble]; ressentir [ro-sati.'r], to feel. 


PRONUNCIATION 


6. e before the sound [j]: abeille [a-be:j], bee; soleil [so-leij], 

sun- 

Note. 4, 5, 6 may be condensed as follows: e before a 
pronounced consonant in the same syllable (see § 54). 

20 . [9], called “neutral e,” is written as follows: 

1. e final in monosyllables: le [la], the, him ; de [do], of. 

2. e before a single consonant in the interior of a word; 

cf. [e] 5: venir [vo-niir], to come; demi [da-mi], half. 

3. e before consonant+1 or-fr; cf. [e] 5: secret [sa-kre], secret; 

reflet [ra-fle], reflection. 

Note. 1. The second consonant, not the first, must be 1 
or r: pronounce [e] in celtique, perdition. 11, rr, lr, rl count 
as two consonants: pronounce [e] in celle, serre, merle. 

Note 2. See § 40. 

Note 3. § 20 , 1 , 2 , 3 may be condensed as follows: e 

final in a syllable (see § 54). 

21 . [i] is written i: cire [si:r], wax ; citron [si-tro], lemon. 

Except before a vowel; see § 26, 1. 

Note. The letter y is merely an orthographic variant of 
the letter i (lyre, style, mystere are pronounced as if written 
lire, stile, mistere); all rules applying to i apply also to y: 
yeux [jo], eyes (see § 26, 1). But for y between vowels, see 
§43. 

22 . [o], called “close o,” is written as follows: 

1.6: votre [vo:tr], yours; controler [ka-tro-le], to control. 

2. o before the sound [z], i.e. before s between vowels: rose 

[ro:z], position [po-zi-sj5]. 

3. o before the ending -tion [—sj 5]: motion [mo-sjo], notion 

[no-sjo]. 

4. o final or before a silent final consonant: zero [ze-ro], piano 

[pja-no]; mot [mo], word; nos [no], our. 

5 . au, eau; saut [so], leap; flambeau [fla-bo], torch 4 

Except that au before r is pronounced [a]: j’aurai [ 5 -ore], 
I shall have; Maure [mo:r], Moor. 

23 . [0], called “open o,” is the usual sound of the French 
0. The letter o is to be pronounced [0] except in the cases 

1 Paul [pol], Paul. 


10 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


noted under [o]: votre [votr], your ; ecole [e-kol], school; 
donner [do-ne], to give. 1 

Note. Compare the rules for [a], [a] with those for [o], [o]. 

24. [0], called “close eu,” is written as follows: 

1. eu final or before a silent final consonant: peu [po], 
little ; douteux [du-to], doubtful. 

Note. So also oeu: bceufs [bo], oxen; ceufs [o], eggs. 

2 . eu before the sound [z]: creuser [kro-ze], to dig; douteuse 
[du-toiz], doubtful. 

25. [ce], called “open eu.” The group eu is to be pro¬ 
nounced [ce] except in the cases noted under [0]. 

eu is pronounced [ce] in the following cases: 

1 . eu when not final nor before a silent final consonant: peur 

[pceir], fear; heureux [ce-ro], happy. 

Note. So also mu: boeuf [beef], ox; ceuf [cef], egg. 

2. eu before the sound [j]: deuil [doerj], mourning; feuillage 

[fce-ja: 3 ], foliage. 

Note. So also ue, 2 ce: recueil [ro-kce:j], collection; ceil 
[ce:j], eye. 

26. [j] is written as follows: 

1. i before another pronounced vowel: del [sjel], sky; 

viande [vja:d], meat. 

Except that when i follows consonant+1 or+r it re¬ 
mains [i]: prier [pri-e], to pray; client [kli-a], client. 

Note. Contrast etudier [e-ty-dje], to study and j’etudie 
fee-ty-di], I study; in j’etudie silent e does not affect the 
pronunciation and i remains [i]. 

2. 11 after i: fille [fi:j], daughter; pillage [pi-ja: 3 ], pillage. 

Except ville [vil], city; village [vi-la: 3 ], village; mille [mil], 
thousand; tranquille [tra-kil], tranquil; and ill- initial: il¬ 
legal [i-le-gal], illegal; illimite [i-li-mi-te], unlimited. 

i fosse [fos], ditch; grosse [gros], big. 

a ue is merely an orthographic variation of eu used after c and g in order 
to guard the sounds [k] and [g]: receuil would be pronounced [ra-scetj], 
and orgueil, if spelled orgeuil, would be [or-3ce:j]; see § 45. 


PRONUNCIATION 


11 


3 . ill after any vowel: travailler [tra-va-je], to work; feuille 

[fce:j], leaf. 

4. il final after a vowel: travail [tra-va:j], work; ceil [oe:j], 
eye. 1 

Note, ill could never be written after i; if this were 
possible fille would be written fiille. Also, French orthog¬ 
raphy avoids -ill final. So, ill may be considered the regu¬ 
lar spelling of [j], 11 (rule 2) and il (rule 4) being accidental. 

27. [u] is written ou: tout [tu], pour [pu:r]. 

Except before a pronounced vowel; see § 29. 


28. [y] is written u: pur [py:r], pure; furtif [fyr-tif], fur¬ 
tive; sfir [sy:r], sure. 

Note, u before a vowel is shorter than otherwise and forms a single 
syllable with the vowel. The accent falls on the second vowel of the 
diphthong: lui [lyi], fcim; puis [pyi], then; puiser [pyi-ze], to draw. Dis¬ 
tinguish lui [lyi] and Louis [lwij, see § 29. 

29. [w] is the sound of ou before a pronounced vowel: 
oui [wi], yes; Louis [lwi]. 

Except that when ou follows consonant-f-1 or+r it remains [u]: 
eblouir [e-blu-i:rj, to dazzle; cf. § 26, 1. 

Note. Contrast jouer fowe], to play f and je joue [30 3U], I play: 
in je joue silent e does not affect the pronunciation and ou remains 
[u]; cf. § 26, 1, Note. 


30. How is the letter a pronounced? See [a], [a]. How is. 
ai pronounced? See [e] 2, [e] 2. How is au pronounced? 
See [o] 5. 

31. How is eu pronounced? See [0], [ce]. How is e 
pronounced (1) before more than one consonant: see [e] 5; 
(2) before one consonant: see [ 0 ] 2; (3) before a final con¬ 
sonant: see [e] 4, [e] 3, [ 0 ] 3? 

1 poil [pwal], hair. 


12 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


NASALIZATION 

32. A vowel is nasalized before m or n if the m or n is 
not followed by a vowel or m or n (i.e. vowel -fm or n when 
m or n is final or followed by any consonant except m or n). 
Rule otherwise stated: A vowel is nasalized before m or n 
if the m or n ends the syllable; see § 54. For examples, see 
§§ 33-36. Do not nasalize the vowels in such words as enne- 
mi [e-no-mi], enemy; hymne [imn]; inoui [i-nwi], unheard of; 
image [i-ma: 3 ]; comniis [ko-mi], clerk; immodeste [i-mo- 
dest]. 1 

33. [a] 2 represents: 

1. a nasalized: dans [da], in; tante [ta:t], aunt. 

2. e nasalized: en [a], in; client [kli-d]. 3 

Except the cases noted under [e] 4. 

34. [e] represents: 

1. i nasalized: vin [ve], wine; simple [seipl]. 

2. ai nasalized: pain [pe], bread; plaindre [ple:dr],£o pity. 

3. ei nasalized: plein [pie], full; Reims [re:s], Rheims. 

4. en final after i: rien [rje], nothing; bien [bje], well; and en 

in forms of the verbs venir, tenir and their compounds: 
je viens [39 vje], I come; il tiendra [il tje-dra], he will 
hold; il retient [il ra-tje], he retains. 

Note, oi nasalized is pronounced [we]: point [pwe]; 
moindre [mwe:dr], least. 

35. [5] represents o nasalized: don [do], gift; fontaine 
[fo-ten], fountain . 4 

1 ennui [a-nyi], bore (so also ennuyer [a-nyi-je], ennuyeux); emmener 
[a-mo-ne], to carry away: enivrer [a-ni-vre], to intoxicate; nous tinmes [nu 
te:m], we held: nous vinmes [nu ve:m], we came: neanmoins [ne-a-mwe], 
nevertheless. 

2 [a] palm 1. a dans [e] sang 1. i vin [5] song o don 

2 . e en 2 . ai pain [ce] sung u un 

3. ei plein 

3 eiamen [eg-za-me], examination: -een final = [—ee]: Europeen [oe-ro- 
pe-e]. 

* monsieur [ma-sjgf], Mr. (for messieurs, see § 19, footnote 2); faon [fa], 
fawn; paon [pa], peacock. 


PRONUNCIATION 


13 


36. [de] represents u nasalized: un [de], one , a; parfum 
[par-foe], perfume. 1 

37. Observe the pronunciation of feminines whose mas¬ 
culines end in n: vain [ve], vaine [ven]; ancien [a-sje], 
ancienne [a-sjen], ancient; un [oe], une [yn], one , a. 

LENGTH OF VOWELS 

38. Vowels are usually short in French; they are always 
short in unstressed syllables. The stress in French words 
falls on the last pronounced vowel; see § 53. 

The following vowels are long: 

1. Stressed vowels before the sounds [z], [ 3 ], [v], [j]: rose 

[ro:z]; j’engage foa-ga^]; brave [bra:v]; je travaille 
[39 tra-va:j], I work, [a] in engager, travailler, is 
short because it is unstressed. 

2. Stressed vowels before r when r is pronounced final: 

affaire [a-fe:r]; rapport [ra-po:r], report; but the 
vowel is short in porte [port], door , since r is not 
pronounced final. 

3. Stressed nasal vowels, unless they are pronounced 

final: bonde [bo:d], leap ; amante [a-ma:t], lover; but 
the vowels are short in bon [bo], good; amant [a-ma], 
lover , since they are pronounced final. 

4. Stressed vowels bearing a circumflex, unless they are 

pronounced final: pate [pa:t], paste; c 6 te [ko:t], coast ; 
but mat [ma], mast; ci-git [si 3 i], here lies. 

Except vous etes [vu zet], you are; and the endings of 
the past definite: nous donnames [nu do-nam], we gave; 
vous finites [vu fi-nit], you finished. 

1 eu nasalized is pronounced [de]; the only common word of this class is 
a ieun [a 3 oe], fasting. 


14 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


OBSERVATIONS ON VOWELS 

39. ai before the sound [z] in forms of the verb faire, to 
do, is pronounced [ 0 ]: nous faisons [nu fo-zo], we do; il 
faisait [il fo-ze], he was doing; faisant [fo-za], doing. 

40. [ 0 ] is dropped unless an unpronounceable combina¬ 
tion of consonants (usually three consonants) would result: 
matelot [ma-tlo], sailor; venir [vni:r], to come; but Angleterre 
[a-gb-teir], England; relier [ro-lje], to hind. The beginning 
student, however, will do well to give full value to [ 0 ] in all 
eases. 

41. -e final, -es final, -ent as a verb ending (third person 
plural) are silent: rose, roses [roiz]; ils donnent [il don], 
they give; ils donnerent [il do-ne:r], they gave. 

42. eu in forms of the verb avoir, to have, is pronounced 
f y] : nous eumes [nu zym], we had; il a eu [i la y], he has 
had; i.e. pronounce as if the e were omitted. 

43. y between vowels is equivalent to two i’s: payer= 
paiier [pe-je] (pai = [pe], see § 19, 2;-ier = [je], see § 26, 1); 
voyons = voi+ions [vwa-jo], let us see; tuyau = tui+iau 
[tyi-jo], pipe. 1 

Note 1. For y not between vowels, see § 21, Note. 

Note 2. The y in pays, country, and its compounds is treated 
as if it were between vowels: pays=pai+i [pe-i]; so paysan [pe-i- 
za], peasant; and paysage [pe-i-za:3], landscape. 

OBSERVATIONS ON CONSONANTS 

44. b before s or t is pronounced [p]: obscur [op-skyir]; 
obtenir [op-to-niir], to obtain. Cf. Latin urbs [urps]. 

45. c, g before a, 0 , u are pronounced [k], [g] (cf. English 
cat , cot, cut): car [kair], for; gout [gu], taste. 

1 La Fayette [la fa-jet], mayonnaise [ma-ja-nerz]. 


PRONUNCIATION 


15 


c, g before e, iare pronounced [s], [3] (cf. English cent, 
city)' cette [set], this; gilet [3i-le], waistcoat. 

5, ge before a, 0, u are pronounced [s], [3]: nous com- 
mengons [nu ko-ma-so], we begin; nous mangeons 
[nu ma-30], we eat. 

qu, gu are pronounced [k], [g]: qui [ki], who; guerre 
[geir], war. 

46. cc is pronounced [ks] and gg is pronounced [g3] before 
e, i : succeder [syk-se-de], to succeed; suggerer [syg^e-re], to 
suggest; elsewhere (i.e. before a, o, u or a consonant) cc = [k], 
gg = [g]: occasion [o-ka-zjo], aggraver [a-gra-ve]. 

47. ch is ordinarily pronounced [$]: chou [$u], cabbage; 
acheter [a-$o-te], to buy . 

Note, ch before a consonant is pronounced [k]: chretien 
[kre-tje], Christian; chronique [kro-nik], chronicle; also in chceur 
[kce:r], chorus; echo [e-kol, and some other words mainly of Greek 
origin. 

48 . s between vowels is pronounced [z], elsewhere [s]; 
rose [roiz]; phrase [fraiz]; somme [som], sum; passage [pa- 
sai3]; vaste [vast]. 

Note 1. Final s is not pronounced, unless it is linked (see § 55, 
note 2). 

Note 2. In compounds s usually retains the sound [s] of the 
simple word: vraisemblable [vre-sa-blabl], likely; presupposer 
[pre-sy-po-ze], to presuppose. 

49. The ending -tion is pronounced [sjo]: nation [na-sjo], 
motion [mo-sjo]. 

Except -stion [stj5]: question [kes-tjo], suggestion [syg-3es-tj5]. 

50. x is pronounced [ks]: fixer [fik-se], excuser [ek-sky-ze]. 

Except that initial ex- before a vowel is pronounced [egz-]: 
example [eg-za:pl], exister [eg-zis-te]. 


16 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


Note 1. x at the end of a word is equivalent to s and follows 
the rules for s; cf. § 55, note 2. 

Note 2. x is pronounced [z] in deuxieme [da-zjem], second; 
sixieme [si-zjem], sixth; dixieme [di-zjem], tenth. 

Note 3. x is pronounced [s] in soixante [swa-sa:t], sixty; cf. 
six, dix in § 52, 1. 

51. Final consonants are usually silent, but final c, f, 1 
and r are in most cases pronounced: bee [bek], beak; chef 
[$ef], chief; fil [fil], wire; cher [$eir], dear. 

NUMERALS 

52. Pronunciation of numerals cinq (5), six (6), sept (7), 
huit (8), neuf (9), dix (10): 

1. standing alone: [sek], [sis], [set], [yit], [noef], [dis]: il en 

a cinq [i la na sek], he has five. 

2 . before a word beginning with a vowel: [sek], [siz], [set], 

[yit], noev], [diz]. Pronounce the consonant with 
the word following in accordance with § 55: cinq 
ans [se ka], five years; dix amis [di zami]. See § 55, 
note 2. 

3. before a word beginning with a consonant: [se], [si], [se], 

[yi], [nee], [di]: cinq chevaux [se $a-vo ],five horses. 

Note 1. dix-huit [di zyit] 18; dix-neuf [diz noef] 19; 
vingt [ve] 20 ; vingt-deux [vet do] 22 , etc., tovingt- 
neuf [vet noef] 29; but in quatre-vingt-un 81, to 
quatre-vingt-dix-neuf 99, vingt is pronounced [ve]. 

Note 2. See § 50, notes 2, 3. 

Note 3. c = [g] in second [sa-go], second , and its 
derivatives: secondaire, etc. 

STRESS (ACCENTUATION) 

53. There is a slight stress on the last pronounced syl¬ 
lable of all French words, but this stress is so slight that it 
is well to disregard this rule and to stress all syllables equally. 


PRONUNCIATION 


17 


For the first year the student will do well to pronounce 
syllable by syllable; in this way only will he free himself 
from the tendency to misaccentuate, especially in the case 
of words which resemble English words. Say con-cen-trer 
to avoid concentrer. 

SYLLABIFICATION 

54. Correct division of syllables is essential to a good 'pro¬ 
nunciation. In dividing into syllables pronounce a single 
consonant with the vowel following, but separate two or 
more consonants: plu-ra-li-te, ad-mi-rer, par-fait, ter-rain. 

Note. The group consonant +1 or -f-r is not separated but is 
pronounced with the vowel following: se-cret, re-flet: cf. [a] 3 
(§ 20 ). 

LINKING 

55. When a word ending with a consonant precedes a 
word beginning with a vowel or (in most cases) h (see § 56, 
note 4), the consonant is generally carried over to the follow¬ 
ing word: vous allez [vu zale], you go; un autre [de noitr], 
another ; les hommes [le zom], the men. 

Note 1 . Linking takes place even though the consonant 
would be silent if the word to which it belongs were pronounced 
alone: vous [vu], but vous allez [vu zale], you are going. 

Note 2. In linking d becomes [t], f becomes [v], s or x becomes 
[z]: quand it [ka til], when he; neuf amis [nee va-mi], nine friends; 
des amis [de za-mi], some friends; see § 52, 2. 

Note 3. Do not link after et [e], and: et 11 a [e i la], and he has. 

Note 4. See § 56, note 3. 

ELISION 

56. Before a word beginning with a vowel or (in most 
cases) h, the final e of monosyllables is dropped (elided) and 
replaced by an apostrophe: le+ami = l’ami [la-mi], the 
friend; I’homme [lom], the man. So with je, I; me, me; te, 
thee; se, himself , herself; de, of; ne, not; que, that; ce, this , 
that. 


18 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


Note 1. a is elided in la, the, her: l’encre [la:kr], the ink; je 
l’aime [39 lem], I love her. 

Note 2. i is elided in si, if, when il, he, or ils, they, follows: 
s’il vient [sil vje], if he comes; s’ils viennent [sil vjen], if they come. 

Note 3. Do not elide nor link before huit 1 , eight ; huitieme 1 , 
eighth; onze, eleven; onzieme, eleventh; le onzieme livre [la ozjem 
li:vr], the eleventh book. 

Note 4. Initial h is not pronounced; linking and elision take 
place before words beginning with h : des hommes [de zam], some 
men; Thomme [lom], the man. 

Except that h at the beginning of a certain number of words, 
mainly of Germanic origin, prevents linking and elision (“as¬ 
pirate h”): les heros [le e-ro], le heros [la e-ro]. These words, 
which must be learned by observation, are indicated in dic¬ 
tionaries by ‘ or *: ‘heros or *heros. 


57. DIACRITICAL MARKS 

(") acute accent (Faccent aigu [lak-sa te-gy]): ble [ble], wheat 
(') grave accent (Taccent grave [graiv]): pere [pe:r], father 
( A ) circumflex accent (Paccent circonflexe [sir-ko-fleks]): tete 
[text], head 


These three accents indicate the quality of the vowels, not 
stress (see §§ 16, 18, 19, 22, 53). 


(„) cedilla (la c6dille [se-di:j]): lefon [lo-s5], lesson (see § 45) 
(") dieresis (le tr6ma [tre-ma]): Noel [no-el], Christmas 
The dieresis is used to show that the vowel over which it is 
placed is in a separate syllable from the vowel preceding. Com¬ 
pare Noel [na-el] with poele [pwal], stove; aigue [e-gy], sharp, wdth 
longue [lo:g], long. 


(.) le point [pwe] 

(,) la virgule [vir-gyl] 
(;) le point et virgule 
(:) deux points 


(?) le point d’interrogation 
[de-te-ro-ga-sjo] 

(!) le point declamation 
[dek-skla-ma-sj 5] 


1 But link in compound numerals: aix-huit [di zyit], vingt-huitieme [vg 
tyitjem]. 


PRONUNCIATION 


19 


( -) le trait d’union [tre (. . .) les points suspensifs 

dy-njo] [sys-pa-sif] 

(—) le tiret [ti-re] () la parenthese [pa-ra- 

((())) les guillemets [gi-jo-me] te:z] 

The tiret is used to indicate a change of speaker: 

— Est-il venu? — Non! — Ou est-il? — Je ne sais pas. 

The guillemets are not used so much as the English quotation 
marks. 

ALPHABET 


58. The letters of the alphabet are as follows: 


a 

a [a] 

j 

ji [ 31 ] 

s 

esse [es] 

b 

bd [be] 

k 

ka [ka] 

t 

te [te] 

c 

ce [se] 

1 

elle [el] 

u 

u [y] 

d 

dd [de] 

m 

emme [em] 

V 

vd [ve] 

e 

e[e] 

n 

enne [en] 

w 

double vd [du-blo 

f 

effe [ef] 

0 

o[o] 


ve] 

g 

g6 fee] 

P 

pe [pe] 

2 

iks [iks] 

h 

ache [a$] 

q 

ku [ky] 

y 

i grec [i grek] 

i 

i[i] 

r 

erre [er] 

z 

zed [zed] 


It is not advisable to use the names of the letters as given above; 
speak of sounds instead: say [s], not esse. In the case of the ex¬ 
plosive consonants add a “neutral e” [a] to the sound: [bo}, [da], 

[§ 9 1> [ka], Lp 8 L [b]. 


EXERCISES 

59. Exercise on [a], [a], §§ 16-17, 53-54: 1. la p A ace. 
2. nous parlames, we spoke. 3. le vase. 4. le fracas, noise. 
5. moi, me. 6. le degat, injury. 7. il dir a, he will say. 
8. la Loire. 9. vous desirates, you desired. 10. le tas, 
heap. 11. la tache, task. 12. l’evasion, escape. 13. le 
poisons. 14. tu vas, thou goest. 15. pale. 16. j’arrive. 
17. Topdration. 18. dcraser, to crush. 19. deja, already. 


20 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


20. froid, cold. 21. F animal. 22. le cas, case. 23. la phrase. 
24. F obstacle. 25. tu diras, thou shalt say. 26. la nomina¬ 
tion. 27. la table. 28. le repas, meal. 29. la paroisse, 
parish. 


60. Exercise on [e], [e], [ 9 ], §§ 18-20, 53-54: 1. je parlai, 
I spoke. 2. je parlais, I was speaking. 3. la mer, sea. 
4. F4veil, awakening. 5. assez, enough. 6. le metre. 7. le 
regret. 8. me. 9. ete, been. 10. je dirai, I shall say. 
11. mener, to drive. 12. la peche, peach. 13. je dirais, I 
should say. 14. je ferai, I shall make. 15. vous parlez, you 
speak. 16. pareille, similar. 17. je mene, I drive. 18. Fef- 
fet, the effect. 19. te, thee. 20. errer, to wander. 21. la 
Seine. 22. replier, to fold up. 23. la reprise, taking again. 
24. il menerait, he would drive. 25. le chef (/ is pronounced), 
chief. 26. la clef (/ is silent), key. 27. perdu, lost. 28. le 
degre. 29. gai. 

61. Exercise on [ 0 ], [o], §§ 22-23, 53-54: 1. composer. 
2. la potion. 3. le poete. 4. la cote, coast. 5. la curiosite. 
6. le restaurant. 7. le dos (s is silent), back. 8. la dot ( t is 
pronounced), dowry. 9. la pause. 10. notre, our. 11. le 
notre, ours. 12. la popularity. 13. sot ( t is silent), foolish. 
14. sotte, foolish. 15. la locomotion. 16. Fecho. 17. la 
peau, skin. 18. tu auras, thou shalt have. 

62. Exercise on [i], [0], [ 00 ], [u], [j], [w], §§ 21, 24-29, 
53-54: 1. le feu, fire. 2. le tablier, apron. 3. la sceur, 
sister. 4. veuillez, please. 5. la muraille, wall. 6. le 
voeu, vow. 7. la priere, prayer. 8. la truite, trout. 9. la 
pitie, pity. 10. le bleuet, cornflower. 11. Fouvriere, working- 
woman. 12. le bataillon, battalion. 13. luisant, shining. 
14. le beurre, butter. 15. cueillir, to gather. 16. le fil, 
thread. 17. vieil, old. 18. la famille, family. 19. familier. 
20. initial. 21. heureux, happy. 22. heureuse. 23. Fceillet, 
pink. 24. friand, dainty. 25. illumine. 


PRONUNCIATION 


21 


63. Exercise on the nasal sounds, §§ 32-37, 53-54: 1. le 
panier, basket. 2. inferieur. 3. Fancre, anchor. 4. la reine, 
queen. 5. bien, well. 6. commun. 7. vous viendriez, you 
would come. 8. joindre, to join. 9. pendant, during. 
10 . intime, intimate. 11. la conscience. 12. Fane, donkey. 
13. Fan, year. 14. la peinture, painting. 15. ils viennent, 
they come. 16. tenant, holding. 17. nous tiendrons, we 
shall hold. 18. la dentelle, lace. 19. indiscret. 20. ameri- 
cain. 21. humble. 22. annuel. 23. bon, good. 24. bonne. 
25. le soin, care. 26. le moineau, sparrow. 27. immense. 
28. americaine. 29. la honte, shame. 

64. Exercise on § 38: mark the long vowels in §§ 59-63. 

65. General exercise on §§ 16-38, 53-54: 1. edifier, to edify. 
2 . redresser, to straighten. 3. Fhopital, hospital. 4. Fenjeu, 
stake. 5. Fenfant, child. 6. Fintuition. 7. ce, this. 8. le 
cable. 9. je tiendrai, I shall hold. 10. la position. 11. il- 
licite. 12. orgueilleux, proud. 13. orgueilleuse. 14. il 
retiendra, he will retain. 15. chez, at the house of. 16. nous 
aimames, we loved. 17. loin, far. 18. le moine, monk. 
19. la devotion. 20. emprunter, to borrow. 21. craindre, 
to fear. 22. Fceuvre, work. 23. bravo. 24. le easier, pigeon¬ 
holes. 25. pecher, to fish. 26. pecher, to sin. 27. la cuisine, 
kitchen. 28. la Chartreuse. 29. le veau, calf. 30. la reine, 
queen. 31. trois, three. 32. Fecueil, reef. 33. la caution. 
34. ceindre, to gird. 35. il acheterait, he would buy. 36. Fhe- 
sitation. 37. nous craignons, we fear. 38. tu as, thou hast. 
39. le paquet, package. 40. la feuille, leaf. 41. le bee, 
beak. 42. cacher, to conceal. 43. Laure. 44. nouer, to tie. 
45. la pioche, pickaxe. 46. fort, strong. 47. le balai, 
broom. 48. vermeil, vermilion. 49. sevrer, to wean. 50. ils 
viendront, they will come. 51. ils tiennent, they hold. 
52. patiente. 53. coquin, rascal. 54. coquine. 55. vous 
montates, you mounted. 


22 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


66 . General exercise on §§ 16-56: 1. la theiere, teapot. 
2. Phote, host. 3. le bilan, balance-sheet. 4. isoler, to 
isolate. 5. le blame. 6. defunte, defunct. 7. le cahier, 
note-book. 8. la groseille, currant. 9. la ceinture, belt. 
10. la frayeur, fright. 11. le Maine. 12. Pessai, trial. 
13. j’acheterai, I shall buy. 14. F emotion. 15. les voeux, 
vows. 16. vous racont&tes, you related. 17. la peine, pain. 
18. la science. 19. le grelot, bell. 20. vous tiendriez, you 
would hold. 21. jaser, to chatter. 22. Fceillade, glance. 
23. l’avoine, oats. 24. Paumone, alms. 25. ils menent, they 
drive. 26. le fleau, scourge. 27. le soin, care. 28. tu aurais, 
thou wouldst have. 29. seize, sixteen. 30. chretien, Christian. 
31. le jouet, plaything. 32. le tien, thine. 33. nous criorus, 
we cry. 34. exigeant, exacting. 35. le tuyau, pipe. 36. de- 
cemment, decently. 37. quel, what. 38. la canaille, rabble. 
39. le poignard, poniard. 40. le moyen, means. 41. egayer, 
enliven. 42. et, and. 43. il reveille, he awakens. 44. la 
tienne, thine. 45. la cuisine, kitchen. 46. la femme, woman. 
47. que, that. 48. fair, to flee. 49. elle est, she is. 50. Pin- 
dignity. 51. la fosse, ditch. 52. six hommes, six men. 
53. nous enrageons, we are enraged. 54. le paysage, land¬ 
scape. 55. le secretaire. 56. il maintiendra, ho will main¬ 
tain. 57. anxieux, anxious. 58. le lyceen. 59. monsieur. 
60. mieux, better. 61. Pinvitation. 62. Faffut, hiding-place. 
63. guere, scarcely. 64. chretienne, Christian. 65. pro¬ 
digue, prodigal. 66. tu ennuyeras, thou wilt bore. 67. Pen- 
train, spirit. 68. second. 69. tu feras, thou wilt do. 
70. vous etes, you are. 71. Pengin. 72. le combat. 
73. huit, eight. 74. Pennemi. 75. le bastion. 76. Pinno- 
vation. 77. succinct. 78. partir, to leave. 79. la reclusion. 
80. faisant, doing. 81. Paul. 82. le rayon, beam. 83. res- 
sortir, to come out again. 84. solennel, solemn. 85. anxieuse, 
anxious. 86. chasser, to hunt. 87. ensuite, then. 88. vous 
tintes, you held. 89. balayant, sweeping. 90. le pillage. 
91. nous eumes, we had. 92. toi, thee. 93. la besogne, task. 


PRONUN CIATION 


23 


94. quand il faisait, when he was making. 95. neuf oeufs, 
nine eggs. 96. je devrai, I shall have to. 97. le poil, hair . 
98. l’obscurite. 99. le beffroi, belfry. 100. vous creuseriez, 
you would dig. 101. ayant, having. 102. ardemment, ar¬ 
dently. 103. le voisin, neighbor. 104. inanime. 105. il 
brille, he shines. 106. Femprunt, loan. 107. vous sembliez, 
you seemed. 108. Fexamen, examination. 109. a jeun, 
fasting. 110. Faccueil, welcome. 111. l’excuse. 112. la 
main, hand. 113. le geai, jay. 114. le succes, success. 
115. baiser, to kiss. 116. baisser, to lower. 117. le fusil, 
gun. 118. Fabsinthe. 119. qu’il aille! let him go! 120. Fail, 
garlic. 121. Fade, wing. 122. le mecanicien. 123. le pigeon. 
124. la pilule, pill. 125. le feuillet, leaf. 126. soixante, 
sixty. 127. deuxieme, second. 128. le poison. 129. le 
poisson, fish. 


1. PREMIERE LEQON [pramjeir laso] 

% 

L’feCOLE 

I 

1. Gender. All French nouns are either masculine or 
feminine 1 

2 . Number. Nouns usually form the plural by adding s 
to the singular: ecole [ekol], school; ecoles [ekol], schools. 2 

3. Definite Article : the. 

le [la] before a masculine noun: le livre [liivr], the hook 
la [la] before a feminine noun: la table [tabl], the table 
1 ’ [1] before either a masculine or a feminine noun 
beginning with a vowel 3 : l’eleve [leleiv], the pupil; 
P ecole [lekol], the school 

les [le] before all plurals: les ecoles [le zekol 4 ], the 
schools; les livres [le li:vr], the hooks 


VOCABULARY 


4 


le cahier [kaje], the copy-book 
le crayon [krejo], the pencil 
dans [da], in, into 
de [do], of, from 
devant [dova], in front of 


l’ecole [lekol] (/.), the school 
Peleve [leleiv] ( m. f /.), the pupil 
est [e], is 

la fenetre [foneitr], the window 
le livre [liivr], the book 


1 The gender of all nouns must be learned. 

2 This final S being silent, singulars and plurals are pronounced alike. If 
the singular ends in S, the singular and plural are identical: le Franfais, the 
Frenchman: les Franfais, the Frenchmen. 

3 Nouns beginning with h are treated as if they began with a vowel: 
l’histoire [listwair], the story. There are. a few exceptions; none occur in the 
lessons of this book. See Introduction, § 56, 4. 

4 See Introduction, §55. 


25 


26 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


le maitre d’ecole [ms:tro dekol], the 
school-master 

la maitresse d’ecole [metres de¬ 
kol], the school-mistress 
oh [u], where 

5. 

1 . The copy-book; the window 

2. The copy-books; the win¬ 

dows 

3. The pupil; the school 

4. The pupils; the schools 

5. The book; the books 

6 . The class-room 
The class-rooms 

7. The school; the schools 

8 . The school-masters 

9. The school-mistress 

10. In the school; in front of 

the class 

11. On the table; in front of 

the tables 

12. On the copy-book; in the 

copy-books 

13. On the pencil; in the pencils 

14. Of the pupil; of the school 

15. Of the window; of the school¬ 

mistress 


L § 5 

la salle de classe [sal da klas], the 
class-room 
sur [sy:r], on 
la table [tabl], the table 


Le cahier; la fenetre 
Les cahiers; les fenetres 

L’eleve; l’ecole 

Les eleves; les ecoles 

Le livre; les livres 

La salle de classe 

Les salles de classe 

L’ecole; les ecoles 

Les maitres d’ecole 

La maitresse d’ecole 

Dans l’ecole; devant la classe 

Sur la table; devant les tables 

Sur le cahier; dans les cahiers 

Sur le crayon; dans les crayons 
De l’eleve; de l’ecole 
De la fenetre; de la maitresse 
d’ecole 


DRILL 


6. Reading. Oil est la salle de classe? La salle de classe 
est dans l’dcole. Ou est la maitresse d’ecole? La maitresse 
d’ecole est dans la salle de classe devant les eleves. La table 
de la maitresse d’ecole est devant la fenetre. Ou est l’dleve? 

5 L’eleve est devant la maitresse. Ou est le livre de l’eleve? 
Le livre de l’eleve est sur les cahiers. Le crayon de l’eleve 
est dans le livre. La maitresse est devant les dleves. Le 
livre de la maitresse est sur la table. Le crayon de l’eleve 
est sur le cahier dans la salle de classe. Ou est le maitre 


§7] 


LEgON I 


27 


d’ecole? Le maitre d’ecole est devant la table. Le cahier 
est sur la table. La table est devant la fenetre. La fenetre 
est dans la salle de classe. La salle de classe est dans 
recole. 



7. Resume for Oral Work. Reproduce what you can of 
the Reading with the aid of the following hints, or use them 
to construct similar matter: 

salle de classe; maitresse d'ecole; table; eleve; livre; 
crayon; maitresse d’ecole; livre; crayon de F eleve; maitre 
d’ecole; cahier; table; fenetre; salle de classe. 

8. Oral Drill. 1. the pencil; the pencils. 2. the window; 
the windows. 3. the pupil; the pupils. 4. the book; the 
books. 5. the table; the tables. 6. the copy-book; the copy¬ 
books. 7. the school; the schools. 8. in front of the school¬ 
master; in front of the school-mistress. 9. the book of the 
pupil; the table of the school-mistress. 10. on the pencils; 
in the books. 

ii 

9 . DIALOGUE 

1 . Where is the pupil? Oft est l’eleve? 

2. The pupil is in the class- L’eleve est dans la salle de classe 

room 

3. Where is the class-room? Oft est la salle de classe? 


io 










28 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 10 


4. The class-room is in the 

school 

5. Where is the school-master? 

6 . The school-master is in 

front of the pupils 

7. Where is the table of the 

mistress? 

8 . The table of the mistress is 

in front of the window 

9. Where is the copy-book of 

the pupil? 

10. The copy-book of the pupil 

is on the table 

11. Where is the pencil of the 

pupil? 

12. The pencil of the pupil is 

in the book 

13. Where is the book? 

14. The book is on the table 

15. Where is the table? 

16. The table is in front of the 

windows 

10. Conversation. A student puts one of the following 
questions into French; another student answers it, using the 
Reading (not the Dialogue) as a basis: 

1 . Where is the school-master? 2. Where is the pupil? 
3. Where is the book of the pupil? 4. Where is the table? 
5. Where is the pencil of the school-mistress? 

11. Theme. The pupil is in front of the window. The 
window is in the class-room. The class-room is in the school. 
The school-mistress is in front of the tables. The book of 
the pupil is on the table. The copy-book of the pupil is on 

5 the books. The pencil is in the copy-book. Where is the 
school-master? The school-master is in front of the table 
of the pupil. 


La salle de classe est dans l’ecole 

06 est le maitre d’ecole? 

Le maitre d’ecole est devant les 
eleves 

06 est la table de la maitresse? 

La table de la maitresse est de¬ 
vant la fenetre 

06 est le cahier de 1’eleve? 

Le cahier de 1’eleve est sur la 
table 

06 est le crayon de 1’eleve? 

Le crayon de 1’eleve est dans le 
livre 

06 est le livre? 

Le livre est sur la table 

06 est la table? 

La table est devant les fenetres 


§12] 


LEQON II 


29 


12 . Exercises. A, Put the definite article, first singular, 
then plural, before the following: 

school-master copy-book pencil pupil window 

school-mistress school class-room table book 

B. Use the above words in sentences. 


2. DEUXlLME LEQON [dtfzjem las5] 

L’fiCOLE 

I 


13. a [a ] = at, to de [d o\ — of, from 

a+le contracts to au [o]; never say a le 
de+le contracts to du [dy]; never say de le 
a+les contracts to aux [o]; never say a les 
de+les contracts to des [de]; never say de les 

au livre, to the book; du livre, of the book 
a la legon, to the lesson; de la legon, of the lesson 
a l’61eve, to the pupil; de l’eleve, of the pupil 
aux livres, to the books; des livres, of the books 

14. To ask a question, put est-ce que [es ka], is it {true) 
that, before the affirmative form. 1 

Le livre est sur la table, The book is on the table 

Est-ce que le livre est sur la table? Is the book on the table? 


15. VOCABULARY 


Panglais [lagls] (m.), English 
le banc [bfi], bench 
ce [so], this, that, it 
difficile [difisil], difficult 


donne [don], gives 
l’etude [letyd] (/.), study 
facile [fasil], easy 
le frangais [frase], French 


1 Exception: With OU? follow the order learned in Lesson I. 


3i 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


I’histoire 1 [listwair] (/.), story- 
la lef on [laso], lesson 
non [no], no 
oui [wi], yes 

le devoir [dovwair], paper, exercise 

16. 

1. To the professor; to the 

lesson 

2. To the professors; to the 

lessons 

3. Of the paper; of the lesson 

4. Of the papers; of the lessons 

5. To the pupil; to the school 

6. To the pupils; to the schools 

7. Of the pupil; of the school 

8. Of the pupils; of the schools 

9. Of the window; of the study 

10. Of the table; of the papers 

11. To the bench; of the story 

12. Of the stories; to the papers 

13. To the story; of the English 

14. Of the windows; to the 

studies 

15. To the pen; of the lesson 

16. To the stories; of the 

benches 

17. To the professor, to the 

window 

18. To the English; of the pen 

19. To the pens; of the studies 


[§ 16 

la plume [plym], pen 
le professeur [profesceir], pro¬ 
fessor, the teacher 
sont [so], are 


Au professeur; a la legon 

Aux professeurs; aux lemons 

Du devoir; de la legon 
Des devoirs; des lefons 
A l’eleve; a l’ecole 
Aux eleves; aux ecoles 
De l’eleve; de l’ecole 
Des eleves; des ecoles 
De la fenetre; de 1’etude 
De la table; des papiers 
Au banc; de l’histoire 
Des histoires; aux devoirs 
A l’histoire; de l’anglais 
Des fenetres; aux etudes 

A la plume; de la leg on 
Aux histoires; des bancs 

Au professeur; k la fenetre 

A 1’anglais; de la plume 
Aux plumes; des etudes 


DRILL 


17. Reading. Le professeur est dans T6cole devant la 
fenetre. Les bancs des el&ves sont dans la salle de classe 
devant la table du professeur. Le professeur donne les 
livres aux sieves. Est-ce que Fetude du frangais est facile? 

5 L’dtude de Tanglais est facile. L’etude du frangais est 

1 See p. 25, note 3. 


LEQON II 


31 


18] 


difficile. La legon sur l'histoire dans le livre est facile. 
Le professeur donne la plume a Peleve. L’eleve donne le 
devoir au professeur. Le devoir de 
FeleVe est dans le cahier. Les 
cahiers des eleves de Pecole sont 
sur les bancs devant la table du 
professeur. Est-ce que la legon des 
eleves est difficile? Non, la legon 
des eleves est facile. 

18. Resume. 1 Professeur; bancs; 
donne; etude du frangais; anglais; 
legon; plume; devoir; cahiers; legon 
difficile. 

19. Oral Drill. 1. to the profes¬ 
sor; of the professor. 2. to the 

yf ‘‘bench; to the benches. 3. of the 

L’el&ve donne le devoir au benches, of the bench. 4. of the 
professeur pen; of the' pens. 5. to the pen; 

to the pens. 6. to the pencil of 
the mistress; to the pencils of the masters. 7. of the study 
of the lessons; to the study of the lesson. 8. to the story 
of the mistress; of the stories of the masters. 9. to the 
bench of the pupil; to the pupils of the school. 10. to the 
pens of the pupils; to the benches of the school. 



ii 

20. DIALOGUE 

1. Is the study of (the) En- Est-ce que l’etude de l’anglais 

glish easy? est facile? 

2. Yes, the study of (the) Oui, l’etude de l’anglais est facile 

English is easy 

1 For all Resumes follow instructions on p. 27, § 7. 








32 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 21 


3. Is the study of (the) French 

easy? 

4. No, the study of (the) 

French is difficult 

5. Where are the copy-books 

of the pupils? 

6 . The copy-books of the pupils 

are on the bench 

7. Does the professor give the 

pens to the pupils? 

8 . No, the professor gives the 

papers to the pupils 

9. Is the study of the story 

difficult? 

10. Yes, the study of the story 

is difficult 

11 . Where are the books of the 

pupils? 

12. The books of the pupils are 

on the table of the pro¬ 
fessor 

21. Conversation. 1 1. Where are the papers of the pupils? 
2. Is the story difficult? 3. Does the pupil give the book 
to the mistress? 4. Does the master give the pen to the 
pupil? 5. Is the study of (the) English easy? 6. Are the 
books on the table? 7. Does the mistress give the pens 
to the master? 8. Does the master give the lesson to 
the pupils? 9. Is the study difficult? 10. Where are the 
lessons? 

22 . Theme. The professor is in the class-room of the 
school. The pupils of the school are in front of the table of 
the professor. The professor gives the books to the pupils. 
The lesson is difficult. The study of the story is easy. The 

5 pupil gives the paper to the professor. The papers of the 

1 For all Conversations follow instructions on p* 28, § 10. 


Est-ce que Petude du fran$ais esft 
facile? 

Non, Petude du fran$ais est 
difficile 

Oft sont les cahiers des eleves? 

Les cahiers des eleves sont sin 
le banc 

Est-ce que le professeur donne les 
plumes aux eleves? 

Non, le professeur donne les 
devoirs aux eleves 

Est-ce que Petude de l’histoire est 
difficile? 

Oui, Petude de Phistoire est 
difficile 

Oil sont les livres des eleves? 

Les livres des eleves sont sur la 
table du professeur 


§23] 


LEgON III 


33 


pupils are on the table of the professor in front of the window. 
The pens are on the papers. 

23. Exercises. A. Put of the and to the before the follow¬ 
ing words, first singular, then plural: 

pen school bench paper pupil school-master 

story lesson study professor window copy-book 

B. Use the above words in sentences. 

C. A student asks questions (based on A ); another answers. 


3. TROISlfiME LECON [trwazjem] 

L’ECOLE 

i 

24. Present Indicative of First Conjugation (verbs end¬ 
ing in -er in the infinitive): donner [done], to give. 

je donn e 1 33 don], I give 1 
(tu donn es [ty don], thou givest 2 ) 
il donn e [il don], he gives 3 
elle donn e [el don], she gives 3 

nous donn ons [nu dono], we give 
vous donn ez [vu done], you give 
ils donn ent [il don], they (m.) give 
elles donn ent [el don], they (/.) give 

25. Note that the three singular forms and the third 
person plural are pronounced alike, the endings -e, -es, -ent 
being silent. 

1 Je donne = 7 give, / do give, I am giving. 

2 Tu is used only in speaking to children or intimate friends. Always use 
the vous form for you. 

3 It = il or elle according to the gender of the noun to which it refers: 
il (le livre) est difficile; elle (la legon ) est facile. 


34 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 26 


26. Interrogative. 

Est-ce que je donne? [es ka 39 don], do I give? 1 
(donnes-tu? [don ty], dost thou give?) 
donne-t-il? 2 [don til], does he give? 
donne-t-elle? 2 4 [don tel], does she give? 
donnons-nous? [dono nu], do we give? 
donnez-vous? [done vu], do you give? 
donnent-ils? [don til], do they (m.) give? 
donnent-elles? [don tel], do they (/.) give? 


27. MODELS FOR QUESTIONS 

(Use this table for reference until it is learned) 


1. If the subject is a 'pronoun 
(except jes): 

2. If the subject is a noun: 

3. With oh? and some other 
interrogative words: 


Donnez-vous ? or 
Est-ce que vous donnez? 

Est-ce que le livre est sur la table?* 
Ovl est le livre ? 5 


28. Indefinite Article : a, an. 

un [de] before a masculine noun: un banc, a bench 
une [yn] before a feminine noun: une etude, a study 


29. VOCABULARY 


l’allemand [lalma] (m.), German 
apres [apre], after 
aussi [osi], also 
chanter [Sate], to sing 
la classe [klas], class 


et [e], and 
le mot [mo], word 
parler [parle], to speak 
la phrase [frci:z], sentence 
prononcer [pronose], to pronounce 


1 The est-ce que form is to be used in the first person singular, and may 
be used in all persons and numbers. For elision of e before a vowel (est-ce 
qu’il donne?), see Introduction, § 56. 

2 When il or elle follows its verb, t (between hyphens) intervenes, if the 
verb ends in a vowel. 

3 See § 26, and Note 1. 

4 Or Le livre est-il sur la table? (less used). 

6 Or Le livre oh est-il? (less used). This construction or the est-ce que 
form must be used if the subject of the verb is a noun and the verb has a 
direct object. 

Oh est-ce que le maitre trouve le livre?) Where does the master find the 
Le maitre oh trouve-t-il le livre? / book? 


§30] 


LEgON III 


35 


DRILL 

Chantez-vous? je chante 
Donnez-vous? nous donnons 


30. 

1. Do you sing? I sing 

2. Do you give? we give 

3. Does he speak? she speaks 

4. They (m.) give; we speak 

5. Does she speak? he speaks 

6 . Do you speak? I speak 

7. Do I pronounce? 

8 . I pronounce; he pronounces 

9. Do they (m.) pronounce? 

they (/.) pronounce 

10. Of a sentence; of a pupil 

11. Of a pencil; of a story 

12. Do I sing? 

13. They give; they (/.) speak 

14. Does he pronounce? does 

she speak? 

15. Do I give? 

16. Do the pupils speak to the 

masters? 

17. Does the class sing? 


Parle-t-il? elle parle 
Ils donnent; nous parlons 
Parle-t-elle? il parle 
Parlez-vous? je parle 
Est-ce que je prononce? 

Je prononce; il prononce 
Prononcent-ils? elles prononcent 

D’une 1 phrase; d’un! eleve 
D’un 1 crayon; d’une! histoire 
Est-ce que je chante? 

Ils donnent; elles parlent 
Prononce-t-il? parle-t-elle? 

Est-ce que je donne? 

Est-ce que les eleves parlent 
aux maitres? 

Est-ce que la classe chante? 


31. Reading. Le maitre est dans Fecole. Les eleves 
sont dans Pecole aussi. Le maitre est devant la fenetre. 
Les eleves sont devant les bancs. Le maitre dgnne la legon 
d’allemand aux eleves. Apres la legon d'allemajid, il donne 
la legon de frangais aux eleves. Les eleves prononcent les 
mots et les phrases du livre apres le maitre. Est-ce que 
vous chantez apres la legon de frangais? Nous chantons 
apres la legon d’anglais. Est-ce que la classe chante? Oui, 
elle chante. Donnez-vous les cahiers au maitre? Oui, nous 
donnons les cahiers au maitre, et les devoirs aussi. Est-ce 
que l’eleve prononce les phrases de l’histoire? Il prononce 
les phrases de l’histoire apres le maitre. Est-ce que Letude 
de Pallemand est difficile? Oui, elle est difficile. Est-ce que 
F^tude de l’anglais est difficile aussi? Non, elle est facile. 

1 See Introduction, § 56. 


36 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 32 


Parlez-vous frangais au maitre? Oui, nous parlons frangais 
au maitre apres la classe. 

32. Resume. Maitre; eleves; le^on d’allemand; apres; 
prononcent; chantez?; classe chante; donnez?; prononce; 
etude de Pallemand; de F anglais; parler frangais. 

33. Oral Drill. 1. a copy-book; a pupil. 2. a school; a 
window. 3. a professor; a class-room. 4. a school-mistress; 
a table. 5. a bench; a study. 6. to pronounce; I give; he 
pronounces. 7. she speaks; they pronounce; we sing. 8. to 
sing; we give; you pronounce. 9. they speak; she sings; I 
speak. 10. Does the master speak of the pupils? 11. Does 
the mistress speak to the pupil? 12. Does the professor give 
the papers to the class? 13. Does he pronounce?; do I give?; 
does she speak? 14. Do they (m.) pronounce?; do you sing? 
15. Do we speak?; do they (/.) sing? 


DIALOGUE 


ii 

34. 

1. Do you speak French to the 

professor? 

2. No, I speak German to the 

professor 

3. Does the professor speak 

German to the pupils? 

4. No, the pupils speak Ger¬ 

man to the professor 

5. Do the pupils pronounce 

the sentences after the 
professor? 

6 . Yes, they pronounce the 

words and the sentences 
of the book after the pro¬ 
fessor 

7. Do we speak of the mistress 

to the pupil? 


Parlez-vous franfais au profes- 
seur? 

Non, je parle allemand au profes- 
seur 

Est-ce que le professeur parle 
allemand aux eleves? 

Non, les eleves parlent allemand 
au professeur 

Est-ce que les eleves prononcent 
les phrases apres le professeur? 

Oui, ils prononcent les mots et les 
phrases du livre apres le pro¬ 
fesseur 

Est-ce que nous parlons de la 
maitresse a l’eleve? 


§35] 


LEgON III 


37 


8. No, the pupil speaks of you 

to the mistress 

9. Does the master give a 

French lesson (lesson of 
French) to the pupils? 

10. No, he gives an English les¬ 

son (lesson of English) to 
the pupils 

11. Does the class pronounce 

the words after the mas¬ 
ter? 

12. No, it pronounces the sen¬ 

tences after the master 

13. Do you sing at (the) school? 

14. We sing after the lesson 

15. Does the master sing also? 

16. The master and the mistress 

sing 

35. Conversation. 1. Are the pupils in front of the 
window? 2 . Do you sing after the lesson? 3. Does she 
pronounce the sentences? 4. Does the master give the 
lesson to the pupil? 5. Do I give the pencil to the mistress? 

6 . Do we sing? 7. Do you pronounce the words also? 

8. Does the class sing? 9. Do they speak to the pupils? 
10. Do you speak to the mistress? 

36. Theme. Where is the professor? Is he in the school? 

Yes, he is in the class-room in front of the pupils. Does the 
professor give the lesson to the pupils? Yes, he gives the 
lesson to the pupils, and they pronounce the words and the 
sentences of the lesson. Does the class pronounce the sen- 5 
tences after the professor? Yes, they pronounce the sen¬ 
tences and the words also. Is the study of (the) German 
difficult? Yes, and the study of (the) French is difficult 
also. The study of (the) English is easy. Do you sing after 
the lessons? Yes, we sing after the lessons. 10 

1 See page 33, footnote 3. 


Non, I’eleve parle de vous k la 
maitresse 

Est-ce que le maitre donne une 
legon de frangais aux eleves? 

Non, il donne une legon d’anglais 
aux eleves 

Est-ce que la classe prononce les 
mots apres le maitre? 

Non, elle 1 prononce les phrases 
apres le maitre 

Est-ce que vous chantez a l’ecole? 

Nous chantons apres la legon 

Est-ce que le maitre chante aussi? 

Le maitre et la maitresse chantent 


38 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 37 

37. Exercises. A. Conjugate: 

I give.a book. Do I speak of the school? 

I sing the words. Do I speak to a professor? 

B. Students fill in the blanks in the following; other 
students answer the questions: 

1. Est-ce que — est dans l’ecole? 

2. Est-ce que — sont dans la salle de classe? 

3. -vous les mots? 

C. Put the indefinite article before the following words: 

pen school-mistress school class lesson 

bench professor word sentence paper 

< 

D. Verb Drill on donner, parler, chanter, prononcer in the 
affirmative and in the interrogative: § 480, A . 

i d 

4. QUATRliME LEQON [katriem] 

# 

L’lJCOLE 

I 

38. Feminine Adjectives are formed by adding e to the 
masculine (the final consonant being now pronounced — but 
not the e). 1 

H est petit [pati], He is small 
* Elle est petite [patit], She is small 

& 

39. Plural^of Adjectives. Adjectives form the plural 
like nouns. See p. 25, § 2, note 2. 

1 Acfcectives ending in -e remain unchanged: 

Le livre est facile [fasil], The book is easy 
La lepon est facile [fasil], The lesson is easy 


§40] 


LEQON IV 


39 


II est petit [pati], He is small 
Elle est petite [patit], She is small 
Us sont petits [pati], They are small 
Elies sont petites [patit], They are small 

40. Position of Adjectives. 

1. Adjectives usually follow their noun: 

la legon facile, the easy lesson 
la legon difficile, the difficult lesson 

2. Adjectives of color and nationality always follow their 
nouns: 

la langue frangaise, the French language 
l’encre noire, the black ink 


3. Many short common adjectives precede their nouns; 
such are grand and petit which are used in this lesson. 

4. Position of adjectives must in the main be learned by 
observation. 

41. VOCABULARY 


bleu [bio], blue 
chercher [$er$e], to seek, 
look for 

la cour [ku:r], yard 
Pencre [ld:kr] (/.), ink 
l’enfant [lafa] (m.,/.), child 
enseigner [asejie], to teach 
la fille [fi:j], daughter, girl 
le gargon [garsa], boy 


grand [gra], big, large 
jouer [ 3 we ], 1 to play 
la langue [la:g], language 
noir [nwair], black 
petit [pati], small, little 
rouge [ru: 3 ], red 
trouver [truve], to find 
vert [ve:r], green 


42. 


DRILL 


1. The small boy; the small Le petit gargon; la petite cour 

yard 

2. The small boys; the large Les petits gargons; les grandes 

rooms salles 

3. The easy lesson; the diffi- Lalegon facile; les livres difficiles 

cult books ' ,/f 

' t ■' 

1 See p. 11 , §29, Note, on pronunciation [ 3 we] and [ 3 a 3 U]. 


40 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 43 


4. The French sentences; the 

French words 

5. The big sentences; the small 

words 

6. The red pencil; the red pen¬ 

cils 

7. The big girls; the little boys 

8. Of the blue ink; to the green 

inks 

9. To the English language; of 

the big windows 

10. To the German sentences; 

of the blue copy-book 

11. Of the green ink; of the 

French language 

12. To the difficult lesson; of 

the English child 

13. To a small child; of the 

French word 

14. Of the difficult languages; 

of the daughter of the 
master 

15. To a big yard; to the black 

ink 


Les phrases frangaises; les mots 
frangais 

Les grandes phrases; les petits 
mots 

Le crayon rouge; les crayons 
rouges 

Les grandes filles; les petits gar- 
eons 

De Pencre bleue; aux encres 
vertes 

A la langue anglaise; des grandes 
fenetres 

Aux phrases allemandes; du ca- 
hier bleu 

De Pencre verte; de la langue 
frangais e 

A la legon difficile; de l’enfant an¬ 
glais 

A un petit enfant; du mot frangais 

Des langues difficiles; de la fille 
du maitre 

A une grande cour; a Pencre noire 


43. Reading. Les enfants sont a Tecole. Les grandes 
filles et les grands gargons sont dans la salle de classe; les 
petits gargons et les petites filles jouent dans la cour. Le 
maitre est devant la fenetre. II enseigne la langue frangaise 
a la classe des petites filles et la langue allemande a la classe 
des grandes filles. II enseigne la langue anglaise aux petits 
gargons et la langue allemande aux petites filles. II donne un 
livre frangais au petit eleve frangais et un livre allemand a la 
petite eleve anglaise. L’eleve frangais trouve le livre frangais 
facile et k eleve anglaise trouve le livre allemand difficile. La 
fille du maitre est dans la salle de classe. 


§44] 


LEgON IV 


41 



Les petits gargons et les petites filles jouent dans la cour 

44. Resume. Enfants; grandes filles et grands gargons; 
petits; petites; maitre; langue frangaise, allemande, anglaise; 
donne; eleve frangais; eleve anglaise; fille du maitre. 

45. Oral Drill. 1. Does he pronounce the English words? 
2. The children pronounce the French sentences. 3. Do 
you give the blue copy-books to the pupils? 4. We give the 
English books to the daughter of the professor. 5. Does the 
girl speak to the German school-master? 6. She is looking 
for the green ink. 7. Do the boys and the girls play in the 
big yard? 8. The boys play in the yard in front of the class¬ 
room. 9. Are you teaching the French language to the child? 

10. I am teaching 1 the English language to the little girl. 

11. Where is the red ink? 12. Does the master give the easy 
lessons to the pupils? 

ii 

46. DIALOGUE 

1. Where are the children? Oft sont les enfants? 

2. The big boy is in the yard Le grand gargon est dans la cour 

and the little girl is in the et la petite fille est dans la salle 
class-room de classe 

i For elision of e of je with enseigner (j’enseigne), see Introduction, § 56. 











42 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 47 


3. Does the little girl play? 
'4. No, she is looking for the 
ink and the pencil 

5. Is she looking for the red 

ink? 

6. No, the red ink is on the 

table of the master; she is 
looking for the black ink 

7. Does she find the pencil? 

8. Yes, she finds the blue pencil 

and the black ink 

9. Does the master teach the 

English language to the 
big boys? 

10. No, he teaches the French 

language to the little girls 
and the German language 
to the big boys 

11. Are the lessons difficult? 

12. The lessons of the little girls 

are easy; the lessons of 
the big boys are difficult. 
The little girls find the 
French books easy, and 
the big boys find the Ger¬ 
man books difficult 


Est-ce que la petite fille joue? 

Non, elle cherche l’encre et le 
crayon 

Est-ce qu’elle cherche l’encre 
rouge? 

Non, l’encre rouge est sur la table 
du maitre; elle cherche l’encre 
noire 

Est-ce qu’elle trouve le crayon? 

Oui, elle trouve le crayon bleu et 
l’encre noire 

Est-ce que le maitre enseigne la 
langue anglaise aux grands 
garfons? 

Non, il enseigne la langue fran- 
gaise aux petites filles et la 
langue allemande aux grands 
gargons 

Est-ce que les legons sont diffi- 
ciles? 

Les lefons des petites filles sont 
faciles; les lemons des grands 
garfons sont difficiles. Les 
petites filles trouvent les livres 
frangais faciles, et les grands 
garfons trouvent les livres alle- 
mands difficiles 


47. Conversation. 1 . Do you play in the class-room? 
2. Do you teach the English language? 3. Where are the 
masters? 4. Do you give the French books to the German pu¬ 
pils? 5. Is the little girl French? 6. Do you find the French 
books difficult? 7. Are you seeking the German pupils? 
8. Is the French book difficult? 9. Does the English pupil 
give the pencils to the little girls? 10. Where are the pupils? 

48. Theme. We find the little German children in the 
big yard of the school. The little boys are playing with the 


§49] 


LEgON V 


43 


little girl^. Is the school-master in the yard with the pupils? 

No, he is Reaching the French language to the big girls and 
to the big toys. Is the French language difficult? No, it is 5 
easy. The daughter of the master is looking for the red ink. 

She finds the blue ink, the green ink and the black ink. She 
gives the blue ink to the pupils. Are they playing in the 
yard? The little children are playing in the yard. Do the 
big children play in the yard? They play in the yard after 10 
the class. They are pronouncing the difficult words and the 
difficult sentences after the master. 

49. Exercises. A. Use the indefinite article and an 
appropriate adjective with the following words: 

yard girl boy sentence 

story ink bench book 

B. With these same words use the plural of the definite 
article and an adjective. 

C. Conjugate: 

I teach the French language. Do I look for the red ink? 

D. Drill on present indicative of chercher and enseigner: r 
§480, A. 


5* CINQUlfiME LEQON [sekjem] 

Review 

1 

50. 1. On the table; before the pupils. 2. In the yards; 
of the tables. 3. To the pupil; of the schools. 4. To the 
class-room; of the copy-books. 5. To the pencils; of the 
pupils. 6. Of the masters; to the windows. 7. Of the yard; 
to the professor. 8. To the lessons; of a yard. 9. Of a pen; 
of a paper. 10. Of the pens; to the professors. 11. To a 


44 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 51 

bench; of the study. 12. Of the studies; to the story. 
13. To the stories; do you sing? 14. We sing; does he speak? 
15. They speak; do I pronounce? 16. You pronounce; do 
we give? 17. He gives; she sings. 18. Does he speak?; does 
she give? 19. The English language; the big window. 
20. The green ink; of the little girl. 21. To the black ink; 
of the small child. 22. Are you seeking? I am finding. 
23. Do you teach German? We teach English. 24. Does 
she play? She sings. 25. Do you speak to the school¬ 
mistress? 26. They look for the daughters of the professor. 

ii 

51. 1 . Where is the school? 2. The pencil is on the table. 
3. The little boy is in front of the window. 4. The French 
book is on the table. 5. Does the daughter of the professor 
give the papers to the children? 6. Do you find the study of 
the lesson difficult? 7. The study of the French language is 
easy. 8. The copy-books of the pupils are on the bench. 
9. The mistress gives the little books to the pupils. 10. I 
am looking for the blue ink in the class-room. 11. The boys 
in front of the window are singing. 12. A little girl is pro¬ 
nouncing the German words after the master. 13. The 
study of the stories is difficult. 14. Are you looking for the 
red ink? 15. I find the French books. 16. The boy is 
playing in front of the house. 17. Does the master teach 
the English language to the little girls? 18. We teach the 
French language to the big boys. 19. Is the professor 
teaching the German language to the English pupils in the 
class-room? 20. The daughters of the school-mistress are 
playing in the yard of the school. 21. Are you looking for 
the girls? 22. No, they are looking for the boys. 23. We find 
the study of (the) English easy and the study of (the) French 
difficult. 

52. Oral. Students talk about The School , asking and 
answering questions. 


LEQON VI 


45 


§53] 


6. SIXlfiME LEQON [sizjem] 


LA MAISON 
I 

53. Imperative = indicative with pronoun omitted: vous 
donnez, you give; donnez! give! 

54. Negative. Not 

I do not give, etc. 

je ne donne pas 
(tu ne donnes pas) 
il ne donne pas 
nous ne donnons pas 
vous ne donnez pas 
ils ne donnent pas 


= ne-{-verbpas [no . . . pa]: 

Do I not givet etc. 

est-ce que je ne donne pas? 
(ne donnes-tu pas?) 
ne donne-t-il pas? 
ne donnons-nous pas? 
ne donnez-vous pas? 
ne donnent-ils pas? 


VOCABULARY 


55. 

la chambre [$a:br], room 
entrer (dans) [atre (da)], to 
enter 

fermer [ferme], to close, shut 
la maison [mez5], house 
manger [m& 3 e], to eat 

je peux [30 po], I can 
il peut [il po], he can 
nous pouvons [nu puvo], we can 
vous pouvez [vu puve], you can 


la porte [port], door 
la salle a manger [sal a ma 3 e], 
dining-room 

le salon [salo], living-room 
sonner [sone], to ring 
la sonnette [sonet], bell 

je veux [30 vo], I wish, want 
il veut [il vo], he wishes 
nous voulons [nu vul5], we wish 
vous voulez [vu vule], you wish 


DRILL 


56. 

1. I give; I do not give 

2. We enter; we do not enter 

3. She rings; she does not ring 

4. We give; we don’t give 

5. You give; don’t you give? 

6. They enter; they don’t enter 


Je donne; je ne donne pas 
Nous entrons; nous n’entrons pas 
Elle sonne; elle ne sonne pas 
Nous donnons; nous ne donnons 
pas 

Vous donnez; ne donnez-vous pas? 
Ils entrent; ils n’entrent pas 


46 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 57 


7. He can; he cannot 

8. We wish; we don’t wish 

9. Do you wish? don’t you 

wish? 

10. Can he? can’t he? 

11. Give! don’t give! 

12. Eat! don’t eat! 

13. She wishes; doesn’t she wish? 

14. I ring; I don’t ring 

15. He shuts the door 

16. Doesn’t he shut the door? 

17. Close the doors! 

18. Don’t close the windows! 

19. Enter the house! 

20. Don’t enter the living-room! 


II peut; il ne peut pas 

Nous voulons; nous ne voulons pas 

Voulez-vous? ne voulez-vous pas? 

Peut-il? ne peut-il pas? 

Donnez! ne donnez pas! 

Mangez! ne mangez pas! 

Elle veut; ne veut-elle pas? 

Je sonne; je ne sonne pas 
II ferme la porte 
Ne ferme-t-il pas la porte? 

Fermez les portes! 

Ne fermez pas les fenetres! 

Entrez dans la maison! 

N’entrez pas dans le salon! 


57. Reading. Les petits gargons 
jouent devant la maison. Une grande 
fille est dans le salon et une petite fille 
est dans la salle a manger. La petite 
5 fille dans la salle a manger cherche le 
petit gargon, et la grande fille dans le 
salon cherche la petite fille dans la salle 
a manger. Le petit gargon veut entrer. 

La petite fille ferme la porte. Le petit 
io gargon ne peut pas entrer. II sonne. 

- Le maitre de la maison est dans une 
grande chambre. II entre dans le salon. 

II veut sonner. II cherche la sonnette. 

II ne trouve pas la sonnette. — 

15 Voulez-vous 1 chercher les enfants? — 

Je cherche les enfants. Je trouve les 
petites filles, mais je ne peux pas trouver les petits gargons. 
— Est-ce que les petites filles ne sont pas dans la. salle a 
manger? — Non, elles sont dans la cour devant la maison. 



II sonne 


1 Voulez-vous? = do you wish? or will you? 
































LEgON VI 


47 


§58] 


58. Resume. Petits gargons; grande fille; petite fille; 
cherche; veut entrer; ferme; ne peut pas; maitre; entre; 
sonner; chercher les enfants; je trouve, ou? 


59. Oral Drill. 1 . You give. 2. You don’t speak. 

3. Sing! 4. We give. 5. We don’t teach. 6. Don’t 
pronounce! 7. They seek. 8. They don’t close the door. 
9. She eats. 10. She doesn’t giv£. 11. Does she ring? 
12. Does she not teach? 13. Do you pronounce? 14. Don’t 
you sing? 15. Do I eat? 16. Do I not ring? 17. He can 
play. 18. Can he find? 19. Can she not give? 20. She can¬ 
not speak. 21. Do you wish? 22. We wish. 23. Does he 
wish? 24. He wishes. 25. He does not wish to give the 
ink. 26. Does she not wish to give the papers? 27. Eat! 
28. Don’t eat! 29. Enter the school! 30. Don’t enter the 
house! 31. Do you enter the room? 32. You do not enter 
the living-room. 33. Close the windows! 34. Don’t shut 
the door of the house! 35. Ring the bell! 36. Do they ring 
the bell? 37. Do you not want the ink? 38. I want the ink. 
39. Give the ink to the boys! 




60. DIALOGUE 


1. Do you wish to enter the 

house? 

2 . I wish to enter the house, 

and the little boy does 
not wish to ring 

3. Will you close the door? 

4. I do not wish to close the 

door; the little girl wishes 
to enter the room 

5. Where is the master of the 

bouse? 


Voulez-vous 1 2 3 4 5 entrer dans la mai- 
son? 

Je veux entrer dans la maison, 
et le petit gar g on ne veut 
pas sonner 

Voulez-vous fermer la porte? 

Je ne veux pas fermer la porte; 
la petite fille veut entrer dans 
la chambre 

Oft est le maitre de la maison? 


1 See p. 46, note 1. 


48 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 61 


6. He is not in the living-room, 

he is in the dining-room 

7. Will you not enter the din¬ 

ing-room? 

8. No, I do not wish to eat 

9. Where are the children? 

10. The children are not in the 

house 

11. Will you look for the little 

boy and the little girl? 
They are in front of the 
house 

12. I cannot find the little girl 

13. Is she not in the living- 

room? Look! Ring! 

14. Can’t you find the bell? 

15. I cannot find the bell 


II n’est pas dans le salon, il esit 
dans la salle a manger 

Ne voulez-vous pas entrer dans 
la salle a manger? 

Non, je ne veux pas manger 

Oh sont les enfants? 

Les enfants ne sont pas dans la 
maison 

Voulez-vous chercher le petit gar- 
£on et la petite fille? Ils sont 
devant la maison 

Je ne peux pas trouver la petite 
fille 

Est-ce qu’elle n’est pas dans le 
salon? Cherchez! Sonnez! 

Ne pouvez-vous pas trouver la 
sonnette? 

Je ne peux pas trouver la sonnette 


61. Conversation {answer in the negative). 1. Are the 
little boys and the little girls in the yard? 2. Is the little 
girl in the house? 3. Does she close the door of the dining¬ 
room? 4. Can you enter the house? 5. Can we find the 
bell? 6. Do you wish to enter the room? 7. Does he wish 
to look for the children? 8. Does he find the little girls? 
9. Are they not in the dining-room? 10. Can you not find 
the bell on the table? 

62. Theme. We do not find the little children.. They are 
playing in the yard. Are the girls not entering the house? 
The little girls are in the living-room, and the little boys are 
in the dining-room. Ring! Do you not wish to ring? You 

5 cannot close the door; find the bell, ring! The school¬ 
master can close the door. Do you not wish to eat? Enter 
the dining-room! We do not wish to enter the dining-room; 
we wish to look for the little boys and the little girls in the 
yard in front of the house. Can you not find the children? 


§63] 


LEQON VII 


49 


63. Exercises. A. Conjugate: 

I do not enter the house. Do I not close the door? J 

B. Translate: We do not give; do they (/.) not give?; you 
do not give; do I not give?; she does not give. Replace give 
by close, ring, teach. 

C. One student asks questions (using § 57 as a basis); an¬ 
other answers in the negative. 

D. Verb Drill on fermer, sonner, enseigner in the nega¬ 
tive: § 480, A. 


7. SEPTlfiME LEQON [setjem] 


LA MAISON 


i 


64. Present Indicative of 

I have, etc. 
j’ai fee] 

(tu as [ty a]) 
il a [il a] 

nous avons [nu zavo] 
vous avez [vu zave] 
ils ont [il z5] 


avoir [avwair], to have . 

I have not, etc. 
je n’ai pas fea ne pa] 

(tu n’as pas [ty na pa]) 
il n’a pas [il na pa] 

nous n’avons pas [nu nava pa] 
vous n’avez pas [vu nave pa] 
ils n’ont pas [il n5 pa] 


65. Relative Pronoun (Persons and Things) 

Subject qui [ki] Object que 1 [ko] 

L’enfant qui est ici est petit, The child who is here is small 
L’enfant que vous cherchez est petit, The child whom you seek is small 
La maison qui est ici est petite, The house that (which) is here is small 
La maison que vous cherchez est petite, The house that (which) you 
seek is small 

66. Il y a [il ja \ = there is, there are; voila [vwala] = there 
is! , there are! 

1 For elision, see Introduction, § 56: L’enfant qu il cherche. 


50 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 67 


II y a un livre sur la table, There is a book on the table {statement oj 
fact ) 

Voila un livre sur la table! There is a book on the table! {pointing out 
object; exclamation ) 

Voila les livres que je veux! There are the books that I want! 


VOCABULARY 


67. 

la bonne [bon], maid 
la chaise [$e:z], chair 
la chambre a coucher [$a:br a 
ku§e], bed-room 
la cuisine [kyizin], kitchen 
la cuisiniere [kyizinjeir], cook 
dejeuner [de 3 cene], to breakfast 
diner [dine], to dine 


en bas [a ba], downstairs 
en haut [a o], upstairs 
l’escalier [leskalje] (ra.), stairs 
ici [isi], here 
Jean [ 3 d], John 
la [la], there 

monter [mote], to mount, go up 
tres [tre], very 


DRILL 


68 . 

1. The book which I have 

2. The house which is here 

3. The rooms which they have 

4. The child who is down¬ 

stairs 

5. Have we a small house? 

6. You have not a large house 

7. Have you a small table? 

8. The table which I have is 

large 

9. Has he a chair? 

10. He has no bench 

11. Have they no bed-room? 

12. They have a bed-room 

13. Have you a room upstairs? 

14. I have a room downstairs 

15. Is there a boy here? 


Le livre que j’ai 
La maison qui est ici 
Les chambres qu’ils ont 
L’enfant qui est en bas 

Avons-nous une petite maison? 
Vous n’avez pas une grande mai¬ 
son 

Est-ce que vous avez une petite 
table? 

La table que j’ai est grande 

Est-ce qu’il a une chaise? 

II n’a pas de banc 
N’ont-ils pas de chambre & 
coucher? 1 

Ils ont une chambre a coucher 
Avez-vous une chambre en haut? 
J’ai une chambre en bas 
Est-ce qu’il y a un gargon ici? 


1 No = pas de (with ne before the verb). 


LEgON VII 


51 


§69] 


16. There is a boy here 

17. Is there a pen here? 

18. There are the pens! 


II y a un garjon ici 

Est-ce qu’il y a une plume ici? 

Voila les plumes! 

Est-ce que la bonne a une chaise? 
Elle n’a pas de chaise 


19. Has the maid a chair? 

20. She has no chair 


69. Reading. Nous avons une grande maison. II y a 
une sonnette a la porte. Sonnezl J’ai une chambre en 
haut qui est tres petite, et Jean a une chambre en bas devant 



Voila la bonne qui monte Pescalier! 

la salle a manger. Les enfants dinent dans la petite chambre. 

La bonne dine la aussi. Nous dinons ici dans la salle a 5 
manger qui est tres grande, et la cuisiniere dine dans la 
cuisine. Voila la bonne qui monte Pescalier! Elle n’a pas 
une grande chambre . 1 La chambre qu’elle a est en haut 
devant les chambres a coucher des enfants. Elle cherche le 
petit gargon qui est en haut et qui ne veut pas dejeuner. II 10 
y a un grand escalier devant le salon, et il y a un petit esca- 
lier devant la cuisine. Montez Pescalier et entrez dans la 
petite chambre qui est la! Le livre que vous cherchez est 
sur la table. II y a un livre aussi sur le banc qui est devant 
la fenetre. Fermez la fen^tre et la porte aussi! 15 

1 Translate not a. What would Elle n’a pas de chambre be? See p. 50, 
note. 




























52 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 70 


70. Resume. Grande maison; sonnette; petite chambre; 
Jean; enfants dinent; bonne; dinons; cuisiniere; bonne 
monte; chambre qu’elle a; cherche; grand escalier, petit 
escalier; montez, entrez; livre; fermez! 

71. Oral Drill. 1. Has he? 2. Has he not? 3. He has 
not. 4. We have. 5. We have not. 6. You have not. 
7. They have. 8. She has not. 9. Has she not? 10. Have 
you not? 11. Have we not? 12. I have. 13. I have not. 
14. They have not. 15. Have I not? 16. Has he? 17. Has 
she not? 18. She has. 19. Have we? 20. We have not. 
21. Have you? 22. Have you not? 23. You have not. 
24. There is. 25. Is there? 26. Are there? 27. There are. 
28. There’s the book! 29. The book which they have. 
30. There are the books on the table! 31. The books which 
we have are upstairs. 32. There are the boys in the kitchen! 
33. The boys who are breakfasting here are in the dining¬ 
room. 34. Can you find the book that you are looking for? 
35. There is the table! 36. Look for the boys whom you 
wish to find. 37. We have no book (see p. 50, Note). 

ii 


DIALOGUE 


72. 

1. Have you a large house? 

2. We have a very large house 

3. Is there a large living-room 

in the house? 

4. Yes, there is a living-room 

which is very large 

5. Where is the kitchen? 

6. There is the kitchen which 

you are looking for! 

7. And where is the dining¬ 

room? 

8. Here. Do you wish to dine? 


Avez-vous une grande maison? 

Nous avons une tres grande mai¬ 
son 

Est-ce qu’il y a un grand salon 
dans la maison? 

Oui, il y a un salon qui est tres 
grand 

Ofi est la cuisine? 

Voila la cuisine que vous cherchez! 

Et ob est la salle a manger? 


Ici. Voulez-vous diner? 


LE£ON VII 


53 


§ 73] 


9. Yes, I wish to dine 

10. Enter! There is the table 

in front of the window! 
Can you find a chair? 

11. There is no chair here. 

Here is a very large chair! 

12. There is a little chair! The 

chair that you have is the 
chair of the cook 

13. Where are the cook and the 

maid? Are they upstairs? 

14. The cook is in the bed-room 

upstairs 

15. And where is the maid? Is 

she not here? 

16. No. There is the maid who 

is going up the stairs, 
there in front of the 
kitchen! 

17. Has she a French book? 

18. The book that she has is 

German 


Oui, je veux diner 

Entrez! Voila la table devant la 
fenetre! Pouvez-vous trouver 
une chaise? 

II n’y a pas de 1 chaise ici. Voici 
une tres grande chaise! 

Voila une petite chaise! La chaise 
que vous avez est la chaise de 
la cusiniere 

Oh sont la cuisiniere et la bonne? 
Sont-elles en haut? 

La cuisiniere est dans la chambre 
a coucher en haut 

Et oh est la bonne? Est-ce qu’elle 
n’est pas ici? 

Non. Voila la bonne qui monte 
l’escalier, la devant la cuisine! 

Est-ce qu’elle a un livre frangais? 

Le livre qu’elle a est allemand 


73. Conversation. 1. Where is the dining-room? 

2. Does the maid go upstairs? 3. Does she go up the 
stairs? 4. Does the little boy wish to eat? 5. Do you 
enter the room of the children? 6. Where is the book that 
I wish? 7. Is there a book on the chair? 8. Where is the 
bench? 9. Do we not close the doors? 10. Where is the 
boy who closes the windows of the class-room? 

74. Theme. There is a small chair in the bed-room 
which is upstairs and a very large table in the dining-room 
which is downstairs. The maid who is in the bed-room is 
German; the cook who is in the kitchen is French. The 
children who breakfast and dine in the dining-room go up 5 
the stairs to the bed-room where they play. The maid does 
not dine in the bed-room, she dines in the kitchen. The 

i See p. 50, note. 


54 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 75 

cook, whom you are looking for, dines there also. The little 
boys and the little girls, whom I am looking for, do not play 
in the kitchen. 

75. Exercises. A. Drill on present indicative of avoir: 
§ 480, A, first positive, then negative. 

B. Finish the following sentences: 

La bonne qui ... La maison qui . . . 

La bonne que . . . La maison que . . . 


8. HUITLliME LEgON [yitjsm] 


LE 

76. Irregular Feminine 

JARDIN 

1 

Adjectives: 



beautiful 

good 

which? what? 

Masc. 

beau 1 [bo] 

bon [bo] 

quel? 2 [kel] 

Fem. 

belle [bel] 

bonne [bon] 

quelle? [kel] 


old 


white 


Masc. vieux [vjo] blanc [bid] 

Fem. vieille [vjerj] blanche [blfi:$] 


77. Present Indicative of Second Conjugation (verbs 
ending in -ir in the infinitive): finir [finiir], to finish . 3 

je fin is [fini], I finish 
(tu fin is [fini], thou finishest) 
il fin it [fini], he finishes 

nous fin issons [finiso], we finish 
vous fin issez [finise], you finish 
ils fin issent [finis], they finish 

1 The plural of beau is beaux. 

2 Used only before nouns; not for which or what standing alone. 

3 All regular verbs ending in -ir are conjugated like finir. 


§78] 


LEQON VIII 


55 


78 VOCABULARY 


choisir [$wazi:r], to choose 
la fleur [flce:r], flower 
l’herbe [lerb] (/.), grass 
le jardin foarde], garden 
mais [me], but 
Pceillet [lceje] (m.), pink 


pousser [puse], to grow 
la rose [ro:z], rose 
saisir [sezirr], to seize 
le travail [trava:j], work 
la tulipe [tylip], tulip 


79. DRILL 


1. Which garden? which gar¬ 

dens? 

2. Which rose? which roses? 

3. The beautiful rose; the beau¬ 

tiful garden 

4. The white pink; the white 

rose 

5. A good master; a good mis¬ 

tress 

6. What masters? what mis¬ 

tresses? 

7. The old master; the old mis¬ 

tress 

8. We finish; I finish 

9. He finishes; they finish 

10. You finish; you don't finish 

11. He seizes; they seize 

12. Seize! do not seize! 

13. Are you finishing? finish! 

14. What house? the old house 

15. Which boys? which girls? 

16. Find the flower! which 

flower? 

17. Which tulip? the beautiful 

tulip 

18. What flowers do you choose? 

19. We choose the white tulips 

20. Finish the lesson! 


Quel jardin? quels jardins? 

Quelle rose? quelles roses? 

La belle rose; le beau jardin 

L’oeillet blanc; la rose blanche 

Un bon maitre; une bonne mai= 
tresse 

Quels maitres? quelles mat¬ 
tresses? 

Le vieux maitre; la vieille mai- 
tresse 

Nous finissons; je finis 
II finit; ils finissent 
Vous finissez; vous ne finissez pas 
II saisit; ils saisissent 
Saisissez! ne saisissez pas! 
Finissez-vous? finissez! 

Quelle maison? la vieille maison 
Quels gargons? quelles filles? 
Trouvez la fleur! quelle fleur? 

Quelle tulipe? la belle tulipe 

Quelles fleurs choisissez-vous? 
Nous choisissons les tulipes 
blanches 
Finissez la lefon! 


56 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 80 



Elle donne uno rose blanche a la petite fille 
















§80] 


LEgON VIII 


57 


80. Reading. La bonne vieille maitresse de la maison et 
la petite fille finissent le travail qui n’est pas difficile. La 
maitresse entre dans le jardin qui est devant la maison. Les 
enfants qu’elle cherche entrent dans le jardin aussi. Elle 
donne une rose blanche a la petite fille et un oeillet blanc au 5 
petit gargon. La bonne vieille maitresse n’est pas belle, 
mais le bon vieux maitre est beau. II entre dans le jardin. 
Les enfants finissent le travail qu’il donne. Ils entrent dans 

le jardin. Ils choisissent les fleurs qui poussent dans le 
jardin. Ils donnent les tulipes rouges au bon vieux maitre 10 
et les roses blanches a la bonne cuisiniere qui n’entre pas 
dans le jardin. Ils choisissent les fleurs qui poussent dans 
Fherbe verte. Ils ferment la porte du jardin et ils entrent 
dans la salle a manger. La cuisiniere finit le travail dans 
la salle a manger. Le petit gargon cherche la sonnette. II 15 
ne peut pas trouver la sonnette. La petite fille trouve la 
sonnette. Elle sonne. La bonne entre. Elle saisit le petit 
gargon. Voulez-vous entrer dans la chambre a coucher? 

— Non, nous voulons manger. — Yous ne pouvez pas 
manger. Fermez la porte! Voila le vieux maitre qui cherche 20 
un petit gargon et une petite fille! 

81. Resume. Finissent le travail; entre dans le jardin; 
enfants aussi; donne rose blanche, oeillet blanc; belle, beau; 
enfants finissent; jardin; fleurs qui; donnent tulipes, roses; 
fleurs, herbe; ferment; entrent; cuisiniere; gargon. 

82. Oral Drill. 1. Which work? 2. The good work. 

3. Which flowers? 4. The beautiful flowers. 5. Is the boy 
good? 6 . The girl is good. 7. The beautiful garden. 

8 . The beautiful girl. 9. Does he finish the lesson? 10. He 
does not finish the lesson. 11. Find the master! 12. Which 
master? 13. The old master. 14. Seek the good mistress! 

15. Which mistress? 16. The old mistress. 17. Choose a 
flower. 18. I choose a white pink. 19. Which roses do you 


58 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 83 

choose? 20. I choose the white roses. 21. Do you finish 
the work? 22. We finish the work. 23. Do they finish the 
lessons? 24. They do not finish the lessons. 25. Do not 
finish the work! 


DIALOGUE 


ii 

83. 

1. Which garden are you look¬ 

ing for? 

2. I am looking for the garden 

which is in front of the 
white house. Is there a 
door here? 

3. There is the door! You can 

enter the garden 

4. What is the flower that you 

have? 

5. The flower that I have is a 

pink. It is very beauti¬ 
ful; it is white 

6. What flowers do you choose? 

7. I choose the black tulips. 

Is there no black tulip 
in this beautiful garden? 

8. No, choose the roses! They 

are very beautiful. They 
do not grow in the green 
grass, but they grow in 
front of the stairs. Will 
you enter the house? 

9. I do not wish to enter the 

house; the school-master 
is there. Does he dine 
there? 

10. Yes, and he is not very good, 
but the school-mistress is 
very good 


Quel jardin cherchez-vous? 

Je cherche le jardin qui est de~ 
vant la maison blanche. Est-ce 
qu’il y a une porte ici? 

Voila la porte! Vous pouvez 
entrer dans le jardin 

Quelle est la fleur que vous avez? 

La fleur que j’ai est un ceillet. II 
est tres beau; il est blanc 

Quelles fleurs choisissez-vous? 

Je choisis les tulipes noires. Est- 
ce qu’il n’y a pas de tulipe 
noire dans ce beau jardin? 

Non, choisissez les roses! Elies 
sont tres belles. Elies ne 
poussent pas dans l’herbe 
verte, mais elles poussent 
devant l’escalier. Voulez-vous 
entrer dans la maison? 

Je ne veux pas entrer dans la 
maison; le maitre d’ecole est 
la. Est-ce qu’il dine la? 

Oui, et il n’est pas tres bon, mais 
la maitresse d’ecole est tres 
bonne 


§84] 


LE£ON VIII 


59 


11. Is he old? Est-ce qu’il est vieux? 

12. He is very old, but she is II est tres vieux, mais elle n’est 

not very old pas tres vieille 

84. Conversation. 1 . Do you not finish the work which 
I give? 2. Where are the children? 3. Do you give the 
beautiful flowers to the boy? 4. Where do the white roses 
grow? 5. Are the roses that grow in front of the house white? 

6 . What flowers do you choose? 7. Where is the bell? 

8 . Can’t you find the bell? 9. Do you not close the door of 
the dining-room? 10. Which pupils finish the work? 

85. Theme. The children finish the work which the good 
old school-mistress gives. They enter the garden. They 
play. They look for the flowers which are growing there. 
What flowers are you looking for? We are looking for the 
white flowers. There are the white flowers! They are very 5 
beautiful. Do you choose the pinks? No, we choose the 
tulips; where are they? They are in the old garden in front 
of the house. Which house? The white house which is 
there in front of you. Can you find the door? There is a 
bell there. Ring! The roses do not grow in the green grass, 10 
but the pinks grow there. 

86. Exercises. A. Use the definite article and the 
correct form of ‘beautiful/ ‘good/ ‘old/ ‘white/ with the 
following words: ‘house/ ‘book/ ‘chair/ ‘pencil.’ 

B. Drill on present indicative of finir, choisir, saisir: § 480, 

A, first positive, then negative, then interrogative. 

C. Conjugate: 

I seize the old book. I do not choose the white flower. 

What lesson do I finish? Do I not choose the beautiful 

flowers? 


60 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 87 


9. NEUVIJ&ME LECON [nosvjem] 

LA FAMILLE 


I 


87. 

Possessive Adjectives: 




my 

his, her, its our 

your 

their 

Masc. 

mon [mo] 1 

son [so] notre [notr] 

votre [votr] 

leur [lce:r] 

Fern. 

ma [ma] 

sa [sa] notre [notr] 

votre [votr] 

leur [lceir] 

PI. 

mes [me] 

ses [se] nos [no] 

vos [vo] 

leurs [loe:r 


88. Note that these words agree with the nouns following 
them: son livre, his or her hook ; sa plume, his or her yen; 
ses plumes, his or her yens. 


89. Possession. The French have no form correspond' 
ing to John’s, the maid’s; they say of John, of the maid. 

le livre de Jean (the book of John), John's book 

la chambre de la bonne (the room of the maid), the maid’s room 


VOCABULARY 


90. 

I’ami [lami] (m.), friend 
avec [avek], with 
le cousin [kuze], la cousine [ku- 
zin], cousin 

la famille [famiij], family 
la femme [fam], woman, wife 
la fille [fkj], daughter 
le fils [fis], son 
le frere [fre:r], brother 
le mari fmari], husband 

91. 


Marie [mari], Mary 
la mere [me:r], mother 
l’oncle [loxkl], uncle 
ou [u], or 

le parent [para], relative 

le pere [pe:r], father 

Pierre [pje:r], Peter 

la sceur [sceir], sister 

la tante [ta:t], aunt 

tout (m. pi. tous) [tu], all, every 


DRILL 


1. His daughter or my daugh¬ 

ter 

2. Her son and our son 

3. His father and your brother 


Sa fille ou ma fille 

Son fils et notre fils 
Son pere et votre frere 


1 Thy is ton [to], ta [ta], tes [te]. 


§ 92 ] 


LEgON IX 


61 


4. Her father or her mother 

5. His relatives or his mother 

6. Our brothers and your sis¬ 

ters 

7. My aunt and Peter’s sisters 

8. Mary’s sisters and my uncles 

9. Our relatives and your aunts 

10. Your sons or our son 

11. There’s their cousin! 

12. There’s her husband! 

13. Where are my sisters? 

14. There’s Mary’s rose! 

15. Where is Mary’s cousin (/.)? 

16. There’s Peter’s wife! 

17. Where are their relatives? 

18. There is your family! 

19. All my sons; all the ink 

20. All the paper; all your 

daughters 


Son pere ou sa mere 
Ses parents ou sa mere 
Nos freres et vos soeurs 

Ma tante et les soeurs de Pierre 
Les soeurs de Marie et mes oncles 
Nos parents et vos tantes 
Vos fils ou notre fils 
Voila leur cousin! 

Voila son mari! 

Oft sont mes soeurs? 

Voila la rose de Marie! 

Oil est la cousine de Marie? 

Voila la femme de Pierre! 

Ofi sont leurs parents? 

Voila votre famille! 

Tous mes fils; toute l’encre 
Tout le papier; toutes vos filles 


92. Reading. Voila ma maison et mon jardin! Entrez, 
mes amis! Voila mon frere et sa femme dans le jardin avec 



Voil4 ma maison et mon jardin 


leurs enfants! Ils ont une tres belle fille. Leur fils, qui joue 
la dans l’herbe, est l’ami de mes fils. Ils jouent avec leur 
petit cousin. Leur cousine Marie cherche une belle rose 
blanche. Son petit frere Pierre est la aussi. II cherche un 




















62 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§C3 

oeillet blanc. Pierre et sa soeur ne trouvent pas la rose 
blanche et le petit oeillet blanc. Tous mes ceilletsettoutesmes 
roses sont rouges. Voila Pierre qui choisit une fleur! Sa 
soeur choisit une fleur aussi. La rose de Marie est tres belle 
et F oeillet de Pierre est tres beau aussi. II y a un grand 
banc dans le jardin devant la maison. Toute notre famille 
est la devant l’escalier, mon bon pere, ma bonne mere, 
notre oncle et ses enfants, et mes bonnes vieilles tantes. 
Devant le banc, dans Fherbe verte ou poussent les belles 
tulipes, sont leurs fils et leurs filles, tous nos petits cousins 
et toutes nos petites cousines. Votre femme, vos fils et nos 
filles sont la aussi. Marie donne sa fleur a votre femme, et 
Pierre donne son oeillet k une de vos filles. 

93. Resume. Voila; entrez; frere et . . .; fille, fils . . . 
ami; jouent avec; Marie; Pierre; cherche; ne trouvent pas; 
ceillets; roses; choisit; soeur; banc; famille; poussent; Marie 
donne; Pierre donne. 

94. Oral Drill. 1. Your son and my daughter. 2. His 
mother; her father. 3. Her brother; his sister. 4. His aunt; 
her uncles and my mother. 5. Her uncle; his aunts and 
their father. 6. Our son and his sisters. 7. Her husband 
and his daughter. 8. His wife and her father. 9. Your 
aunts and their cousins. 10. Where is Peter’s brother? 
11. Is Mary’s husband in the garden? 12. Are your cousins 
and their sisters in the house? 13. Do your friends dine with 
their relatives? 

ii 

95. DIALOGUE 

1. Where are your children? Ou sont vos enfants? 

2. One of my sons is here. He Un de mes fils est ici. H joue 

is playing with his sister avec sa soeur devant ma maison 
in front of my house 

3. Where is your son Peter? 


Ofi est votre fils Pierre? 


§ 96] 


LEgON IX 


63 


4. He is in your garden with 

his cousin Mary * 

5. The little girl there, on the 

bench, is she his cousin? 

6. Yes, Mary is the daughter 

of my sister 

7. Does your little Peter look 

for a flower in our garden? 

8. Yes, he wants to give a red 

rose to his cousin Mary 

9. I have no red rose in my 

garden 

10. Are your tulips and your 

pinks red? 

11. My tulips are not blue, all 

my pinks are red and all 
my roses are white 

12. Mary, do you want a white 

rose? 

13. Yes, my friend, your white 

roses are very beautiful 

14. Do you wish to give your 

flowers to our aunts or to 
their friends? 

15. I want to give my flowers 

to my mother 

16. There are all my pinks and 

all my roses. Choose! 

17. I choose one of your beau¬ 

tiful roses and one of 
your beautiful pinks. I 
have Peter’s beautiful red 
flower here 


II est dans votre jardin avec sa 
cousine Marie 

La petite fille la, sur le banc, 
est-elle sa cousine? 

Oui, Marie est la fille de ma soeur 

Est-ce que votre petit Pierre 
cherche une fieur dans notre 
jardin? 

Oui, il veut donner une rose rouge 
a sa cousine Marie 

Je n’ai pas de rose rouge dans 
mon jardin 

Est-ce que vos tulipes et vos 
ceillets sont rouges? 

Mes tulipes ne sont pas bleues, 
tous mes oeillets sont rouges et 
toutes mes roses sont blanches 

Marie! voulez-vous une rose 
blanche? g 

Oui, mon ami, vos roses blanches 
sont tres belles 

Voulez-vous donner vos fleurs a 
nos tantes ou a leurs amis? 

Je veux donner mes fleurs a ma 
mere 

Voila tous mes ceillets et toutes 
mes roses. Choisissez! 

Je choisis une de vos belles roses 
et un de vos beaux ceillets. 
J’ai la belle fleur rouge de 
Pierre ici 


96. Conversation. 1. Where are your old friends? 
2. Where are their children? 3. Do your sons play with my 
son? 4. Does their cousin play with my little boys? 5. Is 


64 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


]§97 

my cousin with her husband in the garden? 6. Have they 
all my pinks or all your roses? 7. Are there no beautiful 
flowers in your brother’s garden? 8. Is there a beautiful 
white tulip in her garden? 9. Where are my sister’s children? 
10. Where do his sister’s sons and daughters play? 

97. Theme. No, my cousin John is not my uncle’s son, 
he is my aunt’s son. My cousin Mary is my uncle’s daughter. 
My uncle Peter is not Mary’s mother’s husband; Mary and 
John are not brother and sister. My father’s family is very 

5 large; all his relatives are here in our house; his brother and 
his brother’s wife are here with all their children. All my 
cousins (m.) are not handsome (see § 76, note*l), but all 
my cousins (/.) are beautiful. Have you a large family also? 

98. Exercises. A. Put the adjectives our, my, your, his, 
their, her, first singular, then plural, before the following: 

cousin (/.) friend daughter son aunt uncle 

B. Use the following words in sentences: 

all relative with or father mother 


10. DIXlfiME LECON [dizjem] 

Review 

i 

99. 1. Finish your lessons! 2. Don’t enter my house! 
3. Have you her flower? 4. We have not his pen. 5. We 
enter their house. 6. They find our house. 7. Shut the 
door! 8. I shut the door. 9. Which garden do you seek? 
10. We seek his garden. 11. Does she finish her work? 
12. We do not finish our work. 13. Which books do 
you choose? 14. I choose your books. 15. Have you not 


§ 100 ] 


LEQON X 


65 


my pen? 16. I have your pencil. 17. Have you John's 
chair? 18. John’s wife has my chair. 19. Give my daughter 
your rose! 20. We give our roses to your sons. 21. Has 
her husband a brother? 22. I have a sister. 23. Has she 
not his pen? 24. We have no pencil. 25. They have your 
copy-books. 26. Give our books to the boys! 27. We have 
not his pens. 28. Have you no flowers? 29. They have 
her flowers. 30. There is a rose! 31. There is a bell in my 
room. 32. Finish the work! 33. Do not finish your work! 
34. They have a beautiful house. 35. His mother and her 
sisters are looking for our aunt. 

ii 

100 . 1 . Choose one of our beautiful flowers! 2. Which 
rose does John’s brother wish? 3. There is an old chair in 
her kitchen or in her living-room. 4. His good old aunt is 
finishing our work. 5. There are my blue flowers; there is 
your beautiful little pink! 6. Which French books have your 
friends? 7. Have you not my sister’s pencils? 8. Does her 
father choose the house which I wish? 9. Mary’s relatives 
do not finish the books which are not English. 10. Finish 
the lesson which you have! 11. Do not give my good pens 
to your sisters! 12. I am giving their old copy-books to my 
pupils. 13. His uncles are finishing their work. 14. Is the 
good old school-master her uncle or her father? 15. Is 
there a dining-room in front of their kitchen? 16. Do you 
close the door of your house? 17. Where are our children? 
18. There are your sons with my daughters! 19. There is 
a good pen on his mother’s table. 20. In which room of her 
house has she her books? 21. Ring, or look for my maid! 
22. There is a cook in the kitchen of their house. 23. In 
what house? 24. There’s the house! 25. Enter the dining- 
room! 


66 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 101 


11. ONZlfiME LECON [ozjem] 

LA FAMILLE 

I 

101. Present Indicative of Third Conjugation (verbs 
ending in -re in the infinitive): vendre 1 [vaidr], to sell. 

je vend s [va], I sell 
(tu vend s [va], thou sellest) 
il vend 9 [va], he sells 

nous vend ons [vad5], we sell 
vous vend ez [vade], you sell 
ils vend ent [va:d], they sell 

102. Interrogative Pronoun (Persons) = qui? whof whom? 

Qui est la? Who is there? 

Qui cherchez-vous? Whom are you looking for? 

A qui parlez-vous? To whom are you speaking? 


VOCABULARY 


103. 

le batiment [batima], building 
batir [batiir], to build 
le chapeau (pi. chapeaux) [$apo], 
hat 

descendre [desaidr], to go down 
deux [do], two 


entendre [ataidr], to hear 
frapper [frape], to knock, strike 
mettre [metr], to put, put on 
il met [me], he puts (irregular) 
rencontrer [rakotre], to meet 
la rue [ry], street 


104. DRILL 

1 . Who goes down? I go Qui descend? je descends 

down 

2. Do you hear? we hear Entendez-vous? nous entendons 

3. Do they put? you put Mettent-ils? vous mettez 

1 Regular verbs ending in -re are conjugated like vendre. 

2 If the consonant preceding the ending -re of the infinite of verbs of the 
third conjugation is not d or t, a t (which does not affect the pronunciation) 
is added in the third person singular: rompre [ro:pr], to break; il rompt [ro], 

he breaks. 


§ 105] 


LEgON XI 


67 


4. Who sells? they sell 

5. Whom do you meet? 

6 . I don’t hear; she hears 

7. He does not build; we build 

8 . Go down! don’t go down! 

9. They put; we put 

10. She goes down; she builds 

11. To whom do you speak? 

12 . Whom are you looking for? 

13. There is the boy whom they 

meet! 

14. Who meets his friends? 

15. To whom does he sell his 

building? 

16. To the friends who build 

17. We go up; you go down 

18. Choose a good hat! 

19. The hats we choose are beau¬ 

tiful 

20. What books does he sell? 


Qui vend? ils vendent 
Qui rencontrez-vous? 

Je n’entends pas; elle entend 
II ne batit pas; nous batissons 
Descendez! ne descendez pas! 

Ils mettent; nous mettons 
Elle descend; elle batit 
A qui parlez-vous? 

Qui cherchez-vous? 

Voila le garfon qu’ils rencontrent 

Qui rencontre ses amis? 

A qui vend-il [vd til] son batiment? 

Aux amis qui batissent 
Nous montons; vous descendez 
Choisissez un bon chapeau! 

Les chapeaux que nous choisis- 
sons sont beaux 
Quels livres est-ce qu’il vend? 


105. Reading. Le pere entend la petite fille qui frappe a 
la porte de sa chambre. Elle rencontre son pere. Son pere 
et elle saisissent leurs chapeaux. Ils mettent leurs chapeaux. 

Ils descendent l’escalier. Ils entrent dans le beau jardin. 

Ils choisissent toutes les belles fleurs qu’ils rencontrent dans 5 
1’herbe verte. Ils montent l’escalier. Ils ferment la porte. 

La mere de la petite fille n’est pas dans la maison, mais son 
frere est la. Elle rencontre sa soeur aussi. Le frere et la 
soeur descendent l’escalier avec leur pere. Ils sont dans la rue. 

La rue est belle. II y a un beau batiment la. Le beau batiment 10 
est une ecole. Les enfants batissent une belle maison dans 
leur jardin. Le gargon monte en haut chercher un ami. II 
descend avec son ami et la soeur de son ami. Voila deux 
gargons et deux filles! Ils jouent. La bonne cherche les 
enfants. Elle ne peut pas trouver Pierre et Marie qu’elle 15 
entend, mais qui ne sont pas dans le jardin. Ou sont-ils? 


68 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 106 


Ils sont dans la rue. N’entendez-vous pas Pierre qui parle a 
Marie? Voila le beau batiment qu’ils cherchent! La vieille 
tante d’un des enfants vend les fleurs qui sont devant la 
20 porte du beau batiment. 

106. Resume. Pereentend; rencontre; chapeaux ;mettent; 
escalier; jardin; fleurs; montent; mere, frere; descendent; 
rue; batiment; enfants, maison; monte; descend; jouent; 
bonne; Pierre, Marie; batiment; tante. 

107. Oral Drill. 1. He hears. 2. We hear. 3. You don’t 
meet. 4. Go down! 5. Don’t build! 6. Choose! 7. Don’t 
go down! 8. Which boys do you meet? 9. What lesson do 
you choose? 10. Do not build a house! 11. She sells the 
pens. 12. He meets a friend. 13. Are you building a large 
house? 14. I am building a little house. 15. Which house? 
16. The little building which is in her garden. 17. The 
buildings which they sell. 18. To whom do you sell the 
hats? 19. Whom do you choose? 


DIALOGUE 


108. 

1. Whom do you hear? Who 

is knocking at my door? 

2. Your friend Peter 

3. Whom are you looking for? 

4. I am looking for my sister 

and my brother 

5. With whom are they? 

6. They are with my uncle and 

my aunt 

7. Put on your hats, go down 

into the street and meet 
your relatives. I am go¬ 
ing down with you 


Qui entendez-vous? Qui frappe 
a ma porte? 

Votre ami Pierre 

Qui cherchez-vous? 

Je cherche ma sceur et mon frere 

Avec qui sont-ils? 

Ils sont avec mon oncle et ma 
tante 

Mettez vos chapeaux, descen- 
dez dans la rue et rencontrez 
vos parents! Je descends avec 


vous 


k 109] 


LEgON XI 


69 


8 . There is a fine building! 

Who is selling the flowers 
which are there? 

9. I am selling the flowers. 

Which flowers do you 
choose? 

10. Do you wish to sell all the 

roses which are on the 
bench? 

11 . I wish to sell all the white 

roses, but I do not sell the 
white pinks. Choose! 

12. Good! I choose the white 

roses 

13. The flowers which you 

choose, my friend, are 
very beautiful. There 
are your white roses! 

14. There is a flower there 

which I wish to have 

15. I do not hear. Which flower 

do you wish to have? 

16. I wish to have the beautiful 

flower which is there in 
front of the window. Do 
you hear? 

17. I hear. There are all your 

flowers, my child! 


Voila un beau batiment! Qui 
vend les fleurs qui sont la? 

Je vends les fleurs. Quelles 
fleurs choisissez-vous? 

Est-ce que vous voulez vendre 
toutes les roses qui sont sur le 
banc? 

Je veux vendre toutes les roses 
blanches, mais je ne vends pas 
les ceillets blancs. Choisissez! 

Bon! Jechoisis les roses blanches 

Les fleurs que vous choisissez, 
mon ami, sont tres belles. 
Voila vos roses blanches! 

II y a une fleur la que je veux 
avoir 

Je n’entends pas. Quelle fleur 
voulez-vous avoir? 

Je veux avoir la belle fleur qui est 
la devant la fenetre. Entendez- 
vous? 

J’entends. Voila toutes vos 
fleurs, mon enfant! 


109. Conversation. 1. Whom do you hear at my door? 
2. To whom do you sell the hats? 3. Do you go up or do 
you go down? 4. Where is the little boy’s family? 5. With 
whom does his sister go down the stairs? 6. Who meets 
the little girls? 7. Do her brothers build and sell the houses? 
8. Who builds and sells the beautiful buildings in your 
garden? 9. Do the children hear the boys who play in the 
street? 10. To whom do they sell the two beautiful build- 


70 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ no 


110. Theme. Who sells the ink to the girls? My 
daughters sell the black ink to the girls. To whom do you 
sell your pencils? I sell my pencils to the children. Whom 
is your aunt looking for? She is looking for her son who is 

5 in the garden. Who meets your cousin Mary at the school? 
My brother. Who is going down the stairs into the street? 
My sisters. What work are they finishing? They are finish¬ 
ing the work which my husband gives. Have you no work 
for your sisters? There are your sons! Can’t you find your 
io hats? Where do they put their hats? 

111. Exercises. A. Conjugate: 

I go down the stairs. Do I hear the bell? 

I do not sell the hats. Do I not choose the old hat? 

B. Drill on present indicative of vendre, descendre, 
entendre: § 480, A, first positive, then negative, then inter¬ 
rogative. 

C. Complete the following: ‘who . . .V ‘whom . . .?’ ‘of 
whom . . .?’ A second student answers the questions. 


12 . DOUZlfiME LECON [duzjem] 

LA RUE 


i 


112. Past Participle (endings of the three conjugations): 


I. donn e [done], given 

II. fin i [fini], finished 

III. vend u [vady], sold 


113. Past Indefinite: I have given , I have finished, etc., 
are expressed in French as in English: 


j’ai donne, I have given 
(tu as fini, thou hast finished) 


je n’ai pas donne 
(tu n’as pas fini) 


§ 114] 


LEgON XII 


71 


il a vendu, he has sold il n’a pas vendu 

nous avons bati, we have built nous n’avons pas bati 

vous avez entendu, you have heard vous n’avez pas entendu 

ils ont rencontre, they have met ils n’ont pas rencontre 

This is the most commonly used past tense in French and 
has a double function, corresponding not only to the English 
I have given, etc., but also to the English I gave, etc. 1 


114. VOCABULARY 


le chemin [Some], road 
le coin [kwe], corner 
l’eglise [legliiz] (/.), church 
entre [a:tr], between 
le magasin [magaze], store 
maintenant [mctna], now 
marcher [mar$e], to walk 
le pare [park], park 


perdre [perdr], to lose 
pour [purr], for 

le tramway [tramwe], street-car 
le trottoir [trotwair], sidewalk 
la ville [vil], city 

la voiture [vwatyir], carriage, ve¬ 
hicle, wagon 


115. DRILL 


1. I have given; we have heard 

2. They have finished; he sold 

3. She built; you sought 

4. I taught; she seized 

5. We lost; he sang 

6. You chose 

7. I pronounced; you lost 

8. She walked; we heard 

9. They (/.) met; he knocked 

10. With whom did you build 

the store? 

11. Who spoke French? 

12. Whom did you hear? 

13. To whom did you sell the 

books? 


J’ai donne; nous avons entendu 
Ils ont fini; il a vendu 
Elle a bati; vous avez cherche 
J’ai enseigne; elle a saisi 
Nous avons perdu; il a chante 
Vous avez choisi 
J’ai prononce; vous avez perdu 
Elle a marche; nous avons en~ 
tendu 

Elies ont rencontre; il a frappe 
Avec qui avez-vous bati le maga¬ 
sin? 

Qui a parle frangais? 

Qui avez-vous entendu? 

A qui avez-vous vendu les livres? 


1 The past participle agrees with the direct object when the object precedes 
(see § 362): 

Quelle iefon avez-vous etudiee? What lesson have you studied? 

Bui: J’ai etudie la lefon. I have studied the lesson. 


72 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 116 


14. I sold the books to the boys J’ai vendu les livres aux garfons 

15. Did the children meet their Est-ce que les enfants ont ren- 

friends? contre leurs amis? 

116. Reading. J’ai cherche mes enfants en haut et en 
bas. J’ai rencontre ma petite fille au coin de la rue devant 
l’eglise, mais je n’ai pas trouve mon fils Pierre. Ou est-il 
maintenant? N’a-t-il pas entendu la sonnette? A-t-il 

S monte l’escalier? N’a-t-il pas joue dans le jardin avec sa 
petite sceur Marie? Ou a-t-il joue dans la rue ou dans le 
pare? A-t-il perdu son chemin? A-t-il marche sur le trot- 
toir devant les magasins ou dans la rue entre les tramways 
et les voitures? La ville est tres grande et Pierre est tres 
io petit. Marie! Marie! cherchez votre petit frere! II n’est 
pas dans le jardin. II a descendu l’escalier; il a joue sur le 
trottoir; il a perdu son chemin. — Non, ma mere, Pierre 
n’est pas dans la rue; il a descendu l’escalier et il a joue sur 
le trottoir devant les tramways, mais il n’a pas perdu son 
15 chemin. Notre oncle, qui a bati le grand magasin au coin de 
la rue devant l’eglise, a rencontre mon petit frere. Ils ont 
monte l’escalier. Mon bon oncle est dans le jardin; il n’a 
pas entendu la sonnette. Il a choisi une belle rose blanche 
pour sa femme et un ceillet blanc qu’il a donne a ma cousine 
20 et qu’elle a perdu. Elle perd toutes ses fleurs. Pierre et sa 
cousine sont maintenant dans la salle a manger. Ils ont 
dejeune avec la cuisiniere et la bonne. Nous n’avons pas 
fini nos legons. Pierre et elle ont joue dans le jardin. Ils 
ont marche sur les tulipes. Ils ont chante. Ils ont parle 
25 frangais aussi. Notre oncle est maitre d’ecole et il a enseigne 
le frangais a toute sa famille. J’ai choisi un oeillet blanc, 
tres beau, que j ’ai donne a ma cousine et que Pierre a saisi. 
Marie a frappe Pierre, et Pierre a prononce un mot que je ne 
peux pas et ne veux pas prononcer. 

117. Resume. Cherche; rencontre; ou?; entendu; monte; 
jou6; chemin; trottoir; ville; cherchez!; escalier; perdu; 


§ 117] 


LEgON XII 


73 



J’ai rencontre ma petite fille au coin de la rue devant l’eglise 































































74 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ H8 


non; oncle; jardin; rose; oeillet; salle a manger; cuisiniere; 
Pierre et elle; tulipes; chante; frangais; maitre d’ecole; oeillet; 
saisi; prononce. 

118. Oral Drill. 1 . We have heard. 2. We heard. 

3. Have you walked? 4. He lost. 5. They met. 6. Did 
he not teach? 7. You built. 8. We seized. 9. Has she 
taught? 10. Did you sing? 11. We sang. 12. I have not 
lost. 13. I lost. 14. Did you knock? 15. Did they not 
finish? 16. We knocked. 17. Have you finished? 18. Who 
spoke? 19. You heard. 20. Have you chosen? 21. Did 
you pronounce the French words? 22. I did not pronounce 
the English words. 23. Pronounce the German sentences. 
24. We have not spoken German. 25. Have you spoken 
the French language? 

ii 


DIALOGUE 


119. 

1. Where have you looked for 

your children? 

2. I have looked for my son 

and my daughter in your 
garden 

3. Did you not meet your son 

Peter? 

4. No, I found my daughter, 

but I did not meet my son 

5. Look in the street at the 

corner in front of the old 
church. He played there 
with his cousin Mary 

6. There is the cook who has 

looked for Peter also. 
Have you met my son? 

7. I found your son at the cor¬ 

ner of the street. He is 
with his uncle and his aunt. 


Oh avez-vous cherche vos enfants? 

J’ai cherche mon fils et ma fille 
dans votre jardin 

N’avez-vous pas rencontre votre 
fils Pierre? 

Non, j’ai trouve ma fille, mais je 
n’ai pas rencontre mon fils 

Cherchez dans la rue au coin 
devant la vieille eglise. II a 
joue la avec sa cousine Marie 

Voila la cuisiniere, qui a cherche 
Pierre aussi. Avez-vous ren¬ 
contre mon fils? 

J’ai trouve votre fils au coin de la 
rue. II est avec son oncle et sa 
tante. La bonne vieille tante 


§ 120] 


LEgON XII 


75 


The good old aunt met the 
little boy on the stairs of 
the church. She heard 
Peter and his sister who 
are playing in the street 

8 . I heard the children also 

9. Did they not meet the maid? 

10 . No, she lost her way. She 

looked for the children in 
the park 


a rencontre le petit garfon sur 
l’escalier de Peglise. Elle a 
entendu Pierre et sa soeur qui 
jouent dans la rue 

J’ai entendu les enfants aussi 

N’ont-ils pas rencontre la bonne? 

Non, elle a perdu son chemin. 
Elle a cherche les enfants dans 
le pare 


120 . Conversation. 1 . Did not the mother meet her 
daughter? 2. Did the son meet his mother? 3. Did the boy 
hear the bell in the dining-room? 4. Did he play in the 
street between the carriages and the street-cars? 5. Did the 
children walk on the sidewalks in front of the stores? 6 . Did 
they go down the stairs of the church? 7. Who built the 
large building at the street-corner? 8 . With whom did the 
boy and girl dine? 9. Who taught French to the children? 
10 . Will you pronounce the word which the little boy pro¬ 
nounced? 

121. Theme. Where did you look for the child’s mother? 

I looked for the child’s mother in the church, but I found his 
sister there. She did not meet her mother there. I met 
your two sons in front of the store. What language did 
they speak 1 ? I did not hear. They spoke French; the 5 
school-master taught (the) French to all my family. Did 
you choose French? No, they chose French. Who is the 
woman on the sidewalk in front of the church at the street- 
corner? She is our old cook’s aunt; we met her son in the 
street-car Has she lost her way? No, she is going into the 10 
church 

122. Exercises. A. Conjugate: 

I met my friends. I did not build the church. 

Did I lose my way? Did I not walk on the sidewalk? 


1 See p. 71, footnote 1. 


76 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 123 


B. Drill on past indefinite of rencontrer, batir, entendre: 
§ 480, A. 

C. Use forms of the past indefinite with the following 
words in sentences: 

road corner church between city for now 


13. TREIZlfiME LECON [trezjem] 

LE RESTAURANT [restoraj 

i 

123. Some, adjective (i.e. followed by a noun) =of the. 
Some, object pronoun (i.e. used alone) =en, which is placed 
immediately before the verb. 1 

J’ai des pommes, I have some (i.e. of the) apples 

J’ai de la viande, I have some meat 

yen ai, I have some 

En avez-vous? Have you any? 2 

II n 'en a pas, He has none 2 

124. Some may be omitted in English, but must not be 
omitted in French: 

J’ai du lait et de l’eau, I have milk and water 

125. VOCABULARY 

apporter [aporte], to bring la creme [kreim], cream 

le beurre [boeir], butter l’eau [loj (/.), water 

le cafe [kafe], coffee le gargon [garso], boy, waiter 

1 In the case of the past indefinite, the auxiliary (have, has ) is considered 
the verb, and en goes before it; il en a trouve, he has found some ; il n’en a 
pas trouve, he has not found any, he has found none. 

2 In questions any is substituted for some in English; in negative sentences 
no (see p. 50, note), none = not any. The French constructions are not 
affected. Observe that in negative sentences ne precedes en. 

En a-t-il? Has he any ( = some) ? 

Il n’en a pas. He has none ( = not any). 


§ 126] 


LEgON XIII 


77 


le lait [le], milk la pomme [pom], apple 

monsieur [masjo], Mr., sir le potage [pota: 3 ], soup 

le pain [pe], bread la viande [vjaidj, meat 

la pomme de terre [pom do te:r], le vin [ve], wine 
potato [la terre, the earth] 

126. DRILL 


1. Some butter; some meat 

2. Some coffee; have you any? 

3. Some apples; he has none 

4. Some milk; he sold some 

5. Some water; he brought 

none 

6. Some cream; did he bring 

any? 

7. Some potatoes; some soup 

8. Some paper; some ink 

9. He brought meat and pota¬ 

toes 

10. Have you any? He has 

none 

11. Has the waiter brought any 

wine? 

12. We gave none to the boys 

13. Did she give some water to 

your sister? 

14. Did they (/.) sell any? 

15. He sold apples and potatoes 


Du heurre; de la viande 

Du cafe; en avez-vous? 

Des pommes; il n’en a pas 

Du lait; il en a vendu 

De l’eau; il n’en a pas apporte 

De la creme; en a-t-il apporte? 

Des pommes de terre; du potage 

Du papier; de 1’encre 

Il a apporte de la viande et des 
pommes de terre 

En avez-vous? Il n’en a pas 

Est-ce que le gargon a apporte du 
vin? 

Nous n’en avons pas donne aux 
garfons 

Est-ce qu’elle a donne de l’eau a 
votre soeur? 

Est-ce qu’elles en ont vendu? 

Il a vendu des pommes et des 
pommes de terre 


127. Reading. Voila mon fils qui monte Pescalier! Il 
y a deux de ses amis ici. Ils ont marche dans la rue, ils n’ont 
pas perdu leur chemin, ils ont cherche notre maison et ils 
ont trouve la porte. Ils ont sonne. Maintenant ils sont 
dans le jardin. Il y a des fleurs et de Pherbe la. Ils ont 
dine dans le jardin. La bonne a apporte du pain, de Peau, 
du beurre, des pommes de terre, de la viande, du cafd, de la 


78 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 128 


creme. Elle n’a pas apporte de 1 vin. Elle a donne du cafe 
a mon fils et du lait a ma fille. Ma fille a donne le lait a 
io Pami de son frere, et mon fils a donne le cafe a la sceur de son 
ami. Ma femme cherche les enfants, elle a descendu Pesca- 
lier, elle a trouve les petits gargons et les petites filles dans 
le jardin. Elle a donne du potage a notre fils qui ne peut pas 



manger avec les grands enfants. Elle en a donne aux grands 
15 enfants aussi, mais ils n’en ont pas mange. Notre fils en a 
mange; il veut en donner a Pami de son frere, mais Pami de 
son fr&re n’en veut pas. Ils ont entendu la sonnette. Ils 
ont monte Pescalier. Ils sont maintenant dans la chambre a 
coucher. 

128. Resume. Fils; ami; marche; chemin; maison; 
porte; sonne; jardin; fleurs, herbe; dine; bonne; pain, eau, 

1 See p. 50, note. 













§ 129] 


LEgON XIII 


79 


beurre, pommes de terre, viande, cafe, creme; vin; fils, 
fille; donne; femme cherche; jardin; potage; grands enfants; 
notre fils, Pami; sonnette. 


129. Oral Drill. 1 . Some wine; some ink; I have some. 

2. Some meat; some pens; has he any? 3. Bring milk and 
cream! 4. Have you any? I have none. 5. Some soup; 
some potatoes. 6. Black coffee, white milk; they have none. 
7. Water; has the boy any? He has some. 8. Blue ink; 
English words; difficult languages. 9. Has his wife any?; 
no, but their son has some. 10. He has none; have we any?;; 
we have none. 11. She has no milk (see p. 50, Note). 

ii 

130. DIALOGUE 


1. Waiter, bring some bread 

for my son! 

2. Yes, sir, there is some bread 

and some butter! 

3. Now he wishes coffee and 

milk 

4. Do you wish some coffee 

also, sir? 

5. No, I want some water 

6. What meat do you choose, 

sir? 

7. I do not want any. I want 

some soup; have you any? 

8. Yes, sir, we have some; it is 

very good 

9. Is the meat good? 

10. Yes, it is very good; do you 

wish some now after your 
soup? 

11. Yes, and bring some water 

for my son! 


Garfon, apportez du pain pour 
mon fils! 

Oui, monsieur, voila du pain et 
du beurre! 

Maintenant il veut du cafe et du 
lait 

Voulez-vous du cafe, aussi, mon¬ 
sieur? 

Non, je veux de l’eau 

Quelle viande choisissez-vous,, 
monsieur? 

Je n’en veux pas. Je veux du 
potage; est-ce que vous en 
avez? 

Oui, monsieur, nous en avons; il 
est tres bon 

Est-ce que la viande est bonne? 

Oui, elle est tres bonne; en 
voulez-vous maintenant apres 
votre potage? 

Oui, et apportez de l’eau pour mon 
fils! 


80 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 131 


12. (My) father, there is (my) Mon pere, voila mon oncle de¬ 

uncle in front of the big vant le grand batiment rouge! 
red building! 

13. Waiter, some butter! , . . Gargon, du beurre! . . . Voulez- 

Do you want some water? vous de l’eau? 

14. No, I want some milk and Non, je veux du lait et du pain; 

some bread; I have not je n’ai pas mange. Apportez 
eaten. Bring some po- des pommes de terre et de la 
tatoes and meat! viande! 

131. Conversation. 1. In what house did you meet your 
friend? 2. Whom did you find in the garden? 3. With 
whom did his son speak in the street? 4. Who brought 
water, bread and meat into the garden? 5. Did she bring 
coffee and cream also? 6. Did she bring wine? 7. Whom 
did your -wife look for? 8. Did she give some milk and coffee 
to her children? 9. To whom did she give some? 10. Did 
she give any to her son and to her daughter? 

132. Theme. I have no 1 wine; I want none. Waiter, 
bring some meat, some bread and some butter! Does your 
son wish soup also, sir? Yes, and have you any milk? No, 
we have none now. I can bring some coffee and cream. 

5 Do you wish any? Yes. Have you apples? Yes, they are 
very good. Do you wish some? Yes, you can bring some; 
and bring some water, also; we haven’t any. My son, who 
is the boy whom we met at the school? My friend Peter. 
Did Peter find some friends there? Yes, he found a boy and 
io his sisters. Did the girls dine at the school? Yes, they ate 
bread, but when they looked for butter, they did not find any. 

133. Exercises. A. Conjugate T have’ with the follow¬ 
ing words: 

butter cream watex" potatoes. 

B. Conjugate ‘have I?’ with the same words. 

C. Conjugate ‘I have brought some,’ ‘I have sold none.’ 

1 See p. 50, note. 


§ 1341 


LEQON XIV 


81 


14. QUATORZlfiME LEgON [katorzjem] 

LA GARE 

i 

134. Present Indicative of etre [e:tr], to be: 


je suis [39 syi], I am 
(tu es [ty c], thou art) 
il est [il e], he is 

135. Past Indefinite with etre. 

‘I have gone/ they say ‘I am gone/ 
gated are: 


aller [ale], to go 
arriver [arive], to arrive 
descendre, 1 to descend 
entrer, to enter 
monter, 1 to go up 
partir [partiir], to depart, go away 
leave 

sortir [sorti:r], to go out 
venir [vaniir], to come 


nous sommes [nu som], we are 
vous etes [vu zet], you are 
ils sont [il so], they are 

The French do not say 
Other verbs so conju- 

je suis alle, 2 I have gone = I went 
(tu es arrive, thou hast arrived) 
il est descendu, he descended 
elle est entree, she entered 
nous sommes montes, we went up 
vous etes parti (s) , 2 you departed 

ils sont sortis, they went out 
elles sont venues, they came 


1 Verbs conjugated with etre are intransitive (that is, they have no direct 
object). Some may be used also transitively (that is, with a direct object), 
as in the case of descendre, monter: I descended (intransitive), and I de¬ 
scended the stairs (transitive). In the second case they are conjugated with 

avoir: 

Je suis descendu (monte), I went down (went up) 

J’ai descendu (monte) 1’escalier), I went down (went up) the stairs 

2 The past participle with etre agrees with the subject like an adjective: 
vous etes parti: vous = a single person, masculine 

vous etes partie: vous = a single person, feminine 

vous etes partis: vous = more than one person, masculine or masculine 
and feminine 

vous etes parties: vous = more than one person, feminine 
Similarly, the past participle will take the feminine form of I or we refer 
to females: 

Je suis partie, I (a woman) departed 
Nous sommes montees, we {women) went up 
If there is no reason to the contrary, je and nous, in these lessons, will be 
understood to be masculine, and vous masculine singular. 


82 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 136 


Note 1 . The past participle of verbs conjugated with etre agrees 
with the subject; see p. 81, Note 2. This is usually merely a matter of 
spelling, not affecting the pronunciation. Page 71, note refers to verbs 
conjugated with avoir. 

Note 2. All verbs to be conjugated with etre will be followed in 
vocabularies by an asterisk, e.g., venir.* 

136. VOCABULARY 


les bagages [bagatf], baggage 
le billet [bije], ticket 
le buffet [byfe], lunch-counter 
le colis [koli], piece of baggage, 
package 

le facteur [faktceir], porter 
la gare [ga:r], station 
le guichet [gi$e], ticket-window 
la malle [mal], trunk 

137. 

1. I have given; I have de¬ 

parted 

2. Has he dined? she went 

3. Did you arrive? you lost 

4. They have found; have they 

(m.) entered? 

5. We got down; we gave 

6. Did she sell? he went up 

7. You came; you finished 

8. He sought; she got down 

9. Did we build? we departed 

10. They came; they heard 

11. I did not lose; I have arrived 

12. We did not enter; we seized 

13. She sang; she did not go 

down 

14. You did not come; you have 

spoken 


Paris [pari], Paris 
la place Iplas], seat, fare 
Reims [re:s], Rheims 
la salle d’attente [sal datait], 
waiting-room 
le train [tre], train 
la valise [vali:z], valise 
le wagon [vago], car 


J’ai donne; je suis parti 

A-t-il dine? elle est allee 
Etes-vous arrive? vous avez perdu 
Ils ont trouve; sont-ils entres? 

Nous sommes descendus; nous 
avons donne 

A-t-elle vendu? il est monte 
Vous etes venu;.vous avez fini 
II a cherche; elle est descendue 
Avons-nous bati? nous sommes 
partis 

Ils sont venus; ils ont entendu 
Je n’ai pas perdu; je suis arrive 
Nous ne sommes pas entres; nous 
avons saisi 

Elle a chante; elle n’est pas des¬ 
cendue 

Vous n’etes pas venu; vous avez 
parle 


DRILL 


§ 138] 


LEgON XIV 


83 


15. They (/.) chose; she did not 

go 

16. You went out; did we hear? 

17. He did not meet; they went 

up 

18. Did he go? we did not seize 

19. You did not knock; did you 

arrive? 

20. Did you go out? I did not 

meet 


Elies ont choisi; elle n’est pas 
allee 

Vous etes sorti; avons-nous en- 
tendu? 

II n’a pas rencontre; ils sont 
monte s 

Est-il alle? nous n’avons pas saisi 

Vous n’avez pas frappe; etes-vous 
arrive? 

Etes-vous sorti? je n’ai pas ren¬ 
contre 


138. Reading. Nous sommes ar¬ 
rives a Paris. Nous allons a Reims. 
Nous sommes dans la gare. Nous 
voulons diner au buffet. II est de- 
vant la salle d’attente. Est-ce que 5 
Pierre n’est pas venu avec sa sceur? 
Ou sont-ils alles? Ah! la petite fille 
et son frere ne sont pas descendus 
du wagon. Descendez, mes enfants! 
Bon! Vous etes descendus. Est-ce 10 
que ma bonne vieille tante est des- 
cendue aussi? Ah, oui! elle est ar- 
rivee avec Pierre et ils sont entres 
au buffet ou ils ont dine, et ils 
sont alles maintenant dans la salle 15 
d’attente. Mais mon mari, ou est-il 
alle? Est-ce qu’il n’est pas la devant 
le guichet? II cherche des billets. 
Non, il est alle avec le facteur mettre 
nos valises et nos colis dans le wagon. 20 
II est monte, il est entre dans ie 
wagon; le facteur a trouve deux 
places — deux bonnes places — devant la fenetre. Mainte¬ 
nant ou sont nos colis? Voila nos colis! Mon mari est 



Le facteur 






84 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 139 


25 sorti du wagon. II est descendu du train. Mais off sont 
nos malles, la valise de Pierre, les colis de ma tante? Ils ne 
sont pas arrives a la gare. Mais nous pouvons manger 
maintenant. Voulez-vous manger ici au buffet? Nous 
sommes entres. Nous avons dine. Nous sommes sortis 
30 maintenant. Mais nos bagages ne sont pas arrives! Et off 
est notre train? Notre train est parti!—et nos colis, nos 
valises, dans le wagon, la devant la fenetre? Partis aussi! 

139. Resume. Paris; Reims; gare; diner; Pierre; ou?; 
wagon; tante, Pierre; mari, billets; facteur; montd, places; 
colis; malles, valise, colis; manger; buffet; sortis; bagages; 
train. 

140. Oral Drill. 1. We have gone. 2. They have dined. 

3. You arrived. 4. He spoke. 5. They departed. 6 . She 
went out. 7. I chose. 8 . He came. 9. We got down. 
10 . We sought. 11 . He did not find. 12 . We entered. 
13. Did he not sell? 14. Did they not get down? 15. They 
went up. 16. You did not give. 17. He did not eat. 
18. Did you come? 19. You did not go up. 20. Did you 
lose? 21 . She arrived at the station. 22 . Her aunt entered 
the car. 23. Did she go to the ticket-window? 24. They 
sold all the tickets. 25. Have they left the waiting-room? 


DIALOGUE 


11 

141. 

1 . Did you come from Paris? 

2 . We came from Rheims 

3. Have you any baggage? 

4. Yes, I have some packages, 

a valise and two trunks 

5. Didn’t your brother come 

with you? 

6 . No, he went to the city 


Etes-vous venus de Paris? 

Nous sommes venus de Reims 
Est-ce que vous avez des bagages? 
Oui, j’ai des colis, une valise et 
deux malles 

Est-ce que votre frere n’est pas 
venu avec vous? 

Non, il est alle a la ville 


§ 142] 


LEgON XIV 


85 


7. And your sister? Did she 

leave with your brother? 

8. No, she came in the train, 

too 

9. Where is she? 

10. She entered the waiting- 

room or she went to the 
lunch-counter. No — she 
has gone to the ticket- 
window 

11. Good! Do you wish to 

leave? 

12. We can’t leave. We are 

looking for a porter 

13. A porter! There is a porter 

in front of the ticket- 
window 

14. No, he is gone. He has got 

into the car 

15. No, he has got down and he 

has gone into the waiting- 
room 

16. Porter, will you get into the 

train to look for our bag¬ 
gage? 

17. In what coach, sir? 

18. There’s the coach! My 

packages are in the cor¬ 
ner, in front of the win¬ 
dow 

19. I got into the train, sir; 

I entered the coach; I 
looked in the corner, but 
I have not found your 
packages 


Et votre sceur? Est-elle partie 
avec votre frere? 

Non, elle est venue dans le train 
aussi 

Ou est-elle? 

Elle est entree dans la salle 
d’attente ou elle est allee au 
buffet. Non — elle est allee au 
guichet 

Bon! Voulez-vous partir? 

Nous ne pouvons pas partir. 
Nous cherchons un facteur 

IJn facteur! II y a un facteur 
devant le guichet 

Non, il est parti. II est monte 
dans le wagon 

Non, il est descendu, et il est alle 
a la salle d’attente 

Facteur, voulez-vous monter dans 
le train chercher nos bagages? 

Dans quel wagon, monsieur? 

Voila le wagon! Mes colis sont 
dans le coin, devant la fenetre 

Monsieur, je suis monte dans le 
train; je suis entre dans le 
wagon; j’ai cherche dans le 
coin, mais je n’ai pas trouve 
vos colis 


142. Conversation. 1. Have you not come to the sta¬ 
tion? 2. Where did you dine? 3. Did the children come 1 


86 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ M3 


with my aunt? 4. Where did the brother and sister go? 
5. Did the uncle enter the car? 6. Did he find a good seat? 
7. Did he get out of the coach? 8. Did the porter get into 
the train with his valises and his packages? 9. Did his bag¬ 
gage arrive at the station? 10. Did the train leave? 

143. Theme. I have come from Rheims. I have arrived 
at Paris. I went to the lunch-counter. I met my friend. 
We dined. We left. We met our friends. They went with 
us. We arrived at the ticket-window where we asked for 

5 tickets. “The train has left!” We found the porter. He 
went with my friends to look for their packages and their 
trunk. I found the stairs. I went down. I went out. On 
the sidewalk I met Peter. We departed. My friends are 
in the station. Paris is a beautiful city. Its parks are very 
io beautiful. 

144. Exercises. A. Conjugate: 

I entered the house. I departed 

I went down. I came. 

I went up. I went. 

B. Drill on present indicative of etre: § 480, A. 

C. Drill on past indefinite of aller, partir, descendre, 
venir: § 480, A. 

D. Use the following words in sentences: 

ticket ticket-window trunk Rheims 

station seat porter Paris 


I went out. 
I arrived. 


§ 145] 


LEgON XV 


87 


15. QUINZliME LEQON [kezjem] 

145. Review 

i 

1. Who sells? 2. He sells. 3. We hear. 4. You hear. 
5. Who sold? 6. She sold. 7. You heard. 8. I heard. 
9. He arrived. 10. We got down. 11. They went. 12. I 
came. 13. Has he come? 14. She came. 15. Did you go? 
16. We did not get down. 17. Don't go! 18. Who came? 
19. Some bread. 20. Have you any? 21. Some potatoes. 
22. Have you any? 23. Eat soup! 24. I have eaten some. 
25. They sold apples. 26. Who brought the potatoes? 
27. The porter has arrived. 28. Have you any ink? 
29. Who has some? 30. Who has some trunks? 31. Did 
they arrive with baggage? 32. Their packages arrived. 
33. At what station? 34. Who looked for valises here? 

35. I arrived, and I looked for my valises and my trunks. 

36. Did you go to the waiting-room? 37. We went to the 
ticket-window. 38. Who sells tickets? 39. They sell some. 
40. They have none. 41. There are none. 

ii 

146. 1 . Who sells milk? 2. We sell wine. 3. To whom 
do they sell coffee? 4. He sold apples. 5. Bring some 
cream! 6. Is there any cream? 7. He ate meat. 8. We 
ate soup. 9. Eat potatoes! 10. He brought bread. 11. The 
milk has arrived. 12. The waiter came. 13. Did he sell 
butter? 14. Did you bring water? 15. We went to the 
station. 16. Did you bring any baggage? 17. Did the 
porter find any packages? 18. Did you go to the ticket- 
window? 19. Whom did you look for? 20. We looked for 
friends. 21. Did your friends arrive? 22. They went out 
of the station. 23. Did you find any carriages at the door? 


88 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 147 


24. We did not look for any. 25. The porter brought our 
valises and our packages to the railway-coach. 26. We 
have none. 27. Did you bring some baggage? 28.1 brought 
some. 29. We brought none. 30. With whom did you 
get down from the carriage? 31. I got down with my son, 
whom you met in the waiting-room. 32. We went to the 
ticket-window. 33. Did they sell tickets? 34. They sold 
some. 


16. SEIZlfiME LECON [sezjem] 


LA GARE 


i 


147. Future. To form the future, add to the whole in¬ 
finitive the following endings 1 : 


je donner ai [50 donore] 

(tu finir as [ty finira]) 
il vendr a 3 [il vadra] 
nous finir ons [nu finiro] 
vous vendr ez 3 [vu vadre] 
ils donner ont [il donaro] 


-ai [e ] 2 
-as [a] 

-a [a] 

-ons [5] 

-ez [e] 

-ont [5] 

I. I shall give, etc. 
je donner ai 
(tu donner as) 
il donner a 4 
nous donner ons 
vous donner ez 
ils donner ont 

1 Note that these are 
§64). 


II. I shall finish, etc. 
je finir ai 
(tu finir as) 
il finir a 4 
nous finir ons 
vous finir ez 
ils finir ont 


I shall sell, etc. 
je vendr ai 3 
(tu vendr as) 
il vendr a 4 
nous vendr ons 
vous vendr ez 
ils vendr ont 


the endings of the present indicative of avoir (see 

2 Note that when -ai is a verb-ending it is pronounced [e]; elsewhere it is 
[e]; see p. 8, § 19, 2. 

3 Note that the final e of third conjugation verbs is dropped before the 
endings are added. 

4 Interrogative third person singular: donnera-t-il? finira-t-il? vendra- 
t-il? Cf. donne-t-il? a-t-il? See p. 34, Note 2. 


§ 148] 


LEgON XVI 


89 


148. Interrogative Pronoun. 1 Things (cf. § 102). 
Subject: Qu’est-ce qui? [kes ki], what ? 

Object: Que? [ko] or Qu’est-ce que? [kes ka], what? 

Qu’est-ce qui est sur la table? What is on the table? 

Que cherchez-vous? ^ 

Qu-est-ce que vous cherchez?/ What are y° u lookln « for? 

Note. The last two forms correspond to que followed by the 
alternate interrogative forms cherchez-vous? est-ce que vous cherchez? 
(See § 26, note 1.) When the verb is in the first person singular, or 
when the subject of the verb is a noun, use the longer form. (See § 27, 
and note 1.) 

Qu’est-ce que je cherche? What am I looking for? 

Qu’est-ce que Jean cherche? What is John looking for? 


VOCABULARY 


149. 

aimer [eme], to like, love 
1’amie [.ami] (/.), friend 
appeler 2 3 [aple], to call 
l’argent [lar 3 d] (ra.), money, silver 
bientot [bjeto], soon 
la carte [kart], bill-of-fare 
cinq [sck ], five 

le cocher [ko$e], coachman, cabby 
demander [damade], to ask, ask for 


laisser 4 [lese], leave 
madame [madam], madam, Mrs. 
merci [mersi], thanks 
parce que [pars ka], because 
peu [po], little {adverb) 
peut-etre [po te:tr], perhaps 
porter [parte], to carry 
le restaurant [restara], restaurant 
le voyageur [vwaja 3 ce:r], traveler 


150. DRILL 


1. We shall like; they (/.) will 

carry 

2. He will finish; she will ask 

3. I shall sell; we shall ring 

4. She will depart; you will lose 


Nous aimerons; elles porteront 

II finira; elle demandera 
Je vendrai; nous sonnerons 
Elle partira; vous perdrez 


* The interrogative adjective is quel? (see § 76). 

2 Present: j’appelle (tu appelles), il appelle; nous appelons, vous appelez, 
ils appellent. (Cf. acheter, § 160, Note.) 

Future: j’appellerai, etc 

3 Pronounce [sc] before a word beginning with a consonant: cinq voyageurs, 
[se vwaja3ce:r]. (See § 234, Note.) 

* partir is intransitive: to leave, go away', laisser is transitive: to leave behind, 
Abandon. 


90 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 151 


5. We shall descend; I shall 

dine 

6. They will ask; he will seize 

7. I shall meet; they will de¬ 

part 

8. We shall hear; I shall break¬ 

fast 

9. She will pronounce; he will 

knock 

10. They (/.) will like; you will 

choose 

11. What is? who is? 

12. Whom do you call? what 

do you leave? 

13. To whom are you speaking? 

14. What is there? who is here? 

15. What have you heard? 

16. Whom have they met? 

17. What has the traveler 

brought? 

18. What did your friend sell? 

19. What book did your brother 

carry? 

20. What did your sister choose? 


Nous descendrons; je dinerai 

Us demanderont; il saisira 
Je rencontrerai; ils partiront 

Nous entendrons; je dejeunerai 

Elle prononcera; il frappera 

Elies aimeront; vous choisirez 

Qu’est-ce qui est? qui est? 

Qui appelez-vous? que laissez- 
vous? 

A qui parlez-vous? 

Qu’est-ce qui est la? qui est ici? 
Qu’est-ce que vous avez entendu? 
Qui est-ce qu’ils out rencontre? 
Qu’est-ce que le voyageur a ap- 
porte? 

Qu’est-ce que votre ami a vendu? 
Quel livre est-ce que votre frere a 
porte? 

Qu’est-ce que votre sceur a choisi? 


151. Reading. Allez chercher le facteur. Appelez mon 1 
amie qui est entree dans la gare; elle cherchera le facteur avec 
vous. Nous n’appellerons pas votre amie. Le facteur est 
arrive. Facteur, vous porterez mes cinq colis dans le wagon. 
5 Voila de Pargent! Maintenant je veux parler au cocher. Il est 
sorti de la gare. Il est parti, peut-etre .Non, mais il est entre 
au buffet. Cocher, j ’ai laisse un de mes colis dans la voiture. 
Voulez-vous aller chercher mon colis? Merci! Maintenant 
nous dinerons. Que voulez-vous manger? G argon! Vous 
io demandez, madame? Apportez la carte Voila la carte, 

i Before feminine nouns or adjectives beginning with a vowel, the 
masculine forms mon, ton, son are used. 


§ 152] 


LEgON XVI 


91 


madame! Nous mangerons tres peu parce que notre train 
partira bientot. Nous descendrons a Chicago et nous trou- 
verons un bon restaurant la. Voila des voyageurs qui 
montent dans le train. Le coeher n’est pas venu. II est all6 
chercher mon colis, mais il n’est pas arrive! Le train partira, 
il arrivera a Chicago, mon mari me cherchera a la gare, je 
n’arriverai pas, il ne trouvera pas sa femme! Voila le cocher! 
Le train n’est pas parti. Merci, cocher! Nous arriverons 



Voila la carte, madame! 


bientot k Chicago. Nous rencontrerons mon mari. Nous ne 
laisserons pas nos cinq colis dans le wagon. Le cocher mettra 
notre valise dans la voiture, mais le facteur portera notre 
malle a la salle des bagages. Nous trouverons tous nos amis k 
la gare. Nous partirons de Chicago bientot et nous descen¬ 
drons du train a Buffalo off il y a un trks bon ami de mon mari. 

152. Resume. Facteur; amie; facteur; cinq colis; cocher; 
voiture; chercher; manger; carte; peu; Chicago; voyageurs; 
cocher!; mari; Chicago, mari; valise; malle; amis; Buffalo. 








92 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 153 


153. Oral Drill. 1. They will descend; he will break¬ 
fast. 2. We shall depart; will they carry? 3. She will sell; 
I shall ask. 4. We shall go out; will she give? 5. You wall 
sell; shall we lose? 6. I shall ring; they (/.) will like. 7. He 
will seize; shall I meet? 8. They (m.) will leave; you will 
hear. 9. We shall choose; will she hear? 10. They (/.) 
will bring; you will play. 11. Who is there? 12. Whom is 
she looking for? 13. What is in the church? 14. What will 
the girl choose? 15. To whom will they speak? 16. What 
sentences will the pupil pronounce? 17. What is here? 
18. Who speaks of the tickets? 19. Whom do we call? 
20. What did the porter bring? 


DIALOGUE 


ii 

154. 

1. Peter, has your aunt ar¬ 

rived? 

2. I have not gone up to the 

waiting-room; she went 
there, perhaps 

3. Do you Want to go to break¬ 

fast now? Have you any 
money? 

4. Can we not find my aunt? 

She will not go out of the 
station. I do not like to 
leave my aunt here. She 
is old. 

5. We shall go up to the wait¬ 

ing-room 

6. There is my aunt! Now we 

can go and dine 

7. What are you looking for? 

8. I am looking for a good res¬ 

taurant 


Pierre, est-ce que votre tante est 
arrive e? 

Je ne suis pas monte a la salle 
d’attente; elie est allee la, 
peut-etre 

Voulez-vous aller dejeuner main- 
tenant? Avez-vous de l’argent? 

Ne pouvons-nous pas trouver ma 
tante? Elle ne sortira pas de la 
gare. Je n’aime pas laisser ma 
tante ici. Elle est vieille 

Nous monterons a la salle d’at- 
tente 

Voila ma tante! Maintenant nous 
pouvons aller diner 

Que cherchez-vous? 

Je cherche un bon restaurant 


§ 155] 


LEgON XVI 


93 


9. Isn’t there a good restau¬ 
rant in front of the sta¬ 
tion? 

10. No, there isn’t any there 

11. What are they looking for, 

the five travelers who en¬ 
tered the store at the cor¬ 
ner where the old lady 
sells the beautiful flowers? 

12. They have found a restau¬ 

rant, perhaps. Ask! 

13. Have you found a restau¬ 

rant? 

14. We haven’t looked for any; 

we have breakfasted at 
the lunch-counter, but we 
have eaten very little. 

The restaurants here are 
not good 

155. Conversation. 1. Whom did you seek? 2. Who 
arrived? 3. What language will he speak? 4. What will 
the traveler carry? 5. To whom do you wish to speak? 
6. What is in the carriage? 7. What can you eat? 8. Whom 
will you meet at Chicago? 9. What will the cabby find in 
the restaurant? 10. What is on the benches in the station? 

156. Theme. Whom will you meet at the station? I 
shall find my friends there, perhaps.’ Bring the bill-of-fare, 
waiter; I shall eat very little because I shall leave soon. 
What did the porter leave in the car? Ask! I do not speak 
French. He speaks English, — but very little. With whom 
did you talk in front of the restaurant? What is in your 
valise? Where is your husband? Who is at the ticket- 

1 See § 123. Learn: 

il y en a, there is (are) some 
il n’y en a pas, there is (are) none 


Est-ce qu’il n’y a pas un bon res¬ 
taurant devant la gare? 

Non, il n’y en a pas la 1 

Qu’est-ce qu’ils cherchent, les 
cinq voyageurs qui sont entres 
dans le magasin au coin oh la 
vieille femme vend les belles 
fleurs? 

Ils ont trouve un restaurant, peut- 
etre. Demandez! 

Avez-vous trouve un restaurant? 

Nous n’en avons pas cherche; 
nous avons dejeune au buffet, 
mais nous avons tres peu 
mange. Les restaurants ici ne 
sont pas bons 


94 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 157 


window? There is your husband! What package did you 
leave in the carriage? What is the cabby bringing? The 
io waiter will bring the bill-of-fare soon, perhaps. 

157. Exercises. A. Conjugate: 

I shall build a house. I shall leave my packages. 

I shall lose my trunk. 

B. Drill on future of demander, batir, entendre: § 480, A. 

C. Use what? first as subject, then as object, in as many 
sentences as possible. Other students answer the questions. 


17. DIX-SEPTlfiME LEQON [dis setjem] 


LE MAGASIN 

i 


158. Adverbs of Quantity: 


beaucoup Iboku], 

peu [p 0 ], | little -' 
(tew; 

assez [ase], enough; 

( too; 

trop [tro] J too much; 

I too many; 
plus [ply], more; 


moins [mwe], j^ r; 

{how much 
combien Ikobje], j howmany 

\ so much; 
tant [to.], 1 

1 h (so many; 


beaucoup de viande, much meat 

beaucoup d’amis, many friends 

peu de lait, little milk 

peu de voyageurs, few travelers 

assez de billets, enough tickets 

trop blanc, too white 

trop de vin, too much wine 

trop d’histoires, too many stories 

plus de colis, more packages 

moins d’encre, less ink 

moins de chapeaux, fewer hats 

combien de creme, how much cream 

combien de mots, how many words 

tant de beurre, so much butter 

tant de malles, so many trunks 


159. En = o/ it, of them as well as some, any (see § 123). 
As in the case of some (see § 124), en must not be omitted in 


§ 160] 


LEgON XYII 


95 


French even though of it or of them is omitted in English. 
Note this particularly when numbers are used: 

Combien en avez-vous? How many (of them) have you? 

J’en ai deux, I have two (of them) 

Je n’en ai pas beaucoup, I haven’t much or many 


VOCABULARY 


160. 

acheter 1 [a§te], to buy 
le bas [ba], stocking 
le centime [satim], centime (R- of a 
cent ) 

la chose [$o:z], thing 
cinquante [sekait], fifty 
le coton [koto], cotton 
desirer [dezire], to desire 


l’employe [laplwaje] (ra.), clerk, 
employee 

le franc [fra], franc (20 cents ) 
le prix [pri], price 
que [ko], than, as 
repondre [repoidr], to reply 
la robe [rob], dress 
la soie [swa], silk 
un, une [de, yn], one 


161. DRILL 


1. Much money; little money 

2. Many things; too many 

dresses 

3. Too much bread; few apples 

4. Enough butter; so much 

wine 

5. How many pens; enough 

stores 

6. Enough meat; how much 

milk 

7. Less money; fewer apples 

8. So many dresses; more stores 

9. Much silk; more stockings 

10. Too many travelers; few 

employees 

11. A little money; fewer cen¬ 

times 


Beaucoup d’argent; peu d’argent 
Beaucoup de choses; trop de robes 

Trop de pain; peu de pommes 
Assez de beurre; tant de vin 

Combien de plumes; assez de 
magasins 

Assez de viande; combien de lait 

Moins d’argent; moins de pommes 
Tant de robes; plus de magasins 
Beaucoup de soie; plus de bas 
Trop de voyageurs; peu d’em- 
ployes 

Un peu d’argent; moins de cen¬ 
times 


Present: j’achate, (tu ach&tes), il ach&te; nous achetons, vous achetez, 
ils ach&tent. 

Future: j’achfcterai, etc. (Cf. appeler, § 149, note 2.) 


96 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 162 


12. I have money; have you 

any? 

13. He talks of money; do you 

talk of it? 

14. We talk of it; don’t talk of 

it! 

15. How much money do you 

ask? 

16. What will you carry? 

17. What price will he ask? 

18. What will they answer? 

19. Whom will you hear? 

20. What is in the store? 


J’ai de l’argent; en avez-vous? 

II parle d’argent; en parlez-vous? 

Nous en parlons; n’en parlez pas! 

Combien d’argent demandez- 
vous? 

Qu’est-ce que vous porterez? 

Quel prix demandera-t-il? 
Qu’est-ce qu’ils repondront? 

Qui entendrez-vous? 

Qu’est-ce qui est dans le maga- 
sin? 


162. Reading. Une femme est entree dans beaucoup de 
magasins de la rue Hoyaie [rwajal]. Tous les magasins 
de la rue Hoyaie sont tres beaux et il y en a tant! II y 
a moins de magasins dans la rue a Paris ou vous avez achete 
5 votre belle robe de soie. La femme n’a pas tant d’argent que 
vous; elle en a beaucoup moins. Sonmari est l’employe qui 
vend des billets au guichet a la gare. II vend beaucoup de 
billets, mais il a tres peu d’argent. Sa femme est entree 
dans un des tres beaux magasins de la rue. L’employe a 
io demande: ((Que desirez-vous, madame?)) Elle a repondu: 
((Je desire beaucoup de choses, mais j’ai tres peu d’argent.)) 
Il a demande: ((Voulez-vous acheter une robe?)) Elle a 
repondu: ((Je n’ai pas assez d’argent pour acheter une robe. 
Je veux acheter des bas. Est-ce que vous vendez des bas 
15 ici?)) Un employe est alle chercher des bas pour la femme. 
Le prix est deux francs cinquante. Elle n’en a pas achete. 
L’employe ne vendra pas beaucoup de bas a la femme parce 
qu’elle ne donnera pas tant d’argent pour les choses qu’elle 
desire. Cinq francs n’est pas trop pour des bas de soie, 
20 mais deux francs cinquante est certainement assez pour des 
bas de coton. Elle ne veut pas en acheter parce qu’elle a 
trop peu d’argent. Son mari n’en donnera pas a sa femme; 


§ 163] 


LEgON XVII 


97 


il ne peut pas en donner parce qu’il n’en a pas. L’employe 
a demande: ((Combien d’argent avez-vous?)) Elle n’a pas 
repondu. Un employe qui demande ((Combien d’argent 
avez-vous?)) n’est pas un bon employ^. 


163. Resume. Femme; magasins, rue Royale; rue a 
Paris; argent; mari; entree; employe; repondu; robe; bas; 
chercher; pas achete; ne vendra pas; cinq francs; ne veut 
pas; mari; employe, combien. 

164. Oral Drill. 1 . Too much butter. 2. Enough bread. 
3. More wine. 4. Less money. 5. Fewer potatoes. 6. So 
much meat. 7. How much milk? 8. Too many apples. 
9. How many things? 10. Much money. 11. Little meat. 
12. Few travelers. 13. A little wine. 14. How many 
pencils? 15. Too much silk. 16. More apples. 17. Enough 
bread. 18. Many pens. 19. So many things. 20. A little 
cotton. 21. Many things. 22. Will you talk of it? 23. Will 
he talk of it? 24. Have you any? 25. I have some. 
26. What will you ask? 27. What will they answer? 28. To 
whom shall we speak? 29. What is in the carriage? 30. Who 
will call the coachman? 31. Where will you leave so many 
packages? 32. I will call a cabby perhaps. 33. Have you 
any silk stockings? 34. We have some. 35. How many do 
you desire? 36. How many dresses have you? 37. You 
buy many things. 


ii 

DIALOGUE 


165. 

1. Do you sell stockings here? 

2. Yes, madam, we do (we sell 

some). Do you want cot¬ 
ton or silk ones? 

3. I like (the) silk stockings, 

but I have very little 
money 


Vendez-vous des bas ici? 

Oui, madame, nous en vendons. 
En voulez-vous de coton ou de 
soie? 

J’aime les bas de soie, mais j’ai 
tres peu d’argent 


98 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 166 


4. The clerk will get some cot¬ 

ton stockings 

5. You haven’t enough clerks 

in your store, sir 

6 . We haven’t too many! 

7. The store at the corner of the 

street has more than you 

8 . How many has it? 

9. It has fifty 

10 . We have fewer, but our 

clerks are very good 

11. What is the price of the silk 

stockings? 

12. We have some at five francs 

and at five francs fifty 
(centimes). I’ll get some 
for you 

13. No, thank you, I do not 

want any 

14. There are some cotton 

stockings! 

15. What is the price of them? 

16. Much less than for the silk 

stockings 

17. I did not ask for silk stock¬ 

ings, I want them of cot¬ 
ton 

18. But, madam, here are cot¬ 

ton stockings! 

19. I do not like your cotton 

stockings, and the silk 
stockings are less good 
for the price than the cot¬ 
ton stockings 


L’employe cherchera des has de 
coton 

Vous n’avez pas assez d’employes 
dans votre magasin, monsieur 

Nous n’en avons pas trop! 

Le magasin au coin de la rue en a 
plus que vous 

Combien en a-t-il? 

II en a cinquante 

Nous en avons moins, mais nos 
employes sont tres bons 

Quel est le prix des bas de soie? 

Nous en avons a cinq francs et 
a cinq francs cinquante. J’en 
chercherai pour vous 

Non, merci, je n’en veux pas 

Voiia des bas de coton! 

Quel en est le prix? 

Beaucoup moins que pour les bas 
de soie 

Je n’ai pas demande des bas de 
soie, j’en veux de coton 

Mais, madame, voiia des bas de 
coton! 

Je n’aime pas vos bas de coton, et 
les bas de soie sont moins bons 
pour le prix que les bas de coton 


166. Conversation. 1 . What do the clerks in the stores 
ask? 2. What is in the store? 3. What do the women buy? 
4. What price do the clerks ask? 5. Will the women give 


§ 167] 


LEgON XVII 


99 


much money? 6. Will the clerks sell cotton stockings 
perhaps for less money than silk stockings? 7. How many 
francs will the women give for silk stockings? 8. What will 
their husbands give for cotton stockings? 9. How much 
money have they given? 10. Will they give any to their 
wives? 

167. Theme. I haven’t much money, but I wish to buy 

many things. How much have you? I have very little; I 
have less than you. There are boys who have too much 
money. There are some who have too little money. They 
will buy (§160, note 1) fewer things than the boys who have 5 
much money. Go into the store and ask for the clerk. You 
will find there all the things that you are looking for. Are 
you one of the boys who have a great deal of (=much) 
money? You can buy all the things that you desire, but 
there are some which are not good. *o 

168. Exercises. A. Use all the adverbs of quantity 
you can with the following: 

things dresses potatoes soup 

silk coffee cream hats 

B. Fill the following blanks: 

Avez-vous du —? Est-ce que j’ai de Y —? 

A-t-il de la —? Est-ce que nous avons des —? 

A-t-elle de Y —? Est-ce qu’ils ont du —? 

Avons-nous des —? 

Other students answer the questions using en. 

C. Dialogue: One student is the clerk in a store, another 
comes to buy. 

D. Drill on present, past indefinite, future of demander, 
batir, repondre: § 480, B. 


100 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 169 


18. DIX-HUITlfiME LEQON [di zyitjem] 


LA GARE 


i 


169. Conjunctive Pronouns, Direct Object: 


me [mo], me 
(te [fo], thee) 
le pa], him, it (m.) 
la pa], her, it (/.) 


nous [nu], us 
vous [vu], you 
les pe], them (m.) 
les pe], them (/.) 


170. These pronouns are placed immediately before the 
verb: 

II me cherche, He is looking for me 
Le trouvons-nous? Do we find him? 

Us les saisissent, They seize them 

171. If used with the past indefinite, or other compound 
tenses, conjunctive pronouns come before the auxiliary (have, 
has, etc.): 

Us vous ont cherche, They looked for you 
Nous l’avons trouve, We found him 
Je les ai saisis, I seized them 

172. If the verb is negative, pronouns come between ne 
and the verb: 


Vous ne la cherchez pas, You do not look for her 
Elle ne me trouve pas, She does not find me 
II ne les saisit pas, He does not seize them 


173. Chez [$e]= j 


at the house of, at the store of, etc. 
to the house of, to the store of, etc. 


H est chez votre ami, He is at the house of your friend, at your friend’s 
house, at your friend’s 

Nous allons chez le tailleur, We are going to the tailor’s shop, store, 
house 


§ 174] 


LEgON XVIII 


101 


VOCABULARY 


174. 

bon marche [bo mar$e], cheap 
(' invariable ) 

cher [§e:r], dear ( invariable as 
adverb ) 

commander [komade], to order 
le costume [kostym], suit 
gris [gri], gray 
Phabit [labi] (m.), coat 
la laine [len], wool 

175. 

1 . I leave them; he leaves them 

2 . She likes him; he likes her 

3. We buy it; you buy it 

4. I carry him; he carries her 

5. We call you; you call us 

6 . We carry them; they carry 

us 

7. Do you bring it? I bring it 

8 . He asks for us; we ask for 

him 

9. Do you call me? we call her 

10. He asks for her; she asks for 

him 

11. Do we call her? you call me 

12 . They like him; he likes them 

13. He asks it; I ask for him 

14. You bring it; he carries them 

15. She leaves them; we buy it 

16. Are you seeking her? 

17. We do not find her 


mardi [mardi], Tuesday 
le pantalon [patalo], trousers 
le pardessus [pardosy], overcoat 
porter [porte], to carry (§ 149), to 
wear 
si 1 [si], if 

le tailleur [tajoeir], tailor 
toujours [tu 5 u:r], always 
le verre [ve:r], glass 


Je les laisse; il les laisse 
Elle l’aime; il Faime 
Nous Pachetons; vous l’achetez 
Je le porte; il la porte 
Nous vous appeions; vous nous 
appelez 

Nous les portons; ils nous portent 

L’apportez-vous? je Papporte 
Il nous demande; nous le deman- 
dons 

Est-ce que vous m’appelez? nous 
l’appelons 

Il la demande; elle le demande 

Est-ce que nous Pappelons? vous 
m’appelez 

Ils Faiment; il les aime 
Il le demande; je le demande 
Vous l’apportez; il les porte 
Elle les laisse; nous Pachetons 
Est-ce que vous la cherchez? 
Nous ne la trouvons pas 


DRILL 


1 The i of si is elided before il and ils: s’il cherche, s’ils cherchent; see 
Introduction, § 56, note 2. 


102 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 176 


18. You will not find her at my 

uncle’s house 

19. At whose house did they 

find you? 

20. At Peter’s house 


Vous ne la trouverez pas chez 
mon oncle 

Chez qui vous ont-ils trouve? 
Chez Pierre 


176. Reading. Mon oncle Pierre arrivera a Paris mardi. 
Je l’aime beaucoup, mon bon oncle, et il m’aime beaucoup 
aussi. Voulez-vous aller le chercher a la gare? Yous le 



II commandera un grand verre d’eau 


trouverez dans la salle d’attente ou peut-etre au buffet. 
II portera un pardessus de laine noire — il le porte tou- 
jours — un habit de coton gris, un pantalon de coton aussi, 
et des has de coton blanc! Il porte toujours des bas, et il 
n’aime pas la soie. Il ne donne pas beaucoup d’argent pour 
ses costumes. Il les veut bon marche. Il ne les commande 
pas chez les grands tailleurs qui les vendent trSs cher, mais 
chez les tailleurs dans les petites rues qui les vendent tres 
bon marchA Vous monterez dans le tramway; il y en a un 
dans la rue, \k, au coin — m’entendez-vous? Yous descendrez 



§ 177] 


LE£ON XVIII 


103 


devant la gare, vous entrerez et vous chercherez mon oncle 
dans la salle d’attente. II vous cherchera aussi et si vous ne 15 
le trouvez pas, il vous trouvera. Si vous ne le trouvez pas 
dans la salle d’attente, vous le chercherez devant le guichet 
ou 1 ’employe vend des billets, ou au buffet. II mange 
toujours au buffet. Qu’est-ce qu’il demandera au buffet: 
du pain, de la viande, des pommes de terre? Non, mon ami, 20 
il demandera le prix du pain, le prix de la viande et le prix 
des pommes de terre. Si tout est bon marche, il en com- 
mandera. Shi n’aime pas les prix, il commandera un grand 
verre d’eau. Mais, apres tout, il est tres bon, mon oncle; il 
in’aime beaucoup, et je l’aime beaucoup aussi. 25 

177. Resume. Pierre; aime; chercher; salle d’attente; 
pardessus, habit, pantalon, bas; soie; costumes; grands 
tailleurs; tramway, coin; descendrez; chercher; guichet; 
buffet; pain?; eau; bon. 

178. Oral Drill. 1. He seeks her. 2 . You find me. 

3 . We sought her . 1 4. She found us . 1 5. We bring it. 

6 . You brought it. 7 . Do you seek her? 8 . Will you bring 
it? 9. Will they look for me? 10. They are not looking 
for you. 11. We are calling her. 12 . You are not calling 
us. 13. Will he carry them? 14. You do not bring them. 
15. He asks for it. 16. We do not ask for them. 17. Do 
you seek her? 18. We have found her . 1 19. Has she found 
them ? 1 20. They do not seek her. 21. Have you any? 
22. I have none. 23. We are leaving them. 24. Are you 
calling me? 25. We have spoken of it. 26. He speaks of it. 
27. Go to your tailor’s. 28. He has a cotton coat. 29. I 
don’t wish any. 30. He sells cotton suits. 31. If he has 
money, he gives it. 32. Your overcoat is gray; I like it. 
33. There is a glass of water on the table; do you wish it? 

1 See p. 71, footnote 1. 


104 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 179 


DIALOGUE 


ii 

179. 

1 . Will your uncle arrive Tues¬ 

day? 

2. Yes, my friend, he will ar¬ 

rive at Paris Tuesday 

3. Will you look for him at the 

station? 

4. No, he will get down from 

the train; he will not look 
for me; he will go out of 
the station and will get 
into a street-car 

5. But he will lose his way, 

your uncle! He will not 
find you 

6 . He will find me. He will 

get down from the street¬ 
car at the street-corner in 
front of the church. He 
will look for the house 
and he will find it 

7. Will he carry his baggage? 

He always has a great 
deal 

8 . Yes, he always has enough 

baggage, too much bag¬ 
gage: a trunk, a valise, 
and two or three pack¬ 
ages; but the porter will 
carry them to the street¬ 
car 

9. But who will carry them 

from the street-car to the 
house? 

10. There are always many 
boys at the street-comer. 


Est-ce que votre oncle arrivera 
mardi? 

Oui, mon ami, il arrivera a Paris 
mardi 

Le chercherez-vous a la gare? 

Non, il descendra du train; il ne 
me cherchera pas; il sortira de 
la gare, et il montera dans un 
tramway 

Mais il perdra son chemin, votre 
oncle! Il ne vous trouvera pas 

Il me trouvera. Il descendra du 
tramway au coin de la rue de- 
vant l’eglise. 11 cherchera la 
maison et il la trouvera 

Portera-t-il ses bagages? Il en a 
toujours beaucoup 

Oui, il a toujours assez de ba- 
gages, trop de bagages: une 
malle, une valise et deux ou 
trois colis; mais le facteur les 
portera au tramway 

Mais qui les portera du tramway 
k la maison? 

Il y a toujours beaucoup de gar- 
fons au coin de la rue. L’oncle 


§ 180] 


LEgON XVIII 


105 


Uncle will give his valise 
and one of his packages 
to a boy 

11 . And the boy will carry them? 

12 . He will carry them. (The) 

little boys have not much 
money. If my uncle gives 
enough (of it), they will 
carry the baggage 

13. Has your uncle a great deal 

of money? 

14. He has enough (of it). He 

has more (of it) than we. 

But he loves it too much. 

He will not give much 
(of it) to the boys. But, 

50 centimes, is that not 
enough? 

180. Conversation. 1. Have you met my uncle and do 
you like him? 2. Can he not find you at the ticket-window? 

3. He has a gray overcoat; will he wear it or will he not 
wear it? 4. There are some cotton stockings; will you not 
wear them? 5. How much money have you, and how much 
of it do you give for your suits? 6 . I want to get into a 
street-car; are there any at the corner? 7. Have you 
bought a ticket or has my brother bought it? 8 . They have 
bread and meat; will he ask for any? 9. He has a good 
overcoat; at what tailor’s did he buy it? 10. Can he not 
find me in front of the ticket-window? 

181. Theme. We sell overcoats; do you want any? I 
bought one of them, but I do not like it. There are some 
cotton stockings; do you want to buy them? I cannot buy 
them; I have no money. You have no money! To whom 
have you given it? I gave some to my brother who asked 5 
for some. If I want any. I always ask for some. You have a 


donnera sa valise et un de ses 
colis a un garfon 

Et le garfon les portera? 

II les portera. Les petits gargons 
n’ont pas beaucoup d’argent. 
Si mon oncle en donne assez, 
ils porteront les bagages 

Est-ce que votre oncle a beaucoup 
d’argent? 

II en a assez. 11 en a plus que 
nous. Mais il l’aime trop. II 
n’en donnera pas beaucoup aux 
gargons. Mais, cinquante cen¬ 
times, n’est-ce pas assez? 


106 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 182 


beautiful suit; at what tailor’s did you order it? Those 
trousers of gray wool are very dear, but I like them. I bought 
a gray suit very cheap, but I did not wear it much. Your 
io woolen suit is handsome; did you order it at your tailor’s? 
But we have talked enough of suits and trousers — our uncle 
and our aunt are looking for us. My aunt will find me in 
the waiting-room. My uncle will find you in the railway-car 
or at the lunch-counter. 

182. Exercises. A. Drill on present, past indefinite, 
future of chercher, choisir, entendre, with the pronoun 
objects ‘him,’ ‘you,’ ‘them’ (m.), ‘us,’ ‘me,’ ‘them’ (/.), 
‘her’: §480, B. 

B. Students ask and answer questions, using the object 
pronouns in the answers. 


19. DIX-NEUVIEME LEQON [diz ncevjem] 
LE MAGASIN 


i 


183. Conjunctive Pronouns (cf. §§ 169-172): 


Direct object 

1. me [mg], me 

2. (te [ta], thee) 

3. le [la], him, it ( m .) 
3. la [la], her, it (/.) 


Indirect object 
me [ma], to me 
(te [ta], to thee) 
lui [lyi], to him 
lui [lyi], to her 


1. nous [nu], us nous [nu], to us 

2. vous [vu], you vous [vu], to you 

3. les [le], them leur [IceJr], to them 

Note 1. Direct and indirect object pronouns are alike except in 
the third person. 

Note 2. In English the preposition to before indirect objects of 
persons is omitted after certain verbs: Give him a book = give to him; 


§ 184 


LEgON XIX 


107 


Sell him = sell to him. The indirect object pronoun is always used here 
in French. Of course, as in English, direct object pronouns are also 
used with these verbs: Give him it = give it to him; Sell him it = sell it to 

Je le donne, I give it 

Je lui donne, I give him, her ( = to him, to her) 

H l’a montre, He showed it 
H lui a montre, He showed (to) him (or her) 

Nous le dirons, We shall say it 

Nous leur dirons, We shall say to them (tell them) 

Elle lui a repondu, She answered him (or her) 

Note 3. Demander and acheter take indirect objects of persons. 

Je le demande, I ask it 

Je demande a mon ami, I ask my friend 

Je lui demande, I ask him 

Nous l’achetons, We buy it 

Nous lui achetons, We buy from him or for him 


VOCABULARY 


184. 

cohter [kute], to cost 
la cravate [kravat], necktie 
la dentelle [datel], lace 
le dimanche [dima:$], Sunday 
dire [di:r], to say, tell 
encore [aka:r], yet 
le faux-col [fo kal], collar 
la modiste [modist], milliner 
montrer [motre], to show 


le mouchoir [mu$wa:r], hand¬ 
kerchief 

pauvre [po:vr], poor 
le ruban [ryba], ribbon 
tout de suite [tu da syit], im¬ 
mediately 

le velours [valuir], velvet 
, le vetement [vetmd], garment 
(pi.), clothes 
vingt [ve], twenty 


185. DRILL 


1 . We buy it; we bought it 

2. We shall tell him; I showed 

her 

3. He does not answer me; will 

they choose her? 

4. They will tell you; I find 

her 


Nous l’achetons; nous .l’avons 
achete 

Nous lui dirons; je lui ai montre 

II ne me repond pas; la choisiront- 
ils? 

Hs vous diront; je la trouve 


108 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 186 


5. Will he carry me? I asked 

her 

6 . You will tell them; I like her 

7. She showed your brother; 

we like him 

8 . I shall answer them; they 

do not like them 

9. You will tell it; I look for 

her 

10 . I shall not tell your friend; 

she asked him 

11. They answer him; he shows 

us 

12. He showed the boy; will she 

tell them? 

13. Does she ask me? I shall 

show them 

14. We shall answer the teach¬ 

ers; we answer them 

15. I am not looking for her 


Est-ce qu’il me portera? je lui ai 
demande 

Vous leur direz; je l’aime 

Elle a montre a votre frere; nous 
l’aimons 

Je leur repondrai; ils ne les 
aiment pas 

Vous le direz; je la cherche 

Je ne dirai pas a votre ami; elle 
lui a demande 

Ils lui repondent; il nous montre 

II a montre au gargon; est-ce 
qu’elle leur dira? 

Est-ce qu’elle me demande? je 
leur montrerai 

Nous repondrons aux maitres; 
nous leur repondons 

Je ne la cherche pas 


186. Reading. Mon mari m’a demande dimanche: 
«Ma chere Anne, voulez-vous aller a Feglise?)) Je lui ai 
rdpondu tout de suite: ((Non, Pierre, je ne peux pas aller 
k Feglise avec vous. Le chapeau de velours gris que la mo- 
5 diste m’a vendu n’est pas assez beau. J’ai commande mardi 
un plus beau chapeau avec des rubans bleus et de la den- 
telle blanche, pour porter le dimanche. La modiste nFen 
a vendu un qui me coute cinquante francs, mais elle ne Fa 
pas encore fini.» «Et le petit chapeau de soie bleue avec de 
io la dentelle noire et des rubans de velours rouge, que je vous 
ai achete, oh est-il?» m’a demande mon mari. Je lui ai 
rdpondu: ((Une pauvre femme qui a perdu son mari, et qui 
a cinq petits enfants, est venue ici me demander du travail. 
Je n’en ai pas trouve k lui donner, mais je lui ai donne une 
15 vieille robe, et comme elle a deux petites filles, je leur ai 
donn£ des bas, et le petit chapeau aussi.)) 


§187] 


LEgON XIX 


109 


Pierre m’a demande tout de suite: «Ne lui avez-vous 
pas donne des cravates et des faux-cols et des mouchoirs 
de soie?)> Je lui ai repondu: ((Oh, non, Pierre! Mais je 
lui ai donne pour ses petits jargons un pantalon de laine 20 
noire tres vieux et un habit tres vieux aussi, votre habit bleu, 

et un pardessus de laine 
grise.)) — ((Voulez-vous me 
dire une chose?)) m’a de¬ 
mande Pierre. ((Oh avez- 25 
vous trouve le vieux pan¬ 
talon de laine noire, l’habit 
bleu, le pardessus gris?)) — 
((Dans la chambre a cou- 
cher.)) — ((Bon!» m’a repondu 30 
Pierre, ((dans quelle chambre 
sont mon oncle et mon cou¬ 
sin?)) — ((Dans votre petite 
chambre en haut, Pierre.)) — 
((Dans ma chambre! Les 35 
pauvres vous ont demande 
un habit et vous leur avez 
donne l’habit de mon oncle; 
ils vous ont demande un pan¬ 
talon et vous leur avez donne 40 
son pantalon, un pardessus 
et vous leur avez donne le pardessus de mon cousin! Ne 
voulez-vous pas leur donner maintenant leurs cravates, 
leurs faux-cols et leurs mouchoirs aussi?)) 

187. Resume. Pierre demande; Anne repond; chapeau 
gris; plus beau chapeau; chapeau de soie; pauvre femme, 
travail; vetements pour enfants; cravates, etc.; pantalon, 
habit, pardessus; vetements de 1’oncle et du cousin. 

188. Oral Drill. 1 . They show him; he showed us. 2. I 
shall not ask the milliner; she asks me. 3. Will they give 



Mais je lui ai donne une 
vieille robe 



110 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 189 


you?; you will give to them. 4. Did we answer them?; they 
did not answer us. 5. He asked for me; I asked for him. 

6 . She asked him; he asked her. 7. He sold it; he sold 
him. 8. Will he not show his friend?; he did not show him. 
9. Will you not answer them?; they answered you. 10. They 
will give him; he gave to them. 11. Will she tell you?; 
you will tell her. 12. Did you give some?; I gave some. 
13. We will speak to them. 14. They will speak to him. 
15. She showed him the ribbon. 16. He shows her the hand¬ 
kerchiefs. 17. The milliner gives her the hat. 18. The 
tailor gave him the collars and neckties. 


ii 


DIALOGUE 


189. 

1. At what price will you sell 

me an overcoat? 

2. I have many fine overcoats. 

I will sell you one of gray 
wool at 50 francs 

3. I have not enough money 

to give you so much. I 
wish to buy a suit also 

4. I can sell you a black cot¬ 

ton overcoat very cheap. 
There is one at 25 francs 
50 centimes 

5. Will you show me some hats 

now? 

6. There are some very fine 

hats of black velvet! Do 
you want one? 

7. What’s the price of it? 

8. I will sell you the beauti¬ 

ful hat which you have 
there at 5 francs 


A quel prix me vendrez-vous un 
pardessus? 

J’ai beaucoup de beaux pardes¬ 
sus. Je vous en vendrai un de 
laine grise a cinquante francs 
Je n’ai pas assez d’argent pour 
vous donner tant. Je veux 
acheter un costume aussi 
Je peux vous vendre un pardessus 
de coton noir tres bon marche. 
En voila un a vingt-cinq francs 
cinquante centimes 
Voulez-vous me montrer des cha¬ 
peaux maintenant? 

Voila de tres beaux chapeaux de 
velours noir! En voulez-vous 
un? 

Quel en est le prix? 

Je vous vendrai le beau chapeau 
que vous avez la a cinq francs 


§ 190] 


LEgON XIX 


111 


9 . Now you will show me some 
neckties and some collars, 
if you have any to show 
me 

10 . If I have any! Don’t ask 

me if I have any, sir! I 
have many! 

11 . Will you show me some cra¬ 

vats of blue or red silk? 

12 . There they are, the red 

(ones) and the blue. Will 
you choose some, sir? 

13 . Thanks! You can give me 

two blue cravats 


Maintenant vous me montrerez 
des cravates et des faux-cols, 
si vous en avez a me montrer 

Si j’en ai! Ne me demandez pas 
si j’en ai, monsieur! J’en ai 
beaucoup! 

Voulez-vous me montrer des cra¬ 
vates de soie bleue ou rouge? 

Les voila, les rouges et les bleues! 
En choisirez-vous, monsieur? 

Merci! Vous pouvez me donner 
deux cravates bleues 


190. Conversation. 1 . What did the wife ask her hus¬ 
band? 2. What did the husband answer his wife? 3. What 
hat did the wife order? 4. For whom did the poor woman 
ask for clothes? 5. Did Anne give any to the poor woman? 
6. What clothes did she not give? 7. What did she give? 
8. Where did Anne find the clothes that she gave the poor 
woman? 9. Where are Peter’s uncle and cousin? 10. Will 
they wear their old clothes? 

191. Theme. Tuesday I entered a store and asked a 
clerk to show me some gray suits. He showed me one. I 
asked him: “What is the price of this suit?” He answered 
me: “It is not dear; it is very cheap.” I answered him: “I 
have not much money; I have very little. I shall have 
more money soon, perhaps, but I haven’t much yet.” He 
answered me: “You haven’t enough money to (pour) buy 
your clothes here.” I answered him: “I shall look for a 
clerk who will sell clothes to a poor school-master.” He 
answered me: “You will not find any.” I answered him: “I 
do not like your store. I bought an overcoat, a hat, some 
handkerchiefs, collars and neckties here, and I have always 
bought many things in your store, but I shall not ask you to 


112 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 192 


(de) sell me my clothes now. If I have not enough money 
15 to (pour) buy my clothes in your store, you will lose a little 
too. I cannot buy much because I am poor, but I can tell 
my friends to (de) buy their clothes in the store which is at 
the street-corner. There are fewer clerks there, but they 
will not ask the poor how much money they have.” 

192. Exercises. A. Use the direct object pronouns 
‘him/ ‘you/ ‘them’ (m.), ‘us/ ‘them’ (/.), ‘her/ with the 
following verbs: montrer, demander, donner in present , past 
indefinite, future: § 480, B. 

B. Use the corresponding indirect object pronouns with 
the same verbs. 


20. VINGTlilME LEQON [vetjem] 

Review 

1 

193. 1 . I shall leave them. 2. You are carrying him. 
3. We buy them. 4. You will show her. 5. I answer her. 
6. I will answer him. 7. You will ask for some. 8. Are 
you calling us? 9. We are not calling you. 10. He will say 
it. 11. Will you say it? 12. We will not buy it. 13. Do 
you like it? 14. I do not like it. 15. She will like him. 
16. He liked her. 17. She did not carry them to the tailor’s. 
18. He answered her immediately. 19. She answers him 
always. 20. He ordered some Sunday. 21. They will not 
order any Tuesday. 22. I am asking for some. 23. We 
will not carry them to the milliner’s. 24. You ask him. 
25. We answered them immediately. 26. How many 
things you will say to them! 27. The clerk speaks to her 
always. 28. The gray woolen coats cost little money. 
29. How much money? 30. Much money. 31. More 


§ 194 ] 


LEgON XX 


113 


money than the trousers. 32. Less money than the over¬ 
coats. 33. How many collars, and how many cravats will 
he sell you? 34. Many collars and enough cravats. 
35. Enough collars, but few cravats. 

n 

194. 1 . We will carry them immediately. 2. I will call 
her Sunday or Tuesday. 3. The coachman will answer him. 
4. The travelers perhaps are answering her. 5. The mil¬ 
liner will show her a hat. 6. She has not asked her the 
price yet. 7. She asks her husband always for a little 
money. 8. The clerk sells us more woolen suits than the 
tailor. 9. The traveler brings him many things. 10. What 
will you say to them? 11. I show her some gray ribbons 
and some white lace. 12. Show the travelers some cotton 
handkerchiefs. 13. I have shown them some blue silk 
cravats and some collars. 14. We call the cabby and give 
him two francs and fifty centimes. 15. We called the 
waiter and asked him for the bill-of-fare. 16. The tailor 
will tell him that the woolen overcoat and the gray cotton 
trousers are very cheap. 17. If you buy the stockings and 
dresses very cheaply, you will sell them dear. 18. I have 
not sent him the five cotton suits yet. 19. She asks him for 
a big glass of water. 20. I am poor because I have not 
enough money. 21. If you have not much money you are 
poor. 22. The tailors have more coats than you, but fewer 
overcoats. 23. They have enough of them and they do 
not cost them much. 


114 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 195 


21. VINGT ET UNlfiME LEQON [ve te ynjem] 

L’EGLISE 

i 

195. Present Participle (endings of the three conjuga¬ 
tions) : 

I .giving II. finishing III .selling 

donn ant [dona] fin iss ant [finisa] vend ant [vada] 

196. Present Participle of avoir and etre : 

having being 

ay ant [eja] 6t ant [eta] 

Past Participle of avoir and etre: 

eu [y], had ete [ete], been 

197. Future of avoir and etre: 

I shall have , etc. I shall be, etc. 

j’aur ai [ 3 ore], je ser ai [39 sore], 

etc., as in § 147 etc., as in § 147 

198. Prepositions, except en, govern the Infinitive. The 
French do not say ‘forgoing/ ‘ without going/ etc.; they say 
‘for to go/ ‘without to go/ etc. The only preposition which 
governs the present participle, as all do in English, is en, in. 

pour aller, for going 
sans partir, without departing 
apres avoir repondu, after having answered 
avant de finir, before finishing 
But en allant, in going; en repondant, etc. 

199. In English the infinitive is sometimes preceded by to 
and sometimes not. We say ‘ I dare to go/ but ‘ you dare not go/ 

‘ he is able to go/ but ‘ he can go.’ In French 

(1) the infinitive may stand alone, 

(2) may be preceded by de, 

(3) may be preceded by a. 


§ 200] 


LEgON XXI 


115 


As in English, it is what goes before , not the infinitive itself, that 
determines the presence or absence of a preposition: e.g. aller 
is followed directly by the infinitive, oublier by de -1-infinitive, 
apprendre by a+infinitive. 

(1) Nous allons partir, We are going to leave 

(2) H a oublie de venir, He forgot to come 

(3) H apprend a lire, He is learning to read 

Cf. II y a peu a voir, There is little to see. 

This usage can be learned only by observation, and is not of 
great importance for the beginner. 


VOCABULARY 


200 . 

bonjour! [bo 3 u:r], good day! 
conduire [kSdyiir], to conduct, 
drive 

la dame [dam], lady 

deja [de 3 a], already 

dit [di], past participle of dire 

etonner [etone], to astonish 

de bonne heure [do bon ce:r], early 

le jour [ 3 u:r], day 

mademoiselle [madmwazel], Miss 

le matin [mate], morning 


le monde [mo:d], world, people 
la musique [myzik], music 
le plaisir [plezi:r], pleasure 
presque [presko], almost 
puis Ipyi], then 
le sermon [sermo], sermon 
tard [ta:r], late 

tous les (jours) [tu le], every 
(day) 

voir [vwa:r], to see; past participle 
vu [vy] 


201 . 

1. Being; having been 

2. Having; having had 

3. I shall have; I have had 

4. I shall be; I have been 

5. We shall have; we have said 

6. You shall be; you have been 

7. In speaking; in finishing 

8. Without being; without hav¬ 

ing 

9. In losing; in building 

10. She will be; they will have 


DRILL 

Etant; ayant etS 
Ayant; ayant eu 
J’aurai; j’ai eu 
Je serai; j’ai ete 
Nous aurons; nous avons dit 
Vous serez; vous avez ete 
En parlant; en finissant 
Sans etre; sans avoir 

En perdant; en b&tissant 
Elle sera; ils auront 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


116 


[§ 202 


11. To have seen; to have said 

12. Without having been; with¬ 

out having had 

13. Before going; after having 

spoken 

14. Without going out; for de¬ 

parting 

15. Having gone out; having 

said 

16. Having answered; having 

come 

17. He will not have; she will 

not be 

18. Has she had? has he been? 

19. Not having been; not hav¬ 

ing had 

20. You will not have; you will 

not be 


Avoir vu; avoir dit 

Sans avoir ete; sans avoir eu 

Avant d’aller; apres avoir parle 

Sans sortir; pour partir 

Etant sorli; ayant dit 

Ayant repondu; etant venu 

H n’aura pas; elle ne sera pas 

A-t-elle eu? a-t-il ete? 

N’ayant pas ete; n’ayant pas eu 

Vous n’aurez pas; vous ne serez 
pas 


202. Reading. En allant a l’eglise dimanche matin j’ai 
vu beaucoup de magasins. Mais presque tous les maga- 
sins sont fermes le dimanche et il n’y a pas beaucoup de 
monde sur les trottoirs. II y a tres peu a voir dans les rues 
5 le dimanche. Je suis montee dans une voiture et j’ai de¬ 
mands au cocher de me conduire a l’eglise. La ville n’est 
pas tres grande et je suis arrivee a l’eglise de bonne heure. 
Toutes mes amies sont venues plus tard et elles ont ete 
etonnees de me voir deja arrivee. Apres avoir eu le plaisir 
io d’entendre un tres beau sermon, je suis sortie de l’eglise. 
En allant au pare ou il y a toujours de la musique le di¬ 
manche, j’ai perdu mon mouchoir. Au coin d’une grande 
rue j’ai vu un petit magasin ou j’ai achete un mouchoir qui 
m’a coute un franc cinquante. Qu’est-ce que ma tante me 
15 dira et qu’est-ce que je lui repondrai? Mon oncle, en me 
dormant le mouchoir que j’ai perdu, m’a dit: ((Yoila un 
tres beau mouchoir de soie. Ne le perdez pas parce qu’il 
est vieux; un de mes parents l’a donne a votre tante. C’est 


LEgON XXI 


117 


§ 203] 


de la soie frangaise.» J’ai perdu tant de mouchoirs! Ten 
perds un presque tous les jours. 

203. Resume. Eglise; magasins; monde; voir; voiture; 
arrivee; amies; sermon; pare; magasin; tante; oncle; soie; 
parents; perdre. 

204. Oral Drill. 1 . Where have you been? 2. What 
have you had? 3. Having been seen. 4. Having had some 
ribbons. 5. Not having seen the carriage. 6. They have 
been seen. 7. Who has been here? 8. You have been there. 
9. Who said it? 10. They said it. 11. She was astonished. 
12. Have you been at church? 13. We have not been there. 
14. Has he had a carriage? 15. In giving her a hand¬ 
kerchief. 16. In finishing the sermon. 17. Have you heard 
the sermon? 18. In answering her. 19. Where will you be? 
20. Shall we have the pleasure? 21. I shall have seen him. 
22. Not having lost my handkerchief. 23. Your hand¬ 
kerchiefs will be lost. 24. We shall have lost two of them. 
25. Will they have flowers? 26. Will he not be seen? 27. In 
finishing. 28. Having been almost finished. 29. Without 
driving the carriage. 30. Before answering them. 


ii 

205. DIALOGUE 


1. Good day, sir! 

2. Good day, Miss! 

3. I saw you at church 

4. Yes, I went there to hear 

the sermon 

5. You astonish me! You did 

not go to church to see 
the people? 

6. No, I did not see the fair 

ladies. I heard a very 
fine sermon and then I 
went out (left) 


Bonjour, monsieur! 

Bonjour, mademoiselle! 

Je vous ai vu & Peglise 

Oui, je suis alle la pour entendre 
le sermon 

Vous m’etonnez! Vous n’etes 
pas alle a Peglise pour voir le 
monde? 

Non, je n’ai pas vu les belles 
dames. J’ai entendu un tres 
beau sermon et puis je suis 
sorti 


118 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 206 


7. And then you went to the 

park? 

8. No, I don’t like music and 

there is some there every 
Sunday 

9. You will have the pleasure 

of hearing music at your 
aunt’s later 

10. No, I shall not have the 

pleasure of hearing any at 
my aunt’s. Before leaving 
the church I said to her: 

“I shall not be there” 

11. There’s my carriage! If you 

wish to get in, I will ask 
the coachman to drive us 
to your aunt’s before driv¬ 
ing me to my mother’s 

12. Thanks! There will be too 

many people there, and 
too much music! 

206. Conversation. 1 . What did you see in arriving at 
church? 2. Did you see any ladies in the street who have 
been at church? 3. Have they been in the stores? 4. Did 
the coachman go to church? 5. Who arrived at church 
early and who arrived late? 6. Did you hear the music at 
the park? 7. What did your aunt say because you lost 
your handkerchief? 8. What did you answer her? 9. Can 
you buy handkerchiefs on Sunday? 10. Did you lose a 
silk or a cotton handkerchief in going to church? 

207. Theme. Sunday morning, getting into my carriage 
with one of my friends, I went to hear the sermon at church. 
Not having started very early, we arrived late and we did 
not hear all the sermon. On going out of the church we met 

5 some friends who said to us: “Having had the pleasure of 


Et puis vous etes alle au pare? 

Non, je n’aime pas la musique et 
il y en a la tous les dimanches 

Vous aurez le plaisir d’entendre 
de la musique chez votre tante 
plus tard 

Non, je n’aurai pas le plaisir 
d’en entendre chez ma tante. 
Avant de partir de l’eglise je 
lui ai dit: «Je ne serai pas la» 

Voila ma voiture! Si vous voulez 
monter, je demanderai au co¬ 
cker de nous conduire chez 
votre tante avant de me con¬ 
duire chez ma mere 

Merci! II y aura trop de monde 
la, et trop de musique! 


§ 208] 


LEgON XXI 


119 


hearing a fine sermon and having heard much good music 
also, we will have the pleasure now of going with you to see 
the city. Get into our carriage! You will be astonished! 
You will find the stores all closed, the people going out- of 
the houses, walking in the street, meeting friends, talking, io 
answering, buying flowers, choosing them, giving them to the 
ladies, going to the park, hearing the music, losing their 
way and seeking it, and then arriving at the house and 
dining, in (en) a word having a great deal of (much) 
pleasure.” We got into the carriage, and after having been 14 
at the park, and having talked and walked and dined with 
our friends, we went to the house of my aunt. 

208. Exercises. A. Use in sentences en with the present 
participle of the following verbs: 

go finish reply 

show choose lose 

B. Finish the following, using repondre, chercher, parler 
or voir: 

11 est monte dans sa chambre pour . . . 

11 m’a vu sans . . . 

11 est parti apres avoir . . . 

Elle est sortie avant de . . . 

C. Conjugate: 

I have had few friends. I have been astonished. 

D. Conjugate: 

I shall have some milk. I shall be seen. 

E. Drill on present, past indefinite, future of avoir and 
etre: § 480, B. 


120 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 209 


22, VINGT-DEUXlfiME LEgON [vet d0zjem] 

CHEZ LE MARCHAND DE TABAC 


i 


209. Conjunctive Pronouns 


Direct object 
1 me [ma], me 

2. (te [ta], thee) 

3. le [la], him, it 
3. la [la], her, it 

1. nous [nu], us 

2. vous [vu], you 

3. les [le] (m.), them 
3. les [le] (/.), them 


Indirect object 
me [ma], to me 
(te [ta], to thee) 
lui [lyi], to him 
lui [lyi], to her 
nous [nu], to us 
vous [vu], to you 
leur [loe:r] (m.), to them 
leur [loe:r] (/.), to them 


Disjunctive 

Pronouns 

moi [mwa], me 
(toi [twa], thee) 
lui [lyi], him 
elle [el], her 
nous [nu], us 
vous [vu], you 
eux [ 0 ], them 
elles [el], them 


210 . Conjunctive pronouns are always objects of verbs. 
Disjunctive pronouns are used: 


1. After prepositions: avec moi, sans lui, chez eux, etc. 

2. After c’est, it is; c’est moi, c’est lui, etc. 1 

3. Where the pronoun is used alone, i.e. neither as subject nor 
object of a verb: 

Qui est la? Moi! Who is there? I! 

Moi, je suis alle, I went 

4. Where the pronoun is used as part of a compound subject: 

Son pere et lui sont alles, His father and he went 

211 . VOCABULARY 


l’allumette [lalymet] (/.), match boire [bwa:r], to drink; past parti - 
aujourd’hui [o 3 urdyi], to-day ciple bu [by] 

autre [o:tr], other 

1 The French say: 

c’est moi, it is I c’est nous, it is we 

(c’est toi, it is thou) c’est vous, it is you 

c’est lui, it is he ce sont eux, it is they 

c’est elle, it is she ce sont elles, it is they 

But according to a decree of the French Minister of Public Instruction 
c’est eux, c’est elles are not incorrect,. 


§ 212 ] 


LE£ON XXII 


121 


la boite [bwa:t], box 
la bouteille [buteij], bottle 
le cafe fkafe], coffee; cafe 
le cigare [sigair], cigar 
la cigarette [sigarct], cigarette 
& cote de [a kote da], beside 
done [d5], therefore, accordingly, 
then 

fumer ffyme], to smoke 

212 . 

1 . With him; with them (m.) 

2 . Without her; without them 

c f■) 

3. For them (m.); for him 

4. Of her; of them (/.) 

5. Beside me; beside us 

6 . Near him; near her 

7. It is he; it is they (m.) 

8 . It is she; it is they (/.) 

9. At his house; at their (m.) 

house 

10. At her house; at their (/.) 

house 

11. It is we; it is I 

12 . At my house; at our house 

13. Who speaks? he and I 

14. Who came? she and he 

15. Who said it? I! 

16. At whose house? at theirs 

(/•) 

17. At your house; at his house 

18. He speaks with her 

19. She spoke with him 

20. My brother and I; his sister 

and he 


le marchand [mar$a], merchant, 
dealer 

la pipe [pip], pipe 
pres (de) [pre], near 
seul [soel], alone, only 
souvent [suva], often 
le tabac [taba], tobacco 
trois [trwa], three 
y 1 [i], there 


Avec lui; avec eux 
Sans elle; sans elles 

Pour eux; pour lui 
D’elle; d’elles 

A cote de moi; a cote de nous 
Pres de lui; pres d’elle 
C’est lui; ce sont eux 
C’est elle; ce sont elles 
Chez lui; chez eux 

Chez elle; chez elles 

J 

C’est nous; c’est moi 
Chez moi; chez nous 
Qui parle? lui et moi 
Qui est venu? elle et lui 
Qui l’a dit? moi! 

Chez qui? chez elles 

Chez vous; chez lui 

H parle avec elle 

Elle a parle avec lui 

Mon frere et moi; sa sceur et lui 


DRILL 


1 y is placed before verbs like conjunctive object-pronouns: nous y allons, 
we go there. 


122 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 213 


213. Reading. Un jour Madame Lef&vre et son mari 
sont sortis avec leur fils et leur fille pour aller diner dans 
un caf 6 . En entrant dans la rue Royale ils ont rencontr 6 
le frere de Monsieur Lefevre. Les enfants lui ont demand^ 

s de venir avec eux. Leur oncle leur a repondu: “Merci 
beaucoup, je n’aime pas a manger tout seul; mais venez 
avec moi au petit cafe qui est 14 au coin, a cote de P 6 glise. 
Aujourd’hui un de mes amis y conduira sa femme, et il 
m’a demande d’y venir aussi. Mais ils n’y sont pas encore 
io arrives. Ils n’y arriveront pas de bonne heure: ils dinent 
chez des parents. Voulez-vous venir avec moi?” Ils sont 
done alles avec lui, mais avant d’arriver au cafe le fr£re 
de Monsieur L&fevre est entre chez un marchand de tabac. 
II y a achete du tabac pour lui—il fume toujours la pipe— 
I5 et des cigarettes pour son ami. Il a achete aussi des cigares 
pour Monsieur Lef&vre. Le marchand lui a vendu trois 
boites d’allumettes; elles lui ont cout 6 vingt-cinq centimes 
la boite. Au caf 6 ils ont trouv 6 une table pr&s de la porte, 
devant la fenetre, dans la grande salle, ou il y a toujours 
20 beaucoup de families qui dinent. Le fils de Madame 
Lefevre lui a dit: “Voila un de mes amis! Je Pai vu tout 
de suite en entrant. Je veux lui demander de venir manger 
avec moi.” Pierre l’a appelA 

Les enfants ont beaucoup mang 6 , un peu trop, peut- 
25 etre. Ils ont aussi bu une bouteille de lait. Pierre a de¬ 
mande a son ami de venir bientot jouer chez lui; mais le 
pere de son ami a dit: “Non; il jouera chez nous.” Et puis 
le pauvre petit gargon est sorti avec son p&re, sa mere et 
sa soeur sans avoir repondu a Pierre: il a dine avec lui, 
3Q mais il jouera tout seul. Monsieur et Madame Lefevre, 
leur fille et leur fils sont sortis tard parce que Monsieur 
Lef&vre a fum 6 un cigare apres avoir bu son cafe. 

214. Resume. Madame Le4&vre, mari, fils, fille; oncle, 
demande, repondu; marchand de tabac; au cafe, table; ami 
de Pierre, p&re de l’ami; enfants, mange; oncle; jouer. 


§215] 


LEgON XXII 


123 


215. Oral Drill. 1. Without him; with her. 2. For me; 
for him. 3. With them (m.); without him. 4. Beside them 
(/.); near her. 5. It is I; it is he; it is she. 6. Is it we?; is 
it I? 7. Who spoke, he or she? 8. To whose house?; to 
our house. 9. At my house; at their (m.) house. 10. His 
mother and he; her father and she. 11. Who spoke — he, she, 
I, they (m.)? 12. She speaks of him. 13. He speaks for me. 
14. Who came—he or she? 15. We are near him. * 16. It is 
she who came. 17. Who will be there — he or I? 18. You 
are not near me. 19. We are not with them (m.). 20. Is 
it he or they (/.)? 

n 


DIALOGUE 


216 . 

1 . Will you (do you wish to) 

go to the cafd with me? 

2 . Yes, I will (wish to) go there 

with you 

3. Does your uncle want to go 

there with you and me? 

4. He? no. He has already 

breakfasted. 

5. That’s astonishing! I saw 

him at the tobacconist’s, 
and he said to me: “Come 
breakfast with me.” He 
bought a box of cigars 

6 . That’s not for him. He has 

three brothers: my father 
and two others. It’s for 
them 

7. He bought also some to¬ 

bacco. Is that for them 
also? 

8 . No, it’s for him; he always 

smokes a pipe. It’s they 
who will smoke the cigars 

9. Does he not smoke (smoke 

no) cigars? 


Voulez-vous aller au cafe avec 
moi? 

Oui, je veux y aller avec vous 

Est-ce que votre oncle veut y aller 
avec vous et moi? • 

Lui? non. II a deja dejeune 

C’est etonnant! Je l’ai vu chez 
le marchand de tabac, et il m’a 
dit: “Venez dejeuner avec 
moi.” II a achete une boite de 
cigar es 

Ce n’est pas pour lui. II a trois 
freres: mon pere et deux autres. 
C’est pour eux 

II a achete aussi du tabac. Est-ce 
pour eux aussi? 

Non, c’est pour lui; il fume tou- 
jours la pipe. Ce sont eux qui 
fumeront les cigares 

Est-ce qu’il ne fume pas de ci¬ 
gares? 


124 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 217 


10. No, he does not smoke any 

11 . There’s the cafe! My 

brother and I dine here 
very often 

12. Who then is that gentleman 

near the window? Ah! 
it’s Peter. Yes, it’s he 

13. And the two men with him? 

14. Those are two friends who 

are breakfasting with 
him. He is always with 
them 

15. I want some coffee. Wait¬ 

er! Coffee for me 

16. I’ll order some for myself 

also—no, some milk! 
We’ll drink, you coffee 
and I a bottle of milk 


Non, il n’en fume pas. 

Voila le cafe! Mon frere et moi 
nous dejeunons ici tres souvent 

Qui est done ce monsieur pres de 
la fenetre? Ah! e’est Pierre. 
Oui, e’est lui 

Et les deux messieurs avec lui? 

Ce sont deux amis qui dejeunent 
avec lui. II est toujours avec 
eux 

Moi, je veux du cafe. Garmon! 
du cafe pour moi! 

J’en commanderai pour moi aussi 
—non, du lait. Nous boirons, 
vous du cafe et moi une bou- 
teille de lait 


217. Conversation. 1 . Where did Mr, and Mrs. Lefevre 
go? 2. With whom did they go there? 3. Whom did they 
meet? 4. What did they ask him? 5. What did he answer 
them? 6. What did Mr. Lefevre’s brother buy for him? 
7. What did Peter say to his mother? 8. Did Peter’s friend 
come to put his chair beside him or beside her? 9. Did 
Peter’s uncle leave with his brother’s family or without 
them? 10. Will Peter’s friend play at his house? 

218. Theme. My father told me that he met your 
uncle at a cafe the other day. One of their friends came in 
all alone. He came to put his chair beside them and my 
father and he drank coffee, but your uncle said: “I have 
not dined yet,” and he ordered a bottle of milk and some 
meat. Then he smoked his pipe. My father often smokes 


LEQON XXIII 


125 


a pipe at our house, but he likes to smoke cigars at the 
cafes. Your uncle said to him: “7 smoke a pipe at the caf6; 
but my wife wishes that I smoke cigars if I am with her.” 
My father replied to him: “7 smoke a pipe if I am at my 
house; I cannot smoke cigars there because my wife does 
not like them. It is she that chooses.” 

219. Exercises. A. Use the disjunctive pronouns ‘him/ 
‘us/ ‘them’ (m.), ‘me/ ‘you/ ‘her/ ‘them* (/.), with the 
following prepositions: ‘for/ ‘without/ ‘with/ ‘after.’ 

B. Using the same pronouns, fill the following blank: 
‘It is — V 


23. VINGT-TROISIJiME LEQON [vet trwazjem] 

LES JOURS DE LA SEMAINE 
I 

( ce [so] (m.) 
cette [set] (/.) 
ces [se] (pi.), these, those. 

ce livre, this or that book 
cette encre, this or that ink 
ces gar sons, these or those boys 
ces dames, these or those ladies 

Note 1. Before a masculine noun or adjective beginning with a 
vowel use cet [set]: cet ami, this (or that) friend; cet homme, this or that 
man (cf. p. 25, note 3). 

Note 2. If it is necessary to distinguish this and that before nouns, 
add to the noun -ci (here) for this and -la (there) for that. 

ce livre-ci et cette plume-la, this book and that pen 
ces livres-ci et ces plumes-la, these books and those pens 


126 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 221 


221. Used without a noun this = ceci [sosi] , that = cela [sola]. 

Ceci est bon, This is good 
Voulez-vous cela? Do you wish that? 

222. Les Jours de la Semaine: 

dimanche [dima:§], Sunday 
lundi [lcedi], Monday 
mardi [mardi], Tuesday 
mercredi [merkrodi], Wednesday 
jeudi [ 3 cedi], Thursday 
vendredi [vadradi], Friday 
samedi [samdi], Saturday 


VOCABULARY 


223 . 

l’apres-midi [lapre midi] (/.), 
afternoon 

avant 1 [ava], before 

bien [bje], well; eh [e] bien! well! 

derriere [derjeir], behind 

ecouter [ekute], to listen to 

enfin [afe], finally, at last 

la fois 2 [fwa], time; une—, once; 

deux—, twice 
le gateau [gato], cake 
I’heure 2 [lce:r] (/.), hour (time) 


l’homme [lorn], man 
joli feoli], pretty 
le legume [legym], vegetable 
(le) midi [midi], noon 
la note [not], bill 
oublier [ublie], to forget 
payer [peje], to pay, pay for 
la semaine [somen], week 
seulement [scelma], only 
si [si], so 

le soir [swa:r], evening 


DRILL 


224 . 

1 . This boy; this girl 

2. This man; these men 

3. This bill and that bill 

4. These boys and those girls 

5. These men and those men 

6 . That is bought; this is sold 


Ce garfon; cette fille 
Cet homme; ces hommes 
Cette note-ci et cette note-la 
Ces garfons et ces filles 
Ces hommes-ci et ces hommes-la 
Cela est achete; ceci est vendu 


1 avant =before (of time): before ten o'clock; devant ^before (of place)/ in 
front of: before the house. Note that avant is followed by de before an in¬ 
finitive: avant de partir. 

2 heure =£ime of day: what time is it? 

fois =time in a series: four times, five times, etc. 
temps =time in all other senses; also weather . 


§ 225] 


LEgON XXIII 


127 


7. This caf6 and that cafe 

8 . This is for me; that is for 

him 

9. Behind these houses 

10 . Eat these vegetables! 

11. Sell this tobacco for him! 

12. Do you like this or that? 

13. This man speaks of him 

14. Those ladies came with me 

three times 

15. This lady said that once 

16. This cafe has been closed 

twice 

17. Do you want this cake or 

that cake? 

18. This soup is for them (/.) 

19. This meat is not for him 

20 . He wants that soup, I want 

this soup 


Ce cafe-ci et ce cafe-la 
Ceci est pour moi; cela est pour 
lui 

Derriere ces maisons 
Mangez ces legumes! 

Vendez ce tabac pour lui! 
Aimez-vous ceci ou cela? 

Cet homme parle de lui 
Ces dames sont venues avec moi 
trois fois 

Cette dame a dit cela une fois 
Ce cafe a ete ferme deux fois 

Voulez-vous ce gateau-ci ou ce 
gateau-la? 

Ce potage est pour elles 
Cette viande n’est pas pour lui 
II veut ce potage-D, je veux ce 
potage-ci 


225. Reading. Cette semaine je suis alle trois fois chez 
Henri [ari], sans le trouver. Je suis alle chez lui lundi soir, 
mercredi matin et mardi a midi. Cet homme est toujours 
sorti! C’est etonnant, cela! II est venu aussi trois fois 
chez moi cette semaine-ci, mais toujours un peu apres midi, s 
II ne m’a pas trouve. Cela n’est pas etonnant. Je dejeune 
a cette heure-la. II est venu jeudi soir et samedi matin, 
sans me trouver, mais ce matin il m’a enfin trouve. II est 
venu cette fois de tres bonne heure. II m’a demande: 
«Ou avez-vous done ete tous ces jours-ci?)> — «Moi! ficou- io 
tez ceci! Vous me trouverez tous les jours dans cette 
chambre, mais avant midi seulement. N’oubliez pas cela! 

A cette heure-la je dejeune au cafe. Vous avez vu cette 
grande eglise au coin de la rue? Eh bien! derriere cette 
dglise, dans un de ces petits batiments, il y a un petit cafe, is 
Vous Tavez peut-etre vu, pres de cette autre rue-la. Vous me 
trouverez toujours a midi dans ce petit cafe-la, le mardi, le 


128 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 225 


jeudi et le samedi, mais ces jours-la seulement. Le di- 
manche je suis chez ma tante. J’y mange tres bien: le po 
20 tage est bon, la viande est bonne, les legumes sont bons, et 



<J- Urmsher -fS *■* — J 


II y a un petit cafe 


quels gateaux! — et puis, il n’y a pas de note a payer ce 
jour-la! Le lundi je dejeune encore chez elle; le mercredi, 
en ville, chez mon oncle Pierre, Et le vendredi? demandez- 


































§ 226 ] 


LEgON XXIII 


129 


yous. Ce jour-la je dejeune a midi avec mon tailleur, ce 
petit homme qui m’a vendu ce costume-ci, et cet habit, 
et ces faux-cols, et cette belle cravate, et ce pardessus noir, 
et ce joli pantalon gris. Je vous dirai pourquoi je dejeune 
avec lui tous les vendredis. Ecoutez ceci! Je n’ai pas assez 
d’argent pour payer ces beaux costumes, ces belles cravates, 
cet habit, ce pardessus. Done, je donne a dejeuner tous les 
vendredis a ce pauvre homme!» 


226. Resume. Je cherche Henri; Henri me cherche; je 
dejeune; quand; ou; dimanche et lundi; la tante bonne 
cuisiniere; Toncle; le tailleur; qui paye, et pourquoi? 

227. Oral Drill. 1. This afternoon; this morning. 2. These 
cakes; this vegetable. 3. These vegetables; this cake. 
4. This bill and that bill. 5. These cakes and those cakes. 
6 . Pay this man! 7. Behind this house. 8. He likes this; 
I like that. 9. At last these boys came. 10. Having paid 
this man. 11. These bills which you paid. 1 2 3 12. You forgot 1 
them this time. 13. I have bought only these cakes. 
14. This tobacconist sells only tobacco. 15. Do you want 
this or that? 16. This cake is for this girl. 17. These 
vegetables are for this boy. 18. Did she come this evening? 
19. This is good; that is not good. 20. These cakes are so 
good! 

ii 


228. DIALOGUE 


1. How do you do, Henry! 

Always in this room! 
Always that old book in 
front of you! At what 
hour will you dine this 
afternoon? 

2. It’s Sunday to-day; I dine 

early 

3. In this cafd? 

i See p. 71, 


Bonjour, Henri [ari]! Toujours 
dans cette chambre! Toujours 
ce vieux livre devant vous! A 
quelle heure dinerez-vous cette 
apres-midi? 

C’est dimanche aujourd’hui; je 
dine de bonne heure 
Dans ce cafe-ci? 

footnote 1. 


130 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 228 


4. No, in that little cafd at the 

street-comer 

5. Where then?; in this street? 

6. No, in that other little street 

beside that big building 

7. I’ll dine with you, but I can¬ 

not wear this coat 

8. I like that black coat [very] 

much with those gray 
trousers 

9. I dine three times this week 

with friends 

10. With whom will you dine 

Tuesday? 

11. Tuesday — no, Wednesday, * 

I shall dine with that 
young man whom you 
saw at my house 

12. And Thursday? 

13. I dine at our home that day; 

but Friday I dine with John 

14. Ah! that good John! He’s 

your cousin, isn’t he? 

15. That man my cousin! No, 

he’s my tailor 

16. And with whom do you dine 

Saturday this week? 

17. With my cousin, that pretty 

cousin who has come to 
Paris, but for this week 
only 

18. What day will you dine 

with me again? 

19. Tuesday of this week per¬ 

haps — no — Monday! 


Non, dans ce petit cafe au coin de 
la rue 

Oft done?; dans cette rue-ci? 

Non, dans cette autre petite rue a 
cote de ce grand batiment-la 

Je dinerai avec vous, mais je ne 
peux pas porter cet habit-ci 

J’aime beaucoup cet habit noir 
avec ce pantalon gris 

Je dine trois fois cette semaine 
avec des amis 

Avec qui dinerez-vous mardi? 

Mardi — non, mercredi, je dine 
avec ce jeune homme gue vous 
avez vu chez moi 

Et jeudi? 

Je dine chez nous ce jour-la; mais 
vendredi je dine avec Jean 

Ah! ce bon Jean! C’est votre 
cousin, n’est-ce pas? 1 

Cet homme-la mon cousin! Non, 
c’est mon tailleur 

Et avec qui dinez-vous le samedi 
de cette semaine? 

Avec ma cousine, cette jolie 
cousine qui est venue a Paris, 
mais pour cette semaine seule- 
ment 

Quel jour dinerez-vous encore 
avec moi? 

Le mardi de cette semaine peut- 
etre — non — lundi! 


n’est-ce pas? is widely used in French as a sort of question mark. 
C’est lui, n’est-ce pas? It’s he, isn’t it? 

Vous v allez. n’est-ce pas? You are going there, aren’t you? 


§ 229] 


LEgON XXIII 


131 


229. Conversation. 1 . How many times did you go to 
your friend’s house Tuesday and Wednesday? 2. What days 
did you go to his house? 3. Did he find you Thursday or 
Saturday when he came to your house? 4. Did he look for 
you at your house this morning? 5. Where can your friend 
find you and at what hour? 6. At what hour do you breakfast 
Friday? 7. Do you breakfast at home every day? 8. At 
whose house do you lunch Sundays and Mondays? 9. What 
do you eat at your aunt’s house? 10. Will you dine with 
me at the little cafe behind the church? 

230. Theme. We went to your house this week three 
times on Monday, five times on Tuesday and once or twice 
on Wednesday. You were not in this room Monday evening, 
you were not in this house Tuesday morning, and we did 
not find you Wednesday afternoon in that little cafe behind 5 
those two large churches at the corner of this street between 
this big building and that little building. Where have you 
been all this week? Have you not breakfasted in this cafe 
before Thursday or in that cafe near the church before 
Friday? We dined in this cafe Thursday and Saturday, and io 
in that cafe Friday. In that cafe the soup and meat are very 
good; in this cafe the vegetables are good. Eat one of these 
cakes, and I will give you a glass of this good milk. This 
glass is for you—I have drunk from that glass. And now, 
with these cakes, this bottle, these glasses and this good 15 
milk in front of you, you will tell me where you have been 
all this week. 

231. Exercises. A. Put the words for this (that) and 
these before the following: 

cake house hour cigarette 

bill vegetable week evening 

bottle caf6 man friend (m.) 


132 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 232 


B. Use ceci and cela with the following verbs: 

like choose finish 

forget listen to sell 

pay hear 

C. What are the days of the week? 

D. Drill on present, past indefinite, future of oublier: 
§ 480, B. 


24. VINGT-QUATRIEME LEQON [vet katriem] 

L’HEURE 


i 


232. The French do not say I am hungry, I am thirsty; 
they say I have hunger, I have thirst. 

J’ai faim [fe], I am hungry 
II a soif [swaf], He is thirsty 


233. On [5] ( = Latin homo, ‘man’) is much used in French; 
it corresponds to the English indefinite one, people, we, you, 
they. 

On dit qu’il perd beaucoup, They say he loses a great deal 
On ne dit pas cela en anglais, We don’t say that in English 


234. 1 un [de] 

2 deux [d0] 

3 trois [trwa] 

4 quatre [katr] 


5 cinq [sek] 

6 six [sis] 

7 sept [set] 

8 huit [yit] 


9 neuf [noef] 

10 dix [dis] 

11 onze [o:z] 

12 douze [du:z] 


Note. Pronunciation of cinq, six, sept, huit, neuf, dix: 


1. Used alone: 

[sek], 

[sis], [set], 

[yit], 

[noef]. 

[dis] 

2. Before a word beginning 
with a consonant 

[se]» 

[si], [se], 

[yi], 

[no], 

[di] 

3. Before a word beginning 
with a vowel 

[sek], 

[siz], [set], 

[yit], 

[ncev], 

[diz] 


§ 235] 


LEgON XXIV 


133 


235. The Clock. 

Quelle heure est-il? What time is it? 

H est une heure, It is one o’clock 

II est quatre heures, It is four o’clock 

II est huit heures dix, It is 8:10 

H est sept heures un quart. It is 7:15 

II est neuf heures et demie, It is 9:30 

H est neuf heures moins dix, It is 8:50 

II est neuf heures moins le quart. It is 8:45 

H est midi; il est minuit, It is 12 (noon); it is 12 (midnight) 

H est midi dix, It is 12:10 p.m. 

II est minuit et demi, It is 12:30 a.m. 

A quelle heure allez-vous? At what time do you go? 


VOCABULARY 


236. 

avancer [avase], to advance, be 
fast 

ensemble [asaibl], together 
mal [mal], badly 
la montre [mo:tr], watch 

237. 

1. What time is it? I’m hun¬ 

gry 

2. It’s one o’clock; it’s two 

o’clock 

3. It’s five or six o’clock by my 

watch 

4. It’s half past eight or nine 

5. Are you thirsty? Are you 

hungry? 

6. At what o’clock do you 

breakfast? 

7. At 11 o’clock or at noon 

8. At what hour do you break¬ 

fast in the morning? 

9. At a quarter before seven 


la pendule [padyl], clock 
quand [ka], when 
regarder [rogarde], to look at 
retarder [rotarde], to be slow 


Quelle heure est-il? J’ai faim 

H est une heure; il est deux heures 

II est cinq ou six heures a ma 
montre 

Il est huit heures et demie ou 
neuf heures 

Avez-vous soif? Avez-vous faim? 

A quelle heure dejeunez-vous? 

A onze heures ou a midi 

A quelle heure dejeunez-vous le 
matin? 

A sept heures moins un quart 


DRILL 


134 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 238 


10. And I at a quarter past 

seven 

11. When does one breakfast? 

12 . One breakfasts at nine or 

ten o’clock 

13. When did you finish the 

book? 

14. At midnight; at 12:15 a.m. 

15. I finished it at nine o’clock 

16. We finished it at 8:10 

17. And he at ten minutes of 

eight 

18. Are they hungry or thirsty? 

19. One is not hungry in the 

morning 

20. This watch is slow and that 

watch is fast 


Et moi a sept heures un quart 

Quand est-ce qu’on dejeune? 

On dejeune & neuf ou dix heures 

Quand avez-vous fini le livre? 

A minuit; a minuit un quart 
Je l’ai fini a neuf heures 
Nous l’avons fini a huit heures dix 
Et lui a huit heures moins dix 

Ont-ils faim ou soif? 

On n’a pas faim le matin 

Cette montre-ci retarde et cette 
montre-la avance 


238. Reading. Jean et moi nous allons diner ensemble 
mardi, jeudi, et samedi entre six et sept heures du soir. Ici 
en ville on dine entre cinq et sept ou huit heures du soir et 
on y dejeune entre sept et huit heures du matin. Jean est 
5 venu chez moi a six heures un quart. II m’a dit: ((N’avez- 
vous pas faim? A quelle heure allons-nous diner?)) J’ai 
repondu: «I1 n’est pas encore six heures. II est seulement 
cinq heures et demie a ma montre.)) ((Cette montre-la,)) 
me repond-il, ((ne marche pas bien. Est-ce qu’il n’y a pas 
de pendule dans cette maison-ci?» — «Allez voir dans 
cette chambre a cote, il y en a deux la.)) — ((Eh bien! II 
est seulement six heures a cette pendule-ci, mais il est deja 
sept heures dix a cette pendule-la! l’une retarde, l’autre 
avance, et les deux marchent mal. Il est sept heures moins 
is un quart a ma montre.)) — ((Ah! s’il est deja si tard, je 
partirai avec vous.)) 

Nous sommes done partis ensemble, lui et moi. Arrives 
au cafd, nous avons choisi une table sur le trottoir. Nous 
avons fini de diner a huit heures un quart. On a toujours 


§ 239] 


LEQON XXVI 


135 


faim le soir quand on n’a pas mange depuis onze heures 20 
ou midi. Apres notre diner nous avons caus 6 avec deux 
ou trois de nos amis qui dinent toujours au meme cafe, 
et qui y arrivent un quart d’heure ou une demi-heure avant 
nous. Jean a parle; moi, j’ai ecoute. A neuf heures nous 
sommes partis de la pour aller au pare ou il y a toujours 25 
de la musique entre neuf heures et demie et dix heures du 
soir le mardi et le jeudi. Nous sommes sortis du pare a 
dix heures un quart, mais il a sonne onze heures moins un 
quart quand je suis arrive chez moi. 

239. Resume. Nous dinons; quand; et les autres; Jean 
me dit; la montre; les deux pendules; la table au cafe; nos 
amis; Jean, mois; le pare; sorti. 

240. Oral Drill. 1. What time is it? Is it noon? 2. It’s 
half past twelve. 3. No, it’s a quarter of one. 4. Are you 
not hungry? 5. Yes, we will dine together at one. 6 . Are 
you thirsty? 7. No, but I am hungry. 8 . Where will you 
be this afternoon? 9. At the store at two o’clock. 10. At 
this store or that store? 11 . At one of these stores. 12 . I 
shall also be at church. 13. When? At half past four or 
five? 14. No, at six or seven. 15. When does one dine? 
16. At my aunt’s house? 17. One dines there at eleven 
o’clock. 18. No, one dines there at twelve o’clock. 19. 
Where did you go at nine o’clock? 20. I went to your 
house at 10:20, 21 . That is astonishing. Is your watch 
fast? 22 . No, it is fast. 23. I went there before half past 
ten. 24. Listen to this! 25. At what time do you eat in 
this cafe? 26. Look at that clock! 27. It’s a quarter past 
one. 28. That clock is slow. 29. It’s 1:20! 30. No, it’s 
1:30! 31. Shall we have milk? 32. Yes, and we’ll have 
cakes also. 33. These cakes are good 34. And this coffee? 
35. This coffee is good, that coffee is not good. 


136 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 241 


II 

241. DIALOGUE 


1. Are you not hungry? 

2. Yes, I’m hungry. What 

time is it? 

3. It’s half past seven. One is 

always hungry at that hour 

4. It is less late than that. It’s 

only ten minutes after six 

5. Your watch is wrong 

6. I have a clock there which 

is not slow. It is fast 

7. Well! We’ll look at this 

clock. Three o’clock? 
Four? Five? 

8. Twenty-six minutes of eight! 

9. Yes, I breakfasted before 

noon. I’m hungry 

10. And I am thirsty. We’ll 

dine at the cafe. One dines 
very well there. We’ve 
been there once already, 
on Monday of this week 

11. And your brother, where is 

he this evening? 

12. He dines at nine o’clock 

with one of his employees. 
He will arrive at the cafe 
only between eleven and 
twelve o’clock 

13. But what time is it now? Look 

at your watch. A quarter 
of eight already! We shall 
dine late this evening 

14. No, my watch is five or ten 

minutes fast 


Est-ce que vous n’avez pas faim? 

Oui, j’ai faim. Quelle heure est- 
il? 

II est sept heures et demie. On a 
toujours faim a cette heure-la 

II est moins tard que cela. II est 
seulement six heures dix 

Votre montre marche mal 

J’ai une pendule la qui ne retarde 
pas. Elle avance 

Eh bien! Nous regarderons cette 
pendule! Trois heures? Quatre 
heures? Cinq heures? 

Huit heures moins vingt-six mi¬ 
nutes! 

Oui, j’ai dejeune avant midi, moi. 
J’ai faim 

Et moi, j’ai soif. Nous dinerons 
au cafe. On y dine tres bien. 
Nous y avons ete deja une fois, 
le lundi de cette semaine-ci 

Et votre frere, oh est-il ce soir? 

II dine a neuf heures avec un de 
ses employes. II arrivera au 
cafe seulement entre onze 
heures et minuit 

Mais quelle heure est-il mainte- 
nant? Regardez votre montre. 
Huit heures moins un quart de¬ 
ja! Nous dinerons tard ce soir 

Non, ma montre avance cinq ou 
dix minutes 


§ 242] 


LEgON XXIV 


137 


242. Conversation. 1 . At what hour do you dine 
Wednesdays? 2. At what hour do people dine on Sunday? 

3. What time is it by your watch? 4. Have you a clock at 
your house? 5. Does this clock go right? 6. Is that clock 
slow or is this clock fast? 7. At what time did you dine at 
the cafe? 8. If you are thirsty, what do you order? 9. How 
much did the milk cost which you ordered? 10. At what time 
did you arrive at the cafe and at what time did you leave? 

243. Theme. John and I have often been at the cafd 
together Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays. We break¬ 
fast sometimes at half past eight and sometimes at nine, or 
a quarter of nine. When I arrive at John’s house at a quarter 
past eight, he always says to me: “It is not a quarter past s 
eight already! Your watch is fast!” He looks at his watch, 
once, twice, three times; then he says: “This watch is fast 
also.” We look at his clocks. He has two clocks in his 
room. It is twenty minutes past eight now on one clock, on 
the other it is half past seven. John says: “This clock is io 
always fast, that clock is not fast. It runs well. It is only 
half past seven by that clock. At twenty-five minutes past 
eight we will breakfast together.” I answer him: “Listen 
to this, John! Our watches and this clock here are not slow. 
They are not fast. It is nearly half past eight now. That is 
clock which you are looking at is not running!” 

244. Exercises. A. Conjugate: 

I am hungry. I shall be thirsty. 

B. Count from 1 to 12. 

C. 1. Tell the time by minutes from noon to 12:10. 

2. Tell the time by quarters from noon to midnight. 3. Tell 
the time by minutes from 10:50 to 11. 

D. Students ask in French such questions as: ‘What time 
is it?’ ‘At what time are you going there?’ ‘At what time 
do you dine? ’ Other students answer them. 


138 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 245 


25. VINGT-CINQUlfME LE^ON [yet sekjem] 

Review 

i 

245. 1 . He has had. 2. She has been. 3. We shall have. 
4. You will be. 5. In buying, selling and building. 6. Hav¬ 
ing bought, sold and built. 7. Buy, sell and build! 8. Hav¬ 
ing said, being seen. 9. For having had. 10. Without 
having been. 11. Will you be? 12. We shall have. 
13. After having had. 14. Without coming. 15. Having 
departed. 16. Having come. 17. Have you had? 18. Has 
one been? 19. Will they be? 20. Will they have? 21. It 
is he. 22. Is it I? 23. It is they (m.). 24. It is for them (/.). 
25. At whose house? 26. At his house. 27. At her house. 
28. At my house. 29. His sister and he. 30. Her brother 
and I. 31. She and he. 32. Who? he? 33. Who? I? 
34. It is they (m.). 35. It is they (/.). 36. Who smokes? 
he or she? 37. One speaks to them. 38. We speak with 
them. 39. Who came, he or I? 40. Pay this bill. 41. What 
time is it? 42. It’s noon. 43. It's midnight. 44. It’s seven 
o’clock. 45. It’s half past eight. 46. It’s a quarter past 
nine. 47. It’s eleven twenty. 48. It’s five twenty-five. 
49. This watch is slow. 50. Look at that clock. 51. Are 
you not hungry? 52. I am thirsty. 53. We are not 
hungry. 54. He is not thirsty. 55. He has had some soup. 
56. Have you had any vegetables? 57. We drank together. 
58. I saw him. 59. He has not been seen. 60. People saw 
him. 61. Who drank? 62. Have you had any vegetables? 
63. Has the cake been sold? 64. This afternoon. 65. These 
watches. 66. We listened to those ladies. 67. Early this 
evening. 68. Look at that man. 69. Don’t forget this 
bill! 70. Pay those bills! 71. Listen to this! 72. We 
listened to that. 73. He has been behind those men. 


LEgON XXV 


§ 246] 


139 


74. These clocks are fast, and those clocks are slow. 75. He 
has been here three times. 


ii 

246. 1. Who will be hungry, you or he? 2. We shall be 
thirsty, he and I. 3. We have been together seven hours to¬ 
day. 4. You came there before noon and you left finally 
at midnight. 5. This clock is slow, and that clock is fast. 

6. My coat arrived only at nine o’clock this morning. 

7. It is so pretty, that watch! 8. Listen to this! If you 
are hungry at eight or at half past eight this evening, go with 
me to the cafe. 9. The ladies will be there only at nine 
o’clock this time. 10. Will he drink another glass of milk 
or has he already drunk enough? 11. One is not hungry at 
midnight, if one has dined well and drunk two or three 
glasses of milk at ten o’clock. 12. Have they smoked 
cigars and cigarettes or a pipe this evening? 13. Your 
watch runs badly; it is fast; it is not seven o’clock yet. 14. If 
the coachman drives me there, I shall be at church early 
this morning. 15. Where will the lady be this afternoon? 
16. I said to her that I often lose my handkerchiefs in 
coming out of church. 17. He finally went with me to the 
tobacconist’s to buy this box of matches for us this morning. 
18. We heard this music in the park with much pleasure 
this afternoon. 19. Not having seen him near the church, I 
went to his house. 20 Not being alone this evening, I can¬ 
not speak with them (m.). 21. This meat is good, but this 
cake and these vegetables are not so good. 22. We saw 
many people listening to the music near the church every 
day. 23. Isn’t it astonishing? This man paid this bill. 
24. Look at that! He is behind those ladies! 25. Not 
having been at my school, he does not speak this language 
well. 


140 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 247 


26. VINGT-SIXlfiME LEQON [vet sizjem] 

LES METIERS 


i 


247. A. The French have no form corresponding to 
John’s, the maid’s; they say of John, of the maid (§ 89): 

C’est la maison de Jean, It is John’s house 
C’est la chambre de la bonne, It is the maid’s room 

B. When we say the hook is John’s (belongs to John); it 
is the man’s (belongs to the man); it is mine (belongs to me), 
etc., the French say the hook is to John, it is to me, etc. 

Le livre est a moi, The book is mine (belongs to me) 

Ces livres sont a cet homme-la, These books belong to that man 

C. The French say to whom for whosef 

A qui est ceci? A moi, Whose is this? Mine 

248. Some before a noun = o/ the (see § 123). If the verb 
is negative, the is omitted (see p. 50, Note 1): 


II a des parents, He has relatives 

II n’a pas de parents, He has no relatives 


249. Present Indicative of Zaire [fe:r], to make, do: 


je fais [fe], I make 
(tu fais [fe], thou makest) 
il fait [fe], he makes 


nous faisons [fozo], we make 
vous faites [fet], you make 
ils font [fo], they make 


250. 


VOCABULARY 


le boucher [bu$e], butcher 
le boulanger [buld 3 e], baker 
la course [kurs], errand 
l’epicier [lepisje], grocer 
hier [je:r], yesterday 
le menuisier [manyizje], cabinet 


le metier [metje], trade 
obliger [oblise], to oblige 
l’ouvrier [luvrie], workman 
ouvrir [uvri:r], to open 
penser [pase], to think 
poser [poze], to place 
pourquoi [purkwa], why 


maker, carpenter 


§251] 


LEgON XXVI 


141 


prier [prie], to beg 
la question [kestjo], question 
savoir [savwa:r] ; to know 
le sucre [sykr], sugar 

251. 

1. This is John's; that is 

Mary's 

2. That is mine; this is ours 

3. That is his; this is hers 

4. There are no bakers 

5. Whose is this tea? 

6. They have no sugar 

7. There is no grocer here 

8. Whose is this coat? 

9. It is John's; it is mine 

10. Some sugar and no tea 

11. The workmen make chairs 

12. We don't make hats 

13. You make lace 

14. These cabinet makers 

make tables 

15. Do you make any? 

16. We have no bread 

17. These bakers make bread 

18. It’s their trade, isn’t it? 

19. This butcher sells meat 

20. We did not sell any 


le the [te], tea 

travailler [travaje], to work 

void 1 [vwasi], here is, here are 


Ceci est a Jean; cela est a Marie 

Cela est a moi; ceci est k nous 
Cela est a lui; ceci est a elle 
II n’y a pas de boulangers 
A qui est ce the? 

Ils n’ont pas de sucre 
II n’y a pas d’epicier ici 
A qui est cet habit? 

II est k Jean; il est a moi 
Du sucre et pas de the 
Les ouvriers font des chaises 
Nous ne faisons pas de chapeaux 
Vous faites de la dentelle 
Ces menuisiers font des tables 

En faites-vous? 

Nous n’avons pas de pain 
Ces boulangers font du pain 
C’est leur metier, n’est-ce pas? 

Ce boucher vend de la viande 
Nous n’en avons pas vendu 


DRILL 


252. Reading. Madame Bertin [berte] est allee chez son 
amie Madame Perrin [pere]. Elle lui a dit: «J'ai achete un 
chapeau de velours chez votre modiste hier.» 

Madame Perrin a demande a Madame Bertin de lui 
montrer le chapeau. 

1 voici=vois! (see!) + ici (here). 
voila=vois! (see!)+lk (there). 

These words may take a pronoun object, which precedes: me voici! here 
1 am,!; les voila! there they are! 


142 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 252 


«Le voici! II m’a cotite tres cher. Je ne peux pas vous 
dire combien, parce que j’ai oublie d’en demander le prix a 
la modiste. La dentelle est plus chere que 1 si soie, qui est 
tres bon marche. J’ai prie la modiste de mettre de la den- 
io telle sur mon chapeau. La dentelle est peut-etre moins 
belle que la soie; qu’en pensez-vous?)) 



Madame Perrin n’a pas repondu a la question de son amie. 
Elle a dit: «I1 sera bientot quatre heures! Mon mari a 
commande un pardessus chez son tailleur, et il m’a prie d’aller 
15 le chercher cette apres-midi. Mais je n’aurai pas le temps 
d’aller chez le tailleur, parce que j’ai beaucoup de courses a 
faire.)) 

Elle est partie. Elle a dit a son cocher de la conduire 
chez l’epicier. Elle y a achete du cafe, du the, du sucre et 
20 de la creme. Elle y a achet6 du vin aussi. En France on 
peut acheter du vin chez l’epicier. 

Apres avoir commande tout cela chez l’epicier, elle est allee 
chez le menuisier. Elle lui a demande: «Avez-vous des 
ouvriers qui travaillent bien?» ((Nous n’en avons pas qui 


§ 253] 


LEQON XXVI 


143 


ne travaillent pas bien,)) lui a-t-il repondu. Elle lui a com- 
mand6 une chaise pour la chambre de la bonne. Puis elle 
est sortie de chez le menuisier. De la elle est allee chez le 
boulanger o& elle a achete du pain et chez le boucher off elle 
a achete de la viande. 

253. Resume. Les amies; le chapeau; le prix; la dentelle 
et la soie; le pardessus; le cocher; l’epicier; le menuisier; 
la chaise; le boulanger et le boucher. 

254. Oral Drill. 1 . This is his; that is mine. 2. That is 
John’s; this is Peter’s. 3. This coat is Henry’s. 4. Whose is 
this hat? 5. That hat is Mary’s. 6. This grocer has no 
sugar. 7. Whose is that lace? 8. That lace belongs to me. 
9. It belongs to her. 10. It does not belong to this lady. 
11. This workman is making a table. 12. These workmen 
make tables. 13. This grocer’s wife sells sugar. 14. She 
sells no tea. 15. She has no coffee. 16. There are no 
butchers here. 17. There will be no wine on my table. 
18. We shall have no ribbons. 19. She will have no silk. 
20. Whose chair is this? 21. This chair is not mine. 22. We 
shall have some coffee, but we shall have no milk. 23. He 
will have some tea, but he will have no sugar. 24. Do you 
make bread? 25. We make no bread. 26. What do you do? 
27. I have no trade. 28. Is your friend (a) carpenter or (a) 
grocer? 29. He is (a) baker. 30. Do not put my watch on 
that table. 31. Why don’t you answer these questions? 
32. Are these workmen making chairs? 33. We make tables. 
34. You make no chairs. 


ii 

255. DIALOGUE 

1. Whose is this book? A qui est ce livre? 

2. It’s my father’s book; no, C’est le livre de mon pere; non, 

it’s mine il est & m °i 

3. What is there in this book? Qu’est-ce qu’il y a dans ce livre? 


144 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 256 


4. There is the story of Paul¬ 

ine and her friend 

5. Who is her friend? 

6. Her friend is Henriette 

7. What do Pauline and Hen¬ 

riette do? 

8. Pauline sings and Henriette 

makes lace 

9. Why don’t you make some? 

10. I don’t make any, because 

I don’t like to make any 

11. Does Pauline sing well? 

12. No, she sings very badly 

13. What is on that chair? 

14. It’s a watch 

15. Whose is this watch? 

16. This watch is Henriette’s 

17. Why has she placed her 

watch on the chair? 

18. Because she wants to know 

the time 

19. Why does she want to know 

that? 

20. Because at four o’clock she 

can sing, and her friend 
Pauline will be obliged to 
make lace 

21. It is not their trade 


Ilya l’histoire de Pauline et de 
son amie 

Qui est son amie? 

Son amie est Henriette 

Que font Pauline et Henriette? 

Pauline chante et Henriette fait 
de la dentelle 

Pourquoi n’en faites-vous pas? 

Je n’en fais pas, parce que je 
n’aime pas a en faire 

Est-ce que Pauline chante bien? 

Non, elle chante tres mal 

Qu’est-ce qui est sur cette chaise? 

C’est une montre 

A qui est cette montre? 

Cette montre est a Henriette 

Pourquoi a-t-elle pose sa montre 
sur la chaise? 

Parce qu’elle veut savoir l’heure 

Pourquoi veut-elle savoir cela? 

Parce qu’a quatre heures elle 
peut chanter, et son amie Pau¬ 
line sera obligee de faire de la 
dentelle 

Ce n’est pas leur metier 


256. Conversation. 1 . Where did you buy your hat? 
2. Will you show me the hat that you bought? 3. How 
much did it cost you? 4. Is it cheap or dear? 5. At what 
o’clock will you come to my house? 6. Have you asked your 
husband to go and get your hat at the milliner’s? 7. When 
you have no sugar, to whose shop do you go to get some? 
8. Have you no errands to do this afternoon? 9. Whose is 
the overcoat that you are looking at, is it yours or is it your 
brother’s? 10. Can one drink tea if one has no sugar? 


§ 257] 


LEgON XXVI 


145 


257. Theme. The French lady bought a beautiful hat 
at the milliner’s. All her friends said to her: “Where is your 
hat? Oh! the lovely hat! How much did it cost you? Is 
it cheap or dear? - Did you ask the milliner to put on this 
pretty lace? Look at this beautiful velvet! Our milliner 
has no velvet so beautiful. Did you wear this hat at church 
Sunday? Did you hear Pauline, the lady who came from 
Paris? She sang before the sermon. She sings very well.” 
The French lady listens to all this, but she does not answer 
her friends’ questions. She gives them tea, but she gives 
them no sugar; she brings them bread, but she brings no 
butter. What do her friends do? They look at her and 
they are astonished. They look at the little watch which 
is there on that chair. Whose watch is it? It does not 
belong to them, to you, to me. It belongs to the French 
lady. Her friend, a baker, or butcher, or carpenter, or grocer, 
gave this pretty watch to her yesterday. When she looks 
at this watch, there is no sugar, there is no butter, there 
are no friends for her, there is only her friend! 

258. Exercises. A. Answer the questions: 

A qui est cela? A qui est cette maison? 

A qui est ce livre? A qui sont ces chapeaux? 

B. Fill the following blanks: 

Avez-vous du —? Est-ce que cet homme a 

Avez-vous eu de la —? de 1’—? 

Est-ce que votre ami a eu des —? 

Answer the questions in the negative. 

C. Conjugate: 

I do this. I do not do that. 

D. Drill on present indicative of faire: § 480, A. 


146 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 259 


27. VINGT-SEPTIftME LEgON [vet setjem] 


LE TEMPS —LES SAISONS 


i 

259. Imperfect Indicative. The imperfect is formed from 
the 'present participle by dropping the ending -ant and add¬ 
ing the endings: 


-ais [e] Cf. the future ending -ai [e]. 
-ais [e] 

-ait [e] 

-ions [jo] 

-iez [je] 

-aient [e] 


260. I. donner 
donn ant 


II. finir 
finiss ant 


III. vendre 
vend ant 


je donn ais 
(tu donn ais) 
il donn ait 


je finiss ais 
(tu finiss ais) 
il finiss ait 


je vend ais 
(tu vend ais) 
il vend ait 


nous donn ions 
vous donn iez 
ils donn aient 


nous finiss ions 
vous finiss iez 
ils finiss aient 


nous vend ions 
vous vend iez 
ils vend aient 


Note that the first, second, third singular and the third plural are 
pronounced alike. Remember the i in the endings of the first and second 
plural; also the -iss- in the second conjugation. 


261. Infinitive 
etre, to be 
avoir, to have 
faire, to make, do 
pleuvoir [ploevwa:r], 


Present Participle 
etant [eta] 
ayant [eya] 
faisant [faza] 
to rain pleuvant [plceva] 


Imperfect 
j’etais r 3 ete], etc. 
j’avais 1 [ 3 ave], etc. 
je faisais [30 faze], etc. 
il pleuvait [il ploeve] 


1 Note that the imperfect of avoir is irregular (ayant ought to give j’ayais). 
Remember, however, that the endings are always the same and that the stem 
never changes after the first person singular; so when you know the first 
person singular you know all the rest of the tense, even in the case of the 
irregular verbs , 


§ 262] 


LEgON XXVII 


147 


262. Use of the Imperfect. The past indefinite is the 
narrative tense, the most frequently used past tense. 

The imperfect is the descriptive tense, corresponding 
roughly to the English past in -nng, I was giving. It is used: 

(1) of an action conceived as continuing in past time, es¬ 

pecially when another action takes place during the 
continuance of the first: I was walking (imperfect) 
in the garden when I saw (past indefinite) him; 

(2) of customary or repeated action: I used to give, I 

(repeatedly, always, usually, etc.) gave. 

263. Les Saisons: 

le printemps [preta], spring; au printemps, in spring 
l’ete [lete] (ra.*), summer; en ete, in summer 
l’automne [loton] (m.), autumn; en automne, in autumn 
l’hiver [live'.r] (m.), winter; en hiver, in winter 

264. Note the use of faire in expressions relating to the 
weather: 

il fait chaud [So], it’s hot 

il faisait froid [frwa], it was cold 

il faisait du vent [va], it was windy 

il fait beau, il fait beau temps [ta], it’s fine (weather) 

il fait mauvais, il fait mauvais temps, the weather is bad 

Quel temps fait-il? How is the weather? 


265. 


VOCABULARY 


admirer [admire], to admire 
l’annee [lane] (/.), year 
briller [brije], to shine 
le ciel [sjel], sky 
1’eclair [leklcir] (m.), lightning 
la glace [glas], ice 
longtemps [lota], a long time 
mauvais [move], bad 
le mois [mwa], month 
la neige [ne^], snow 


le nuage [nya.’ 3 ], cloud 

ouvert [uve:r], open (past parti¬ 


ciple of ouvrir) 
pendant [pada], during 
pendant que [pada ko], while 
la pluie [plyi], rain 
la saison [sezo], season 
le soleil [soleij], sun 
tomber [tobe], to fall 
le tonnerre [tone:r], thunder 


148 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 266 


DRILL 


266 

1. I used to be; you used to be 

2. He used to have; we used to 

have 

3. She used to finish; they used 

to finish 

4. I was doing; we were doing 

5. He was making; you Were 

making 

6. It was hot; it was cold 

7. It was fine weather in sum¬ 

mer 

8. It was bad weather in spring 

9. The sun shines; it was shining 

10. It is windy; it was windy 

11. He used to hear the thunder 

12. We used to like the spring 

13. The flowers were growing 

14. The flower grows; it was 

growing 

15. It is fine weather; it was fine 

16. Was it bad weather in win¬ 

ter? 

17. Was it hot or cold in 

autumn? 

18. The season was beautiful 

19. It was not raining; it was 

blowing 


J’etais; vous etiez 
II avait; nous avions 

Elle finissait; ils finissaient 

Je faisais; nous faisions 
II faisait; vous faisiez 

II faisait chaud; il faisait froid 
II faisait beau en ete 

II faisait mauvais au printemps 
Le soleil brille; il brillait 
II fait du vent; il faisait du vent 
11 entendait le tonnerre 
Nous aimions le printemps 
Les fleurs poussaient 
La fleur pousse; elle poussait 

Il fait beau; il faisait beau 
Est-ce qu’il faisait mauvais en 
hiver? 

Faisait-il chaud ou froid en au- 
tomne? 

La saison etait belle 
Il ne pleuvait pas; il faisait du 
vent 


267. Reading. Voulez-vous aller avec moi dans mon 
jardin? Nous sommes au printemps: le soleil brille, le ciel 
est sans nuages, les belles fleurs poussent. 

Non, merci, je suis entre dans votre jardin hier. Il ne 
5 faisait pas tres chaud, il faisait froid et le soleil ne brillait 
pas. Il faisait tres mauvais temps. Je n’ai pas vu pousser 
vos belles tulipes; mais n’ayant pas mon pardessus, et etant 
dans un jardin ouvert a tous les vents pendant qu’il pleu- 


§ 268] 


LEgON XXVII 


149 


vait, — je n’aime pas la pluie — je suis sorti de votre jardin 
et je n’y entrerai pas aujourd’hui. io 

Moi, je n’ai pas ecoute mon ami, parce que j’aime tant 
mon beau jardin. Pendant qu’il parlait, je suis parti. Je 
suis entre dans la maison et j’ai laisse la porte ouverte. II 
faisait beau. Pendant longtemps j’ai admire le ciel bleu. 
Mais bientot j’ai entendu le tonnerre et j’ai vu des eclairs. II is 
faisait du vent. N’aimant pas les eclairs, j ’ai ferme ma porte. 

Ah! il faisait plus beau pendant Fete. C’est toujours la 
plus belle saison de Fannee, s’il ne fait pas trop chaud. 
Pendant des mois et des mois on laisse les portes et les fenetres 
ouvertes; on joue sur Fherbe verte. On n’est pas oblige de 20 
travailler, parce que Fecole est fermee. II n’y a pas de glace 
et il n’y a pas de neige. 

Quand j’etais petit j’aimais beaucoup Fautomne. J’allais 
toujours chez ma vieille tante, qui me donnait beaucoup de 
bonnes choses a manger. J’aimais beaucoup Fhiver aussi, 25 
s’il ne faisait pas trop froid. J’aimais a jouer dans la neige 
et sur la glace. Souvent, pendant que la pluie tombait, je 
cherchais mon bon ami, et lui, sa soeur, ma sceur et moi 
nous allions ecouter le tonnerre et admirer les eclairs. Quelle 
bonne saison de Fannee! 3 ° 

268. Resume. Au jardin; hier; les tulipes; le pardessus; 
le vent et la pluie; le temps beau, puis mauvais; Fete a la 
campagne; chez la tante; Fhiver. 

269. Oral Drill. 1. You used to be. 2. We used to 
have. 3. They used to finish. 4. We were making. 5. He 
was doing. 6 . They are doing. 7. Do this! 8 . We don’t 
do that. 9. They used to have. 10. She used to do. 11. Is 
it hot? 12 . It is not cold. 13. Was it not hot? 14. It was 
not cold. 15. The weather was fine this summer. 16. It 
was cold this winter. 17. Was the sun not shining? 18. It 
was windy. 19. Do you like the spring? 20. I used to 
like it. 21. I did not like the autumn. 22. The season was 


150 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 270 


not fine. 23. The flowers were not growing. 24. It was 
bad weather. 25. The sun was shining. 26. Do you hear 
the thunder? 27. I used to hear the thunder. 28. What do 
you do during the spring? 29. We were in the country 
during the summer. 30. After having chosen some flowers, 
we came. 31. We worked in the garden while the sun was 
shining. 32. During the winter there is snow and ice. 
33. It used to rain in spring. 34. Where were you? 35. I 
was in the garden. 36. The gardens were open. 37. He 
used to admire this man. 38. The snow was falling. 
39. What were they doing? 40. You were making bread. 


DIALOGUE 


ii 

270. 

1. What did you use to do dur¬ 

ing the spring when you 
were small? 

2. We used to call our friends 

and go to play in the 
garden, if it did not rain 

3. What do you do during the 

summer? 

4. After having finished our 

lessons, we work in the 
gardens near our house 

5. Is it cold in summer? 

6. It is very hot when the sun 

shines and when the sky 
is blue, but it is cold 
when it rains 

7. Was it windy yesterday 

when you left? 

8. It was very fine yesterday 

for a long time, but later 
it was less fine because 
there were clouds 


Que faisiez-vous pendant le prin- 
temps quand vous etiez petits? 

Nous appelions nos amis et nous 
allions jouer dans le jardin, s’il 
ne pleuvait pas 

Que faites-vous pendant Pete? 

Apres avoir fini nos lefons, nous 
travaillons dans les jardins pres 
de notre maison 

Est-ce qu’il fait froid en ete? 

II fait tres chaud quand le soleil 
brille et quand le del est bleu, 
mais il fait froid quand il pleut 

Est-ce qu’il faisait du vent hier 
quand vous etes parti? 

Il faisait tres beau hier pendant 
longtemps, mais plus tard il 
faisait moins beau parce qu’il 
y avait des nuages 


§271] 


LEgON XXYII 


151 


9. What season is it now? 

10. It’s autumn. The windows 

and doors are open often 
during this season. It is 
not bad weather 

11. What season was it when 

you used to go to your old 
aunt? 

12. It was winter. There was 

snow and ice, thunder 
and lightning. We wore 
woolen clothes. It was 
very cold every day. We 
did not like winter very 
much 


Quelle saison est-ce maintenant? 

C’est l’automne. Les fenetres et 
les portes sont ouvertes souvent 
pendant cette saison. II ne fait 
pas mauvais temps 

Quelle saison etait-ce quand vous 
alliez chez votre vieille tante? 

C’etait l’hiver. 11 y avait de la 
neige et de la glace, du tonnerre 
et des eclairs. Nous portions 
des vetements de laine. II fai- 
sait tres froid tous les jours. 
Nous n’aimions pas beaucoup 
l’hiver 


271. Conversation. 1 . How many seasons are there? 
2. Was it hot yesterday, or did it rain? 3. Where were 
you yesterday? 4. Was the sun shining while you were in 
the garden? 5. Did you use to leave the doors open when 
you went out of the house? 6 . Did you use to close the door 
of your garden when you heard the thunder? 7. Was it fine 
weather during a long time this winter? 8 . What did you 
do during the summer? 9. What did your brothers and 
sisters do during the autumn? 10. Did you go into the garden 
during the spring, and what did you do there? 


272. Theme. When the school was closed during the 
summer we were not obliged to work. It was fine weather 
and the sun shone every day. I used to go to my aunt’s 
house. I used to play in her garden where the beautiful 
flowers grew. When it rained and when it was windy, I 5 
played in the house. My sisters were with me. They did 
not like to hear the thunder and to see the lightning. In 
autumn the weather was less fine, it rained often and the 
sky was not so blue as in summer. We came back to school 
after this, and during the winter and spring we worked 10 


152 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 273 


much. In the afternoon at four o’clock we played a little 
during an hour or two, when there was not too much snow 
and ice. But often it was very cold. My sisters did not 
like the winter much. 

273. Exercises. A. Drill on imperfect of choisir, ren- 
contrer, entendre, saisir, appeler, finir: § 480, A. 

B. Say 'How is the weather?’ ‘How was the weather?’ 
Answer in as many ways as possible. 


28. VINGT-HUITlBME LEgON [ve tyitjem] 

A LA CAMPAGNE 

i 

274. Comparison of Adjectives. 

Positive: grand, great 
Comparative: 

( m. s .) plus grand, greater 
(f. s .) plus grande, greater 
(m. pi.) plus grands, greater 
( f . pi.) plus grandes, greater 
Superlative: 

( m. s .) le plus grand, 1 greatest 
(/. s.) la plus grande, greatest 
(m. pi.) les plus grands, greatest 
| {f. pi.) les plus grandes, greatest 

275. Comparison of Adverbs. 

Positive: souvent, often 

Comparative: plus souvent, oftener, more often 
moins souvent, less often 
Superlative: le plus souvent, oftenest, most often 
le moins souvent, least often 

1 Note that when the comparative is preceded by an article, it has the 
'same form as the superlative: the greater =the greatest. 


moins grand, less great 
moins grande, less great 
moins grands, less great 
moins grandes, less great 

le moins grand, least great 
la moins grande, least great 
les moins grands, least great 
les moins grandes, least great 


§ 276] 


LEgON XXVIII 


153 


276. Exceptions 

Adjective: bon, good meilleur 1 [mejce:r], better le meilleur, best 

Adverb: bien, well mieux 1 [mjo], better le mieux, best 

277. aussi grand que = as great as 
aussi souvent que == as often as 

278. 13 treize [treiz] 17 dix-sept [dis set] 

14 quatorze [katorz] 18 dix-huit [di zyit] 

15 quinze [ke:z] 19 dix-neuf [diz noef] 

16 seize [seiz] 20 vingt [ve] 


VOCABULARY 


279. 

l’animal [lanimal] (m.), (pi- ani- 
maux [animo]), animal 
& travers [a traveir], across 
la campagne [kdpap], country 
le champ [$a], field 
le cheval [$aval], (pi. chevaux 
[Savo]), horse 
le college [kale: 3 ], school 
le commencement [kamasma], be¬ 
ginning 

la ferine [ferm), farm 
la fin [fe], end 


moins [mwe], less, (least) 
l’oiseau [lwazo] (ra.),(;ph oiseaux), 
bird 

le paysan [peiza], peasant 
plus [ply], more, (most) 
possible [pasibl], possible 
la poussiere [pusje:r], dust 
revenir [ravaniir], to come back 
salir [sali:r], to soil 
les vacances [vakais] (/.), vacation 
la vache [va$], cow 
le village [vila: 3 ], village 


280. 


DRILL 


1. A smaller horse; the smallest 

horse 

2. A smaller cow; the smallest 

cow 

3. A better girl; the best girl 

4. As good as I; better than I 

5. He speaks well; you speak 

better 


Un plus petit cheval; le plus petit 
cheval 

Une plus petite vache; la plus pe¬ 
tite vache 

Une meilleure fille; la meilleure 
fille 

Aussi bon que moi; meilleur que 
moi 

II parle bien; vous parlez mieux 


1 meilleur =more good; mieux =in a better manner. 


154 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 281 


6. We go oftener; you go 

oftenest 

7. You go as often as he 

8. We go less often than you 

9. She is larger than he 

10. He is not as large as she 

11. You do more than they 

12. They do less than I 

13. I give more of it than he 

14. We sell less of it than they 

15. He has a more beautiful 

farm 

16. The peasant is as good as 

they 

17. This horse is blacker 

18. Those horses are the black¬ 

est 

19. This cow is the best 

20. Those fields are the largest 


Nous allons plus souvent; vous 
allez le plus souvent 
Vous allez aussi souvent que lui 
Nous allons moins souvent que 
vous 

Elle est plus grande que lui 
II n’est pas aussi grand qu’elle 
Vous faites plus qu’eux 
Ils font moins que moi 
J’en donne plus que lui 
Nous en vendons moins qu’eux 
H a une plus belle ferine 

Le paysan est aussi bon qu’eux 

Ce cheval est plus noir 

Ces chevaux-la sont les plus noirs 

Cette vache est la meilleure 
Ces champs sont les plus grands 


281. Reading. Quand j’etais au college j’allais toujours 
pendant mes vacances d’ete chez mon oncle qui avait une 
ferme pres d’un petit village. Ce n’etait pas une grande 
ferine, mais elle etait tres belle. A la fin de h.uit ou neuf mois 
S de travail dans mes classes, j ’aimais a partir pour les champs 
ouverts a tous les vents, parce qu’en 6 te il fait plus chaud 
dans la ville qu’a la campagne. II y avait beaucoup d’ani- 
maux chez mon oncle, et j’allais avec lui aussi souvent que 
possible voir les chevaux et les vaches. J’aimais mieux les 
io chevaux que les vaches. Le meilleur cheval etait un petit 
noir, un des plus beaux animaux du monde. J’allais souvent 
sur cet animal a travers les champs. Les paysans l’admiraient 
beaucoup, et tout le monde demandait a mon oncle: «Voulez- 
vous vendre ce petit cheval noir?)) Mon oncle leur repon- 
15 dait qu’il ne cherchait pas a vendre un cheval qui donnait 
tant de plaisir aux petits gargons et aux petites filles. 


§ 281] 


LE£ON XXVIII 


155 



Les paysans Tadmiraient beaucoup 











156 


BEGINNING FKENCH 


[§ 282 


Un jour il faisait tres mauvais temps; il pleuvait et il fai- 
sait tres froid. J’etais sur mon petit cheval noir. Je n’avais 
pas de pardessus. Mais j’etais pres de la maison de mon 
20 oncle; mon cheval avait faim, et il m’a porte a la ferme en 
si peu de temps que la pluie et la poussiere n’ont pas sali 
mes vetements. Je suis descendu de mon bon petit cheval. 
Je suis entre dans la maison ou j’ai trouve un bon diner sur 
la table. J’avais si faim que j’ai mange beaucoup trop. 
25 On fait cela le plus souvent a la campagne, ou le beau ciel 
bleu, le bon vent, le soleil qui brille, les oiseaux qui chantent, 
vous font manger plus que dans les villes. 

Au commencement de l’hiver nous sommes revenus au 
college. Il n’y avait pas de poussiere a la campagne. Il y 
30 en a beaucoup ici. Tout le monde aime mieux la campagne 
que la ville. Pour moi le plus grand plaisir, c’est de jouer 
avec les fils des paysans dans la ferme de mon oncle. 

282. Resume. Chez Poncle; la ferme; les chevaux et les 
vaches; le meilleur cheval; vendre; le mauvais temps; le 
diner; la campagne et la ville. 

283. Oral Drill. 1. A bigger farm. 2. The largest farm. 

3. The smallest cows. 4. A better farm. 5. This farm is 
the best. 6. As small as he. 7. Oftener than that. 8. As 
often as you. 9. He used to do it well. 10. You used to do 
it better. 11. We did it oftener. 12. You did it oftenest. 
13. We went as often as they (m.). 14. They did it less 

often than we. 15. We are not so good as he. 16. We do 
less than they (m.). 17. This man has the most beautiful 

wife. 18. His daughter is more beautiful. 19. This girl is 
less beautiful. 20. She is the smallest. 21. This horse 
is the best. 22. That cow is the whitest. 23. This cow is 
redder. 24. That field is larger than this field. 25. Which 
field is largest? 26. They do it well. 27. You do it better. 
28. She is better than he. 29. I am the best man. 30. You 
are not as good as he. 31. This bird sings better than that 


§ 284] 


LEgON XXVIII 


157 


bird. 32. The end was better than the beginning. 33. The 
peasants all came back across the fields. 34. They were 
soiling their clothes playing in the dust. 35. This school is 
as good as that school. 


ii 

284. DIALOGUE 


1 . Whose horse is this? 

2. He is mine 

3. There is no animal in the 

world more beautiful than 
he 

4. Thanks! Everybody finds 

him very pretty 

5. That does not surprise me 

6 . Whose farm is that? 

7. It belongs to my friend’s 

uncle. Do you want to 
go with me across the 
fields? 

8 . What beautiful animals! I 

like horses better than 
cows 

9. Everybody likes them better 

10. What beautiful weather! 

Do you hear the birds 
(which are) singing? 

11. It’s raining. I don’t want 

to soil my clothes. We’ll 
go into the house; we’ll 
find my aunt there per¬ 
haps, who will give us 
(something) to eat 

12. Don’t forget to ask her to 

give us some milk; I am 
thirsty 


A qui est ce cheval? 

II est a moi 

II n’y a pas d’animal au monde 
plus beau que lui 

Merci! Tout le monde le trouve 
tres joli 

Cela ne m’etonne pas 

A qui est cette ferme? 

Elle est a l’oncle de mon ami. 
Voulez-vous aller avec moi & 
travers les champs? 

Quels beaux animaux! J’aime 
mieux les chevaux 1 que les 
vaches 

Tout le monde les aime mieux 

Quel beau temps! Entendez- 
vous les oiseaux qui chantent? 

II pleut. Je ne veux pas salir 
mes vetements. Nous entre- 
rons dans la maison; nous y 
trouverons peut-etre ma tante 
qui nous donnera a manger 

N’oubliez pas de lui demander de 
nous donner du lait; j’ai soif 


1 Horses as a class, not some horses; therefore, les not des. 


158 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§285 


13. It’s the best farm in the 

world, and there is the 
best milk in the world! 

14. I want to drink a glass of 

milk also. Will you give 
us some bread and butter? 
We are hungry! 

15. Here is some milk, some 

bread and some butter! 

16. Thanks! You are as good 

as my mother! We are 
going to come back later 
this evening 


C’est la meilleure ferme du monde, 
et voila le meilleur lait du 
monde! 

Je veux boire un verre de lait 
aussi. Voulez-vbus nous don- 
ner du pain et du beurre? Nous 
avons faim 

Void du lait, du pain et du beurre! 

Merci! Vous etes aussi bonne 
que ma mere! Nous allons re- 
venir plus tard ce soir 


285. Conversation. 1 . Did you use to go to school in 
the city or in the country? 2. Where were you during your 
summer vacation? 3. Is it warmer in the city than in the 
country in summer? 4. Is it as cold in winter? 5. Do your 
friends go to the country as often as I? 6. Do you like horses 
(cf. § 284, 8) better than other animals? 7. Why do you 
like horses the best? 8. When you went to school, which 
pleasure did you find the greatest? 9. Is the village where 
you go in summer prettier than the city? 10. Is your 
father’s farm as large as the farm which belongs to the 
peasant whom you saw yesterday? 


286. Theme. While I was going to the farm in the 
country after ten months of work at school, I met my cousin. 
He was going to the city. I said to him: “Do you like the 
city better than the country?” He answered that he went 
to the city as often as possible because there were no schools, 
no churches and no stores in the country. “When the 
peasants do not work, what do they do? They walk through 
the fields, they look at the cows and horses of the other 
peasants. They admire the black horse because he is blacker 
than the gray horse; they like the white horse better than 
the gray horse because he is larger; they find the red cow 


§ 287] 


LEgON XXVIII 


159 


handsomer than the white cow, but they find the black cow 
the best and the largest of all. They ask: Whose farm is 
this? Is it as large as our farm? Is this white house as 
pretty as our house? Is it larger or better? After having is 
said this, they walk across the fields to their house. They 
enter, they eat, they ask if it is hot or cold, if it is bad weather 
or if the sun shines. After that they work. Yes, my friend, 

I like the city better.” 

287. Exercises. A. Fill the following blanks with the 
positive, comparative and superlative of: ‘great/ ‘ small/ 

‘ white/ ‘old/ ‘good/ ‘beautiful/ first in an ascending com¬ 
parison (greater, greatest), then in a descending comparison 
(less great, least great): 

1. He is —. 3. They (m.) are —. 

2. She is —. 4. They (/.) are —. 

B. Fill the following blanks with the positive, compara¬ 
tive and superlative of: ‘well/ ‘often/ ‘badly/ first ascend¬ 
ing, then descending: 

1 . He works — . 2. They speak — . 3. We choose — . 

C. Fill the blanks in A, using as . . . as, followed by a 
disjunctive pronoun: II est aussi grand que moi, etc. 

D. (1) Count from 1 to 20; (2) count from 1 to 20 omit¬ 
ting the even numbers; (3) count from 1 to 20 omitting the 
odd numbers. 

E. Drill on present, past indefinite, future, present parti¬ 
ciple, imperfect of vendre, choisir, arriver : § 480, C. 


160 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 288 


29. VINGT-NEUVlfiME LEQON [vet noevjem] 

LA FAMILLE 


i 

288. Quel age avez-vous? How old are youf 
J’ai dix ans, I am ten years old 


289. II y a, there is., there are = ago 


290. 


II y a deux ans, Two years ago 


21 vingt et un [ye te de] 

22 vingt-deux [vet do] 

30 trente [trait] 

31 trente et un [trait e de] 

32 trente-deux [trait do] 

40 quarante [karait] 

50 cinquante [sekait] 

60 soixante [swasait] 

70 soixante-dix [swasait dis] 


72 soixante-douze [swasait duiz] 

80 quatre-vingts [katra ve] 

81 quatre-vingt-un [katra ve oe] 

82 quatre-vingt-deux [katra ve do] 

90 quatre-vingt-dix [katra ve dis] 

91 quatre-vingt-onze [katra ve 5:z] 

100 cent [sa] 

101 cent un [sa re] 

200 deux cents [do sa] 


71 soixante et onze [swasait e 5:z] 201 deux cent un [do sa de] 

1000 mille [mil] 1 
2000 deux mille [do mil] 

1,000,000 un million [miljo] 

1,000,000,000 un milliard [miljair] 

Note. Peculiarities in the pronunciation and spelling of numerals 
should be learned gradually. 

291. Savoir [savwair], to know; sachant [sa$a], knowing; 
su [sy], known. 


Present indicative: 

je sais [se or se], I know nous savons [savo], we know 

(tu sais [se or se], thou knowest) vous savez [save], you know 

il sait [se or se], he knows ils savent [saiv], they know 

Imperfect: je savais, etc., I used to know, etc. 

Past indefinite: j’ai su, etc. 

Future: je saurai [sore], etc., I shall know, etc. 
i Mille is written mil in dates: mil neuf cent vingt, 1920 . 


§ 292] 


LE£ON XXIX 


161 


VOCABULARY 


292. 

l’age [la: 3 ] (m.), age 
Pavocat [lavoka], lawyer 
demeurer [domcere], to live 
epouser [epuze], to marry 
fiance [fjase], fiance, betrothed 
le grand-pere [gra pe:r], grand¬ 
father 

la grand’mere [gra me:r], grand¬ 
mother 

jeune feoen], young 
marie [marje], married 


le medecin [medse], doctor 
meme [me:m], same 
au moins [o mwe], at least 
mort [mo:r], dead; il est—, he died 
ne [ne], born; il est—, he was born 
le neveu [navo], nephew 
la niece [njes], niece 
pourtant [purta], however, yet 
tous les deux [tu le do], both 
vrai [vre], true 


DRILL 


293. 

1. How old are you? 

2. I am 27 years old 

3. How old is your sister? 

4. She is 34 years old 

5. When was he born? 

6. I don’t know 

7. Is he older than I? 

8. You are younger than he 

9. Did he die an hour ago? 

10. He died two hours ago 

11. Is his sister as young as he? 

12. She is younger than he 

13. How old is she? 

14. She does not know 

15. I used to know; we know 

16. We used to know; they (/.) 

know 

17. You don’t know; you used 

to know 

18. We shall know; we have known 

19. Have they known? will he 

know? 

20. He knew it ten years ago 


Quel age avez-vous? 

J’ai vingt-sept ans 
Quel age a votre sceur? 

Elle a trente-quatre ans 
Quand est-il ne? 

Je ne sais pas 

Est-il plus vieux que moi? 

Vous etes plus jeune que lui 
Est-ce qu’il est mort il y a une 
heure? 

Il est mort il y a deux heures 
Est-ce que sa soeur est aussi jeune 
que lui? 

Elle est plus jeune que lui 
Quel age a-t-elle? 

Elle ne sait pas 
Je savais; nous savons 
Nous savions; elles savent 

Vous ne savez pas; vous saviez 

Nous saurons; nous avons su 
Ont-ils su? saura-t-il? 

Il Pa su il y a dix ans 


162 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 294 


294. Reading. Ma mere est plus jeune que mon pere; 
mon frere est plus jeune que ma soeur. Mon pere a quarante- 
deux ans. — Quel age a votre mere? — Elle a trente-huit 
ans, elle n'est pas aussi jeune que sa soeur, ma tante, qui a 
S seulement trente-trois ans. — Mon oncle, le mari de ma 
tante, que vous avez vu hier au pare, a cinquante-huit ans. 
II etait deja vieux quand il a epouse ma tante. — Quel &ge 
a votre cousine? — Elle a seulement dix-huit ans, mais elle 
est deja fiancee. — A qui? — Au neveu du 
io mddecin. — A lui ! II est trop vieux pour 
elle! — Non, il a seulement vingt-huit ans; 
il avait vingt-quatre ans quand son grand- 
pere est mort il y a quatre ans. — Est-ce 
vrai? Je ne le savais pas. Je pensais qufil 
15 avait au moins trente et un ans. — Vous 
saviez qu’il demeurait chez son grand-pere 
a Chicago, n’est-ce pas? — Non, je ne savais 
pas cela; on m’a dit que son grand-pere et 
sa grand’mere etaient morts tous les deux. 

20 — Le neveu de Favocat a qui vous avez 

parld chez mon oncle 6tait son ami de college, son meilleur 
ami. Ils sont alles a Paris ensemble pour y faire leurs 
etudes. — J’ai vu la niece de Favocat, ou peut-etre etait-ce 
sa femme, chez mon cousin le medecin il y a trois jours. 
25 —C’est sa ni&ce; elle est beaucoup trop jeune pour etre sa 
femme. — Pourtant, elle m’a parle de son mari. — Elle est 
mariee; elle a epouse un jeune homme qui est revenu de 
Paris avec mon cousin il y a deux ans. — C’est vrai; votre 
cousin m’en a parle hier. Ou demeurent-ils? — Ils de- 
30 meuraient a Chicago il y a un an, mais ils aiment mieux 
New-York. Ils y sont alles avec leur fils et leur fille qui 
sont tres jeunes. Cela leur coutera tres cher, et puis ils 
seront obliges de revenir avant la fin de Phiver ou le com¬ 
mencement du printemps. 



Elle a seulement 
dix-huit ans 


§ 295] 


LEQON XXIX 


163 


295. Exercise. Ask and answer the questions: 

1. How old are you? 2. How old is his mother? 3. — your 
father? 4. — her aunt? 5. — our uncle? 6. — my friend? 
7. — your grandfather? 8. — his grandmother? 


296. Oral Drill. 1 . How old is he? 2. He is 32 years old. 
3. When was she born? 4. I don’t know. 5. I was born 20 
years ago. 6. How old are you? 7. I am 21 years old. 
8. When did he die? 9. He died ten years ago. 10. He 
was younger than I. 11. When was he born? 12. He was 
born 35 years ago. 13. Do you know it? 14. I used to 
know it. 15. Has he known it? 16. He has known it. 
17. When will you know it? 18. I shall know it to-day. 
19. I know it is true. 20. How old is she? 21. Who? 
22. The girl whom your nephew married. 1 23. I don’t 
know how old she is. 24. She is 21 years old at least. 
25. Did she marry a doctor or a lawyer? 26. Her husband 
is a lawyer. 27. Did you know she was married? 28. I 
have known it. 29. We have not known it. 30. Is your 
grandmother dead? 31. You know very well that she is 
dead. 32. She died the same day as her niece. 33. I did 
not know it. 34. Both died the same day. 35. How old 
were they? 36. The one was 73 and the other 31 years old. 
37. Where does the doctor live? 38. He lives at the house 
of his nephew. 39. Didn’t you know that? 40. I knew 
that very well. 

ii 

297. DIALOGUE 


1. How old are you? 

2. I am eighteen years old 

3. You are very young 

4. I am not as young as you, and 

yet you are already married! 

5. You are much younger than 

I 

i See p. 71, 


Quel age avez-vous? 

J’ai dix-huit ans 
Vous 6tes tres jeune 
Je ne suispasaussi jeune que vous, 
et pourtant vous etes deja marie! 
Vous etes beaucoup plus jeune 
que moi 
footnote 1. 


164 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 297 


6. Do you know how old I am? 

7. No, I do not know (it) 

8. Well, I shall be twenty-one 

soon. I am much older 
than you 

9. My sister is eighteen 

10. She is already engaged at 

the age of eighteen! 

11. Have you seen her fiancd? 

12. He lives at his grandfather’s, 

doesn’t he? 

13. He lives at his grand¬ 

mother’s. His grand¬ 
father is dead 

14. I didn’t know it. When did 

he die? 

15. At least two years ago, at 

the age of eighty-three 

16. My cousin saw his nephew at 

Chicago. He married the 
daughter of a poor lawyer 

17. I know well who he is. He 

lives near my aunt, in 
the same street. She was 
born the same year as he 

18. You surprise me! I didn’t 

know it. Is she as old as 
that? 

19. But, they are only thirty- 

five years old; you didn’t 
know it? 

20. No, that can’t be true; he 

cannot be as young as 
that. It can’t be the 
same man 

21. It’s his other nephew, per¬ 

haps, who married the 
lawyer’s daughter 


Savez-vous l’age que j’ai? 

Non, je ne le sais pas 

Eh bien, j’aurai bientot vingt et 
un ans. Je suis beaucoup plus 
vieux que vous 

Ma sceur a dix-huit ans 

Elle est deja fiancee a Page de 
dix-huit ans! 

Avez-vous vu son fiance? 

II demeure chez son grand-pere, 
n’est-ce pas? 

II demeure chez sa grand’mere; 
son grand-pere est mort 

Je ne le savais pas. Quand est-ce 
qu’il est mort? 

II y a au moins deux ans, a Page 
de quatre-vingt-trois ans 

Mon cousin a vu son neveu a Chi¬ 
cago. II a epouse la fille d’un 
avocat pauvre 

Je sais bien qui il est. II demeure 
pres de ma tante, dans la meme 
rue. Elle est nee la meme an- 
nee que lui 

Vous m’etonnez! Je ne le savais 
pas. Est-ce qu’elle est aussi 
vieille que cela? 

Mais, ils ont seulement trente- 
cinq ans; vous ne le saviez-pas? 

Non, cela ne peut pas etre vrai; 
il ne peut pas etre aussi jeune 
que cela. Ce ne peut pas etre 
le meme homme 

C’est son autre neveu, peut-etre, 
qui a epouse la fille de Pavocat 


§ 298] 


LEgON XXIX 


165 


298. Conversation. 1 . How old are your two brothers 
and your sister? 2. How old are your father and mother? 

3. Who is the youngest of your brothers? 4. When was he 
born? 5. How old was the grandfather, who lived at your 
house when he died? 6. Do you know how old I am? 

7. Did your uncle know how old your aunt was when he 
married her? 8. Do you know if she was as young as he, or 
was she younger? 9. Will you know before long where the 
doctor lives? 10. When will the lawyer know if these men 
lived in the same house, or does he know it already? 

299. Theme. I used to live in the same house as your 
cousin thirty or forty years ago. We lived there together; 
did you not know it? He was not so young as I; he was 
twenty-two; I was eighteen. You know I am younger than 
you. He had two sisters: the one was nineteen years old, 5 
the other was thirty. If you asked her: “How old are you?” 
she always answered: “I was twenty-four this summer,” or 
“I shall be twenty-five this winter.” But I know now that 
she was thirty. The smaller sister, who was nineteen, was 

a very pretty girl. She knew how old her sister was, but I 10 
did not know it. I thought she was forty! I begged the 
pretty sister to walk across the fields with me one day, 
but she answered that she liked better to be in the house 
than in the fields when it was raining. The other sister 
said: “The sun will shine before long; you know that as well 15 
as I. Why don’t you ask me if I want to walk across the 
fields with you?” 

300. Exercises. A. Count from 1 to 100. 

B. Drill on present indicative of savoir: § 480, A. 

C. Drill on savoir: § 480, C. 

D. Students ask questions beginning with 'when.’ Other 
students answer them using 'ago.’ 


166 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


L§ 301 


30. TRENTlfiME LEQON [tratjem]; 

Review 

i 

301. A. 1. What are you doing? 2. What are they 
doing? 3. Don’t you know that? 4. Don’t do that! 
5. Whose is this hat? 6. It is mine. 7. It is his. 8. It is 
theirs. 9. It is hers. 10. Has the baker any bread? 11. He 
has no bread. 12. Had the grocer any sugar? 13. He had 
no sugar. 14. Do the carpenters make chairs? 15. They 
don’t make chairs. 16. They don’t make any. 17. Do 
you do errands? 18. We do errands. 19. They do no 
errands. 20. Did you use to do errands? 21. We did none. 
22. You did some. 23. What was he making? 24. Was 
it hot? 25. It was cold. 26. Was it windy? 27. Do you 
like the spring? 28. I used to like it. 29. Was it bad 
weather? 30. It was fine. 31. Was it raining? 32. The 
sun was shining. 33. Did you see any clouds? 34. We 
saw no snow. 35. There was thunder and lightning (plural). 
36. During the summer. 37. After the winter. 38. During 
the season. 39. Before the autumn. 40. Through the fields. 
41. A smaller animal. 42. A larger cow. 43. The biggest 
horse. 44. The best bird. 45. The red bird. 46. This 
bird is as large as that bird. 47. It is larger. 48. It is the 
largest. 49. She was smaller than he. 50. She was as 
small as I. 51. This field is smaller than that farm. 52. The 
one is as large as the other. 53. There was much dust. 
54. There were no peasants. 55. They used to speak oftener. 
56. She knew it as well as he. 57. He lives in the smallest 
village. 58. He was not as young as I. 59. How old was 
he? 60. Was she young? 


§ 302] 


LEgON XXX 


167 


II 

302. B. 1. Have you no errands to do? 2. I was doing 
some. 3. Was it raining or was it fine weather? 4. What 
were you doing while we were finishing our work? 5. Dur¬ 
ing the summer vacation I used to play in the fields. 6. Was 
it hot, or was it cold, or did it blow during the winter? 7. He 
died in the little village where he was born. 8. Was he the 
butcher or the baker? 9. I think he was the doctor or the 
lawyer, or perhaps the carpenter, but I don’t know his trade. 
10. Was that Henry’s horse? 11. That horse is mine, not 
his. 12. Why did you use to place that watch on the chair? 
13. Because I used to look at it when I did not know what 
time it was. 14. At what time did you return to school 
yesterday? 15. If, in making tea, you have no sugar, what 
do you do? 16. We go across the field to the grocer’s in the 
little village, and we buy some sugar there. 17. Were your 
clothes soiled by the rain? 18. No, it was not raining in 
the country. 19. It is fine weather there as often as in the 
city, or oftener, I think. 20. Do you know if she is twenty 
years old? 21. I used to think she was more than (de) 1 
twenty, but she has told me that she will be nineteen this 
autumn. 22. She is not so young as that! 23. Did you use 
to answer my questions as well as he? 24. We used to 
answer your questions at school less badly than the other 
pupils. 25. Was his niece married, and did she live in the 
same village as he? 26. She was living there at her grand¬ 
father’s house when her fianc6, the young lawyer, married 
the old peasant’s daughter. 27. Thirty or forty years ago, 
I think. 28. I don’t know; I prefer (like better) to talk of 
other things. 29. They are both dead? 30. Yes, ten years 
ago, at least. 31. The beginning was better than the end. 


de is used instead of que before numerals. 


168 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 303 


31. TRENTE ET UNIJSME LEQON [trait e ynjem] 


LA POSTE 


I 

303. The Conditional (which tells what would be the case 
under certain conditions) never offers the slightest difficulty 
even in irregular verbs: drop the -ai of the future and add 


the endings of the imperfect* 

I would or should give, etc. 
(Fut. je donner ai [donore] 1 ) 

je donner ais [donore] 1 
(tu donner ais [donore]) 
il donner ait [donors] 
nous donner ions [donorjo] 
vous donner iez [donorje] 
ils donner aient [donors] 

(je finirai) je finirais, etc. 

(je vendrai) je vendrais, etc. 


I would or should know, etc. 
(Fut. je saur ai) 

je saur ais 
(tu saur ais) 
il saur ait 
nous saur ions 
vous saur iez 
ils saur aient 

(j’aurai) j’aurais, etc. 

(je serai) je serais, etc. 


304. Aller* 2 [ale], to go; allant [ala], going; alle [ale], gone. 

Present indicative : je vais [vs] nous allons [alo] 

tu vas [va] vous allez [ale] 

il va [va] ils vont [vo] 

Imperfect: (from allant) j’allais, etc. 

Past indefinite: je suis alle, etc. 

Future: j’irai [-e], etc. 

Conditional: j’irais [-e], etc. 


305. Conditions follow the normal English forms: 

If he speaks, I shall speak, S’il parle (present), je parlerai ( future ) 

If he spoke, I should speak, S’il parlait (imperfect), je parlerais (con¬ 
ditional) 

1 Note the pronunciation of the endings 

2 Cf. § 135, note 2. 


§ 306] 


LEQON XXXI 


169 


VOCABULARY 


306. 

Padresse [ladres] (/.), the address 
la boite [bwa:t], box 

la boite aux lettres, the letter¬ 
box 

la carte postale [kart postal], post¬ 
card 

la carte postale illustree [ilys- 
tre], picture post-card 
le colis postal [koli postal], postal 
package 

a droite [a drwat], to the right • 
ecrire [ekri:r], to write 
envoyer [dvwaje], to send; future, 
j’enverrai [ 3 dvere], etc. 

307. 

1. I am going; I will go 

2. They go; they would go 

3. I shall write; I would write 

4. We will send; they would 

send 

5. She goes; he would go 

6. Would you buy? you will 

buy 

7. We would not put; he will 

not put 

8. He will open; she would 

finish 

9. He would send a letter 

10. He will not write letters 

11. I would not answer him 

12. I will not answer her 

13. Would he have answered? 

14. They will have answered 

15. She will be happy 

16. He would not be happy 

17. I will write if he goes there 


le facteur [faktceir], porter, let¬ 
ter-carrier 

a gauche [a go$], to the left 
heureux [oero] (/. heureuse [ceroiz]), 
happy 

la lettre [letr], letter 
le mandat [mada], money-order 
la moitie [mwatje], half 
ouvrir [uvriir], to open 
la poste [post], post-office 
quelque [kelko], some 
quelquefois [kelkofwa], sometimes 
le temps [ta], time 
le timbre [te:br], stamp 


Je vais; j’irai 

Ils vont; ils iraient 

J’ecrirai; j’ecrirais 

Nous enverrons; ils enverraient 

Elle va; il irait 

Acheteriez-vous? vous acheterez 

Nous ne mettrions pas; il ne met- 
tra pas 

Il ouvrira; elle finirait 

Il enverrait une lettre 
Il n’ecrira pas de lettres 
Je ne lui repondrais pas 
Je ne lui repondrai pas 
Aurait-il repondu? 

Ils auront repondu 
Elle sera heureuse 
H ne serait pas heureux 
J’ecrirai s’il y va 


DRILL 


170 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 308 


18. He would write if I went 

19. If we paid, would you pay? 

20. You would be happy, if you 

chose them 


II ecrirait si j’y allais 
Si nous payions, payeriez-vous? 
Vous seriez heureux, si vous les 
choisissiez 


308. Reading. En hiver, quand il fait si froid qu’on 
ne peut pas sortir, j’aimerais k dcrire des lettres du matin 
au soir, si j’en avais le 
temps. Si seulement ma 
s sceur, en allant a la cam- 
pagne, m’avait donne son 
adresse, je lui ecrirais tous 
les jours deux ou trois let¬ 
tres au moins. Je lui en 
io Ecrirais une tout de suite 
apres avoir ddjeune; puis 
je sortirais, j’irais a la 
poste, j’irais au premier 
guichet dans la grande 
15 salle, j’acheterais un tim¬ 
bre a quinze centimes, je 
chercherais la boite aux lettres, et dans cinq minutes ma lettre 
partirait. Ma sceur l’aurait dans trois ou quatre heures, elle y 
r^pondrait le m£me jour, et avant le soir le facteur m’appor- 
20 terait une lettre de Marie. Ce serait beau! Elle me dirait 
si la saison est belle k la campagne, si les fleurs poussent, 
s’il fait froid ou chaud, s’il pleut ou s’il fait beau temps. 
Et moi, le meme soir je lui repondrais, et Pierre lui ecrirait 
une carte postale illustree, et Henriette lui enverrait un 
25 beau livre. Marie nous enverrait aussi des colis postaux — 
toujours des fleurs. Elle choisirait les plus beaux ceillets et 
les plus belles roses de son jardin, elle les mettrait dans une 
boite, et elle Ecrirait notre adresse sur la boite. Puis elle 
irait a la gare, chercherait le guichet a gauche, acheterait des 
30 timbres, les payerait, et donnerait son colis postal k l’em- 



J’aimerais a 6crire des lettres 






§ 309] 


LEgON XXXI 


171 


ployA Le meme jour nous Paurions, nous Pouvririons, nous 
admirerions les belles fleurs, nous demanderions au facteur 
s’il n’y a pas aussi une lettre ou une carte postale, quelque 
chose enfin, et il dirait quelquefois oui et quelquefois non. 
On chercherait dans la boite, on y trouverait une carte 35 
postale illustree, ou un beau livre ou quelque autre chose. 

Et tout le monde demanderait: «Que dit Marie?)) Et nous 
serions si heureux—si nous savions son adresse! 

309. Resume. Hiver, lettres; ma soeur, son adresse; a la 
poste; on repond; facteur; ma soeur dirait; moi, Pierre et 
Henriette; colis-postal; oeillets et roses; ma soeur a la gare; 
le colis arrive; on cherche; on demande; heureux. 

310. Oral Drill. 1 . He goes; he would go. 2. They go; 
we will go. 3. Will you write?; would you write? 4. I do not 
go; I would not go. 5. They will put; they would put. 

6 . He would have finished. 7. They will be finished. 

8 . Would they send?; they will send. 9. He will open; I 
should choose. 10 . Will you sell?; would you sell? 11 . At 
last I will answer him. 12. He would not answer her. 

13. Will she be happy at last? 14. Would she not be happy? 

15. Will his letter be finished? 16. Would he write her 
sometimes? 17. Would you sell half of the stamps? 18. Will 
they send a postal-parcel sometimes? 19. Would you have 
had the time? 20. She would write her (son) address on the 
postal-card if she had the time. 21. Would you go to the 
stamp-window or to the letter-box? 22 . The letter-carrier, 
if he had a money-order, would go to the room on the left. 

23. Would she send something, a money-order or a picture- 
postal? 24. You will go to the window at the right. 25. I 
would go, if I had time. 


172 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 311 


II 

311. DIALOGUE 


1. I am going to the post-office. 

Do you want to go there 
with me? 

2. I would go with pleasure, if 

I had (the) time (for it) 

3. It is not late 

4. What are you going to do 

at the post-office? 

5. I shall buy some stamps: 

12 stamps at 15 centimes, 
and 16 stamps at 25 

6. I would buy 10 francs’ 

worth at the same time, 
if I had some money 

7. I would give you 10 francs, 

if I had enough money; 
but I have only 13 or 14 
francs. I will give you 
half, if you wish 

8. Thank you! Where does 

one buy the stamps? 

9. At the window in the large 

room at the right 

10. I would also write some 

postal-cards, if there were 
any here 

11. Picture-postals? Ask for 

some in the store next 
door 

12. Where is the letter-box? 

13. Near the windows at the 

left 

14. I would write to my sister, 

if I knew her address. I 
1 See § 


Je vais a la poste. Voulez-vous y 
aller avec moi? 

J’irais avec plaisir, si j’en avais le 
temps 

II n’est pas tard 

Qu’est-ce que vous allez faire a 
la poste? 

J’acheterai des timbres: douze 
timbres a quinze centimes, et 
seize timbres a vingt-cinq 

J’en acheterais pour dix francs en 
meme temps, si j’avais de l’ar- 
gent 

Je vous donnerais dix francs, si 
j’avais assez d’argent; mais j’ai 
settlement treize ou quatorze 
francs. Je vous en donnerai la 
moitie, si vous voulez 

Merci! Oh est-ce qu’on achete 
les timbres? 

Au guichet dans la grande salle a 
droite 

J’ecrirais aussi quelques cartes 
postales, s’il y en avait ici 

Des cartes illustrees? Deman- 
dez-en dans le magasin a cote 

Oh est la boite aux lettres? 

Pres des guichets a gauche 

J’ecrirais a ma sceur si je savais 
son 1 adresse. Jelui aurais en- 

!4, Note. 


§312] 


LE£ON XXXI 


173 


would have sent her a 
postal-parcel also 

15. Oh yes! we would some¬ 

times send her money- 
orders with our letters 

16. And she would answer us 

and would tell us how 
much pleasure that gives 
her 


voye un colis postal aussi 

Ah oui! nous lui enverrions 
quelquefois des mandats avec 
nos lettres 

Et elle nous repondrait et nous 
dirait combien cela lui fait 
plaisir 


312. Conversation. 1 . How many letters would you 
write to your friends, if you had time? 2. If you left for 
Paris, to whom would you give your address? 3. If one 
had written a letter, where would one go to put it in the 
letter-box? 4. Where would one buy stamps? 5. How much 
would one pay for the stamps? 6. If you gave a postal- 
parcel to the employee, what would that cost? 7. If my 
sister left for Paris, would you sometimes send her some 
picture-postals? 8. Who would bring the letters to your 
house? 9. Whom will you ask for stamps, and where? 
10. If the postman had brought you anything, would you 
give him some money? 

313. Theme. We should like to write letters all the time, 
if our friends answered us immediately. We would write a 
letter every day; we would go to the post-office, we would 
ask for some fifteen-centime stamps. After having paid for 
our stamps, or our postal-cards, we would put the letters or 
cards in the box and in three minutes they would leave for 
Chicago. Then we would go to the store beside the post- 
office and would buy some pretty picture-postals or some 
good book which we would send to our friends. They would 
be so happy when the postman would bring the cards or the 
book. They would say to him “ Thank you.” Then they 
would immediately open our letters, or look in our box, be¬ 
cause they would be so happy if we had sent them something 


174 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 314 


which they would like. And they would ask the postman, 
if some day he did not bring them something: “Have you 
not a letter or a postal-package or something for us?” 

314. Exercises. A. Conjugate: ‘If I go, I shall know’; 
‘If I knew, I should go.’ 

B. Drill on conditional of savoir, aller: § 480, A. 

C . Drill on aller: § 480, C. 


32. TRENTE-DEUXlfiME LE£ON [trait dpzjem] 

L’HOTEL 

I 

315. Je ne cherche pas, I do not seek. 

In place of pas: for nothing put rien [rje] 

for nobody put personne [person] 
for never put jamais [ 3 ame] 
for no more put plus [ply] 
for only put que [ke] 


Do not omit ne. 


Je ne cherche rien, I seek nothing (= 1 do not seek anything) 

Je n’env errai personne, I shall send nobody (= I shall not send anybody) 
II ne va jamais, He never goes (= He does not ever go) 

II ne cherche plus, He seeks no more ( = He does not seek any more) 

Je ne sais que cela, 1 1 know only that (= 1 don’t know (any more) than 
that) 


1 Position with past indefinite or with complementary infinitive: 


Same as pas (je n’ai pas cherche): 
lien: Je n'ai rien cherch6 
jamais: Je n'ai jamais cherche 
plus : Je n’ai plus cherche 
Same as in English: 
personnel Je n’ai cherche personne 
que : Je ne l’ai trouve qu’apres avoir 
cherche 


Je ne peux rien comprendre 
Je ne peux jamais comprendre 
Je ne peux plus comprendre 

Je ne peux chercher personne 
Je ne peux chercher que mes amis 


§ 316] LEgON XXXII 175 

316. If these negative words begin the sentence, don’t 
forget ne : 

Personne n’est venu, Nobody came 
Rien n’est arrive, Nothing arrived 

317. If the verb is omitted, ne is omitted also: 

Qui est la? Personne, Who is there? Nobody 
Irez-vous? Jamais!, Will you go? Never! 

Qu’avez-vous? Rien!, What have you? Nothing 

318. Some (any) before a noun =of the. 

1. If the verb is negative, the is omitted (§ 248): 

II n’a pas de chevaux, He has no horses 
II n’a plus de chevaux, He has no more horses 

2. If an adjective precedes the noun, the is omitted: 

II a de bons chevaux, He has good horses 
But II a des chevaux blancs, He has white horses 

Note. According to a decree of the French Minister of Public 
Instruction, this exception may be ignored: des bons chevaux is not 
incorrect. 

319. In and to= 1. with cities, a: a Paris. 

2. with feminine countries, en : en France. 

3. with masculine countries, au: aux 

Etats-Unis. 

Je suis a Paris (en France, aux Etats-Unis), I am in Paris (in France, 
in the United States) 

Je vais a Paris (en France, aux Etats-Unis), I am going to Paris (to 
France, to the United States) 

320. Pouvoir [puvwair], to he able; pouvant [puva]; pu 

[py]- 

Present: 

je peux [po], I can 
(tu peux [po], thou canst) 
il peut [po], he can 


nous pouvons [puvo], we can 
vous pouvez [puve], you can 
ils peuvent [pce:v], they can 


176 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 321 


Imperfect: je pouvais, etc. 

Past indefinite: j’ai pu, etc. 

Future: je pourrai [—e], etc. 

Conditional: je pourrais [-e], etc. 

321. If the student will make careful note of the following 
he will be greatly aided in learning irregular verbs: In the 
'present indicative and the present subjunctive the first, second, 
third singular and the third plural have the same stem 
(peu-), the first and second plural have the stem of the present 
participle (pouv-). The consonant which follows the stem 
of the third plural (peu-) is that which precedes the ending 
(-ant) of the present participle (-v): 

je peux gives the stem of the third plural: ils peu-; 
pouvant gives the consonant: ils peuv-; 

-ent (unpronounced) is the regular ending: ils peuvent. 

From now on irregular forms of the irregular verbs will be 
italicized; the student ought to know all other forms without 
learning them. In pouvoir he should have to learn only 
pu, je peux and je pourrai. 

322. Prendre [praidr], to take;prenan t [prona]; pris [pri]. 

Present: je prends [pra] nous prenons [prono] 

(tu prends [pra]) vous prenez [prone] 

il prend [pra] ilsprennent [pren] 

Imperfect: je prenais, etc. 

Past indefinite: j’ai pris, etc. 

Future: je prendrai [-e], etc. 

Conditional: je prendrais [-e], etc. 

323. Like prendre conjugate: 

apprendre [apraidr], to learn 
comprendre [kopraidr], to understand 


§ 324] 


LE^ON XXXII 


177 


VOCABULARY 


324 

l’Amerique [lamerik] (/.), America 
assis [asi], seated 
attendre [at a: dr], to wait, wait for 
brosser [brose], to brush 
cirer [sire], to black (shoes) 
comme [kom], how, as, like 
dernier [dernje] (/. derniere [der- 
nje:r], last 

deuxieme [dozjem], second 
Les Etats-Unis [le zeta zyni] (m.), 
United States 

l’etranger [letra 3 e] (m.) foreigner 
or foreign country- 

325. 

1. Take; we have taken 

2. He understood; we under¬ 

stood 

3. Do you learn? have you 

learned? 

4. Have you been able? will 

he be able? 

5. You used to be able; he is 

able 

6. Would you be able? I was 

able 

7. He never understands; he 

never will be able to un¬ 
derstand 

8. We understood nothing; no¬ 

body learned 

9. We understand nobody; no¬ 

body has learned 

10. Nobody used to understand 
us 


l’hotel [lotel] (m.), hotel 
le lit [li], bed 

le numero [nymero], number 
Parisien [parizje] (/. Parisienne 
[parizjen]), Parisian 
poli [poli], polite 
le pourboire [purbwair], tip 
premier [promje] (/. premiere 
[promjcir]), first 

le rez-de-chaussee 1 [re do $ose], 
the ground-floor 
le soulier [sulje], shoe 


Prenez; nous avons pris 

II a compris; nous avons compris 

Apprenez-vous? avez-vous 
appris? 

Avez-vous pu? pourra-t-il? 

Vous pouviez; il peut 

Pourriez-vous? je pouvais 

II ne comprend jamais; il ne 
pourra jamais comprendre 

Nous n’avons rien compris; per- 
sonne n’a appris 

Nous ne comprenons personne; 
personne n’a appris 

Personne ne nous comprenait 


DRILL 


1 The ground-floor= rez-de-chaussee; second floor =le premier; third floor = 
le deuxieme. 


178 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 326 


11. We used to understand no¬ 

body 

12. I understood only two 

words 

13. He would not be able to 

learn anything 

14. Don’t take any shoes! 

15. I have taken some fine cloth¬ 

ing 

16. Have you been able to un¬ 

derstand? 

17. I have never understood 

18. Would you be able to do it? 

19. He will no longer be able to 

go 

20. We no longer took any les¬ 

sons 


Nous ne comprenions personne 

Je n’ai compris que deux mots 

H ne pourrait rien apprendre 

Ne prenez pas de souliers! 

J’ai pris de beaux vetements 

Avez-vous pu comprendre? 

Je n’ai jamais compris 
Pourriez-vous le faire? 

II ne pourra plus aller 

Nous ne prenions plus de lefons 


326. Reading. Je ne suis arrive qu’aujourd’hui a Paris. 
Je n’y suis encore jamais venu. Je suis ne a Chicago, aux 
Btats-Unis, et je ne suis sorti de cette ville qu’une ou deux fois. 
Je n’ai pas pu trouver mes amis a la gare. Personne n’y est 
5 venu. Qu’est-ce que je vais faire maintenant? Sortir seul? 
Je pourrais perdre mon chemin. Attendre? Personne n’ar- 
rivera. Ah! voila! Je vais appeler un cocher. Non — il 
y a un grand hotel tout pres. J’irai la. Je ne parlerai que 
le frangais. Je ne parlerai plus un mot d’anglais en France, 
io Aux Etats-Unis on ne parle que tres peu le frangais. Ici 
je pourrai le parler tout le temps. On me prendra pour un 
Frangais. On m’a tout de suite pris pour un Frangais, 
quand je suis arrivd en France. Le gargon a l’hotel me pre- 
nait pour un Parisien. II m’a dit qu’il n’avait jamais entendu 
is un meilleur frangais et que c’etait etonnant comme il me 
comprenait. Il a tout compris! Je lui ai donne un bon 
eigare parce qu’il me prenait pour un Parisien. Il m’a .dit 
qu’on ne me prendrait jamais pour un Americain, si je ne 
fumais pas de si bons cigares, et si je ne portais pas de si 


§ 327] 


LEgON XXXII 


179 


beaux vetements. Je lui ai donne un deuxieme cigare — 
comme je n’avais pas d’argent sur moi je n’ai pas pu lui 
donner le pourboire qu’il attendait. 

Plus tard la femme de chambre qui faisait mon lit m’a dit 
aussi que personne he parlait le frangais comme moi. Je 
pense que c’est vrai. En brossant mon pardessus elle m’a dit: 
«Vous avez de bons tailleurs en Amerique qui font de tres 
beaux vetements. Je n’en ai jamais vu de plus beaux. 
Est-ce en Amerique que vous avez appris le frangais? Yous 
comprenez si bien! Nous n’apprenons pas si bien Fanglais a 
Paris.)) Je lui ai donne un petit pourboire parce qu’elle 
etait si polie. En m’apportant mes souliers cires, elle m’a 
dit: ((Yous avez la de tres bons souliers, monsieur. On ne 
fait pas d’aussi bons souliers a Paris qu’aux Btats-Unis. 
Ou les Americains ont-ils appris a faire des souliers si beaux? 
Nous ne faisons rien de si bon ici.)) Autre pourboire! Si 
elle avait pu dire encore de si belles choses sur les Americains 
elle m’aurait pris mon dernier centime. 

327. Resume. Paris, Chicago; a la gare; sortir, attendre; 
cocher, hotel; Americain ou Parisien; gargon, cigares; femme 
de chambre; vetements, souliers; pourboires. 

328. Oral Drill. 1. You are taking; we took nothing. 
2. They have been able; they will be able. 3. Do you no 
longer understand?; nobody understands. 4. Did you take; 
I was taking. 5. We took; they take. 6. They never used 
to understand; they understand nobody. 7. They are able; 
they have been able. 8. He would no longer be able; he 
used to be able. 9. We never understand; I understand 
nothing. 10. Nobody understood; I used to understand 
nobody. 11. Have you learned it? 12. I was learning 
nothing. 13. We are learning nothing. 14. He will no 
longer be able to wait. 15. Would you be able to wait? 
16. I have learned nothing. 17. Have you been able to 
brush my clothes? 18. I was not able to black your shoes. 


20 

25 

30 

35 


180 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 329 


19. Have you never had rooms on the (au) ground-floor? 

20. The chambermaid has not been able to make the bed. 

21 . Nobody would desire a room on the second floor, if the 
waiters could find a good room on the ground-floor. 22. These 
foreigners are not able to find the hotel. 23. They used to 
live at Chicago, in the United States. 24. The polite 
waiter blacks their shoes. 25. If he brushes their clothes, 
they give him a tip. 26. The Parisian lives on the second 
floor, number 37. 27. He is seated near the door. 


DIALOGUE 


ii 

329. 

1 . At last I am in Paris! Who 

will be able to tell me 
where I shall find a good 
hotel? 

2. Do you want a carriage, sir? 

3. Yes. Take these packages 

and put this trunk in the 
carriage. I have no other 
baggage 

4. You are a stranger, perhaps, 

sir? 

5. Yes, I have never been in 

Paris. Is there a hotel 
near the depot, where 
they talk English? I no 
longer talk the French 
language very well 

6. You might stop at the 

English Hotel, sir. There 
are never any Frenchmen 
there. You will be able 
to talk English with 
everybody. Nobody talks 
French there 


Enfin, je suis a Paris! Qui 
pourra me dire oh je trouverai 
un bon hotel? 

Monsieur desire une voiture? 

Oui. Prenez ces colis et mettez 
cette malle dans la voiture. 
Je n’ai pas d’autres bagages 

Monsieur est etranger peut-etre? 

Oui, je n’ai jamais ete a Paris. 
Est-ce qu’il y a un hotel 
pres de la gare, oh on parle 
anglais? Je ne parle plus tres 
bien la langue franpaise 

Monsieur pourrait descendre a 
l’hotel des Anglais. H n’y a 
jamais de Franpais la. Vous 
pourrez parler anglais avec tout 
le monde. Personne n’y parle 
franpais 


§ 330] 


LEgON XXXII 


181 


7. Nobody? 

8. No, sir, never. They talk 

only English there 

9. Good! As I talk only a very 

poor French, I will go to 
that hotel 

10. There’s the hotel, sir! 

11. There’s your tip! Waiter, 

take my packages! I 
have only those two. 
Have you a nice room on 
the ground-floor? 

12. There are no more 

13. On the second floor? 

14. Nothing. Everything is 

taken. But there is no¬ 
body in number 30, on 
the third floor 

15. I’ll take it. I’ll go up at 

once 

16. You desire nothing, sir? 

17. No — nothing 

18. There are your packages. I 

was not able to carry 
your trunk 

19. Where is the waiter that I 

saw seated in front of the 
door? 

20. He is not there any longer. 

There is nobody down¬ 
stairs 

21. All right! Brush that over¬ 

coat and black my shoes! 


Personne? 

Non, monsieur, jamais. On n’y 
parle que l’anglais 

Bon! Comme je ne parle qu’un 
tres mauvais franfais, j’irai 
a cet hotel 

Voila l’hotel, monsieur! 

Voila votre pourboire! Garjon, 
prenez mes colis! Je n’ai 
que ces deux-la. Avez-vous 
une belle chambre au rez-de- 
chaussee? 

H n’y en a plus 

Au premier? 

Rien. Tout est pris. Mais il n’y a 
personne dans le numero trente 
au deuxieme 

Je le prendrai. Je monterai tout 
de suite 

Monsieur ne desire rien? 

Non — rien 

Voila vos colis. Je n’ai pas pu 
porter votre malle 

Oh est le garfon que j’ai vu 
assis devant la porte? 

II n’y est plus. H n’y a personne 
en bas 

Bon! Brossez ce pardessus et 
cirez mes souliers! 


330. Conversation. 1. Have you been at Paris only 
once or twice? 2. Were your friends able to find you at the 
station? 3. Will you never be able to find your way, if you 
go out alone? 4. Have you been able to find nobody at 


182 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 331 


the hotel? 5. If you speak French in the United States, do 
the Americans take you for a Parisian? 6 . Did people take 
you for a Frenchman immediately when you arrived in 
France? 7. Did the waiters at the hotels understand you? 

8 . Did nobody understand that you were (an) American? 

9. Why have you not been able to give tips to the waiters? 

10. What did the chambermaid say to you? 

331. Theme. I have learned the French language at 
Paris. There are beautiful things to see at Paris. I have 
not been in France very long. I live in the United States. 
After Sunday, I shall no longer be in Paris; I shall go to the 

5 country for two or three days, and then I shall leave for 
Chicago. There are good hotels in America. In Chicago I 
will go to a big hotel where they have only French waiters. 
I will speak only French with them. The French waiters 
never speak English to travelers who know French, even if 
io they speak it only very little. In France, I never talked 
English; I talked only French at Paris. In the United 
States, I will never talk English at the hotel. After having 
learned French so well, I shall talk only French. I will say 
nothing in English. Here at Paris the waiters all under- 
15 stand me. Nobody takes me for an American. I talk 
French to everybody; I talk English to nobody. It is 
astonishing how all the waiters and chambermaids have 
always understood me. They never take me for an American. 
They always ask me where I learned French, because they 
20 have never heard a foreigner talk so well. Nothing is difficult 
for me. Nobody talks better than I. 

332. Exercises. A. Use 'nothing/ 'nobody/ 'never/ 
'no more/ ‘only/ with the present and past indefinite of 

chercher, trouver, choisir. 

B. Fill the following blanks: ‘ He has no —/ ‘ He has small 
—/ 'He has white —/ 'He has no more —/ using the ap¬ 
propriate words among the following: 


§ 333] 


LEgON XXXIII 


183 


flower cow time tea nephew 

horse letter watch shoe niece 

C. Drill on present indicative and conditional of pouvoir 
and prendre: § 480, A. 

D. Drill on pouvoir and prendre: § 480, C. 

33. TRENTE-TROISliME LEQON [trait trwazjem] 

LE MAGASIN 

i 

333. Imperative=indicative with pronoun omitted (§ 53): 

vous donnez, you give; donnez! give! 

nous donnons, we give; donnons! let us give! 

nous finissons, we finish; finissons! let us finish! 

334. With the positive imperative, pronoun-objects follow 
in violation of the rule stated in § 170. 

Cherchez-le! Look for him! ( Note the hyphen ) 

Donnez-lui! Give (to) him or her! 

Trouvons-les! Let us find them! 

Note. With the positive imperative moi is used instead of me. 

Cherchez-moi! Look for me! 

335. With the negative imperative the regular rules are 
followed: 

Ne le cherchez pas! Do not look for him! 

Ne me cherchez pas! Do not look for me! 

336. To form adverbs from adjectives: 

1. If the masculine ends in a vowel, add -ment [ma] to it: 
poli, polite; poliment, politely; vrai, true; vraiment, truly 


184 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 337 


2. If the masculine ends in a consonant , add -ment to the 
feminine: 

certain (/. certaine), certain 

certainement, certainly 
naturel (/. naturelle), natural 

naturellement, naturally 
heureux (/. heureuse), happy 

heureusement, happily 


337. Venir* [voniir], to come; venant [vona], venu [vony]. 
Present: je viens [vje] nous venons [vono] 

tu viens [vje] vous venez [vane] 

il vient [vje] Us viennent [vjeb] 

Imperfect: je venais, etc. 

Past indefinite: je suis venu, etc. (See § 135.) 

Future: je viendrai [vjedre], etc. 

Conditional: je viendrais [vjedre], etc. 


Note. Compounds of venir (e.g. revenir* [ravaniir], to come back, 
return) and tenir [taniir] and its compounds are conjugated like venir. 


VOCABULARY 


338. 

l’achat [la$a] (m.), purchase 
certain [serte] (/. certaine 
[serten]), certain 
clair [kle:r], light (of colors ) 
le client [klia], customer 
la couleur [kuloeir], color 
envelopper [avalope], to wrap up 
essayer [eseje], to try 
fonce [fose], dark (of colors ) 
le gant [ga], glove 
jaune [ 3 on], yellow 
le metre [me:tr], meter, yard 


a la mode [a la mod], fashion¬ 
able 

naturel [natyrel] (/. naturelle), 
natural 

la paille [pa:j], straw 
la paire [pe:r], pair 
le paquet [pake], package 
passer [pase], to pass 
s’il vous plait [sil vu pie], if you 
please 

la qualite [kalite], quality 
tenir [toniir], to hold 
il vaut [vo], it is worth 


339. DRILL 

1. Look! let us look! Regardez! regardons! 

2. Let us choose! choose! Choisissons! choisissez! 

3. Don’t come! let us come! Ne venez pas! venons! 


§ 340] 


LEgON XXXIII 


185 


4. In coming; in finishing 

5. She has chosen; she has 

come 

6. They will return; they would 
' hold 

7. Show me that! don’t show 

them that! 

8. Make your purchases! don’t 

make them! 

9. Let us make them! let us 

not make them! 

10. Show me some gloves! don’t 

show them! 

11. He will hold that easily 

12. Wrap them! don’t wrap 

them! 

13. Hold this dress! don’t hold 

it! 

14. In holding; having held 

15. He would hold certainly 

16. He will come, truly 

17. Give me my package! don’t 

forget it! 

18. Let’s buy this ribbon! let’s 

not buy it! 

19. In holding them; we have 

held it 

20. Let us hold him! let’s not 

hold them! 


En venant; en finissant 

Elle a choisi; elle est venue 

Us reviendront; ils tiendraient 

Montrez-moi cela! ne leur mon- 
trez pas cela! 

Faites vos achats! ne les faites 
pas! 

Faisons-les! ne les faisons pas! 

Montrez-moi des gants! ne les 
montrez pas! 

II tiendra cela facilement 

Enveloppez-les! ne les enveloppez 
pas! 

Tenez cette robe! ne la tenez pas! 

En tenant; ayant tenu 

II tiendrait certainement 

II viendra, vraiment 

Donnez-moi mon paquet! ne 
l’oubliez pas! 

Achetons ce ruban! ne 1’achetons 
pas! 

En les tenant; nous l’avons 
tenu 

Tenons-le! ne les tenons pas! 


340. Reading. Une lettre venant de Paris! De qui 
vient-elle? De mon fiance! II vient passer quelques se- 
maines ici — chez nous, naturellement. Un mois — quatre 
semaines seulement! C’est peu! II viendra par le train de 
midi et demi. Je vais tout de suite en ville faire des achats: 
quelques rubans, des gants jaunes ou gris, un chapeau de 
paille, une robe blanche. Venez, mes soeurs! Allons au ma- 
gasin faire nos achats! Notre cousin vient ici aujourd’hui! 


186 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 340 


II viendra a midi! Allons chez la modiste! Regardons les 
io chapeaux de paille! Achetons nous quelque chose de joli — 
des chapeaux a la mode! Choisissons-les avec de belles 
fleurs et des rubans blancs! Et ne les prenons pas s’ils ne 
sont pas a la mode! Void 
une voiture! Prenons-la! 
is Mais oh est le cocher? Ap- 
pelez-le! Ah! le voici! Mon¬ 
tons ! Enfin, voila le magasin! 

Descendons! Entrons! Ache- 
tons nos gants et nos ru- 
20 bans ici! Regardez done 
ces beaux rubans! Montrez- 
nous ces rubans, s’il vous 
plait! Apportez-en de jaunes 
et de blancs! N’en apportez 
2s pas de rouges! En avez-vous 
de plus fonces? Ne les ap¬ 
portez pas, s’ils ne sont pas 
plus fonces que les rubans que 
je tiens ici! Cherchez-moi 
30 une meilleure qualite! Et ne 
me montrez plus de ces ru¬ 
bans bon marche! Montrez- 
moi les plus beaux! II vaut 
combien le metre, ce ruban blanc? Quatre francs! e’est cher. 
35 Donnez-moi trois metres de ce ruban-ci, et ne me donnez 
qu’un demi-metre de ce ruban-la. Montrez-nous mainte- 
nant des robes blanches! Cette robe-ci est tres jolie. Pre-> 
nons-la, n’est-ce pas, mes soeurs? Elle est venue de Paris, 
peut-etre? Oui, vraiment? Ces autres sont tres jolies, aussi. 
40 Prenons-en pour toutes les trois, n’est-ce pas? Elies sont 
tres a la mode, naturellement? Les robes qui viennent de 
Paris (le) sont toujours, certainement. Enveloppez-les! 
Vous les enverrez tout de suite. Autrement, ne les envoyez 



Cette robe-ci est tres jolie 




§341] 


LEgON XXXIII 


187 


pas! Si elles ne sont pas venues a onze heures, je n’en veux 
pas. Ce matin, avant onze heures — ne l’oubliez pas! 45 
Oubliez-le — et vous perdrez certainement un bon client! 

341. Resume. Yisite du fiance; train; faire des achats; 
chapeaux a la mode; voiture; cocher; magasin; rubans, 
couleurs; qualite, prix; robes, de Paris ;'enveloppez, envoyez; 
oublier, client perdu. 

342. Oral Drill. 1 . Pass!; let us choose! 2. Don’t 
come!; return! 3. In returning, in choosing. 4. We have 
finished; he has come. 5. You will not come; he would 
hold. 6 . Would they come?; will they hold? 7. Do it!; don’t 
do it! 8 . In holding them; having held him. 9. I was 
holding him; I will hold her. 10. Certainly they will hold. 

11. Naturally he holds them. 12. Will he come, truly? 

13. Forget it!; don’t forget it! 14. Let us not forget it!; 
let’s forget it! 15. Will you return? I shall not return. 

16. Wrap this package!; don’t wrap it! 17. Give them some 
gloves! 18. Don’t give him the straw hat! 19. Show her 
this dress! 20. Don’t send her these dresses! 21 . Choose 
this dark color!; don’t choose it! 22. We choose the light 
color; let us choose it! 23. Show her some hats, if you 
please! 24. How much is this silk worth? 25. It is worth 
only two francs a (the) yard; buy it! 26. Those yellow 
gloves are not fashionable; don’t buy them! 27. This dark 
yellow is certainly pretty. 28. I like this dress; wrap it 
up! 29. Send it to my address, please! 30. Choose this 
quality! 31. Don’t show me those gloves; they are cer¬ 
tainly too light. 


188 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 343 


II 

343. DIALOGUE 

1. I am going to make some Je vais faire des achats. Venez 


purchases. Come with 
me! 

2. Naturally I would come 

with pleasure, if I could 
return early 

3. You will be able to easily. 

There is a cabby coming! 
Let’s get in! 

4. Here’s the store! Come! 

Let’s go in! 

5. Show us some gloves, please! 

6. Of what color do you wish 

them? 

7. Show us some yellow ones 

and some gray ones! 

8. Try on this pair! 

9. Yes, let’s put them on! No 

— let’s not put them on! 
Show me another pair, 
please, but do not show 
me so dark a color! 

10. The pair that I hold here 

is very pretty. These 
gloves come from Paris 

11. But gloves coming from 

Paris will be very dear, 
won’t they? 

12. Naturally they are a little 

dearer. But I know that 
this pair is worth more 
than the others 

13. Give me that pair! 

14. You will not easily find any 


avec moi! 

Naturellement je viendrais avec 
plaisir, si je pouvais revenir de 
bonne heure 

Vous le pourrez facilement. Voila 
un cocher qui vient! Montons! 

Voici le magasin! Venez! En- 
trons! 

' Montrez-nous des gants, s’il vous 
plait! 

De quelle couleur les desirez- 
vous? 

Montrez-nous des jaunes et des 
gris! 

Essayez cette paire-ci! 

Oui, mettons-les! Non — ne les 
mettons pas! Montrez-moi 
une autre paire, s’il vous plait, 
mais ne me montrez pas une 
couleur si foncee! 

La paire que je tiens ici est tres 
jolie. Ces gants viennent de 
Paris 

Mais des gants venant de Paris 
seront tres chers, n’est-ce pas? 

Naturellement ils sont un peu 
plus chers. Mais je sais que 
cette paire vaut plus que les 
autres 

Donnez-moi cette paire-la! 

Vous n’en trouverez pas facile- 


§ 344] 


LEgON XXXIII 


189 


cheaper. This color is 
really fine 

15. That’s true. Only don’t 

give me that first pair! 
Give me the others! 
Wrap them up and send 
them to my address! 
To-day, don’t forget it! 

16. Certainly, madam! I will 

send your packages im¬ 
mediately 

17. Now let us look at the straw 

hats! Let us choose one 
of the prettiest! 

18. Here is one of very good 

quality and very fashion¬ 
able! Put it on! 

19. Good! Let us take it! 


ment a meilleur marche. 
Cette couleur est vraiment 
belle 

C’est vrai. Seulement, ne me 
donnezpas cette premiere paire! 
Donnez-moi les autres! En- 
veloppez-les et envoyez-les a 
mon adresse! Aujourd’hui, ne 
l’oubliez pas! 

Certainement, madame! J’en- 
verrai vos paquets tout de 
suite 

Maintenant, regardons les cha¬ 
peaux de paille! Choisissons 
un des plus jolis! 

En voici un de tres bonne qualite 
et tres a la mode! Mettez-le! 

Bon! Prenons-le! 


344. Conversation. 1. By what train did your cousin 
come? 2. You are going to the store; what will you buy? 
3. What did you buy at the milliner’s? 4. Do you always 
take a carriage when you go to make purchases? 5. At 
what time will your cousins come to your house? 6. That 
is very pretty ribbon; how much is it worth a yard? 7. Have 
I shown you my beautiful white dresses which came from 
Paris? 8. Have you taken the yellow gloves or the white 
ones? 9. Are those hats which your sisters chose fashion¬ 
able? 10. Will you send me before ten o’clock the packages 
which you have wrapped up? 


345. Theme. At last I have returned home (to my house). 
Let’s enter the living-room! Where is the maid? Will she 
never come? I thought certainly that she would come 
immediately. Five years ago, when I returned from Paris, 
she always used to come to bring me my letters. She used 5 


190 


BEGINNING FKENCH 


[§ 346 


to hold my horse while I was getting down. But truly, she 
is not so young as she was (it). Marie! come here! Bring 
me my letters! Thank you! Ah! a letter coming from 
Paris! My cousin is coming to pass some weeks with us. 
io She will come certainly to-day; by the four o’clock train 
(train of four o’clock), naturally. My sister, come here! 
Let’s go to the store! Let’s make some purchases, a straw 
hat for me and a pair of gloves of a dark color for me. Let’s 
buy some beautiful flowers for my cousin! Choose them for 
15 me! But if you find fashionable dresses in the store, don’t 
look at them; if you find pretty hats, don’t buy them! 
Let’s make our purchases and come back! Wait! What 
time is it? Three o’clock already! We cannot arrive there 
easily before half past three. Let’s get into the carriage! 

346. Exercises. A. Fill the following blanks: it!’ 

* Do not — it!’ ‘Let us — it!’ ‘Let us not — them!’using 
the verbs: 

send finish learn build wait for 

B. ‘Give —!’ ‘Let us give —!’ Fill the blanks with the 
following pronouns, when possible both direct and indirect: 

him them (/.) her you 

me us them (m.) 

C. Form adverbs from the following adjectives: 

great open happy certain 

polite true natural 

D. Drill on present indicative of venir, tenir, revenir: 
§ 480, A. 

E. Drill on venir and tenir: § 480, D . 


§ 347] 


LEQON XXXIV 


191 


34. TRENTE-QUATRlfiME LE£ON [trait katriem] 

i 


347. Les Mois de PAnnee: 


janvier feavje], January 
fevrier [fevrie], February 
mars [mars], March 
avril [avril], April 
mai [ms], May 
juin feye], June 


juillet feyije], July 
aout [u], August 
septembre [septaibr], September 
octobre [oktobr], October 
novembre [novaibr], November 
decembre [desaibr], December 


Note 1. le premier janvier (mars, etc.), January 1 
But le deux (etc.) janvier, January 2, etc . 1 

Note 2. The French in speaking of the months often prefix le 
mois de to the name: 

au mois d’avril (= en avril), in April 

J’y vais au mois de mai, I am going there in May 


348. Combien de temps = how long. 


How long has he been here? 


Depuis combien de temps est-il ici ? ) 

Depuis quand est-il ici? ) 

II est ici depuis longtemps, He has been here a long time 


349. Faire [fsir], to do , make; faisant [faza], fait [fe]. 

Present: je fais [fe] nous faisons [fazo] 

(tu fais [fe]) vous faites [fet] 

il fait [fe] i/s font [fo] 

Imperfect: je faisais [faze], etc. 

Past indefinite: j’ai fait [fe], etc. 

Future: je ferai [fare], etc. 

Conditional: je ferais [fare], etc. 


350. Dire [diir], to say; disant [diza], dit [di]. 

Present: je dis [di] nous disons [dizo] 

(tu dis [di]) vous dites [dit] 

il dit [di] ils disent [di:z] 

i For the use of mil in dates, see p. 160, footnote 1. 


192 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


I§ 351 


Imperfect: je disais, etc. 

Past indefinite: j’ai dit, etc. 
Future: je dirai [— e], etc. 
Conditional: je dirais [-e], etc. 

VOCABULARY 


351. 

absolu [apsoly], absolute 
amuser [amyze], to amuse 
Panniversaire [laniverseir] (m.), 
birthday 

le cadeau [kado], present 
commencer [komase], to begin 
demain [dame], to-morrow 
depuis [dapyi], since, from 
la fete [fe:t], holiday 


le jour de Pan [ 3 ur do la]. New 

Year’s Day 

joyeux fewajo] (J. joyeuse 
fowajoiz]), joyous, merry 
jusqu’a [ 3 yska], up to, until 
le Noel [noel], Christmas 
le Paques [park], Easter 
le temps [ta], time, weather 
la visite [vizit], visit 


DRILL 


352. 

1. I was doing; he will do 

2. They are doing; they would 

do 

3. She was saying; they say 

4. Say it! don’t do it! 

5. Do it! don’t say it! 

6. One used to say; one says 

7. Let us say it! let us not do 

it! 

8. We say it; we do not do it 

9. Are you doing it? you say it 

10. Have you done it? I have 

said it 

11. They used to do it; we used 

to say it 

12. I will do it; I said it 

13. What were you doing? 

what was he saying? 


Je faisais; il fera 
Ils font; ils feraient 

Elle disait; ils disent 
Dites-le! ne le faites pas! 
Faites-le! ne le dites pas! 

On disait; on dit 
Disons-le! ne le faisons pas! 

Nous le disons; nous ne le faisons 
pas 

Le faites-vous? vous le dites 
L’avez-vous fait? je l’ai dit 

Ils le faisaient; nous le disions 

Je le ferai; je l’ai dit 
Qu’est-ce que vous faisiez? que 
disait-il? 


§ 353] 


LEgON XXXIV 


193 


14. Since January; until July 

15. How long, tell! since when? 

16. Since yesterday; until to¬ 

morrow 

17. What do you do in sum¬ 

mer? 

18. What will you do this win¬ 

ter? 

19. I would do it before fall 

20. Tell me, when will spring 

come? 


Depuis janvier; jusqu’a juillet 

Combien de temps, dites! de¬ 
puis combien de temps? 

Depuis hier; jusqu’a demain 

Qu’est-ce que vous faites en ete? 

Qu’est-ce que vous ferez cet 
hiver? 

Je le ferais avant l’automne 

Dites-moi quand viendra le prin- 
temps? 


353. Reading. Jean: Voila le cinq aodt arrive! L’ecole 
est ouverte depuis le trente juillet. Les eleves reviennent 
tous les jours. Envoilaun! Bonjour, Pierre! Depuis quand 
etes-vous ici? 

— Pierre: Je suis en ville depuis le trente et un juillet. 5 

— Jean: Que faites-vous ici? 

— Pierre: Je ne fais rien encore. Je ferai un peu d’anglais 
cette annde-ci. Je parlerai poliment aux maitres, j ’apprendrai 
mes legons, je jouerai — et j’attendrai les vacances de Noel 
qui heureusement commencent le vingt decembre cette io 
annee-ci. 

— Jean: Je ferai absolument la meme chose. Ou avez- 
vous passe vos vacances d’ete? 

Pierre: Je suis alle chez mes parents a la campagne le 
trente et un mai — non, le premier juin. is 

— Jean: Qu’est-ce que vous faites d’amusant a la cam¬ 
pagne au printemps et en ete, depuis le mois de mai jusqu’au 
mois d’aout? 

— Pierre: Nous ne faisons absolument rien d’amusant — 
toujours du travail! Mais dites-moi done, qu’est-ce que 20 
vous faisiez? Ou avez-vous ete a Noel? Qu’est-ce qu’on 
fait en ville pendant les vacances d’hiver, depuis Noel jus- 
qu’au jour de l’an, et apres, pendant tout l’hiver? 



Je suis alle a la campagne 












§ 354] 


LEgON XXXIV 


195 


— Jean: Comme il fait tres froid en janvier — et en fevrier, 
et en mars aussi quelquefois — nous faisons peu de visites. 
Nos amis arrivent chez nous a Noel et disent ((Joyeux Noel)) 
et nous leur disons la meme chose. 

— Pierre: Et le jour de Tan, que faites-vous? 

— Jean: Le jour de Fan nous faisons des visites depuis le 
matin jusqu’au soir. 

— Pierre: Et que dites-vous a vos amis? 

— Jean: Nous leur disons ((Bonne Annee)) et ils nous 
disent ((Bonne Annee.)) 

— Pierre: Est-ce qu’ils vous font des cadeaux? 

— Jean: Oui, et nous leur faisons des cadeaux aussi. On 
m’a fait cadeau d’un Shakespeare! 

— Pierre: Hm! Mes parents me font de ces cadeaux-la 
aussi! Ils m’ont fait revenir chez nous pour les fetes de 
Paques. Mais ils m’ont fait travailler tout le temps: samedi, 
dimanche, et le jour de mon anniversaire! 

354. Resume. L’ecole; Pierre; maitres, legons, vacances 
de Noel; vacances d’ete, parents, campagne, travail; Noel en 
ville; jour de Tan; cadeaux; Shakespeare; fetes de Paques, 
travail, anniversaire. 

355. Oral Drill. 1. What are you doing? 2 . What will 
they do? 3. He would do it. 4. She will do nothing. 5. Let 
us do it! 6. Do not say that! 7. What were we saying? 
8. They say nothing. 9. Nobody has done it. 10. They do 
nothing. 11. Don’t tell that to anybody! 12. I would 
never do that. 13. One says it. 14. Does one do that? 
15. People used to do that. 16. We say that. 17. We used 
to do it. 18. People used to do it. 19. What will you do? 
20. We have done nothing. 21. We no longer do it. 22. No¬ 
body will do it. 23. I have never done it. 24. When will 
you do it? 25. Don’t do it! 26. Let us do that! 27. We 
have done it. 28. I would not do it. 29. What were you 
saying? 30. I was not saying anything. 31. Nobody said 


25 

30 

35 

40 


196 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 356 


that. 32. You will do that certainly. 33. Since when have 
you lived here? 34. I have lived here since February. 
35. How long will you live here? 36. I shall live here till 
April or May. 37. From Christmas till New Year's Day. 
38. What will you do New Year's Day? 39. I shall make 
many visits. 40. What were you doing at Christmas? 
41. We made presents to our friends. 42. What will you 
do in spring? 43. I will do nothing till summer vacation. 
44. What do you do in autumn and winter? 45. I do nothing. 


DIALOGUE 


ii 

356. 

1. My dear friend (/.), since 

when have you been in 
town, and for how long? 

2 . I have been here since the 

16th of April, and I shall 
only leave on the 31st 
of July. And since when 
have you been here? 

3. I have been here since Jan¬ 

uary, since New Year's 
Day. I love the city in 
winter and spring 

4. But you will pass the sum¬ 

mer in the country, won’t 
you? 

5. Yes, from the month of 

June until the month of 
August or September 

6 . But, tell me, what are you 

doing now? 

7. My husband and I make 

visits at our friends', and 
our friends make some at 
our home 


Ma chere amie, depuis quand 
etes-vous en ville, et pour 
combien de temps? 

Je suis ici depuis le seize avril, 
et je ne partirai que le trente 
et un juillet. Et depuis quand 
etes-vous ici? 

Je suis ici depuis janvier, depuis 
le jour de Pan. J’aime la ville 
en hiver et au printemps 

Mais vous passerez l’ete & la 
campagne, n’est-ce pas? 

Oui, depuis le mois de juin 
jusqu’au mois d’aout ou de 
septembre 

Mais, dites-moi, que faites-vous 
maintenant? 

Mon mari et moi nous faisons 
des visites chez nos amis, et 
nos amis en font chez nous 


357] 


LEgON XXXIY 


197 


8 . And that amuses you a great 

deal? 

9. No, it is always the same 

thing, naturally, from the 
first of the month till the 
last, and from morning 
till night 

10 . What do you say to them, 

and what do they say to 
you? 

11. We say 11 Good-day ’ ’ to them 

on coming to their house, 
and they say “Good eve¬ 
ning” to us in departing 
from our house 

12 . Tell me, you will make us 

a visit before starting for 
the country, won’t you? 
Make us a visit to-mor¬ 
row! 

13. I would do it with pleasure, 

if I could find time for it, 
but all my time is taken 
since last Sunday till Fri¬ 
day. But I will make you 
a visit Saturday evening 

14. Thank you, do so! Don’t 

forget it! 


Et cela vous amuse beaucoup? 

Non, c’est toujours la meme 
chose, naturellement, depuis le 
premier du mois jusqu’au der¬ 
nier, et depuis le matin jus¬ 
qu’au soir 

Qu’est-ce que vous leur dites, et 
qu’est-ce qu’ils vous disent? 

Nous leur disons «Bonjour» en 
venant chez eux, et eux ils nous 
disent «Bonsoir» en partant 
(§ 392) de chez nous 

Dites-moi, vous nous ferez une 
visite avant de partir pour la 
campagne, n’est-ce pas? Faites- 
nous une visite demain! 

Je le ferais avec plaisir, si je 
pouvais en trouver le temps, 
mais tout mon temps est pris 
depuis dimanche dernier jus- 
qu’a vendredi. Mais je vous 
ferai une visite samedi soir 

Merci, faites-le! Ne l’oubliez 
pas! 


357. Conversation. 1 . Since when have you been at 
school? 2. How long will you be in town? 3. When will 
the Christmas vacation come this year? 4. Will you go to 
the country this summer? 5. How long will you be at your 
relatives’ home? 6. What are you doing, what have you done, 
and what will you do at school? 7. Tell me, what were the 
pupils doing yesterday? 8. What were you saying to your 
friends New Year’s Day? 9. Did Peter tell John that he 
would come to his house at Easter? 10. Do your relatives 


198 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 358 


say Merry Christmas and Happy New Year to you during 
the holidays of December and January? 

358. Theme. The pupils are coming back to (the) 
school after the summer vacation. My friend John has 
come back already. He returns early, the thirty-first of 
August or the first of September. I have been here 

5 since yesterday. The master always asks us if we will do 
more work this year. We always say that we would do 
more work, if we had more time. “Yes,” says the professor, 
“you say that you will do that, but very often you do no¬ 
thing at (the) school. I know that you do nothing; you 
io wait for the Christmas vacation! When Christmas comes, 
you say ‘Merry Christmas and Happy New Year’ to me and 
you go home. What do you do during the vacation? No¬ 
thing! At Easter? Nothing! Tell me: are you doing 
something to-day? Did you do anything (something) 
15 yesterday? Will you do anything to-morrow? No! my 
pupils do nothing,, they have done nothing, they will do 
nothing. You pass all your time without doing anything 
(rien). Tell me: what have you done to-day? You say 
nothing. I understand: you have done nothing, and you are 
20 doing nothing!” 

359. Exercises. A. Form adverbs from the following 
adjectives: 

absolute last joyous 

B. What are the months of the year? 

C. Give the dates from January 1 to January 31. 

D. Students ask and answer the question ‘How long have 
you been here?’ 

E. Drill on present indicative of faire and dire: § 480, A . 

F. Drill on faire and dire : § 480, D. 


§360] 


LEQON XXXV 


199 


35. TRENTE-CINQUlEME LEgON [trait sekjem] 
Review 

i 

360. 1 . He will go. 2. He goes. 3. Were you going? 
4. Would you go? 5. They go. 6. She would be. 7. You 
shall have it. 8. We should not be. 9. We should send them. 
10. Would you write it? 11. Will you have the time? 
12. Who would choose it? 13. Will she be happy? 
14. Would he open it? 15. I should not answer. 16. Would 
he go? 17. I will send them. 18. Will he write, if I go? 
19. If we went, would they write? 20. Take them! 21. I 
have taken it. 22. Do they learn? 23. They were learning. 
24. Have you been able? 25. Nobody used to be able. 
26. They are able. 27. Having been able. 28. Being 
taken. 29. We never take. 30. I no longer understand. 
31. I used to understand nothing. 32. Nobody has taken 
it. 33. He used to take only that. 34. Will you be able to 
do it? 35. We learn only this. 36. She understood no¬ 
body. 37. He was seated. 38. She will be seated. 39. We 
have good beds. 40. Are you waiting for some strangers? 
41. There are no Americans here. 42. Make your purchases! 
43. We are making them. 44. Let us make them! 45. Do 
not hold it! 46. Will they come, truly? 47. Wrap that! 
48. Do not wrap it! 49. Will you come? 50. Let us 
finish! 51. Let us buy them! 52. Let us not hold them! 
53. Have you held it? 54. Let’s hold them! 55. He is 
in France. 56. They make them in Paris. 57. Show me 
the road! 58. Do it! 59. Don’t say it! 60. In doing it. 
61. Having done it. 62. They say it. 63. Do you say it? 
64. Let us say it! 65. Since June. 66. Till July. 67. Tell 
me where? 68. Since when? 69. He used to learn it. 
70. She used to do it. 71. That is done. 72. What do you 


200 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 361 ; 


say to that? 73. Until to-morrow. 74. Since yesterday. 
75. I will go this winter. 76. She came this spring. 77. She 
comes in summer. 78. She goes this autumn. 

ii 

361. 1 . Would you go to the post-office? 2. I would 
send my letter, if I had some stamps. 3. She would write a 
card and send it to my address. 4. I would put them in the 
mail-box. 5. You send (the) half of the money-orders from 
this window. 6. She will send him some picture-cards to¬ 
morrow. 7. Will you answer me sometimes? 8. They will 
send us some postal-parcels. 9. The letter-carrier would 
never bring the money-order. 10. The foreigners used to 
understand me easily. 11. The chambermaid was making 
the bed on (a) the ground-floor. 12. As I was saying to 
you, I am going to the United States. 13. Brush my coat 
and black my shoes! 14. We never do that in America. 
15. The waiter took the tip. 16. We don’t understand 
which number you desire. 17. Where was he seated? 18. He 
used to answer me very politely. 19. He used to do nothing. 
20. We no longer do that. 21. Who did it? Nobody. 
22. What was he doing? Nothing. 23. Naturally, I would 
no longer do that. 24. He was telling me that there were 
only two rooms on the second floor. 25. Since when have 
you been here? 36. I have been here since yesterday. 
27. Will you be here until to-morrow? 28. I shall not make 
any purchases. 29. Truly, this color is too dark, and that 
color is too light. 30. Come back! Tell me how long you 
will be there! 31. Send them to my house, but don’t wrap 
them! 32. They used to make straw hats. 33. The cus¬ 
tomers never take those dark gloves. 34. How much is a 
yard worth? 35. Send me these packages, if you please. 
36. That has never been fashionable. 37. Where did you 
pass your summer vacation? 38. It (ce) will be my birth¬ 
day to-morrow. 39. The last holiday will come at Easter. 


§ 362] 


LE£ON XXXVI 


201 


40. Nobody makes me beautiful presents. 41. I shall make 
no visits this month. 42. Merry Christmas and Happy 
New Year! 


36. TRENTE-SIXlfiME LEQON [trait sizjem] 

LE THEATRE 

i 

362. Agreement of Past Participles: 

1. If the verb is conjugated with avoir, the participle 
agrees with the direct object when the object 'precedes {order; 
object; verb; participle: page 71, footnote 1): 

Quelle Jecon avez-vous apprise? What lesson hare you learned? 
Otherwise no agreement {order: verb; participle; object): 
J’ai appris la lecon, I have learned the lesson 

2. If the verb is conjugated with etre (§ 135), the par¬ 
ticiple agrees with the subject (§ 135, note 1): 

Elle est venue , She has come 
Elies sont aimees, They are loved 

363. The French do not say I am hungry, I am thirsty, I 
am right, etc.; they say I have hunger, I have thirst, I have 
reason, etc. (see § 232): 

iJT’ai chaud [So], I am hot 

II a fioid [frwa], He is cold 

Vous avez raison [rezo], You are right 

Nous avons tort [ta:r], We are wrong 

Us ont peur [pce:r], They are afraid (they have fear) 

Elle a besoin de [bazwe da] cela. She needs that (she has need of that) 

364. When what = that which, use: 

Subject, ce qui [sa ki]: Je sais ce qui est ici, I know what is here 
Object, ce que [sa ka]: Je sais ce que vous avez, I know what you have 


202 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 365 


365. Lire [liir], to read; lisant [liza], lu [ly]. 

Present: je lis [li] nous lisons [lizo] 

(tu lis [li]) vous lisez [lize] 

il lit [li] ils lisent [li:z] 

Imperfect: je lisais, etc. 

Past indefinite: j’ai lu, etc. 

Future: je lirai [—e], e„tc. 

Conditional: je lirais [-e], etc. 

366. Ecrire [ekriir],fo write ;ecnvant [ekriva], ecrit [ekri]. 

Present: j’ecris [ekri] nous ecrivons [ekrivo] 

(tu ecris [ekri]) vous ecrivez [ekrive] 

il ecrit [ekri] ils ecrivent [ekri:v] 

Imperfect: j’ecrivais, etc. 

Past indefinite: j’ai ecrit, etc. 

Future: j’ecrirai [-e], etc. 

Conditional: j’ecrirais [—e], etc. 


VOCABULARY 


367. 

attraper [atrape], to catch 
l’automobile [lotomobil] (/.), auto¬ 
mobile 

bete [be:t], stupid 
le chauffeur [$ofce:r], chauffeur 
le cinema [sinema], moving-pic¬ 
ture show 
clair [kleir], clear 
la comedie [komedi], comedy 
drole [droil], funny 

368. 

1 . Am I wrong? You are right! 

2 . Who is afraid? We are cold 

3. Are you reading? We are 

writing 

4. Was she reading? She was 

writing 


lent [la], slow 
la nuit [nyi], night 
la piece [pjes], play 
le pied [pje], foot; a—, on foot 
le rhume [rym], cold {malady) 
la scene [sen], stage 
le taxi [taksi], taxicab 
le theatre [teaitr], theater 
la tragedie [tra 3 edi], tragedy 
vite [vit], quickly, fast 


Est-ce que j’ai tort? Vous avez 
raison 

Qui a peur? Nous avons froid 
Lisez-vous? Nous ecrivons 

Lisait-elle? Elle ecrivait 


DRILL 


[§ 369 


LEgON XXXVI 


203 


5. Would you read? I would 

write 

6 . Let us read! Do not write! 

7. Do you know what I have 

written? 

8 . I need the books that I have 

read 

9. What ladies have you seen? 

10. We saw two old ladies 

11. We read what is amusing 

12 . I know what I wish 

13. What you say is stupid 

14. Did you write the letter 

that I have read? 

15. Are you afraid of this man? 

16. I have read the play; it is 

well written 

17. Write to me! don’t write to 

her! 

18. He will read the books you 

have read 

19. That’s what he desired 

20. You are wrong and I am 

right 

369. Reading. Je vais tres souvent au cinema et au 
theatre, et je pense que j’ai raison. Ce qui serait bete, ce 
serait de demeurer dans une grande ville sans y aller aussi 
souvent que possible. On aurait tort, vraiment. Je prends 
toujours de bonnes places pour ma femme et moi. En haut 
nous aurions chaud, ce que je n’aime pas; en bas nous au- 
rions froid pres des fenetres, ce que ma femme n’aime pas. 
Et nous avons peur aussi d’attraper un rhume. Nous sommes 
done obliges de prendre les meilleures places pres de la scene. 
Cela coute cher, mais j’ai assez d’argent. II est vrai que 
nous ne prenons jamais de taxi pour aller au theatre; nous 


Est-ce que vous liriez? J’ecri- 
rais 

Lisons! N’ecrivez pas! 

Savez-vous ce que j’ai ecrit? 

J’ai besoin des livres que j’ai lus 

Quelles dames avez-vous vues? 

Nous avons vu deux vieilles 
dames 

Nous lisons ce qui est amusant 

Je sais ce que je veux 

Ce que vous dites est bete 

Avez-vous ecrit la lettre que j’ai 
lue? 

Avez-vous peur de cet homme? 

J’ai lu la piece; elle est bien 
ecrite 

Ecrivez-moi! ne lui ecrivez pas! 

H lira les livres que vous avez 
lus 

Voila ce qu’il desirait 

Vous avez tort et j’ai raison 


204 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 370 


y allons a pied. On n’a qu’a partir de bonne heure ou a 
marcher un peu vite pour arriver a temps. On a tort d’ar- 
river quand la piece est commencee, comme beaucoup le 
is font. On ne commence qu’a huit heures un quart; on ne 
finit le plus souvent qu’a onze heures et demie, ou a minuit. 
On donne quelquefois des tragedies, ce qui n’est pas tres 
amusant, quelquefois des comedies. Voila ce que j’aime! 
Je n’aime pas les pieces de Shakespeare. Je les ai vues 
20 toutes au theatre, et je les ai lues un peu il y a quarante ans. 
C’est un peu vieux, tout cela. On dit qu’il les a ecrites il y 
a tres longtemps. On ecrivait comme cela au temps de 
Shakespeare, mais nous n’ecrivons plus comme lui au- 
jourd’hui. On ecrit clairement maintenant. Ces vieilles 
as pieces ne sont pas bien ecrites; quand je les ai lues je les ai 
trouv^es tres difficiles a comprendre. Je ne les ai jamais 
finies. Et puis, vous savez, ce sont des tragedies, ce qui ne 
me fait pas plaisir. Je ne les ai plus lues depuis. J’ai tort 
peut-etre, mais je ne les ai jamais aimees, les tragedies. Un 
30 beau jeune homme Spouse une belle jeune fille, et on ne 
les trouvera jamais heureux a la fin de la piece! Vous les 
avez lues aussi, je pense, ces vieilles pieces. Nous les lisions 
a l’ecole—parce que Shakespeare les a ecrites.—Je ne les ai 
j amais lues depuis. Nous en ecrivons de beaucoup meilleures 
35 aujourd’hui. Ce que je trouve tres drole, c’est que ma femme 
lisait encore ces pieces cet hiver. Elle les a trouvees assez 
amusantes — seulement, apres les avoir finies, elle avait 
toujours peur de sortir la nuit. Nous ne voulons done voir 
que des pieces vraiment amusantes. Une petite com^die 
40 bien ecrite, voila ce que je demande apres avoir travaille du 
matin jusqu’au soir! 

370. Resume. Aller au th6dtre; raison ou tort; places; 
chaud, froid, rhume; cher; taxi; arriver a temps, arriver tard; 
commencer et finir; tragedies, comedies; lu Shakespeare, 
vieux; pieces bien Ecrites, claires, difficiles; tragedies, jeune 


§371] 


LEgON XXXYI 


205 


homme et jeune fille; a Fecole, depuis; ma femme, elle a peur; 
pieces amusantes, apres le travail. 

371. Oral Drill. 1. Do you need this? 2. I need that. 
3. Read this book. 4. I have read those plays. 5. What 
plays have you read? 6. I was reading your letters. 7. Are 
the letters well written? 8. We have not read them. 9. Will 
you read them? 10. I have read the letters that you wrote. 
11. You were wrong. 12. No, I am always right. 13. Do 
you need your pens? 14. Have you found her? 15. She is 
lost. 16. She has lost her sister. 17. We know what they 
wish. 18. What is done is done. 19. Are you warm? 
20. He was wrong. 21. We have written to them. 22. The 
plays are well played. 23. They played badly. 24. She 
has caught a cold. 25. Those men will be caught. 26. The 
automobiles will go fast. 27. I am not afraid of the taxicabs. 
28. They go more slowly. 29. Are you afraid to go on foot? 
30. The play that I saw was very funny. 31. She knew 
what she was writing. 32. She was reading a tragedy on the 
stage. 33. I have seen, read and written plays. 34. There 
are the letters that I have read or written. 


DIALOGUE 


ii 

372. 

1. Will you come to the park 

with me? 

2. No, I shall go to the theater 

this evening — or to the 
moving-pictures. I am 
always cold in the park 

3. You are right. You will be 

warm at the theater. But 
what are you reading, eh? 

4. I was reading the play that 

they gave yesterday eve¬ 
ning 


Est-ce que vous viendrez au pare 
avec moi? 

Non, j’irai au theatre ce soir — 
ou au cinema. J’ai toujours 
froid au pare 

Vous avez raison. Vous aurez 
chaud au theatre. Mais que 
lisez-vous done? 

Je lisais la piece qu’on a donnee 
hier soir 


206 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 372 


5. I have not read it. Who 

wrote it? 

6 . It’s the play that you 

saw Wednesday, and 
which you found so 
pretty 

7. You are wrong — it’s an¬ 

other play that they 
played Wednesday 

8 . Do read it! It’s two of my 

friends who wrote it. All 
that they write is pretty. 
It’s they who wrote the 
comedy that they played 
Monday. They wrote it 
in a single week! 

9. They write fast, truly. 

Shakespeare didn’t 
write as fast as they 

10. He! no — he wrote very 

slowly. And then, he 
wrote only tragedies. 
Have you read them? 

11. No, I never read any. I 

used to read some at 
school 

12. You didn’t find them very 

amusing, those trage¬ 
dies? 

13. No, I never liked them. 

Why does one read those 
things? That’s what I 
don’t understand. What 
I ask for is a good, amus¬ 
ing comedy, like the little 
play that I saw Saturday. 
But tragedies, no! There 
are so many of them every 


Moi je ne l’ai pas lue. Qui est-ce 
qui l’a ecrite? 

C’est la piece que vous avez vue 
mercredi, et que vous avez 
trouvee si jolie 

Vous 'avez tort — c’est une autre 
piece qu’on a jouee mercredi 

Lisez-la done! Ce sont deux de 
mes amis qui Pont faite. Tout 
ce qu’ils ecrivent est joli. Ce 
sont eux] qui ont ecrit la co¬ 
me die qu’on a donnee lundi. 
Ils Pont ecrite en une seule 
semaine! 

Us ecrivent vite, vraiment. Shake¬ 
speare n’ecrivait pas aussi vite 
qu’eux 

Lui! non — il ecrivait tres lente- 
ment. Et puis, il n’a ecrit 
que des tragedies. Est-ce que 
vous les avez lues? 

Non, je n’en lis jamais. J’en lisais 
au college 

Vous ne les avez pas trouvees tres 
amusantes, ces tragedies? 

Non, je ne les ai jamais aimees. 
Pourquoi lit-on ces choses-la? 
Voila ce que je ne comprends 
pas. Ce que je demande c’est 
une bonne comedie amusante, 
comme la petite piece que j’ai 
vue samedi. Mais des trage¬ 
dies, non! Il y en a tant tous 
les jours: les taxis, les auto- 


§ 373] 


LEgON XXXVI 


207 


day: the taxicabs, the 
autos, the chauffeurs that 
go so fast! 

14. That’s true — one does not 
need any tragedies 


mobiles, les chauffeurs qui vont 
si vite! 

C’est vrai — on n’a pas besoin de 
tragedies 


373. Conversation. 1 . We go every day to the moving- 
pictures; are we right? 2 . We never go to the theater; are 
we wrong? 3. Do you always get (prendre) good seats? 

4. Are you warm or cold at the theater? 5. If you have 
seats near the stage, are you afraid of catching a cold? 

6 . Have you seen the plays that Shakespeare wrote? 7. Did 
your friends find them easy to understand when they read 
them? 8 . Do you read now the same books that you used 
to read at school? 9. Your wife has read the play that I 
wrote; did she finish it and did she understand it? 10. Did 
Shakespeare use to write slowly or fast? 

374. Theme. We have never gone to the moving-pic¬ 
tures, and we do not often go to the theater. Upstairs one 
is hot; downstairs one is cold. And one easily catches a 
cold in the theater. I am always afraid of that. And then 
the comedies of to-day are badly written. We have almost 5 
always found them very stupid. We have seen some good 
plays that we have liked and that we found well written also. 
When they played them well, we have seen them with 
pleasure. But forty years ago one wrote better. We write 
too fast now. We read too fast also. If you read fast, you 10 
are wrong. We used to read slowly. We were right. We 
understood what we were reading. One needs much time 
to (pour) understand a good book. I have nearly always 
understood the books that I have read. I think in reading. 
Does one think much to-day in reading or in writing? No. 15 
The men and women of to-day read and write much; what 
they do not do is to (c’est de) think. They are wrong, 
truly. What they do is easy': they read and write; but they 


208 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 375 


are afraid to think. Or, perhaps, they do not need to think! 
And also, we do not read the best books. Shakespeare has 
written many beautiful plays. Have you bought them? 
have you read them? have you understood them? 

375. Exercises. A. Use past indefinites with each of the 
following: quelle, to arrive, to go, quels, to go out, to come 
back; to learn, the men whom, the men who, the thing which, 
quelles, quel. 

B. Conjugate: 

I am right. I shall be afraid. 

I was (imperfect) wrong. I needed (past indefinite) that. 

C. Conjugate: 

I know what is here. I shall know what you will have. 

D. Drill on lire and ecrire: § 480, D. 


37. TRENTE-SEPTUSME LEQON [trait setjem] 


LA TOILETTE 

i 

376. Reflexive Verbs : se laver* [so lave], to wash oneself. 


Present: 

je me lave [la:v], I wash my¬ 
self 

(tu te laves [la:v], thou wash- 
est thyself) 

il se lave [la:v], he washes 
himself 

Imperfect: je me lavais, etc. 

Past indefinite: je me suis lave 
(tu t’es lave) 
il s’est lave 
elle s’est lavee * 


nous nous lavons [lavo], we wash 
ourselves 

vous vous lavez [lave], you wash 
yourself or yourselves 
ils se lavent [la:v], they wash 
themselves 

nous nous sommes laves 
vous vous etes lave(s) 
ils se sont laves 
elles se sont lavees 


§ 377] 


LEQON XXXVII 


209 


Note 1 . The auxiliary with reflexive verbs is etre; but the past par¬ 
ticiple agrees not with the subject but with a 'preceding direct object as 
in the case of verbs conjugated with avoir; cf. § 362. 

Future: je me laverai, etc. 

377. Some verbs which are not reflexive in English are 
reflexive in French: se depecher,* to hurry; se lever*, to get 
up; se promener*, to take a walk, etc. 

378. As in English so in French some verbs may be re¬ 
flexive or non-reflexive: 

tromper, to deceive, but se tromper*, to he mistaken 

habiller, to dress (somebody else), but s’habiller*, to dress 
( oneself) 

379. Conduire [kodyiir], to conduct;conduisant[kodyiza], 
conduit [kodyi]. 

Present indicative: je conduis [kodyi] nous conduisons [kodyizo] 
(tu conduis [kodyi]) vous conduisez [kodyize] 
il conduit [kodyi] ils conduisent [kodyi:z] 

380. Croire [krwa:r],ZotaZzet;e;croyanf[krwajd],cru[kry]. 

Present indicative: je crois [krwa] nous croyons [krwa jo] 

(tu crois [krwa]) vous croyez [krwaje] 
il croit [krwa] ils croient [krwa] 

(All forms of these verbs, except the present participle and the past 
participle, follow the rules.) 


381. VOCABULARY 


la blanchisseuse [bla$is 0 iz], 
laundress 
le bras [bra], arm 
la chaussette [Soset], sock 
la chemise [$omi:z], shirt 


comment [koma], how? 1 
se depecher* [so depeje], 
hurry 

fatiguer [fatige], to tire 
habiller [abije], to dress 


i Cf. comme, how . . . ! 

Comment savez-vous cela? How do you knew that? 
Comme elle est belle! How beautiful she is! 


210 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 382 


lever 1 [love], to raise 
se lever,* to get up, rise 
le linge [le: 3 ], linen 
se marier* [so marjej, to get mar¬ 
ried 

se promener* 1 [so promne], to take 
a walk 

propre [propr], clean, neat 

382. 

1 . I tire you; I tire myself 

2 . She deceives him; she de¬ 

ceives herself 

3. We hurry; we rested 

4. They hurried; they are not 

resting 

5. Hurry up! let's get married! 

6 . Don't tire yourself! you 

tired yourself 

7. Get up! let’s dress ourselves! 

8 . He dressed himself; he takes 

a walk 

9. She took a walk; I am mis¬ 

taken 

10 . I was mistaken; I led her 

11. He was hurrying; let's hurry! 

12 . I have believed it; don't be¬ 

lieve it! 

13. Believe me! we were not 

conducting her 

14. How was he conducting him¬ 

self? 

15. Have the ladies not lost 

themselves? 

16. How has she conducted her¬ 

self? 


raccommoder [rakomode], to mend 
se reposer* [so ropoze], to rest 
sale [sal], dirty 
le savon [sav5], soap 
la serviette [servjet], towel 
sous [su], under 
tromper [trope], to deceive 
se tromper*, to be mistaken 


Je vous fatigue; je me fatigue 

Elle le trompe; elle se trompe 

Nous nous depechons; nous nous 
sommes reposes 

Ils se sont depeches; ils ne se re- 
posent pas 

Depechez-vous! marions-nous! 

Ne vous fatiguez pas! vous vous 
etes fatigue 

Levez-vous! habillons-nous! 

II s’est habille; il se promene 

Elle s’est promenee; je me trompe 

Je me trompais; je l’ai conduite 

II se depechait; depechons-nous! 

Je l’ai cru; ne le croyez pas! 

Croyez-moi! nous ne la condui- 
sions pas 

Comment se conduisait-il? 

Est-ce que les dames ne se sont 
pas perdues? 

Comment s’est-elle conduite? 


DRILL 


1 Like acheter, § 160. 


§ 383] 


LEgON XXXVII 


211 


17. Have you not believed her? Est-ce que vous nel’avez pas erne? 

18. We conduct ourselves well Nous nous conduisons bien 

19. Conduct yourselves well! Conduisez-vous bien! 

20. You never used to believe Vous ne croyiez jamais cela 

that 

383. Reading. Je me suis levee a neuf heures ce matin — 
non, je me trompe — a neuf heures et demie. Je me leve de 
meilleure heure que cela les autres jours, mais je me suis 
beaucoup fatigude hier soir en me promenant au pare. Je 
me suis done reposee ce matin. Ma sceur m’a conduite h 5 
travers tout ce grand pare! Nous nous sommes promenees 
pendant trois grandes heures! Comme nous nous sommes 
fatiguees! Mais comme nous nous sommes amusees aussi! 
Quand j’etais a Tecole il y a vingt ans, je me promenais 
beaucoup avec ma soeur. Nous nous promenions ensemble 10 
tous les jours pendant des heures. Elle choisissait toujours le 
chemin. Elle me conduisait a travers les champs, a droite, 
a gauche, ne prenant jamais une seule minute pour se re¬ 
poser. Non, elle ne se reposait jamais, cette fille! Elle 
prenait Je premier chemin venu; elle se trompait; elle s’y 15 
perdait; elle revenait; elle en prenait un autre. Elle ne se 
fatiguait jamais! Quand je disais: Reposons-nous un peu! 
elle repondait: Non, depechons-nous! On aurait cru qu’elle 
me conduisait a travers la France et qu’elle se depechait 
pour arriver avant le soir! Yous croyiez hier que ma soeur 20 
me conduirait chez vous? Non — mais ou m’a-t-elle done 
conduite, croyez-vous? Chez la blanchisseuse! Pendant 
tout le temps que nous nous promenions, elle avait un petit 
paquet sous le bras. L’auriez-vous cru? C’etait du linge 
sale: des chemises, des faux-cols, des chaussettes, des mou- 25 
choirs de son mari! Vous savez, n’est-ce pas, que ma soeur 
s’est mariee au mois d’aout? Elle m’a done conduite jus- 
qu’& la porte de la blanchisseuse. Elle a frappe et une 
vieille femme, assise pres de la fenetre, s’est levee et s’est 
montree a la porte. Elle nous a conduites a travers toute la 30 


212 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 384 


maison. Enfin nous nous sommes trouvees dans la cuisine. 
Ma sceur a dit a la blanchisseuse: «Pouvez-vous laver mon 
linge pour demain?)) La vieille femme s’est depechee de 
repondre quelle ne travaillait jamais les jours de fete et 
35 qu’elle se reposerait jusqu’a mercredi. ((Mais non!)) a dit 



Une vieille femme s’est montree a la porte 


ma soeur. ((Vous vous etes reposee dimanche; vous vous 
reposerez encore jeudi, si vous voulez, mais vous laverez 
mon linge mardi — et bien proprement! Voici du savon! Et 
n’oubliez pas de raccommoder les chaussettes, si elles en ont 
40 besoin. Maintenant, depechons-nous!)) 

384. Resume. Se lever; se fatiguer, se reposer; soeur; 
pare; a Tecole; se promener; choisir le chemin; le perdre; se 
reposer ou se depecher; a travers la France; chez qui; chez 
la blanchisseuse; paquet; linge du mari; frapper; ouvrir, 
conduire; cuisine; laver; fete; dimanche, jeudi; raccommoder. 

385. Oral Drill. 1. We tire them. 2. You deceive us. 
3. He deceives himself. 4. Let’s hurry up! 5. Do not get 
married! 6 . Rest! 7. We never rest. 8 . You are mistaken. 













§ 386] 


LEgON XXXYII 


213 


9. Are they not taking a walk? 10. Get up and dress your¬ 
self! 11. We have dressed ourselves already. 12. He was 
dressing himself. 13. She has dressed herself. 14. She has 
dressed the little girl. 15. You have deceived yourself. 
16. You have not deceived me. 17. Let us not make a mis¬ 
take! 18. She was taking a walk. 19. They were hurrying. 
20. Where did you lead her? 21. Are you conducting your¬ 
self well? 22. Are you fatigued? 23. Have you fatigued 
yourself? 24. Do not believe him! 25. I never have be¬ 
lieved her. 26. I believe she conducts herself well. 27. He 
used to believe that we were conducting ourselves well. 
28. Where were they conducting her? 29. We have brought 
some soap. 30. The laundress has washed the shirts and the 
towels. 31. Where are the socks? has she not mended them? 
32. She was carrying a package of dirty towels under her (le) 
arm. 33. If I am not mistaken, this is clean linen. 


ii 

386 . DIALOGUE 


1. Good-day, Henry! Tell me, 

what are you doing? 

2. Nothing — I am resting 

3. You’re resting? How have 

you tired yourself then, 
you who never tire your¬ 
self? 

4. I walked a long time with 

my friend John. That’s 
what has tired me. He 
came to my house this 
morning at five o’clock to 
take a walk with me! 

5. How! he gets up so early? 

6. Yes, we get up, he and I, be¬ 

tween five and six o’clock. 


Bonjour, Henri! Dites-moi, 
qu’est-ce que vous faites? 

Rien — je me repose 

Vous vous reposez? Comment 
vous etes-vous done fatigue, 
vous qui ne vous fatiguez ja¬ 
mais? 

Je me suis promene tr&s long- 
temps avec mon ami Jean. 
C’est ce qui m’a fatigue. II est 
venu chez moi ce matin k cinq 
heures, pour se promener avec 
moi! 

Comment! il se leve de si bonne 
heure? 

Oui, nous nous levons, lui et moi, 
Cntre cinq et six heures. J’aj 


214 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 387 


I believed it was the laun¬ 
dress with my clean linen 
who was knocking at my 
door, believing that I had 
not yet got up 

7. You were mistaken! 

8. I was mistaken. It was 

John 

9. And you took a walk with 

him? 

10. Yes — he knocked a second 

time saying: Get up! 
Hurry! 

11. Had you not got up already? 

12. No, I had not yet got up, 

but I got up immediately. 
After having washed and 
dressed myself, I made a 
package of dirty linen to 
carry to the laundress: 
shirts, towels, handker¬ 
chiefs, socks. She not 
only washes them well, 
but she mends them also 

13. Where did you walk? Where 

did John lead you? 

14. Into the park. And, believe 

me, we got tired. John 
kept leading me into all 
the corners! 


cru que c’etait la blanchisseuse 
avec mon linge propre qui frap- 
pait a ma porte, croyant que je 
ne m’etais pas encore leve 

Vous vous etes trompe! 

Je me. suis trompe. C’etait Jean 

Et vous vous etes promene avec 
lui? 

Oui — il a frappe une deuxieme 
fois en disant: Levez-vousl 
Depechez-vous! 

Est-ce que vous ne vous etiez pas 
leve deja? 

Non, je ne m’etais pas encore 
leve, mais je me suis leve tout 
de suite. Apres m’etre lave et 
habille, j’ai fait un paquet de 
linge sale pour le porter chez la 
blanchisseuse: des chemises, 
des serviettes, des mouchoirs, 
des chaussettes. Non seule- 
ment elle les lave bien, mais 
elle les raccommode aussi 

Oil est-ce que vous vous etes pro- 
menes? Oil Jean vous a-t-il 
conduit? 

Dans le pare. Et, croyez-moi, 
nous nous sommes fatigues. 
Jean me conduisait dans tous 
les coins! 


387. Conversation. 1. Tell me, my friends, at what time 
did you get up to-day? 2. Did you tire yourself, taking a 
walk across the fields? 3. Did you rest after walking? 
4. With whom did you use to walk every day when you 
lived in the city? 5. When you used to say: Hurry up! how 


§ 388] 


LEgON XXXVII 


215 


did your sister answer you? 6 . What did she have under 
her arm while she was leading you through the city? 7. Who 
brought the soap and towels to the laundress’s house? 8 . Dur¬ 
ing how many days did you rest after working (=after having 
worked)? 9. The laundress said she had not rested a minute 
since Sunday; do you believe it? 10. Why do you not hurry 
when you wash yourself? 

388. Theme. I (/.) took a walk yesterday with John — no, 

I am mistaken, it was Peter who took a walk with me. We 
got up early, we dressed and we departed. I said to Peter: 
“Lead me; I should lose myself in this big city, if I led 
you.” He led me then through the streets, to the left, to the 5 
right, without end. He kept hurrying, he never rested. You 
believe that he rested sometimes, don’t you? You are 
mistaken. How he hurried! and how we tired ourselves! 
You would never have believed it. How I tired myself! 

I have rested from this morning till this evening, and I am 10 
still tired now. Would you have believed it? Peter led me to 
the door of a little house. He knocked and a young woman 
showed herself. She was mending some linen — some towels, 

I believe. You will not believe me — but she is Peter’s wife! 
They got married this summer! I got married a month ago, 15 
but all my friends knew it. Peter has said nothing of it to his 
friends. That’s very funny, isn’t it? She is very beautiful, 
and a very good girl, I believe. She conducted herself very 
well with me, she took a walk in the garden with me, and 
she said to me that she believed herself the friend of all 20 
Peter’s friends. We walked twenty minutes together — and 
then she and Peter walked an hour while I amused myself in 
the house. 

389. Exercises. A. Drill on the past indefinite of se 
depecher, se lever, se promener: § 480, A . 

B. Drill on se laver, se fatiguer, se marier: § 480, D. 

C. Drill on conduire, croire: § 480, D. 


216 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 390 


38. TRENTE-HUITI&ME LEQON [trait yitjem] 

LA TOILETTE 

i 

390. Elle s’est lave les mains, 1 She washed her hands 
Elle s’est casse le bras, 1 She broke her arm 

Cf. Elle s’est lavee, She washed herself 

In the sentence Elle s’est lavee, She washed herself, s’ 
(se) is the direct object; since it precedes the participle, the 
participle agrees with it (see § 376, Note 1). In the sen¬ 
tences Elle s’est lave les mains, Elle s’est casse le bras, 
s’ (se) is the indirect object ( She washed the hands to her¬ 
self; She broke the arm to herself); the direct objects are 
mains, bras, and since they follow the participles, the 
participles do not agree with them, but are invariable. 

391. Sentir [satiir], to feel; sent ant [sata], senti [sati]. 

Present indicative: je sens [sa] nous sentons [sato] 

(tu sens [sa]) vous sentez [sate] 

il sent [sa] ils sentent [saitj 

(The remaining forms follow the rules.) 

392. Conjugate like sentir : dormir, to sleep (je cfors, etc.) 

partir*, to depart, go away (je 
pars , etc.) 

sortir*, to go out (je sors, etc.) 

393. VOCABULARY 

s’arreter* [sarete], to stop les cheveux have] (m.) hair 

le bain [be], bath se coucher* [so ku$e], to go to 

blesser [blese], to wound, hurt bed 

i The definite article (the) is ordinarily used, instead of a possessive ad¬ 
jective (my, his, her, etc.), with parts of the body. 




§ 394] 


LEQON XXXVIII 


217 


la dent [da], tooth 
se deshabiller* [se dezabije], to 
undress 

la figure [figyir], face 
la glace [glas], mirror 
le journal [ 3 urnal] (pi. journaux 
[ 3 urno]), newspaper 


parfait [parfe], perfect 
peigner [pegne], to comb 
quelqu’un [kelkoe], some one 
se rappeler* 1 [so raple], to 
member 

la salle de bains [sal do be], bath¬ 
room 


394. DRILL 

1. He gets up; we go to bed II se leve; nous nous couchons 


2. She got up; they went to 

bed 

3. Let's go to bed! get up! 

4. Don't get up! let's not get 

up! 

5. Stop! let us stop! 

6. We stop; he was stopping 

7. We dress ourselves; he un¬ 

dresses himself 

8. Wash your face! let's brush 

our hair! 

9. He wounds himself; she 

seated herself 

10. She has combed herself; she 

brushed her hair 

11. Do you remember? I don't 

depart 

12. Brush my hair; brush your 

teeth 

13. She broke her arm; she 

stopped 

14. I say to myself; she said to 

herself 

15. She was going out; we were 

sleeping 

16. She washed her face; she de¬ 

parts 


Elle s’est levee; ils se sont cou¬ 
ches 

Couchons-nous! levez-vous! 

Ne vous levez pas! ne nous levons 
pas! 

Arretez-vous! arretons-nous! 

Nous nous arretons; il s’arretait 

Nous nous habillons; il se des¬ 
habille 

Lavez-vous la figure! brossons- 
nous les cheveux! 

Il se blesse; elle s’est assise 

Elle s’est peignee; elle s’est 
brosse les cheveux 

Vous rappelez-vous? je ne pars 
pas 

Brossez-moi les cheveux; bros- 
sez-vous les dents 

Elle s’est casse le bras; elle s’est 
arretee 

Je me dis; elle s’est dit 

Elle sortait; nous dormions 

Elle s’est lave la figure; elle part 


1 Like appeler, § 149. 


218 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 395 


17. She remembered; I used to 

remember 

18. She wounded her hand; I 

don’t sleep 

19. I feel it; he used to feel it 

20. Is she sleeping? we are go¬ 

ing out 


Elle s’est rappelee; je me rappe- 
lais 

Elle s’est blesse la main; je ne 
dors pas 

Je le sens; il le sentait 
Est-ce qu’elle dort? nous sortons 


395. Reading. Je me sens tres mal aujourd’hui, je ne 
sais pas pourquoi. Je me sentais parfaitement bien en me 
couchant hier soir. Je m’etais dit, en me deshabillant, 
qu’apres avoir dormi neuf heures je me leverais ce matin 
5 avant ma soeur, mais c’est elle pourtant qui s’est levee la 
premiere. Elle etait toute joyeuse en se levant. Elle dort 
si bien qu’elle se leve toujours en chantant comme un oiseau. 
Elle se lave, elle s’habille, elle se brosse, elle sort de sa 
chambre, elle vient voir a ma porte si je dors encore, et tout 
io le temps elle chante! Elle est entree dans ma chambre ce 
matin, elle s’est assise 4 cote de mon lit, et elle m’a demande 
comment je me sentais. J’ai rdpondu: «Je me sens tres mal. 
J’ai mal dormi.)) Elle m’a repondu: «Ne sortons done pas 
aujourd’hui comme nous allions le faire! Lisons ensemble 
is ce journal qu’on m’a apporte il y a presque une demi- 
heure. Ou, si vous aimez mieux, rappelons-nous le bon 
temps que nous avons passe ensemble a l’dcole. Est-ce que 
vous vous rappelez l’ecole?)) «Je me suis rappele cette ecole 
bien-aimee pas plus tard qu’hier en parlant avec ma mere, 
20 cette ecole ou nous nous sommes si bien amusees et si mal 
conduites.)) Nous nous sommes rappele tout ce que nous 
y faisions et tout ce que nous y disions. Ma soeur se rap- 
pelait avec le plus de plaisir le jour ou nous sommes sorties 
de la pour la derniere fois. «Ce jour-la,)) disait-elle, ((je 
25 m’etais levde de bonne heure, je m’etais lave la figure et la 
main droite, mais pas la main gauche — je m’etais blessd 
cette main en jouant — je m’etais habillee, je m’etais brosse 
les dents, et je sortais de ma chambre, un petit livre a la 


§ 396] 


LEgON XXXVIII 


219 


main, que je m’etais achete en partant de chez nous. Arri¬ 
ve a la porte, je me suis arretee. Je ne me rappelais plus si 3 o 
je m’etais peignee apres m’etre brosse les cheveux. Je me 
suis done regardee dans la glace. Je me rappelle que je me 
suis trouve la figure assez jolie ce matin-la, et je me suis dit, 
non sans un certain plaisir: ((Mademoiselle, vous vous etes 
si bien brosse les cheveux, et vous vous etes si bien lave la 3S 
figure, et vous vous etes si bien habillee que je vous trouve 
la plus belle fille du monde! Vous vous marierez bientot, 
je crois!)) ((Pas aujourd’hui, au moins!)) a dit quelqu’un 
derriere moi! C’ 6 tait la maitresse! Elle 6 tait entree sans 
frapper, elle s’etait assise derriere moi, et elle avait entendu 40 
toutes les jolies choses que j’avais dites! Comme je me suis 
sentie bete ce matin-la!» 

396. Resume. Se sentir mal ou bien; dormir, se lever; 
soeur, chanter; sortir, lire; se rappeler l^cole; s’amuser, se 
conduire; dernier jour; se laver; main blessee; se brosser, 
dents, cheveux, se peigner; glace, jolie fille, se marier,* 
maitresse assise. 

397. Oral Drill. 1. He is sleeping; he gets up. 2. Let 
us stop!; stop! 3. They are sleeping; we go to bed. 4. Comb 
yourself!; undress! 5. I was sleeping; she goes out. 6 . We do 
not remember that. 7. They were departing. 8 . Some one 
will remember that. 9. He washes himself. 10. She has 
seated herself. 11. She has washed her hands. 12 . He has 
said to himself. 13. She got up. 14. She seated herself. 

15. She brushed her hair. 16. Is he sleeping? 17. He was 
not sleeping. 18. I have not slept. 19. Let us go out! 

20. She broke her arm. 21 . She brushed her teeth. 22 . I 
sleep when he goes out. 23. They were departing. 24. She 
has bought herself a book. 25. The girls have remembered 
that. 26. The women have conducted themselves badly. 

27. Conduct yourselves well! 28. She stopped while I was 


220 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 398 


going out. 29. Go to bed and sleep! 30. Let’s go to bed! 
31. She got up. 32. She has broken her arm. 33. They 
were saying to themselves. 34. We feel nothing. 35. No¬ 
body feels it. 36. She has bought herself a newspaper. 

ii 

398. DIALOGUE 


1. Good-day, Mary! At what 

hour did you get up? 

2. I got up at five o’clock 

3. They rise early at your 

house! 

4. We always get up before six 

o’clock 

5. And at what time do you 

go to bed? 

6. We went to bed yesterday 

evening at ten o’clock 

7. What have you done since 

you got up? 

8. I took a bath in the bath¬ 

room; I washed my face; 
I dressed; I combed my¬ 
self, and I brushed my 
teeth 

9. You brushed yourself, — I 

believe it — but have you 
really washed your face? 
I should never have be¬ 
lieved it. Have you not 
looked at your face in the 
mirror? 

10. I have not looked at my 

face — no — I have not 
looked at myself in the 
mirror 

11. You have your face all red! 


Bonjour, Marie! A quelle heure 
vous etes-vous levee? 

Je me suis levee a cinq heures 

On se leve de bonne heure chez 
vous! 

Nous nous levons toujours avant 
six heures 

Et a quelle heure est-ce que vous 
vous couchez? 

Nous nous sommes couches hier 
soir a dix heures 

Qu’est-ce que vous avez fait de- 
puis que vous vous etes levee? 

J’ai pris un bain dans la salle de 
bains; je me suis lave la figure; 
je me suis habillee; je me suis 
peignee, et je me suis brosse 
les dents 

Vous vous etes brossee — je le 
crois — mais est-ce que vous 
vous etes vraiment lave la 
figure? Je ne l’aurais jamais 
cru. Est-ce que vous ne vous 
etes pas regarde la figure dans 
la glace? 

Je ne me suis pas regarde la figure 
— non — je ne me suis pas re- 
garde e dans la glace 

Vous avez la figure toute rouge! 


§ 399] 


LEgON XXXVIII 


221 


12. Ah, I know! I fell in com¬ 

ing out of my room 

13. You hurt yourself? 

14. I hurt my foot and I almost 

believed that I had broken 
my arm 

15. How did you hurt yourself? 

16. I did not remember that 

there was a staircase in 
front of my door. I fell 
and I only stopped down¬ 
stairs. That is how I 
hurt my foot 


Ah, je sais! Je suis tomb6e en 
sortant de ma chambre 

Vous vous etes fait mal? 

Je me suis blesse le pied et je 
croyais presque que je m’etais 
casse le bras 

Comment vous etes-vous blessee? 

Je ne me suis pas rappele qu’il 
y avait un e scalier devant ma 
porte. Je suis tombee et je ne 
me suis arretee qu’en bas. 
Voila comment je me suis 
blesse le pied 


399. Conversation. 1 . How do you feel now, and how 
did you feel when you went to bed? 2 . What had the lady 
said to herself in going to bed? 3. When do you go to bed 
and when do you get up? 4. What did the sister do when 
she got up? 5. If you remember how you used to pass the 
time at school, tell it to my sister. 6 . Do the girls re¬ 
member what they used to say and do? 7. Has Mary 
washed her hands, and has her sister washed herself? 8 . Have 
the little girls brushed their teeth? 9. When did she buy 
herself the newspapers? 10. Have you heard the things 
which we have said, or were you sleeping? 

400. Theme. As Mary was not fueling very well, she 
said to herself: “I will go to bed at half past eight this 
evening, and if I sleep well I shall get up early to-morrow 
and take a walk in the park.” She had washed her hands, she 
had brushed her teeth and she had gone to bed, when she 5 
remembered that she had not read the newspaper. She got 
up, she dressed herself and she brushed her hair. She 
looked at herself in the glass and said to herself: “I have 
not dressed myself very well, and I have not brushed my 

‘ hair very well, but I am going out only to buy myself a 10 


222 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 401 


newspaper. I shall come back immediately.” She departs 
and goes to the store. As she was going out of the store 
where she had bought herself the newspaper, she fell on the 
sidewalk. She wounded her head and she nearly broke her 
left arm. Poor Mary! She called a cabby, the carriage 
stopped in front of the store, she got in and seated herself. 
On arriving home, she washed her face and looked at herself 
in the glass. She was no longer very pretty! She brushed 
herself, she washed her hands and she went to bed. 

401. Exercises. A. Drill on se coucher, s’arreter: 
§ 480, D. 

B. Drill (on blackboard) on the past indefinite of se 
laver, se laver les mains: § 480, A. 

C. Drill on sentir, dormir, partir: § 480, D. 


39. TRENTE-NEUVE&ME LEQON [trait neevjem] 


LA CASERNE 


i 

402. Order of Personal Pronouns: 


me 

te 

se 

nous 

vous 


precede \ la [ precede 


lui 

[leur 


precede y } precede (s) en 


II me le dit, He says it to me 
II le lui dit, He says it to him 
H se le dit, He says it to himself 
H nous les a donnes, He gave them to us 
H les leur a donnes, He gave them to them 
II m’en a donne, He gave me some 
H ne leur en donne pas, He does not give them any 
H n’y en a pas, There are none 



§ 403J 


LE 9 ON XXXIX 


223 


Exception: After a positive imperative, the direct object pronoun 
always comes first—and en and y always come last. 

403. Voir [vwatr], to see; voyant [vwaja], vu [vy]. 

Present indicative: je vois [vwa] nous voyons [vwajo] 

(tu vois [vwa]) vous vcycz [vwaje] 

il voit [vwa] ils voient [vwa] 

Future: jeverrai [vere], etc. 

(The remaining forms follow the rules.) 

404. Vouloir [vulwair], to wish; voulant [vula], voulu 
[vuly]. 

Present indicative: je veux [vo] nous voulons [vulo] 

(tu veux [vo]) vous voulez [vule] 

il veut [vo] ils veulent [voel] 

Future: je voudrai [vudre], etc. 

(The remaining forms follow the rules.) 


VOCABULARY 


405. 

1’arme [larm] (/.), arm, weapon 
l’armee [larme] (/.), army 
la bataille [bata:j], battle 
se battre* [so batr], to fight 
le capitaine [kapiten], captain 
la caserne [kazern], barracks 
le drapeau [drapo] (pi. drapeaux), 
flag 

l’epee [lepe] (/.), sword 
le fusil [fyzi], gun 
gagner [gape], to win 
le general [ 3 eneral] (pi. generaux), 
general 

406. 

1. He will wish; she was wish¬ 

ing 

2. She sees; they were seeing 

3. We have wished; we shall see 


la guerre [ge:r], war 

le lieutenant [ljcetna], lieutenant 

la mort [mo:r], death 

la paix [pe], peace 

rendre [ra:dr], to give back 

le soldat [solda], soldier 

tuer [tye], to kill 

il vaut mieux [vo mjo], it is 
better 

vouloir dire [vulwair diir], to 
mean 


Il voudra; elle voulait 

Elle voit; ils voyaient 

Nous avons voulu; nous verrons 


DRILL 


224 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 407 


4. Show me them! they wish 

5. I give him them; do you 

wish? 

6. They say it to him; do you 

see? 

7. I say it to them; let us see! 

8. He will give it back to us; I 

shall see him 

9. Say it to him! he has wished 

10. He gave me them; she used 

to wish 

11. There are some; they would 

wish 

12. What did that mean? 

13. She speaks to him of it 

14. Let us give it back to her! 

15. We do not wish to give him 

them 

16. What does he mean? 

17. Do not give them back to 

them! 

18. We used to say it to her 

19. This means nothing 

20. She has not wished to say 

it to him 

407. Reading. Mon fr&re est soldat. II demeure a la 
caserne, ou vous voyez ce drapeau. Moi, je voudrais etre 
soldat aussi. Je le lui dis toujours quand je le vois et il me 
repond toujours: ((Nous verrons.)) II n’a jamais voulu 
5 apprendre un metier. Je me rappelle bien qu’il n’avait 
que huit ans quand il disait deja qu’il voulait etre capitaine. 
Moi — je n’avais que quatre ans — je voulais etre general, 
au moins. Mon frere avait un fusil. C’est mon oncle qui 
le lui avait donne. Moi, j’avais une epde. (Test ma tante 
io qui me l’avait donnde. Mais avec son fusil, mon frere ne 
pouvait tuer personne. Voila pourquoi on le lui avait 


Montrez-les-moi! ils veulent 
Je les lui donne; voulez-vous? 

* 

Us le lui disent; voyez-vous? 

Je le leur dis; voyons! 

Il nous le rendra; je le verrai 

Dites-le-lui! il a voulu 

Il me les a donnes; elle voulait 

Il y en a; ils voudraient 

Qu’est-ce que cela voulait dire? 
Elle lui en parle 
Rendons-le-lui! 

Nous ne voulons pas les lui donner 

Qu’est-ce qu’il veut dire? 

Ne les leur rendez pas! 

Nous le lui disions 

Cela ne veut rien dire 

Elle n’a pas voulu le lui dire 


§ 407] 


LEgON XXXIX 


225 


donne! Et moi, je n’aurais pu blesser personne avec mon 
epee. Voila pourquoi on me Pavait donn 6 e! On nous les a 
donnes, ce fusil et cette epee, a Noel, pendant une visite que 
nous faisions chez notre oncle. Quand nous sommes re- 15 
venus chez nous, le fusil au bras, Fepee a la main, ma m&re 
en nous voyant, a demande tout de suite: «Qu’est-ce que cela 



veut dire? Qui done vous a donne ces choses-la?» Nous 
lui avons repondu que notre oncle et notre tante nous les 
avaient donnees, et que cela voulait dire que nous allions 20 
etre soldats. «Mais ils vont se battre, ils vont se tuer avec 
ces armes-la!)) a dit ma m&re. <(Je ne comprends pas mon 
frere qui les leur a donnees! Je le lui dirai quand je le verrai! 

Je le trouve joliment ( =very ) bete!)) «Attendez!» a dit 
mon pere. ((Voyons ce fusil! Montrez-le-moi!)) «Le voila!)) 25 






226 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


L§ 408 


a repondu mon frere en le lui donnant. Mon pere Pa re- 
garde un peu, puis il le lui a rendu en disant: «Avec cette 
arme-la vous ne pourrez tuer personne. (Pest un vieux 
fusil casse qui ne vaut plus rien. Votre oncle vous Pa donne 
30 parce qu’il n’en voulait plus. Maintenant nous verrons si 
Pepee vaut mieux que le fusil. Yoyons-la! Donnez-la- 
moi! — La void! — C’est tout? — Comment tout? — Mais 
ce n’est que la moitie d’une epee! II y a longtemps qu’elle 
est cassee, cette 6 pee-la! Ne voyez-vous pas? Je vous 
35 la rendrai avec plaisir. Avec ces armes-la vous ne donne- 
rez la mort a personne, mes enfants!)) 

Pourtant, pendant des mois on nous voyait faire la guerre 
dans la cour derriere la maison. Les autres gargons n’etaient 
que soldats; mon frere et moi, nous etions lieute- 
40 nants, capitaines, generaux. Nous commandions toujours 
Parmee. Nous avions bati une caserne dans la cour, nous 
nous battions tous les jours sous le drapeau rouge, blanc et 
bleu, nous gagnions cinquante batailles, et puis, la guerre 
bien finie, nous faisions la paix. Et maintenant, comme vous 
45 voyez, mon frere est vraiment soldat. 

408. Resume, fitre soldat, metier; huit ans, quatre 
ans; fusil, epee; tuer, blesser; Noel; mere; qui a donne; se 
tuer; bete; montrer; vieux fusil; epee cassee; cour, caserne; 
armee; drapeau; la paix. 

409. Oral Drill. 1 . They see. 2. They wish. 3. We 
wish. 4. Don’t you see? 5. He wished. 6 . What do you 
wish? 7. I wish to give him them. 8 . We see them. 
9. They have not wished it. 10. Let us see! 11. He says 
it to us. 12. We do not see him. 13. We wish it. 14. Say 
it to me! 15. Will you see any? 16. Is there any? 17. Do 
you wish it? 18. What do they see? 19. Has he given them 
to her? 20 . What does that mean? 21 . Give me a 
flag! 22 . Do not give me it! 23. Give me it! 24. Say it 
to her! 25. Do they wish to say it to them? 26. I wished 


§ 410] 


LEgON XXXIX 


227 


to know what he meant. 27. Will you see the captain? 
28. I wished to see the lieutenant. 29. Do the generals wish 
to be with the army? 30. The soldier would wish it. 
31. Do you see the swords? 32. I wished to give them to 
him. 33. Have you wished to see the guns? 34. Will you 
see the soldiers coming from the barracks? 35. When the 
war will be finished, the generals will wish to make (the) 
peace. 36. If he fought, they would wish to kill him. 
37. He is not afraid of death. 38. What does this word mean? 


DIALOGUE 


ii 

410. 

• 1. Do you sometimes see my 

brothers? 

2. I see them quite often pass 

in (a) taxicab before my 
window 

3. Have you never gone to see 

them? You asked me for 
their address, and I gave 
it to you. You remem¬ 
ber it, don’t you? 

4. I remember it perfectly, but 

your brothers are never 
at home. What are they 
doing in town? 

5. They are carrying on their 

studies. The one wishes 
to be a doctor, the other 
would like to be a lawyer. 
Only, as he has never 
wanted to work hitherto, 

I do not see how he will 
begin to work now. He 
would like to be a lawyer, 
but he doesn’t wish to 
work 


Est-ce que vous voyez quelque- 
fois mes freres? 

Je les vois assez souvent passer 
en taxi devant ma fenetre 

Est-ce que vous n’etes jamais alle 
les voir? Vous m’avez de- 
mande leur adresse, et je vous 
l’ai donnee. Vous vous le rap- 
pelez, n’est-ce pas? 

Je me le rappelle parfaitement, 
mais vos freres ne sont jamais 
chez eux. Qu’est-ce qu’ils font 
en ville? 

11s font leurs etudes. L’un veut 
etre medecin, l’autre voudrait 
etre avocat. Settlement, comme 
il n’a jamais voulu travailler 
jusqu’ici, je ne vois pas com¬ 
ment il se mettra a travailler 
maintenant. 11 voudrait etre 
avocat, mais il ne veut pas tra¬ 
vailler 


228 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 411 


6. We shall see! The boys 

who do not wish to work 
can arrive at nothing in 
this world 

7. Yes, there is only work! I 

have said so to them a 
hundred times, but my 
brothers don’t want to 
listen to me 

8. And you, what would you 

wish to be? 

9. I should wish to be a soldier 

10. I also should have wished it, 

but my parents did not 
wish it 

11. I have always wished it. 

When I saw the soldiers 
come out of the bar¬ 
racks, with their guns on 
their arms, the general on 
his fine horse, the captains 
and lieutenants, sword in 
hand, when I heard the 
music and saw the flags, I 
always wanted to be a 
captain 

12. Yes, that would be fine! 

To fight, to make war, to 
win battles, and then, 
peace (being) made, to 
come back to live here 
in the country! That is 
what I should wish! 


Nous verrons! Les garfons qui 
ne veulent pas travailler ne 
peuvent arriver a rien dans ce 
monde 

Oui, il n’y a que le travail! Je le 
leur ai dit cent fois, mais mes 
freres ne veulent pas m’ecou- 
ter 

Et vous, qu’est-ce que vous 
voudriez etre? 

Je voudrais etre soldat 

Moi aussi, je l’aurais voulu, mais 
mes parents ne le voulaient pas 

Moi je I’ai toujours voulu. Quand 
je voyais les soldats sortir de 
la caserne, le fusil au bras, le 
general sur son beau cheval, 
les capitaines et les lieutenants, 
l’epeealamain, quand j’ecoutais 
la musique et voyais les dra- 
peaux, je voulais tou jours etre 
capitaine, moi 

Oui, ce serait beau! Se battre, 
faire la guerre, gagner des 
batailles, et puis, lai paix faite, 
revenir demeurer ici a la cam- 
pagne! Voila ce que je vou¬ 
drais! 


411. Conversation. 1. Where do the soldiers live? 

2. Who gave the sword and the gun to the two brothers? 

3. Could one hurt anybody or kill anybody with these 
weapons? 4. Where were the boys when they gave these 


§412] 


LEgON XXXIX 


229 


weapons to them? 5. Did the brothers give their sword and 
their gun to their father? 6 . Did he give them back to 
them? 7. What did he say, in giving them back to them? 

8 . Where did one see the boys every day? 9. Where did 
they fight? 10 . Did they win battles and did they make 
peace? 

412. Theme. Do you see those boys who carry red, 

white and blue flags in the garden in front of the house? 
You do not know what they are doing? I will tell it to you. 
The two boys that one sees at the left are generals, the boys 
behind them at the right wish also to be generals, or captains 5 
or lieutenants, but to-day they are only soldiers. When 
one of the generals sees a soldier with sword in hand he 
says: “Give it to me!” and the soldier gives it to him. When 
they see one of the soldiers with his gun on his arm, they ask 
him for it and the soldier gives it to them. The general ia 
says: “I will give them back to you when the battle shall 
begin .’ 7 If their weapons are old or broken, the general 
says to the captain: “What does that mean? This soldier 
has a broken sword; give it back to him! Those soldiers 
have old guns; give them back to them! These soldiers need is 
good guns and good swords. Do you wish to fight with 
those weapons? Do you not wish to win the battle? You will 
be able to kill nobody with those weapons. There are some 
in the barracks which are not so old and broken. Go to the 
captains at the barracks and ask them for them. Say: ‘You 20 
have good guns; give them to us. You have good swords; 
give some to us.’ If they do not wish to give you them, tell 
them that if they do not give you them immediately the 
generals will come and they will no longer be captains in 
our army! Now, march!” 25 

413. Exercises. A. Fill the following blanks each with 
all the possible conjunctive pronouns: 


230 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 414 


II — le donne. 

II nous — donne, 
II — lui donne. 

II me — donne. 


II — en donne. 

II la — donne. 

II — leur donne. 
II vous — donne. 


B. Replace the above verbs, where possible, first by 
a donne, secondly by a donnes. 

C. Fill the following blanks each with two pronouns: 

II — donne. II — a donnes. 

II — a donne. II ne — a pas donne. 

II ne — a pas donnes. 

D. Drill on present indicative of voir, vouloir: § 480, A. 

E. Drill on voir, vouloir: § 480, D. 


40. QUARANTINE LEQON [karatjem] 

Review 

i 

414. 1 . They wish to be loved. 2. He is right. 3. We 
need that. 4. They used to wish what we wished. 5. You 
are wrong. 6. We read what you write. 7. He used to read 
what she wrote. 8. Read more slowly! 9. He has read too 
fast. 10. What plays have they written? 11. She got up. 
12. She went to bed. 13. She washed her hands. 14. We 
dressed ourselves. 15. She broke her left arm. 16. I am 
not mistaken. 17. He deceived her. 18. Hurry! 19. He 
led her. 20. She fought with him. 21. I remember it. 
22. She remembered them. 23. Believe me! 24. I have 
never believed it. 25. She conducted herself. 26. We used 
to believe that. 27. He feels it. 28. We feel nothing. 
29. She sleeps. 30. We were going out. 31. They do not 
sleep. 32. Let us not go out. 33. Are you departing? 


§ 415] 


LEgON XL 


231 


34. She combed herself. 35. We stopped. 36. She bought 
herself a newspaper. 37. She brushed her hair. 38. She 
wounded her hand. 39. He remembered her. 40. Stop! 
41. Let us take a walk! 42. He gives me it. 43. We give 
it back to him. 44. Tell me it! 45. They wish to give me 
them. 46. Give them back to her! 47. They sold them to 
us. 48. We would have sold them to them. 49. Brush 
your teeth! 50. Have you looked at yourselves in the glass? 
51. The generals have no horses. 52. They have given 
them to them. 53. There are none of them. 54. Let us 
fight! 55. We have fought. 56. We wish to win the battle. 
57. What do you see? 58. I see nothing. 59. We shall see. 
60. He will wish to make (the) war. 61. We have wished to 
make peace. 

ii 

415. 1 . Which newspapers have you read? 2. How many 
letters has the captain written? 3. Has the lieutenant’s 
wife come? 4. Are the generals right or wrong? 5. Has 
she washed herself? 6. Had she brushed her teeth? 
7. Where are you leading the soldier? 8. How has she 
conducted herself? 9. We believe what they believe. 10. I 
believe that you are mistaken. 11. We have believed that 
she was mistaken. 12. The laundress got up early and 
washed the dirty linen. 13. The handkerchiefs are not clean. 
14. These socks and shirts belong to me. 15. She tired 
herself. 16. She got married. 17. If she does not hurry, 
she will never be dressed. 18. She went to bed late and she 
got up early. 19. How do you wish to go to the theater, in 
a taxicab or on foot? 20. She has hurt her foot. 21. She 
has caught a cold. 22. They wish to see that stupid moving- 
picture show. 23. Get out of the automobile quickly! 
24. This play begins badly. 25. Are you hot or cold? 
26. Are you reading the play that I have written? 27. I 
have read it already. 28. Do not hurry; go slowly! 29. Stop 
in front of the stage! 30. She washed her face. 31. She 


232 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 416 


brushed her hair. 32. She has not washed herself yet. 
33. Are the soldiers wounded? 34. Have they built the bar¬ 
racks? 35. Some one remembered it. 36. Let us see those 
weapons. 37. These swords are more broken than those old 
guns. 38. Would you wish to be a captain? 39. Do you 
see the flags? 40. Give them back to him! 41. They are not 
afraid of death. 42. When the war is ( = will be) finished, 
we shall have (the) peace. 43. They are fighting, but they 
do not wish to be killed. 44. We shall not see the laun¬ 
dress. 45. The girl broke her arm and wounded her foot. 


41. QUARANTE ET UNlfiME LEQON [karait e ynjem] 

CHEZ LE MEDECIN 


I 


416. Present Subjunctive: 

Endings added to the stem of the present participle: 


-e (silent) 
-es (silent) 
-e (silent) 
-ions [-jo] 
-iez He] 
-ent (silent) 1 

I. donn ant 


I may give , etc. 
je donn e [don] 

(tu donn es [don]) 
il donn e [don] 
nous donn ions [donjo] 
vous donn iez [donje] 
ils donn ent [don] 


II. finiss ant 

I may finish, etc. 
je finiss e [finis] 

(tu finiss es [finis]) 
il finiss e [finis] 
nous finiss ions [finisjo] 
vous finiss iez [finisje] 
ils finiss ent [finis] 


1 Compare these endings with the endings of the present indicative of the 
first conjugation. Compare the present indicative and the present subjunc¬ 
tive of donner. 


§417] 


LEQON XLI 


233 


III. vend ant 

I may sell , etc. 
je vend e [va:d] 

(tu vend es [vaid]) 
il vend e [vaid] 
nous vend ions [vadjo] 
vous vend iez [vadje] 
ils vend ent [vaid] 

417. Present Subjunctive of Irregular Verbs : In the fol¬ 
lowing verbs the student need learn only one form, the 
first person singular, if he remembers what was said in § 321: 
that the first and second plural have the stem of the present 
participle. Note that, as in the case of the regular verbs, the 
first, second, third singular, and the third plural are pro¬ 
nounced alike. 


avoir, ayant: 

j’aie [ 30 ] 

(tu aies [e]) 
il ait [e] 

nous ayons [ejo] 
vous ayez [eje] 
ils aient [e] 

aller, allant: 

faille [ 3 a:j] 

(tu ailles [aij]) 
il aille [aij] 

nous allions [aij 5] 
vous alliez [alje] 
ils aillent [aij] 

prendre, prenant 

(apprendre) 

(comprendre) 

: je prenne [pren] 

(tu prennes [pren]) 
il prenne [pren] 

nous prenions [pronjo] 
vous preniez [pronje] 
ils prennent [pren] 

venir, venant: 
(tenir) 

je vienne [vjen] 

(tu viennes [vjen]) 
il vienne [vjen] 

nous venions [vonjo] 
vous veniez [vonje] 
ils viennent [vj en] 

vouloir, voulant: 

je veuille [voeij] 

(tu veuilles [voeij]) 
il veuille [voeij] 

nous voulions [vuljo] 
vous vouliez [vulje] 
ils veuillent [voeij] 

voir, voyant: 

je voie [vwa] 

(tu voies [vwa]) 
il voie [vwa] 

nous voyions [vwaijo] 
vous voyiez [vwaije] 
ils voient [vwa] 

croire, croyant: 

je croie [krwa] 

(tu croies [krwa]) 
il croie [krwa] 

nous croyions [krwaijo] 
vous croyiez [krwaije] 
ils croient [krwa] 


234 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 418 


418. Uses of the Subjunctive: 

1. In the third person corresponding to English Let 
him —! Let them —! 

Qu’il finisse! Let him finish! 

Qu’ils finissent! Let them finish! 

2. After the conjunctions: 

afin que [afe ko], I 

pour que [pu:r ka], J or ^ er 

quoique [kwak], I 

bien que [bje ka], j although 

avant que [ava ko], before 
a moins que [a mwe ka], unless 

H nous a dit cela afin que (pour que ) nous le sachions, He has told us 
that in order that we should know it 
Quoique (Bien que) vous sachiez tout, je ne vous aime pas, Although 
you know everything, I don’t like you 
Je ferai cela avant que vous y alliez, I shall do that before you go there 
Vous ne pourrez pas vous lever de bonne heure, a moins que vous (ne 1 ) 
vous couchiez tout de suite, You will not be able to get up early 
unless you go to bed right away 


419. Comment allez-vous? How are you? 

Je vais bien, I am well 
Je vais mieux, I am better 
J’ai mal a la tete, I have a head ache 
Les dents lui font mal, 

11 a mal aux dents, 


He has a tooth ache=His teeth hurt him 


420. VOCABULARY 


la bouche [bu$], mouth 
faible [febl], weak 
fort [fo:r], strong 
le mal [mal] (pi. maux [mo]), 
ache 


malade [malad], sick 
la maladie [maladi], sickness 
le pays [pei], country 
la sante [sate], health 
la tete [test], head 


1 Regularly this redundant ne is required after a moins que and verbs of 
fearing (§ 429), but according to a decree of the French Minister of Public 
Instruction it may be omitted. 


§421] 


LEQON XLI 


235 


DRILL 


421. 

1. Let him sell them! let them 

finish it! 

2. Let him have it! let them 

go there! 

3. Let him take it! let them 

hold! 

4. Let him wish it! let them 

believe it! 

5. Before you see it; that we 

may have it 

6. Although I come; unless 

she learns 

7. That we may believe it; be¬ 

fore I wish 

8. Unless you build; although 

we go 

9. Let them rest! although he 

hurries 

10. That you may get up; un¬ 

less you go to bed 

11. Let them get married! un¬ 

less we remember 

12. Although he deceives; un¬ 

less I am mistaken 

13. That we may take a 

walk; although you see 
him 

14. Let them choose it! let him 

choose them! 

15. Although you are better; 

so that you may rest 

16. Unless you take a walk; al¬ 

though you believe it 

17. Let him tire himself! before 

he undresses 


Qu’il les vende! qu’ils le 
finissent! 

Qu’il Pait! qu’ils y aillent! 

Qu’il le prenne! qu’ils tiennent! 

Qu’il le veuille! qu’ils le croient! 

Avant que vous le voyiez; pour 
que nous l’ayons 

Quoique je vienne; a moins qu’elle 
(n’)apprenne 

Afin que nous le croyions; avant 
que je veuille 

A moins que vous (ne) batissiez; 
bien que nous allions 

Qu’ils se reposent! quoiqu’il se 
depeche 

Pour que vous vous leviez; a 
moins que vous (ne) vous cou- 
chiez 

Qu’ils se marient! a moins que 
nous (ne) nous rappelions 

Quoiqu’il trompe; a moins que je 
(ne) me trompe 

Afin que nous nous promenions; 
bien que vous le voyiez 

Qu’ils le choisissent! qu’il les 
choisisse! 

Quoique vous alliez mieux; pour 
que vous vous reposiez 

A moins que vous (ne) vous pro- 
meniez; quoique vous le croyiez 

Qu’il se fatigue! avant qu’il se 
deshabille 


236 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 422 


18. Unless he has a tooth ache; 

let them get up! 

19. Although we are mistaken; 

that he may go there 

20. How are they? she has a 

head ache 

21. His teeth hurt him; let him 

understand! 


A moms qu’il (n’)ait mal aux 
dents; qu’ils se levent! 

Bien que nous nous trompions; 
qu’il y aille 

Comment vont-ils? elle a mal a 
la tete 

Les dents lui font mal; qu’il com- 
prenne! 


422. Reading. Quoique je n’aie pas la sante bien bonne, 
je n’ai jamais ete vraiment malade. J’ai eu mal a la tete 
de temps en temps, il est vrai, — mais qui est-ce qui n’a 
jamais eu de ces maux-la? Non, j’ai toutes mes dents, je 
5 n’en ai pas perdu une seule. Elies ne me font jamais mal. 
Le medecin ne le croit pas! Qu’il regarde! Voila, j’ai 
ouvert la bouche pour ou’il les voie. Vous voyez que je les 
ai toutes. Bien que je n’aie que dix-neuf ans, je ne suis 
pas faible. Oui, je suis tres fatigue. C’est parce que je me 
io suis tant depeche pour arriver ici avant que vous partiez. 
J’ai ete malade pendant l’ete, mais je vais mieux maintenant. 
Je vais parfaitement bien. Je n’ai pas de maladies. Que le 
medecin cherche! II n’en trouvera pas. Je me promenais 
hier a la campagne et j’ai attrape un rhume, mais cela sera 
is vite parti, a moins qu’on (ne) m’envoie dans un pays oft il 
fera trop froid. Ma mere ne veut pas que j’aille dans un 
pays ofl il y aura beaucoup de maladies. Mais quand je 
serai soldat, j’irai la ou on m’enverra, qu’elle le veuille ou 
non! Je sais qu’on ne dit pas au soldat: «Choisissez!» Le 
20 capitaine dit au lieutenant: ((Bien que ce soldat ait mal a 
la tete, qu’il aille oft vont les autres! Mal a la tete? Qu’est- 
ce que cela veut dire? Cela Veut dire qu’il a peur! Qu’il 
vienne me voir ce soir!)) Vous croyez, peut-etre, que j’aurai 
peur comme cela. A moins qu’on (ne) me prenne comme 
25 soldat, je partirai d’ici et je ne reviendrai plus. Quoique 
mon pays n’ait peut-6tre pas besoin de moi, je ne pourrais 
jamais voir partir l’arm6e sans partir avec elle. Que ma 


§ 422] 


LEgON XLI 


237 



Je me battrai 

















238 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 423 


mere le croie ou non! Mon age? Je vous Pai deja dit. J*ai 
dix-neuf ans. Comment! Je n’ai que quatorze ans? Qui dit 
cela? Qu’il vienne ici me dire cela! On ne me prendra pas? 
Je suis trop jeune et je parle trop? Comment! Mon oncle 
ici! C’est ma m&re qui vous a fait venir. Bien qu’on ne 
veuille pas me prendre parce que je suis trop jeune et parce 
que je parle trop, je serai soldat et je me battrai, vous allez 
voir. N’en dites rien a ma mere, je vous prie. 

423. Resume. Sante, malade; mal a la tete; dents; 
m6decin; bouche; dix-neuf ans; fatigue, pourquoi?; mala¬ 
dies, medecin; rhume, pays froid; mere; soldat malade; 
capitaine; avoir peur; prendre comme soldat; age; trop 
jeune; oncle; serai soldat. 

424. Oral Drill. 1 . Although he rests. 2. Unless your 
health is weak. 3. In order that I may come. 4. Before 
we understand this. 5. How is he? 6. He is not well. 
7. Let them hurry! 8. Although you close your mouth. 
9. Unless he has a head ache. 10. In order that we may 
take a walk. 11. Before he holds it. 12. His teeth hurt 
him. 13. Let him go to bed! 14. Are you well? 15. In 
order that you may see it. 16. Before you are better. 
17. Although he believes it. 18. Let them get up! 19. In 
order that you may rest. 20. Unless he has a sickness. 
21. Before they see it. 22. I am better. 23. Let him dress! 
24. Although I learn that. 25. In order that she may 
go. 26. Unless they remember. 27. He has a tooth ache. 
28. Let them believe it! 29. How are you? 30. Are you 
not better? 31. Unless we are mistaken. 32. Before they 
take them. 33. She is not better to-day. 34. Although he 
has a cold. 


§ 425] 


LEgON XLI 


239 


II 

DIALOGUE 


425. 

1. Good-day, sir! Although 

you didn’t tell me to 
come this afternoon, I felt 
so sick that I couldn’t go 
to bed without seeing you 

2. You remember that I asked 

you to come to my office 
every day. Do so unless 
you wish to catch the 
same disease as your 
brother has caught 

3. Although I am not better 

to-day, I believe that it is 
only a cold 

4. It’s only a cold! You don’t 

know then what that 
means? That means that 
you are very sick. Have 
you a head ache? 

5. Yes, I tired myself yester¬ 

day; I always have a 
head ache when I am 
tired 

6. You are certain that it 

is not your teeth that 
are aching? Truly! We 
know now that nearly all 
diseases come from the 
teeth. You don’t believe 
it? 

7. Tell me so that I may un¬ 

derstand well: How can 
you know that my teeth 
are hurting before you see 
them? 


Bon jour, monsieur! Quoique 
vous ne m’ayez pas dit de venir 
cette apres-midi, je me sentais 
si malade que je ne pouvais pas 
me coucher sans vous voir 

Vous vous rappelez que je vous ai 
prie de venir chez moi tous les 
jours. Faites-le a moins que 
vous (ne) vouliez attraper la 
meme maladie que votre frere 
a attrapee 

Bien que je n’aille pas mieux au- 
jourd’hui, je crois que ce n’est 
qu’un rhume 

Ce n’est qu’un rhume! Vous ne 
savez done pas ce que cela 
veut dire? Cela veut dire que 
vous allez tres mal. Avez-vous 
mal a la tete? 

Oui, je me suis fatigue hier; j’ai 
toujours mal a la tete quand je 
suis fatigue 

Vous etes certain que ce ne sont 
pas les dents qui vous font mal? 
Vraiment! Nous savons main- 
tenant que presque toutes les 
maladies viennent des dents. 
Vous ne le croyez pas? 

Dites-moi pour que je comprenne 
bien: Comment pouvez-vous 
savoir que les dents me font 
mal avant que vous les voyiez? 


240 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§426 


8. Although you don’t come 

often enough to my office, 
I always know what is 
hurting you. So don’t 
say: “Let the doctor look 
at me before he comes 
and tells me what is hurt¬ 
ing me!” * 

9. You don’t need to look? 

Let the others believe 
that, if they wish! 

10. Well! open your mouth so 

that I may see! There! 
What was I telling you? 
You have not a head ache, 
you have a tooth ache. 
You will feel perfectly 
well when you no longer 
have any teeth 

11. And yet I have a head ache, 

and it is not my teeth 
that ache! 


Bien que vous ne veniez pas assez 
souvent chez moi, je sais tou- 
jours ce qui vous fait mal. Ne 
dites done pas: «Que le mede- 
cin me regarde avant qu’il 
vienne me dire ce qui me fait 
mal!» 

Vous n’avez pas besoin de regar- 
der? Que les autres croient 
cela, s’ils veulent! 

Eh bien! ouvrez la bouche pour 
que je voie! Voila! Qu’est-ce 
que je vous disais? Vous n’avez 
pas mal a la tete, vous avez mal 
aux dents. Vous irez parfaite- 
ment bien quand vous n’aurez 
plus de dents 

Et pourtant j’ai mal a la tete, et ce 
ne sont pas les dents qui me 
font mal! 


426. Conversation. 1 . Will you leave this country unless 
they take you as a soldier? 2. Will you go before your 
mother is well? 3. Will he be able to enter the army although 
he is only sixteen? 4. Does he do that in order that the 
doctor may not see that he has a head ache? 5. Do you say 
that in order that your uncle may not come? 6. What does/ 
his mother not wish? 7. Will he do it although she does not. 
wish it? 8. Will she send her brother unless her son comes? 
9. What did the captain say to the lieutenant? 10. How 
did the boy catch a cold? 


427. Theme. Although I am not very well now, I shall 
be much better soon. I am always better during the winter. 
My health is always less good before the snow comes. 


§ 428] 


LEgON XLI 


241 


Don’t live here unless you believe that you will like (the) 
snow and (the) rain and (the) ice. We have a great deal of 5 
it every winter. My husband is going to the city in order 
that he may finish some work that he has been doing for a 
long time. His mother asked me if I wished to go with him. 

I said: “Let him go alone! He will work better without me. 

I shall go there later unless they (on) take him as a soldier!” 10 
You see, although I am always very well in the country, 
the city is always bad for me (hurts me). I never have a 
head ache here, but I am always sick in the city unless I 
wish to go to the doctor’s every day. Your health is weak 
also, isn’t it? I thought you were sick last winter. You had 15 
a tooth ache for (during) a month? You don’t call that a 
sickness? How are you now? The doctors think all (the) 
sicknesses come from the teeth. Do you believe that? Go 
to my doctor’s in order that he may see what is the matter 
with you (what is hurting you). He will not let you go before 20 
he understands your sickness. 

428. Exercises. A. Conjugate: 

Before I come. Unless I go. 

B. Drill on the present subjunctive of donner, finir, 
vendre, avoir, aller, apprendre, tenir, vouloir, voir, croire, 
using a conjunction, or ‘ Let him —! ’ 1 Let them —! ’: § 480, A. 

C. Students ask and answer questions such as: 

How are you? Have you a head ache? 


242 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 429 


42. QUARANTE-DEUXlfiME LEQON [karait d0zj8m] 


LA PENSION 


i 

429. Uses of the Subjunctive (continued ): 

3. Usually with impersonal verbs: 

Ilfaut que vous sortiez, You must go out 

II vaut mieux que vous soyez ici, It is better for you to be here (that 
you be here) 

II est possible qu’il vienne, It is possible he may come 
II est impossible qu’il vienne, It is impossible that he come 

4. With some verbs expressing emotion: 

Wishing: 

Je veux ) _ . . , T , 

Je desire / que V0US 611188162 cela > 1 Wlsh you to finish that 


Happiness and sorrow: 

Je suis content qu’il ait fait ceci, I am glad he has done this 
Je regrette qu’il soit si bete, I am sorry he is so stupid 

Doubting: 

Je doute qu’il fasse cela, I doubt that he will do that 

Fearing: 

J’aipeur qu’il ne 1 vienne, I am afraid he may come 


430. Present Subjunctive of Irregular Verbs: 


(a) etre, etant: 


je sois [swal 
(tu sois [swa]) 
il soit [swa] 


nous soyons [swajo] 
vous soyez [swaje] 
ils soient [swa] 


je fasse [fas] 

(tu fasses [fas]) 
il fasse [fas] 


nous fassions [fasjo] 
vous fassiez [fasje] 
ils fassent [fas] 


*See § 418, note 1. 


faire, faisant: 


§431] 


LE<JON XLII 


243 


pouvoir, pouvant : Je puisse [pyis] nous puissions [pyisjo] 

(tu puisses [pyis]) vous puissiez [pyisje] 
il puisse [pyis] ils puissent [pyis] 

( b ) The following verbs follow the rule: 

savoir, sachant: je sache, etc. 

sentir, sentant: je sente, etc. (So dormir, partir, sortir) 
ecrire, ecrivant; j’ecrive, etc. 
conduire, conduisant: je conduise, etc. 
dire, disant: je dise, etc. 
lire, lisant: je lise, etc. 

431. Connaitre [koneitr], to know 1 ; connaissan t [konesa], 
connu [kony]. 

(Other forms follow the rules.) 

432. Mettre [metr], to put ; mettant [meta], mis [mi]. 

Present indicative: je mets [me] nous mettons [meto] 

(tu mets [me]) vous mettez [mete] 
il met [me] ils mettent [met] 

(Other forms follow the rules.) 


VOCABULARY 


433. 

agreable [agreabl], agreeable 

aimable [emabl], amiable, kind 

americain [amerike], American 

causer [koze], to chat 

content [koto], glad 

il faut [il fo], it is necessary (must) 

inviter [evite], to invite 

loin [lwe], far 

louer [lwe], to rent 


Poccasion [lokazjo] (/.), oppor¬ 
tunity 

la partie [parti], part 
la pension [pasjo], pension, 
boarding-house 
le repas [ropa], meal 
rester [reste], to remain 
la vie [vi], life 


434. DRILL 

1. It is possible for us to know it II est possible que nous le sachions 

2. It is impossible for you to II est impossible que vous leur 

write to them ecriviez 

i The commonest use of connaitre as distinguished from savoir is ‘ to be 
acquainted with.’ 

Je connais ce monsieur. I am acquainted with this gentleman. 


244 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 435 


3. It is better for them to say it 

4. I doubt that they under¬ 

stood it 

5. I fear you may have tired 

yourself 

6. He wishes us to chat with 

her 

7. I am glad you rested 

8. Do you desire him to do 

that? 

9. They must take it 

10. Are you glad he conducts 

himself well? 

11. It is better for you to be 

amiable 

12. We fear he has come to the 

boarding-house 

13. It is possible for him to 

learn this 

14. Does she regret that we can¬ 

not go there? 

15. Is it impossible for her to 

hold it? 

16. I doubt his coming 

17. We must seize the oppor¬ 

tunity to invite them 

18. It is better for us to remain 

there 

19. We fear the meals are too 

expensive 

20. I am glad the life there is 

agreeable 


II vaut mieux qu’ils le disent 

Je doute qu’ils l’aient compris 

J’ai peur que vous (ne) vous soyez 
fatigue 

H veut que nous causions avec elle 

Je suis content que vous vous 
soyez repose 

Desirez-vous qu’il fasse cela? 

II faut qu’ils le prennent 

Etes-vous content qu’il se con- 
duise bien? 

II vaut mieux que vous soyez 
aimable 

Nous avons peur qu’il (ne) soit 
venu a la pension 

II est possible qu’il apprenne ceci 

Est-ce qu’elle regrette que nous 
ne puissions pas y aller? 

Est-il impossible qu’elle le tienne? 

Je doute qu’il vienne 

II faut que nous saisissions l’occa- 
sion de les inviter 

II vaut mieux que nous y restions 

Nous’avons peur que les repas (ne) 
soient trop chers 

Je suis content que la vie y soit 
agreable 


435. Reading. En arrivant a Paris, mon frere et moi, 
nous sommes descendus a un hotel. Cet h6tel etait tr&s bon, 
mais dtant venus a Paris pour apprendre a parler frangais 
nous ne voulions pas rester dans cet hotel, parce que beau- 


§ 436] 


LEgON XLII 


245 


coup d’Americains y arrivaient tous les jours et sachant que 5 
nous parlions un peu le frangais ils desiraient que nous sortions 
avec eux toutes les apres-midis. ((II faut que vous veniez 
avee nous,)) disaient-ils; ((nous serons bien contents de payer 
pour tous, vous n’aurez rien a payer.)) Je disais toujours: 
((Je suis content que vous desiriez que nous sortions avec io 
vous, mon frere et moi, mais j’ai beaucoup de travail a faire: 
il faut que je finisse F etude d’un livre tres difficile avant ce 
soir et je n’en ai lu qu’une petite partie. Je voudrais bien 
aller avec vous, mais je doute que je puisse le faire.)) Mon 
frere disait: ((Je regrette beaucoup qu’il me soit impossible 15 
de sortir avec vous cette apres-midi, mais un de mes amis 
qui demeure loin d’ici m’a invite a diner chez lui ce soir et il 
faut que je sois la avant sept heures.)) 

Un jour mon frere m’a dit: ((Nous pourrions rester dans 
cet hotel toute notre vie sans apprendre un mot de frangais: 20 
il y a trop d’Americains ici! Il faut absolument que nous 
cherchions un autre hotel ou il y ait moins d’Americains.)) 

Je lui ai repondu: ((Sortons! Allons chercher une pension 
de famille!)) Une pension de famille, vous savez bien ce que 
c’est, n’est-ce pas? On demeure dans une bonne famille 25 
frangaise: on y loue une chambre bon marche, on y prend 
tous ses repas, on a Toccasion de causer frangais tout le 
temps, on y rencontre de belles jeunes Frangaises tr&s 
aimables, — enfin si vous allez a Paris pour etudier le fran¬ 
gais, n’allez pas k un hotel, allez dans une pension de fa- 30 
mille. La vie y est tres agr^able: je sais ce que je dis, je ne 
me trompe pas. Vous n’avez pas besoin d’avoir peur que les 
repas y soient moins bons qu’au restaurant. Certainement 
il vaut mieux que vous fassiez cela pour que vous ayez 
Toccasion d’apprendre a parler frangais. 35 

436. Resume. A l’hotel; apprendre frangais; Am 6 ricains, 
sortir; payer; travail; livre; frere; un jour le frere dit; autre 
hotel; pension; chambre, repas, causer; h 6 tel, pension. 


246 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 437 


437. Oral Drill. 1. He wishes you to talk with her. 2. 
Are you glad we are here? 3. We must know. 4. I doubt 
his doing it. 5. Let him feel! 6. In order that he may be 
able. 7. It is better for me to write. 8. Are you well? 
9. We are glad you conduct yourself well. 10. They wish 
us to say it. 11. Let him read them! 12. He must put it in 
his mouth. 13. Do you doubt his coming? 14. I am sorry 
you don’t know him. 15. We desire you to invite us. 16. 
It is better for him to remain here. 17. Are you sorry he 
came to this pension? 18. Are you afraid he will lose a part 
of it? 19. I doubt our remaining there. 20. They are glad 
the meals are good. 21. We are afraid he may lose his wife. 
22 . You desire him to be agreeable. 23. Unless you chat 
with her. 24. It is impossible that we rent this house. 25. 
Although they go far from here. 26. Before you take the 
opportunity. 27. It is possible he is kind. 28. We are very 
well. 29. Before she stopped. 30. Unless they went to bed 
late. 31. Although we got up early. 32. Before you took a 
walk. 33. It is possible she has come. 34. I am glad they 
remembered. 35. I doubt that he hurried. 36. I am sorry 
you tired yourself. 37. He fears you have conducted your¬ 
self badly. 38. Unless she went out. 39. It is impossible 
that they stopped there. 40. Before they dressed. 


ii 


DIALOGUE 


438. 

1 . Good-day, my friend! Where 

are you going so fast? 

2. Hurry up, if you wish to 

come with me! 

3. Tell me what has happened! 

4. I must be at my boarding¬ 

house in a quarter of an 
hour 

5. Wait! Stay! When shall I 


Bon jour, mon ami! Oft allez-vous 
si vite? 

Depechez-vous, si vous voulez 
venir avec moi! 

Dites-moi ce qui est arrive! 

II faut que je sois a ma pension 
dans un quart d’heure 

Attendez! Restez! Quand est-ce 


LEQON XLII 


247 


§ 438] 


have the opportunity of 
chatting a little with you? 
It is impossible that you 
should arrive there before 
six o’clock. It is too far 

6. Well! I’m not going there. 

I have gone only a very 
little part of the way. 
What a life! It is you 
who said to me: “It is 
better that you should go 
into a family boarding¬ 
house” 

7. Life is not agreeable there? 

It is possible that the 
meals are not better there 
than at the restaurant, 
but the young girls are 
very amiable, are they 
not? 

8. I am glad that you made 

me enter this boarding¬ 
house, because now I 
know how much more 
agreeable hotel life is 

9. I regret that we were mis¬ 

taken 

10. You were not mistaken, you 
were right; I do not doubt 
that one learns French 
better in boarding-houses 
where one has so many 
opportunities to talk it — 
only in this boarding¬ 
house there are only Eng¬ 
lish and Americans! They 
thought to leave far be¬ 
hind them the English 


que j’aurai ^occasion de causer 
un peu avec vous? II est im¬ 
possible que vous y arriviez 
avant six heures. C’est trop 
loin 

Eh bien! Je n’y vais pas. Je n’ai 
fait qu’une toute petite partie 
du chemin. Quelle vie! C’est 
vous qui m’avez dit: «I1 vaut 
mieux que vous alliez dans une 
pension de famille» 

La vie n’y est pas agreable? II est 
possible que les repas n’y soient 
pas meilleurs qu’au restaurant, 
mais les jeunes filles sont tres 
aimables, n’est-ce pas? 

Je suis content que vous m’ayez 
fait entrer dans cette pension, 
parce que maintenant je sais 
combien la vie d’hotel est plus 
agreable 

Je regrette que nous nous soyons 
trompes 

Vous ne vous etes pas trompe, 
vous aviez raison; je ne doute 
pas qu’on (n’)apprenne mieux 
le franpais dans les pensions 
oh on a tant d’occasions de le 
parler — settlement, dans cette 
pension il n’y a que des Anglais 
et des Americains! Ils croyaient 
laisser loin derriere eux la 
langue anglaise, comme moi. 
Us ne veulent pas rester dans la 


248 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 439 


language, like me. They 
don’t want to remain in 
the boarding-house; and 
I, I must choose a good 
little hotel far from here 
and I must rent a little 
room there 

11. Listen! Stay here! It is 

better you should wait. 
Remember that it is possi¬ 
ble that the others should 
seek to leave like you 

12. That’s true! I don’t doubt 

that they will do that. I 
stay 


pension; et moi, il faut que je 
choisisse un bon petit hdtel 
loin d’ici et que j’y loue une pe¬ 
tite chambre 


Ecoutez! Restez ici! H vaut mieux 
que vous attendiez. Rappelez- 
vous qu’il est possible que les 
autres cherchent a partir comme 
vous 

C’est vrai! Je ne doute pas qu’ils 
(ne) fassent cela. Je reste 


439. Conversation. 1 . Can one learn French at Paris 
although one lives at a hotel? 2. Do you desire me to go 
out with you? 3. Are you glad he wishes you to go out with 
him? 4. Must they finish their work before they go 1 to the 
theater? 5. Is it impossible for him to come 1 with me? 6. Is 
it better for one to learn 1 French at Paris or at Rheims? 

7. Are they afraid you could not find a good boarding-house? 

8 . Isn’t it better for one to eat 1 well? 9. Do you doubt that 
the meals are good? 10. Are you afraid your French friend 
may learn English before you learn French? 


440. Theme. Although the French lady at the pension 
is very kind, I must leave unless she departs. Although 
you know her very well, you cannot know how much time I 
have lost in chatting with her. I am glad you have come. 

S You must remain here with me; you will see that what I say 
is true. The life here would be very agreeable, it is true, 
but you would do better to rent a room in that hotel before 
they are all taken. I am sorry you can’t stay here, but you 

1 Though the infinitive is correct here, the student is expected to use the 
subjunctive. 


§441] 


LEgON XLIII 


249 


see what would happen (arrive). It is impossible for one to 
write a book unless one seizes every opportunity to (de) work 
during the greater part of the time. I doubt her leaving be¬ 
fore her friend goes to (the) war, unless they get married soon. 
They will do it in order to be able to go to France together. 
You must not think that I do not like her, although I say that 
I have not been able to work while she is in the house. (The) 
last winter she went to bed early every evening and she got 
up late, and she sang all the time while she was undressing 
and while she was dressing. She sings very well, but that is 
a little too much, unless I am mistaken. 

441. Exercises. A. Drill on present subjunctive of etre, 
faire, pouvoir, savoir, dormir, ecrire, conduire, dire, lire, 
using il faut, il vaut mieux, etc. (§ 429,3): § 480, A. 

B. Drill on connaitre, mettre: § 480, E. 


43. QUARANTE-TROISlfiME LECON [karait trwazjem] 

LA MAISON 

i 

442. Demonstrative Pronouns: 

(a) ceci [sosi], this 

cela [sola], that (§ 221) 

(b) m. celui [solyi], this or that (one), the one 
f. celle [sel], this or that (one), the one 
m. ceux [s0], these or those, the ones 

f. celles [sel], these or those, the ones 

Note 1. -ci and -la may be added to the last four forms (see §220, 
note 2): 

celui-ci, celle-ci = this one; ceux-ci, celles-ci = these 
celui-la, celle-la = that one; ceux-la, celles-la = those 


250 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 443 


Celui-ci est bon, celui-la est mauvais, This one is good, that one is bad 
Celles-ci sont bonnes, celles-la sont mauvaises, These are good, those 
are bad 

Note 2. For the Demonstrative Adjective (ce, cette, ces, see § 220). 


443. Possessive Pronouns: 



mine 

{thine) 

his, hers, its 

m. s. 

le mien [mje] 

(le tien [tje]) 

le sien |sje] 

f.s. 

la mienne [mj en] 

(la tienne [tjen]) 

la sienne [sjen] 

m. pi. 

les miens [mje] 

(les tiens [tje]) 

les siens [sje] 

f. pi. 

les miennes [mjen] 

(les tiennes [tjen]) 

les siennes [sjen] 


ours 

yours 

theirs 

m. s. 

le notre [noitr] 

le votre [voitr] 

le leur [loeir] 

f.s. 

la notre [no:tr] 

la votre [voitr] 

la leur llceir] 

m. pi. 

les notres [noitr] 

les v6tres [voitr] 

les leurs [lceir] 

f. pi. 

les notres [noitr] 

les v8tres [voitr] 

les leurs [lceir] 


Note. De and a contract with le and les: 

II parle du mien, He speaks of mine 
A mon frere et au votre, To my brother and to yours 

444. Possession is also indicated by the use of a (see 
§247, B, C). 

Ce livre est a moi, This book is mine 
or Ce livre est le mien, This book is mine 

445. Recevoir [rosavwair], to receive; recevant [rosova], 
iegu [rosy]. 

Present indicative: 

je regois [raswa] nous recevons [rasavo] 

(tu repois [raswa]) vous recevez [rasave] 

il refoit [raswa] ils refoivent [raswaiv] 

Future: 

je recevrai [rasavre], etc. 

Present subjunctive: 

je regoive [raswaiv] nous recevions [rasavjo] 

(tu revives [raswaiv] vous receviez [rasavje] 

il re?oive [raswaiv] ils refoivent [raswaiv] 

(Other forms follow the rules.) 


§ 446] 


LEQON XLIII 


251 


446. Devoir [davwair], to owe; dev ant [dava], du [dy]. 

Present indicative: je dois [dwa] nous devons [dovo] 

(tu dois [dwa]) vous devez [dove] 

il doit [dwa] ils doivent [dwa:v] 

Future: je devrai [dovre], etc. 

Present subjunctive: je doive [dwaiv], etc., like recevoir 
(Other forms follow the rules.) 

447. Devoir is difficult to translate (except when it means 
owe), because the corresponding English auxiliaries {must, 
ought) are defective. The trouble is not with the French 
but with the English words. The following are the most 
usual translations: 

je dois aller, I must go, I am to go (also I have to go) 

je devais aller, I was to go 

je devrai aller, I shall have to go 

je devrais aller, I ought to go 

j’ai du aller, I had to go (also I must have gone) 

j’aurais du aller, I ought to have gone 


VOCABULARY 


448. 

l’assiette [lasjet] (/.), plate 
autour de [otu:r da], around 
les bonbons [bob5] (m.), candy 
chacun [$akde], each one 
chaque [$ak], each 
charmer [$arme], to charm 
la connaissance [konesais], ac¬ 
quaintance 

le couteau [kuto] {pi. couteaux), 
knife 

la cuiller [kyjesr], spoon 


la fourchette [fur$et], fork 
l’invite [levite] (m.), guest 
met.tre la table, to set the table 
le morceau [morso], piece 
la nappe [nap], table-cloth 
par [pa:r], by, through 
permettre [permetr], to permit 
presenter [prezate], to present, 
introduce 

la serviette [servjet], napkin 
la tasse [tas], cup 


449 . DRILL 

1. This spoon and that one Cette cuiller-ci et celle-te 

2. This glass and that of my Ce verre et celui de ma soeur 

sister 


252 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 450 


3. These knives and those of 

my father 

4. Your table-cloth and mine 

5. My fork and yours 

6. Our kitchen and hers 

7. Your bread and theirs 

8. He receives; they receive 

9. We receive; you have re¬ 

ceived 

10. He is to come; we are to go 

11. They are to carry; they 

were to show 

12. I ought to go; I had to speak 

13. We shall owe; we shall re¬ 

ceive 

14. He receives his bread and 

mine 

15. Have you received yours? 

16. Those who have had to do it 

17. You must be tired 

18. He will receive presents 

19. Although he has received 

20. He wishes that I may re¬ 

ceive 


Ces couteaux et ceux de mon pere 

Votre nappe et la mienne 
Mr. fourchette et la votre 
Notre cuisine et la sienne 
Votre pain et le leur 
H refoit; ils refoivent 
Nous recevons; vous avez reju 

II doit venir; nous devons aller 
Us doivent porter; ils devaient 
montrer 

Je devrais aller; j’ai dft parler 
Nous devrons; nous recevrons 

U refoit son pain et le mien 

Avez-vous re$u le votre? 

Ceux qui ont dd le faire 
Vous devez etre fatigue 
H recevra des cadeaux 
Quoiqu’il ait refu 
II veut que je refoive 


450. Reading. Nous avons des invites aujourd’hui. Ce 
sont des parents de ma m&re qui viennent de la campagne. 
Ils ne doivent rester en ville que quelques jours. Ma 
mere est tres bonne; elle les a regus tres poliment. On doit 
5 toujours faire cela. Nous le leur devons parce que ce sont 
des parents. Celui qui ne regoit pas poliment ses parents, 
ne devrait pas 6tre poliment regu par eux. Est-ce que vous 
vous montrez tou jours aussi bon pour les votres que nous 
pour les notres? Ma mere dit a tout le monde: Permettez 
io que je vous presente mon oncle, ma tante, ma cousine! Et 
tout le monde rdpond: Je suis charmd de faire leur connais- 


sanoe. 


§ 450] 


LEgON XLIII 


253 


Je croyais pourtant qu’on devait m’apporter des cadeaux. 
C’est ce que les parents doivent faire. Moi je n’ai vraiment 
rien regu, quoique je leur aie donnd de tres jolies choses. 15 
Ceux qui regoivent des cadeaux, devraient aussi en donner; 
mais tout ce que je recevrai d’eux sera la petite boite de 
bonbons — celle que vous voyez la sur la table — qu’ils 
m’ont mise entre les mains en arrivant. Elle ne vaut pas 



beaucoup, celle-la! Celles que ma soeur regoit de son fiance 20 
sont beaucoup plus grandes. La mienne ne vaut que 
cinquante centimes; les siennes coutent tres cher. Tous mes 
petits amis regoivent de jobs cadeaux de leurs parents: 
celui-ci regoit un fusil des siens, celui-la une epee des siens. 
Moi je ne regois des miens qu’une boite de bonbons! Je 25 
n’aime pas des parents comme les notres. Je voudrais en 
avoir comme les leurs. Pourquoi dites-vous: Quel gargon? 

Ma mere met la table main tenant. Elle y a deja mis les 
assiettes, les tasses, les couteaux, les fourchettes, les cuillers. 
Voyez-vous ces deux petites assiettes bleues? Celle-ci est 30 







254 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 451 


la mienne; celle-la est a ma soeur. Elle trouve la sienne plus 
jolie, mais elle a tort; moi j’aime mieux la mienne. On lui a 
donne la sienne pour son anniversaire; mon frere et moi nous 
avons regu les notres a Noel. Voila tout le monde assis autour 
35 de la table. Celui-la c’est mon oncle, celle-ci c’est ma tante, 
ceux-la sont mes cousins. Regardez comme ils mangent, 
mes deux cousins! Celui-la ne dit pas un seul mot: il a tou- 
jours un morceau de pain dans la bouche. Celui-ci parle 
tout le temps. II ne doit pas etre assis a la table: il est trop 
40 jeune. Il a pris la serviette de son frere parce que la sienne 
est tombee sous ses pieds—et il mange avec son couteau! 
Je n’aime pas mes parents—mais je pense que vous devez 
trouver les votres plus charmants que les miens. 

451. Resume. Parents en ville; reyus; presenter; ca- 
deaux; bonbons; fiance; petits amis; mettre la table; assiettes 
bleues; anniversaire, Noel; cousins, pain, jeune, serviette, 
couteau. 

452. Oral Drill. 1. This glass, and that one. 2. Your 
cup and mine. 3. This spoon and that of my sister. 4. My 
plate and his. 5. These presents and those of my brother. 
6 . Your presents and hers. 7. These napkins and those of 
your mother. 8 . Our napkins and yours (pL). 9. That fork 
and this one. 10. Her fork and yours. 11. Their bread 
and ours. 12 . My bread and hers. 13. Those who receive 
us. 14. The one who receives me. 15. We receive them. 
16. You will receive her. 17. She would not receive them. 
18. Has she received them? 19. She is to speak. 20. They 
are to go out. 21 . We are to depart. 22 . You were to 
come. 23. You ought to go. 24. Have you received your 
letters? 25. I am to receive some. 26. The one who had 
to carry them. 27. She must be tired. 28. Although I 
have received them. 29. Do you wish that we receive 
her? 30. You must depart. 


§ 453] 


LEgON XLIII 


255 


ii 

DIALOGUE 


453. 

1. Where is the maid? She 

ought to be here 

2. Here I am, madam. I had 

to wait a long time at the 
grocer’s. He was to re¬ 
ceive our bread from the 
baker’s at three o’clock. 
He always receives ours 
before that, but to-day he 
received it only at four 
o’clock 

3. You ought to go to another 

grocer’s! Why wait at 
that one’s store? 

4. What am I to do now, ma¬ 

dam? 

5. You must set the table. I 

have some guests who are 
to come soon 

6. Always guests! Those who 

receive guests and who 
keep open house every 
day ought to pay their 
maids better. Those who 
have all the pleasure ought 
at least to pay those who 
do all the work 

7. You forget the tips and the 

presents that you receive 

8 . I don’t receive so many as 

that! 

9. There are two of my guests 

already! The one who is 
ringing is my uncle, and 
the one who is coming 


Ou est la bonne? Elle devrait 
etre ici 

Me void, madame. J’ai dft at- 
tendre longtemps chez l’epicier. 
II devait recevoir notre pain de 
chez le boulanger a trois heures. 
II refoit toujours le notre avant 
cela, mais aujourd’hui il ne l*a 
re$u qu’a quatre heures 

Vous devriez aller chez un autre 
epicier! Pourquoi attendre 
chez celui-la? 

Qu’est-ce que je dois faire main- 
tenant, madame? 

Vous devez mettre la table. J’ai 
des invites qui doivent venir 
bientot 

Toujours des invites! Ceux qui 
regoivent des invites et qui 
tiennent maison ouverte tous 
les jours devraient mieux payer 
leurs bonnes. Ceux qui ont tout 
le plaisir devraient au moins 
payer celles qui font tout le tra¬ 
vail 

Vous oubliez les pourboires et les 
cadeaux que vous recevez 

Je n’en refois pas tant que cela! 

Voila deja deux de mes invites! 
Celui qui sonne c’est mon 
oncle, et celle qui vient avec 
lui c’est ma tante. Mon mari 


256 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 454 


With him is my aunt. My 
husband will receive them 
in the parlor. I had to 
come to make the tea in 
the kitchen. Have you 
received the cakes that I 
ordered? 

10. They are these perhaps? 

11. No, it is not those. They 

were to bring them at two 
o’clock. They ought to 
have arrived a long time 
ago 

12. Must I set the table? 

13. How! you have not set it 

yet! Well, put the knives, 
the forks and the spoons 
beside the plates. But 
must I tell you all that? 
You must know it al¬ 
ready. Put also one of 
these boxes of candy be¬ 
side each plate. Each 
one is to have his. And 
don’t forget the napkins! 
Yesterday you put on 
only mine and my hus¬ 
band’s! We had ours, I 
mine and he his, — and 
my guests did not have 
theirs! 


les recevra dans le salon. J’ai 
du venir faire le the dans la 
cuisine. Est-ce que vous avez 
refu les gateaux que j’ai com¬ 
mands s? 

Ce sont peut-etre ceux-ci? 

Non, ce ne sont pas ceux-la. On 
devait les apporter a deux 
heures. Ils auraient du arriver 
il y a longtemps 

Faut-il que je mette la table? 

Comment! vous ne l’avez pas mise 
encore! Eh bien, mettez les 
couteaux, les fourchettes et les 
cuillers a cote des assiettes. 
Mais est-ce que je dois vous 
dire tout cela? Vous devez le 
savoir deja. Mettez aussi une 
de ces boites de bonbons a cote 
de chaque assiette. Chacun 
doit avoir la sienne. Et n’ou- 
bliez pas les serviettes! Hier 
vous avez mis seulement la 
mienne et celle de mon mari! 
Nous avions les ndtres, moi la 
mienne et lui la sienne, — et 
mes invites n’avaient pas les 
leurs! 


454. Conversation. 1 . Did you have guests yesterday? 
2. Where did they come from and how long were they to stay 
at your house? 3. How did you receive them? 4. Ought 
those who do not receive their relatives politely to be 
politely received by them? 5. She has many relatives, and 
I also; does she show herself as good to hers as I am (it) to 


§ 455] 


LEgON XLIII 


257 


mine? 6 . If we said: Allow us to introduce our uncle to you, 
what would you answer? 7. Are you to bring your cousins 
some presents? 8 . Ought the one who receives a present 
also to give something? 9. How much is this little box of 
candy worth, which I have received? 10. Do you like your 
relatives as much as ours? 

455. Theme. I always receive my guests as politely as 
you receive yours. I am to receive some poor relations to¬ 
day, and I shall receive them very politely. I owe it to them 
because they have always received me very well. They 
always say to their guests: Permit us to introduce to you our 5 
cousins, and all their friends reply that they will be charmed 
to make our acquaintance. The maid has set the table. 
You ought to see the blue plates, the cups, the pretty 
knives and forks and spoons, the white table-cloth, and the 
napkins beside the plates. We have received ten boxes of 10 
candy from the grocer. Each one is to have his beside his 
plate. You will receive yours and I shall receive mine. But 
you must wait. The cakes which we were to receive from 
the grocer at noon have not yet arrived. The maid has had 
to go to the grocer’s, and my mother will have to make the 15 
tea which we are to drink. The guests are to be seated 
around the table and the maid is to carry the tea and the 
cakes to all those who ask for any. Do you see those big 
chairs? That one is for my father, this one is mine. That 
chair beside mine is yours. You must not eat my candy, 20 
however, which is between my plate and yours. Wait! 

456. Exercises. A. Fill the following blanks, with (1) this, 

(2) that, (3) this one (m. and f.), (4) that one (m. and f.): 

— is funny. — is better (vaut mieux) 

than —. 

— goes quickly. — means something. 


258 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 457 


B. Translate the following: 

This plate (cake, fork, knife, table-cloth) is the one you 
are looking for. 

Change to the plural. 

C. Fill the following blanks with (1) mine, (2) his, (3) ours, 
(4) yours, (5) theirs: 

These ( m .) are —. That one (m. and /.) is —. 

Those (/.) are —. This one (m. and /.) is —. 

D. Drill on recevoir, devoir: § 480, E. 


44. QUARANTE-QUATRlfiME LE£ON [karait katriem] 

UNE LETTRE: LE PAQUEBOT, LA DOUANE 

i 

457. Summary of Interrogative and Relative Pronouns: 

[For reference] 

1. Note that the interrogative adjective what? which? is quel? quelle? 
quels? quelles?: Quel livre avez-vous? Quel livre est-ce que vous 
avez? What book have you? 

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 

I. Persons (who? whom?) 

Subject: 

2. (a) Qui est ici? 3. Qui est-ce qui est ici? 

Who is here? 

Object: 

4. (6) Qui (voyez-vous)? 5. Qui (est-ce que vous voyez)? 

Whom do you see? 

Object of prep.: 

6. (c) Avec qui (allez-vous)? 7. Avec qui (est-ce que vous allez)? 

With whom are you going? 


§ 457] 


LEQON XLIV 


259 


8 . Note that which {one)? = lequel?: Lequel (des hommes) est ici? 
Which (of the men ) is here? Lequel (voyez-vous)? Lequel (est-ce que 
vous voyez)? Avec lequel (allez-vous)? Avec lequel (est-ce que vous 
allez)? 

II. Things ( what?) 

Subject: 

9. (a). 10. Qu’est-ce qui est sur la table? 

What is on the table? 

Object: 

11. (6) Que (voyez-vous)? 12. Qu’(est-ce que vous voyez)? 

What do you see? 

Object of prep.: 

13. (c) Avec quoi (ecrivez-vous)? 14. Avec quoi (est-ce que vous 

With what do you write? ecrivez)? 

15. Note that which (one) ?=lequel?: Lequel (des crayons) est sur la 
table? Which {of the pencils ) is on the table? etc. See 8. 

III. What? (asking for a definition) 

16. What kind of thing is . . .? Qu’est-ce que c’est qu’un chameau? 
What is a camel? 

17. Compare: What is your opinion? Quelle est votre opinion? See 
interrogative adjectives above. 

IV. What =that which 

Subject: 

18. (a) Je sais ce qui est ici. I know what is here. 

Object: 

19. (6) Je sais ce que vous I know what you see. 

voyez. 

Predicate with etre: 

20. (c) Je sais ce que vous etes. I know what you are. 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS 

I. Persons {who, whom ) 

Subject: 

21. (a) L’enfant qui est ici est The child who is here is good. 

sage. 



260 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§458 


Object: 

22. (b) V enfant que vous voyez 

est sage. 

Object of prep.: 

23. (c) L’enfant avec qui vous 

allez est sage. 

24. (i d ) L’enfant dont je parle 

est sage. 


The child whom you see is good. 

The child with whom you go is 
good. 

The child of whom I speak is good 


II. Things {which) 


Subject: 

25. (a) Le livre qui est ici est 

bon. 

Object: 

26. (6) Le livre que vous voyez 

est bon. 

Object of prep.: 

27. (c) Le crayon avec lequel 

vous ecrivez est bon. 

28. ( d ) Le livre dont vous par- 

lez est bon. 


The book which is here is good. 

The book which you see is good. 

The pencil with which you write is 
good. 

The book of which you speak is 
' good. 


458. Remarks on Interrogative and Relative Pronouns: 

1 . Where parentheses are used (see 4, 5, 6, 7, etc.) all the 
student has to remember is the equivalence of the inverted 
and est-ce que forms: see § 27. 

2. Usage is determined by the models in § 27. 

Pronoun: Qui voit-z7? Whom does he see? 

Noun: Qui est-ce que Yhomme voit? Whom does the man see? 

3. Both parts of lequel are declined (lequel, laquelle, les- 
quels, lesquelles). Combined with a and de: 

auquel k laquelle auxquels auxquelles 

duquel de laquelle desquels desquelles 

4. Note that what? , subject of a verb, must be translated 
qu* est-ce qui? (10). There is no form for 9. 


LE£ON XLIV 


261 


§ 459] 


5. Note dont (28), of which. With prepositions other 
than of, use lequel (27). 

6. whosef (interrogative) usually=a qui? (to whom?): see 

§ 247, C. 

whose (relative) = dont (of whom, of which), both of per¬ 
sons and things. 

Whose book is this? A qui est ce livre? 

I know the man whose son has gone, Je connais l’homme dont le fils 
est parti 

Here is the flag whose color is blue! Voici le drapeau dont la couleur 
est bleuel 

459. Craindre [kreidr], to fear; craignant [krejia], crain i 
[kre]. 

Present indicative: je crains [kre] nous craignons [krejio] 

(tu crains [kre]) vous craignez [krejie] 

il craint [kre] ils craignent [krep] 

(Other forms follow the rules.) 

460. Conjugate like craindre: plaindre [pleidr], to pity ; 

se plaindre, to complain. 

461. Ouvrir [uvriir], to open; ouvrant [uvra], ouvert 
[Uveir]. 

Present indicative: j’ouvre [ 3 u:vr] nous ouvrons [uvro] 

(tu ouvres [u:vr]) vous ouvrez [uvre] 
il ouvre [u:vr] ils ouvrent [u:vr] 

(Other forms follow the rules.) 

462. Conjugate like ouvrir: couvrir [kuvriir], to cover; 
offrir [ofrixr], to offer; souffrir [sufriir], to suffer. 

463. VOCABULARY 

asseyez-vous! [aseje vu], sit la cabine [kabin], cabin 

down! devouer [devwe], to devote 

le bateau [bato], boat la douane [dwan], custom-house , 

& bord [bo:r], on board il faudra [fodra], fui. cf il faut 


262 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§464 


le matelot [matlo], sailor 
la mer [me:r], sea 
le paquebot [pakbo], steamer 
plusieurs [plyzjoeir], several 
le pont [p5], deck 

464. 

1 . Of what? of whom? 

2. To what? to whom? 

3. The man to whom, for 

whom 

4. The boat to which, for 

which 

5. The steamer on board which 

6 . Which one of these sailors? 

7. For whom? for what? 

8 . To which of the steamers? 

9. To which of the ladies? 

10. Of what do you complain? 

11. The door which is open 

12 . The door which I open 

13. The door through which 

14. The man who sees John 

15. The man whom John sees 

16. The lady of whom we com¬ 

plain 

17. Who was opening the door? 

18. Which sea have you crossed? 

19. Which of the cabins is 

yours? 

20. What! we are at the wharf! 

465. Reading. 


le quai [ke], wharf, dock 
la terre [te:r], land 
traverser [traverse], to cross 
le voyage [vwaja: 3 ], journey 
voyager [vwaja 3 e], to travel 


De quoi? de qui? 

A quoi? a qui? 

L’homme a qui, pour qui 

Le bateau auquel, pour lequel 

Le paquebot a bord duquel 
Lequel de ces matelots? 

Pour qui? pour quoi? 

Auquel des paquebots? 

A laquelle des dames? 

De quoi vous plaignez-vous? 

La porte qui est ouverte 
La porte que j’ouvre 
La porte par laquelle 
L’homme qui voit Jean 
L’homme que voit Jean (or que 
Jean voit) 

La dame dont nous nous plaignons 

Qui ouvrait la porte? 

Quelle mer avez-vous traversee? 
Laquelle des cabines est la votre? 

Quoi! nous sommes au quai! 


DRILL 


Ma chere amie, 

Me voila enfin sur le grand bateau, dont je vous ai parld 
dans ma lettre d’hier, et sur lequel je craignais presque de 
mettre le pied. Enfin je voyage, je traverse la mer! Je 


LEgON XLIY 


263 


§ 465 ] 


trains beaucoup que le temps ne soit bien mauvais. Quoique 5 
je ne craigne rien sur terre, j’ai toujours craint la mer; les 
vents, les eclairs, le tonnerre, tout cela loin de la terre me 
fait peur! 

J’ai trouve ici beaucoup de lettres — moi qui craignais 
de ne rien recevoir, j’ai regu au moins cent lettres et cartes 10 
postales! Je me plaignais quelquefois d’avoir moins d'amis 
que les autres — il ne faut plus que je me plaigne de cela! 

Je vais a la poste chercher mes lettres — dans le bateau, 
naturellement — nous avons une poste ici! Je les demande, 
je les regois, je les ouvre, je les lis, tout cela avec le plus grand 15 
plaisir du monde; mais repondre k toutes ces lettres, apres 
les avoir regues, ouvertes et lues, voila, je le crains, quelque 
chose qui sera moins agreable, —il y en a tant! Plaignez-. 
moi — et, si vous n’etes pas tres contente de cette lettre, 
ne vous plaignez pas de moi! Tous mes amis et amies m’ont 20 
ecrit. Auxquels repondre tout de suite? Lesquels atten¬ 
dant? De quoi leur parler? — il y a tant de choses a dire! 
Heureusement j’ai beaucoup de tres belles cartes postales 
illustrees sur chacune desquelles je n’aurai qu’a ecrire deux 
mots. Mais j’ai tant d’amis dont j’ai regu des lettres, des 25 
cadeaux, des fleurs, des boites de bonbons, et auxquels il 
faudra que j’ecrive des lettres et non des cartes. Vous en 
etes une des premieres, et je commence par vous, parce que 
je ne voudrais jamais que vous vous plaigniez de moi, comme 
nous nous sommes plaintes de ma soeur qui a passe ses 3* 
vacances de Noel a New-York — vous vous rappelez cela, 
n’est-ce pas? — sans que nous ayons regu un seul mot d’elle! 
Moi je ne me suis pas arretee chez les amis dont je vous avais 
parle et chez lesquels ma sceur a fait visite si souvent. Je 
craignais que le paquebot ne parte sans moi! Et puis, j’ai 3S 
du aller en ville acheter une autre malle. J’en ai trois main- 
tenant! Quoi! trois malles! direz-vous. Oui, mademoiselle! 
J’en ai une dans laquelle je n’ai que des robes et des cha¬ 
peaux, une autre, plus grande, ou je mets mon linge, mes 


264 


BEGINNING FKENCH 


[§466 


40 souliers et je ne sais quoi encore, et enfin une troisieme dans 
laquelle je ne porte que des livres. Je crains que je ne reste 
longtemps a la douane en descendant du paquebot. Et on 
ne me dira pas: Asseyez-vous, mademoiselle! 



£crivez-moi encore Tadresse de ces deux amis frangais 
45 dont vous me parliez et auxquels vous voulez que j’apporte 
vos lettres. J’ai perdule carnet dans lequel j’avais ecrit cela. 
Auquel des deux dois-je donner la boite de cigares, et auquel 
l’autre petite boite que vous avez si bien enveloppee, et dans 
laquelle il y a, je pense, des mouchoirs de soie? Pour qui 
50 les cigares? et pour qui les mouchoirs? 

Ecrivez-moi bientbt. ,Que dit-on chez nous? De quoi 
parle-t-on? Avec lesquels de mes amis causez-vous de moi? 
J’ecrirai a tout le monde, mais qu'on ne s’en plaigne pas si 
je n’ecris que deux mots a chacun! 

Votre amie bien devouee, 
Henriette. 

466 . Resume. Grand bateau; bon matelot; terre, mer; 
cent lettres; peu d’amis; une poste; lettres regues; y re- 












§ 467] 


LE£ON XLIV 


265 


pondre; cartes; cadeaux; par qui commencer?; sceur, Noel; 
amis a New-York; trois malles; douane; adresse perdue; 
cigares, mouchoirs; ecrire. 

467. Oral Drill. 1 . To whom do you speak? 2. Of 
what do you speak? 3. Which one of the steamers? 4. On 
which of the boats? 5. For whom is that box? 6. To which 
of the wharves are you going? 7. Of what does she com¬ 
plain? 8. For whom do you open the door? 9. The door 
which she opens. 10. Of what cabin do you speak? 11. The 
steamer on board which you came. 12. On board which 
of the steamers did she come? 13. The man whom I see. 
14. The lady who sees me. 15. The sailor of whom I spoke. 
16. The custom-house through which we passed. 17. Pity 
me! 18. Don’t pity him! 19. Don’t complain! 20. Open 
the door at the left! 21. We have opened the door at the 
right. 22. To which of the boats are you going? 23. Who 
came? 24. Whom have you seen? 25. To whom did she 
speak? 26. What! is it you? 27. Which of the doors did 
you open? 28. For whom do you open the door? 29. The 
sailor of whom I was complaining. 30. Of what do you com¬ 
plain? 

ii 


DIALOGUE 


468. 

1. What! you are traveling 

again? 

2. Yes, I am going to cross the 

sea this time. I am going 
to make that trip to 
France of which I have 
spoken so much and for 
which I have at last 
enough money 

3. You don’t fear the sea then 

at this season? 


Quoi! vous voyagez encore? 

Oui, je vais traverser la mer cette 
fois. Je vais faire ce voyage en 
France dont j’ai tant parle et 
pour lequel j’ai enfin assez d’ar- 
gent 

Vous ne craignez done pas la mer 
dans cette saison? 


266 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 468 


4. No, I don’t fear it any more, 

this sea on which I have 
traveled so many times, 
and of which you are 
afraid because you have 
never crossed it. The 
first time that I went to 
France, I feared it very 
much, I also 

5. I, I have always feared it. 

Is it big, the boat in 
which you will travel? 

6 . Do you remember the boat 

of which you spoke to me 
so often and in which you 
came to New York? 

7. The one on the deck of 

which w^e walked so much? 
I remember it perfectly 

8 . Well, the one in which I 

shall travel is much larger 
than that one 

9. What! what are you telling 

me? 

10. Yes, you will see. Come 

there immediately with 
me. Here we are already 
on the wharf. They are 
opening the door through 
which one goes to the 
boat. Pass through that 
open door there, to the 
right 

11. Through which of these 

doors? I see several of 
them 

12 . What! you don’t see that 

little door which the em- 


Non, je ne la crains plus, cette 
mer sur laquelle j’ai voyage 
tant de fois, et dont vous avez 
peur parce que vous ne l’avez 
jamais traversee. La premiere 
fois que je suis alle en France, 
je la craignais beaucoup, moi 
aussi 

Moi, je l’ai toujours crainte. Est- 
il grand, le paquebot sur lequel 
vous voyagerez? 

Vous rappelez-vous le bateau 
dont vous me parliez si souvent 
et sur lequel vous etes venu a 
New-York? 

Celui sur le pont duquel nous nous 
promenions tant? Jemelerap- 
pelle parfaitement 

Eh bien, celui sur lequel je voya- 
gerai est beaucoup plus grand 
que celui-la 

Quoi! que me dites-vous? 

Oui, vous verrez. Venez-y tout 
de suite avec moi. Nous voila 
deja sur le quai. On ouvre la 
porte par laquelle on va au ba¬ 
teau. Passez par cette porte 
ouverte, la, a droite 


Par laquelle de ces portes? J’en 
vois plusieurs 

Quoi! vous ne voyez pas cette 
petite porte que les employes 


§ 469] 


LEgON XLIV 


267 


ployees are opening, there 
at the left? 

13. At the left! You said: at 

the right! Now I see it, 
the big steamer on board 
which you are going to 
travel 

14. Let’s go on board! They 

are opening my cabin. 
Let’s enter it! Sit down! 


ouvrent, la, a gauche? 

A gauche! Vous avez dit: a droite! 
Maintenant je le vois, le grand 
paquebot a bord duquel vous 
allez voyager 

Allons a bord! On ouvre ma 
cabine. Entrons-y! Asseyez- 
vous! 


469. Conversation. 1 . Do you fear to cross the sea? 

2. What is one afraid of and of what does one complain? 

3. Did you receive several letters from your friends? 4 . What 
did you do when they gave you your letters? 5. Which 
one of your friends did you answer at once? 6 . Do you pity 
me because I have so many letters and cards which I must 
answer? 7. To which of your friends are you writing and of 
what do you speak? 8 . Have you complained of me because 
I did not stop at your house? 9. Are you not afraid that 
you may remain a long time at the custom-house? 10. To 
whom will you give the box in which you have those good 
cigars? 

470. Theme. 

My dear Henrietta: 

I am going to travel! I shall cross the sea on a big 
steamer. I used to fear the sea a little, but I do not fear it 
now. I have always feared (the) bad weather much less than 
you, although I have not traveled as often as you. I came 5 
to New York yesterday evening on a little boat which stopped 
in front of the wharf. I am staying at the house of my aunt 
Mary, of whom I have already spoken to you in one of my 
letters. She is a very old lady at whose house I always stay 
when I am in town. She always opens her house to me, and 10 
she receives me with the greatest pleasure in the world. I 


268 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§471 


stay only at her house, although I sometimes fear that my 
visits may not be agreeable for her. I have so many friends, 
you know, who come there when I am there. She is all alone 
is in her house. Don’t you pity her? But she fears nothing 
and she never complains, although she is always alone there. 
I have received several letters which I shall answer soon. Of 
what do you wish that I write to you? Of my dresses, of 
which I have bought four? Of the trunks, in which I have 
20 put my dresses? Of my books, of which I have not yet 
opened the first one? Of the picture-postals of which I have 
a hundred, and on each of them I shall write only six words? 
Of the big steamer on board which I shall soon be, and in 
which I have a pretty little cabin? But it is already mid- 
25 night, — I shall go to bed now and shall write no more this 
evening. 

Your most devoted friend, 

Mary. 

471. Exercises. Fill the following blanks with pronouns, 
using each blank as many times as possible: 

— is here? — does the man fear? 

— do you fear? With — are you doing that? 

— of the children (houses) do you like the best? 

Drill on craindre, se plaindre: § 480, E. 

Drill on offrir, souffrir: § 480, E. 


45. QUARANTE-CINQUlJlME LEQON [karait sekjem] 

Review 

1 

1 . Let her finish! 2 . Although he takes it. 3. Un¬ 
less he comes. 4. Let them hold it! 5. Before he goes. 
6 . Unless they be. 7. In order that we may have it. 


§ 473] 


LEgON XLV 


269 


8 . We remember it. 9. Unless we remember it. 10. You 
are taking a walk. 11. Although we are taking a walk. 
12. He chooses them. 13. Unless he chooses me. 14. She 
has a head ache. 15. Although she has a tooth ache. 
16. You must be here. 17. It is possible that he may do 
that. 18. I fear that they have done it. 19. Are they doing 
that? 20. Are you glad that I have come? 21. Why have 
I come? 22. Do you wish us to go out? 23. He must go 
out. 24. I doubt that he will be able. 25. Let them say it! 
26. He fears I may have tired myself. 27. It is not possible 
you should know that. 28. I am glad that you are hurrying. 
29. We must take them. 30. Do you wish that he should 
conduct himself badly? 31. It is better that he go. 32. He 
must learn. 33. We doubt their coming. 34. Let him 
choose this knife or that one! 35. That table-cloth or this 
one. 36. These glasses and those. 37. My uncle and 
yours. 38. Your aunts and mine. 39. My hand and his. 
40. My bread and hers. 41. They receive these cakes and 
those. 42. He will receive this box and that of his sister. 
43. He is to come. 44. We are to go. 45. Those who had to 
speak. 46. Although he has received it. 47. They wish 
that he receive them. 48. To whom does he say it? 49. Of 
what do you speak? 50. Which sailor? 51. Which one of 
the boats? 52. Those whom I see. 53. Which ones do 
you see? 54. The lady of whom I was complaining. 55. The 
door through which he was coming. 

ii 

473. 1. Although his health is good, he has a head ache. 

2. Unless you close your mouth, you will have a tooth ache. 

3. Let him go to bed, unless he is better. 4. I have hurried 
so that you may take a walk with me. 5. Unless he was 
mistaken, she Was glad that you are here. 6. Do you wish 
that we do it? 7. Is it better that we remain in the boarding¬ 
house? 8. Are you not afraid that he may not write? 


270 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 474 


9. Do you doubt my doing it? 10. We are glad that you 
know her. 11. Although she went to bed late, she got up 
early. 12. Hurry up, if you wish her to come! 13. He must 
be at the theater at eight o’clock. 14. Although you have 
no napkin, I have mine. 15. They have received our letter 
and his. 16. I had my gun and that of John, my sword and 
that of Peter. 17. We had our guns and those of John, our 
swords and those of Peter. 18. Those who receive us well 
do what they ought to do. 19. You are to cross the sea and 
I am to stay in New York. 20. My box of candy and his 
are larger than that of Mary. 21. This boat and the one in 
which you traveled are very small. 22. To whom is the sailor 
speaking, and of what? 23. On board of which of these 
steamers will you travel? 24. For whom were you making 
this? 25. Of whom or-of what are you complaining? 26. I 
am complaining of the sailors and of their boats. 27. Of 
which of the sailors? 28. Enter my cabin and sit down! 

29. Although I have crossed it several times, I fear the sea. 

30. Which (ones) of these letters have you answered? 

31. From which of your friends did you receive letters and 
which (ones) of these letters will you answer? 


ADDENDA 

Notes on Past Definite and Imperfect Subjunctive 

474. These tenses are rarely used in conversation or in 
informal discourse, such as letters. They belong to purely 
literary style; consequently, before the student begins to 
read he must master them. 


475. Endings of Past Definite: 


First Conjugation 

-ai [e] -ames [am] 1 
-as [a] 1 -ates [at] 1 
-a [a] -erent [e:r] 

5 See Introduction, §§16, 1 


Second and Third Conjugations 

-is [i] -imes [im] 

-is [i] -ites [it] 

-it [i] -irent [iir] 

and 4; 38, 4, (Exceptions) 


§ 476] 


LE£ON XLV 


271 


I gave, etc. 
je donn ai [done] 

(tu donn as [dona]) 
il donn a [dona] 
nous donn ames [donam] 
vous donn ates [donat] 
ils donn erent [doneir] 


I sold, etc. 
je vend is [vadi] 

(tu vend is [vadi]) 
il vend it [vadi] 
nous vend imes [vadim] 
vous vend ites [vadit] 
ils vend irent [vadi:r] 


Note. There are no irregularities in the past definite not offered 
in the first person, even in the case of irregular verbs. In a large num¬ 
ber of irregular verbs (avoir, etre, recevoir, etc.) i in the ending is 
replaced by u. 


476. Endings of Imperfect Subjunctive. There are no 
departures from the rule, even in the irregular verbs, in the 
formation of the imperfect subjunctive: add the endings to 
the second person singular of the past definite. 

For the third singular, substitute t for the s of the past 
definite and put a circumflex over the vowel. 


I. tu donn as 

I might ( should ) give, etc. 
je donnas se [donas] 

(tu donnas ses [donas]) 
il donnat [dona ] 1 
nous donnas sions [donasjo] 
vous donnas siez [donasje] 
ils donnas sent [donas] 


II. and III. tu (fin is) vend is 

I might ( should) sell, etc. 

je vendis se [vadis] 

(tu vendis ses [vadis]) 
il vendit [vadi] 
nous vendis sions [vadisjo] 
vous vendis siez [vadisje] 
ils vendis sent [vadis] 


477. The imperfect subjunctive is used after past tenses 
and the conditional tense: 

Je voulais (voudrais) qu’ils vendissent leur maison, I wished (should 
wish) them to sell their house 

Quoiqu’il eut bien travaille, je ne Pai pas paye, Although he had worked 
well, I have not paid him 

Note. The present subjunctive is generally used in place of the 
imperfect subjunctive in conversation and in informal discourse. 

478. Exercises. Drill on past definite (of any verbs): 
§ 480, A. 

479. Drill on imperfect subjunctive: § 480, A, using the 
formula il desirait que —. 

i See page 270, footnote. 


272 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§480 


SCHEMES FOR VERB DRILL 
480. A. Single Tense. Fill the following blanks: 


1 . you — 

3. they ( m .) — 

5. they (/.) — 

2 . I — 

4. he — 

6 . we — 

B. Present, past indefinite, future: 

7. she — 

1 . I have — 

6 . he has — 

11 . they will — 

2 . you — 

7. they — 

12 . I shall — 

3. they have — 

8 . you have — 

13. he — 

4. I — 

9. you will — 

14. he will — 

5. we shall — 

10 . we — 

15. we have — 


C. Present, past indefinite, future, present participle, imperfect. 


1 . she has — 

9. they were —ing 

17. 

—ing 

2 . I shall — 

10 . we — 

18. 

you have — 

3. —ing 

11 . you will — 

19. 

they will — 

4. you — 

12 . —ing 

20 . 

we were —ing 

5. I was -—ing 

13. she — 

21 . 

they — 

6 . he will — 

14. they have — 

22 . 

he was —ing 

7. I — 

15. we shall — 

23. 

I have — 

8 . we have — 

16. you were —ing 

24. 

—ing 

D. Present, past indefinite, future, present 
perfect, conditional, imperative: 

participle, im- 

1 . —ing 

12 . he will — 

23. 

—ing 

2 . he would — 

13. I — 

24. 

she — 

3. she has — 

14. they would — 

25. 

they have — 

4. —! 

15. —! 

26. 

we shall — 

5. I shall — 

16. we have — 

27. 

you were—ing 

6 . you would — 

17. they were —ing 

28. 

they will — 

7. —ing 

18. —ing 

29. 

you have — 

8 . you — 

19. we should — 

30. 

we were —ing 

9. I was — ing 

20 . you will — 

31. 

they — 

10 . let us —! 

21 . let us —! 

32. 

he was — ing 

11 . I should — 

22 . we — 

33. 

I have — 


§ 480] 


LEgON XLV 


273 


E. Present indicative, past indefinite, future, present parti¬ 
ciple, imperfect, conditional, imperative, present subjunctive (I 

must —: il faut que je —): 


1. he was —ing 

13. I should — 

25. let us —! 

2. he would — 

14. he will — 

26. we — 

3. they must — 

15. I — 

27. I have — 

4. she has — 

16. he must — 

28. she — 

5. —! 

17. they would — 

29. they have — 

6. we must — 

18. —! 

30. I must — 

7. I shall — 

19. you must — 

31. we shall — 

8. you would — 

20. we have — 

32. you were —ing 

9. —ing 

21. they were —ing 

33. they will — 

10. you — 

22. —ing 

34. you have — 

11. I was —ing 

23. we should — 

35. we were —ing 

12. let us —! 

24. you will — 

36. they — 

F. The entire verb, including past definite (indicated as 

follows: I — ed) and imperfect subjunctive (he had to—: il 

fallait qu’il or il a fallu qu’il —): 

1. he was —ing 

17. he will — 

33. we — 

2 . he would 1 — 

18. you —ed 

34. I —ed 

3. they must — 

19. I — 

35. I have — 

4. I —ed 

20. we had to — 

36. she — 

5. she has — 

21 . he must — 

37. they have — 

6 . he had to — 

22 . they would — 

38. I must — 

7. —! 

23. —! 

39. we —ed 

8. they —ed 

24. you must — 

40. we shall — 

9. we must — 

25. we have — 

41. he had to — 

10. I shall — 

26. they were—ing 

42. you were —ing 

11. you would — 

27. they had to — 

43. they will — 

12. —ing 

28. —ing 

44. you have — 

13. you — 

29. we should — 

45. we were—ing 

14. I was —ing 

15. let us —! 

16. I should — 

30. you will — 

31. you had to — 

32. let us —! 

46. they — 



APPENDIX 


SYNOPSIS OF REGULAR VERBS — IRREGULAR VERBS 

Synopsis of the Regular Verbs 

For convenient reference, before treating the irregular 
verbs, complete paradigms of the regular verbs and of 
the auxiliary verbs are here given. 

CONJUGATIONS 


I 

II 

Infinitive 

III 

donn er, to give 

fin ir, to finish 

Present Participle 

vend re, to sell 

donn ant, giving 

fin iss ant, finishing 

Past Participle 

vend ant, selling 

donn e, given 

fin i, finished 

Present Indicative 

vend u, sold 

I give 

I finish 

I sell 

je donn e 

finis 

vend s 

tu donn es 

fin is 

vend s 

il donn e 

fin it 

vend 

nous donn ons 

fin iss ons 

vend ons 

vous donn ez 

fin iss ez 

vend ez 

ils donn ent 

fin iss'ent 

Imperfect Indicative 

vend ent 

I was giving 

I was finishing 

I was selling 

je donn ais 

fin iss ais 

vend ais 

tu donn ais 

fin iss ais 

vend ais 

il donn ait 

fin iss ait 

vend ait 

nous donn ions 

fin iss ions 

vend ions 

vous donn iez 

fin iss iez 

vend iez 

ils donn aient 

fin iss aient 

275 

vend aient 


276 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


Past Definite Indicative 


I gave 

I finished 

I sold 

je donn ai 

finis 

vend is 

tu donn as 

finis 

vend is 

il donn a 

fin it 

vend it 

nous donn ames 

fin fines 

vend fines 

vous donn ates 

fin ites 

vend ites 

ils donn erent 

fin irent 

vend irent 


Future Indicative 


I shall give 

I shall finish 

I shall sell 

je donner ai 

finir ai 

vendr ai 

tu donner as 

finir as 

vendr as 

il donner a 

finir a 

vendr a 

nous donner ons 

finir ons 

vendr ons 

vous donner ez 

finir ez 

vendr ez 

ils donner ont 

finir ont 

vendr ont 


Conditional 


I should give 

I should finish 

I should sell 

je donner ais 

finir ais 

vendr ais 

tu donner ais 

finir ais 

vendr ais 

il donner ait 

finir ait 

vendr ait 

nous donner ions 

finir ions 

vendr ions 

vous donner iez 

finir iez 

vendr iez 

ils donner aient 

finir aient 

vendr aient 


Imperative 


give 

finish 

sell 

donn e 

fin is 

vend s 

donn ons 

fin iss ons 

vend ons 

donn ez 

fin iss ez 

vend ez 


Present Subjunctive 


I may give 

I may finish 

I may sell 

je donn e 

fin iss e 

vend e 

tu donn es 

fin iss es 

vend es 

il donn e 

fin iss e 

vend e 

nous donn ions 

fin iss ions 

vend ions 

vous donn iez 

fin iss iez 

vend iez 

ils donn ent 

fin iss ent 

vend ent 


277 


APPENDIX 


Imperfect Subjunctive 


I might give 

I might finish 

I might sell 

je donn asse 

fin isse 

vend isse 

tu donn asses 

fin isses 

vend isses 

il donn at 

fin it 

vend it 

nous donn assions 

fin issions 

vend issions 

vous donn assiez 

fin issiez 

vend issiez 

ils donn assent 

fin is sent 

vend issent 

Synopsis of Compound Tenses 

( formed with avoir) 


Indicative Past Indefinite: 

j’ai donne, fini, vendu, etc. 7 have given, 

etc. 

“ Pluperfect: 

j’avais donne, etc. 

I had given, 
etc. 

Past Anterior: 

j’eus donne, etc. 

I had given, 
etc. 

Future Perfect: 

j’aurai donne, etc. 

7 shall have 
given, etc. 

Conditional Perfect: 

j’aurais donne, etc. 

I should have 
given, etc. 

Subjunctive Perfect: 

j’aie donne, etc. 

I may have 
given, etc. 

“ Pluperfect: 

j’eusse donne, etc. 

(formed with etre) 

I might have 
given, etc. 

Indicative Past Indefinite: 

je suis alle (allee), 

etc. 7 have gone, 

etc. 

“ Pluperfect: 

j’etais alle, etc. 

7 had gone, 
etc. 

“ Past Anterior: 

je fus alle, etc. 

7 had gone, 
etc. 

“ Future Perfect: 

je serai alle, etc. 

7 shall have 
gone , etc. 

Conditional Perfect: 

je serais alle, etc. 

7 should have 
gone, etc. 

Subjunctive Perfect: 

je sois alle, etc. 

7 may have 
gone, etc. 

“ Pluperfect: 

je fusse alle, etc. 

7 might have 
gone, etc. 


278 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


Compound Infinitives 

Perfect Infinitive: avoir donne, etc., to have given , etc. 

etre alle, etc., to have gone, etc. 

Compound Participles 

Perfect Participle: ayant donne, etc., having given, etc. 

etant alle, etc., having gone, etc. 


Auxiliary Verbs 


Infinitive 


avoir, to have 

etre, to he 

Present Participle 


ayant, having 

etant, being 

Past Participle 


eu, had 

ete, been 

Present Indicative 


j’ai, 7 have, etc. 

je suis, 7 am, etc. 

tu as 

tu es 

il a 

il est 

nous avons nous sommes 

vous avez vous etes 

ils ont 

ils sont 


j’avais, 7 
tu avais 
il avait 
nous avions 
vous aviez 
ils avaient 


Imperfect Indicative 

had, etc. j’etais, I was, etc. 

tu etais 
il etait 
nous etions 
vous etiez 
ils etaient 


Past Definite 

j’eus, 7 had, etc. 
tu eus 
il eut 

nous efimes 

vous elites 

ils eurent 
% 


Indicative 

je fus, 7 was, etc. 
tu fus 
il fut 

nous ffimes 
vous ffites 
ils furent 


APPENDIX 


279 


Future Indicative 


j’aurai, I shall have, etc. 

je serai, I shall be, etc. 

tu auras 


tu seras 

il aura 


il sera 

nous aurons 


nous serons 

vous aurez 


vous serez 

ils auront 

Conditional 

ils seront 

j’aurais, I should have , etc. 

je serais, I should he, etc. 

tu aurais 


tu serais 

il aurait 


il serait 

nous aurions 


nous serions 

vous auriez 


vous seriez 

ils auraient 

Imperative 

ils seraient 

aie, have, 

etc. 

sois, be, etc. 

ayons 


soyons 

ayez 


soyez 


Present Subjunctive 

j’aie, I may have, etc. 

je sois, I may be, etc. 

tu aies 


tu sois 

il ait 


il soit 

nous ayons 


nous soyons 

vous ayez 


vous soyez 

ils aient 


ils soient 


Imperfect Subjunctive 

j’eusse, I might have, etc. 

je fusse, I might be, etc. 

tu eusses 


tu fusses 

il eut 


il fut 

nous eussions 


nous fussions 

vous eussiez 


vous fussiez 

ils eussent 


ils fussent 





















. 








. 




















- ■' ' . - 

_ 














TABLE OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS 


Simple Verbs 

In the following table the principal parts are printed in 
dark type, except the present indicative first person singular, 
which is italicized (except when the imperative singular is 
not identical with it). 

The italicized forms are those of the imperative. 

The future alone is given under the infinitive (the condi¬ 
tional invariably having the same stem, with the ending 
-ais). 

Under the present participle only the imperfect indica¬ 
tive is given — the other derivative forms: the present 
plural (indicative and imperative) and the present sub¬ 
junctive are on the opposite page (along with the present 
indicative singular). 

Under the past participle is given the auxiliary used in 
forming the compound tenses. 

Under the past definite is given the imperfect subjunctive. 


281 



282 


TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS 


Infinitive Pres. Par. Past Par. Pres. Ind. Past Def„ 

Absoudre, absolve (like resoudre) 1 


Acquerir, acquire 

acquerant 

acquis 

acquiers 

acquis 

acquerrai 

acquerais 

avoir — 


acquisse 

Aller, go 

allant 

alle 

vais 2 

allai 

irai 

allais 

etre — 


allasse 

Assaillir, assail (like tressaillir) 




Asseoir, 3 seat 

asseyant 

assis 

assieds 

assis 

assierai 

asseyais 

avoir — 


assisse 

Astreindre, constrain (like atteindre) 



Atteindre, attain 

atteignant 

atteint 

atteins 

atteignis 

fut. reg. 

atteignais 

avoir — 


atteignisse 

Avoir, have 

ayant 

eu 

ai 

eus 

aurai 

avais 

avoir — 


eusse 

Boire, drink 

buvant 

bu 

bois 

bus 

fut. reg. 

buvais 

avoir — 


busse 

Bouillir, boil 

bouillant 

bouilli 

bous 

bouillis 

fut. reg. 

bouillais 

avoir — 


bouillisse 

Ceindre, gird (like atteindre) 




Circonscrire, circumscribe (like inscrire) 



Clore, close 


clos 

clos 


fut. reg. 


avoir — 



Concevoir, conceive 

concevant 

congu 

congois 

congus 

concevrai 

concevais 

avoir — 


congusse 

Conclure, conclude 

concluant 

conclu 

conclus 

conclus 

fut. reg. 

concluais 

avoir — 


conclusse 

Conduire conduct 

conduisant 

conduit 

conduis 

conduisis 

fut. reg. 

conduisais 

avoir — 


conduisisse 

Confire, pickle 

confisant 

confit 

confis 

confis 

fut. reg. 

confisais 

avoir — 


confisse 

Connaitre, know 

connaissant 

connu 

connais 

connus 

fut. reg. 

connaissais 

avoir — 


connusse 

Conquerir, conquer (like aquerir) 




Construire, construct 

construisant 

construit 

construis 

construisis 

fut. reg. 

construisais 

avoir — 


construisisse 

Contraindre, constrain (like craindre) 



Coudre, sew 

cousant 

cousu 

couds 

cousis 

fut. reg. 

cousais 

avoir — 


cousisse 


1 Past participle: absous, absoute. 

3 Rarer forms: Pres. Ind. assois; Pres. SubJ. 


TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS 283 

Present Indicative and Subjunctive 


acquiers 

acquiers 

acquiert 

acquerons 

acquerez 

acquierent 

acquiere 

acquieres 

acquiere 

acquerions 

acqueriez 

acquierent 

vais 

vas 

va 

allons 

allez 

vont 

aille 

allies 

aille 

allions 

alliez 

aillent 

assieds 

assieds 

assied 

asseyons 

asseyez 

asseyent 

asseye 

asseyes 

asseye 

asseyions 

asseyiez 

asseyent 

atteins 

atteins 

atteint 

atteignons 

atteignez 

atteignent 

atteigne 

atteignes 

atteigne 

atteignions 

atteigniez 

atteignent 

ai 

as 

a 

avons 

avez 

ont 

aie 

aies • 

ait 

ayons 

ayez 

aient 

Imper. : 

aie 


ayons 

ayez 


bois 

bois 

boit 

buvons 

buvez 

boivent 

boive 

boives 

boive 

buvions 

buviez 

boivent 

bous 

bous 

bout 

bouillons 

bouillez 

bouillent 

bouille 

bouilles 

bouille 

bouillions 

bouilliez 

bouillent 


clos 

clos 

cl6t 




close 

closes 

close 




congois 

congois 

congoit 

concevons 

concevez 

congoivent 

congoive 

congoives 

congoive 

concevions 

conceviez 

congoivent 

conclus 

conclus 

conclut 

concluons 

concluez 

concluent 

conclue 

conclues 

conclue 

concluions 

concluiez 

concluent 

conduis 

conduis 

conduit 

conduisons 

conduisez 

conduisent 

conduise 

conduises 

conduise 

conduisions 

conduisiez 

conduisent 

confis 

confis 

confit 

confisons 

confisez 

confisent 

confise 

confises 

confise 

confisions 

confisiez 

confisent 

connais 

connais 

commit 

connaissons 

connaissez 

connaissent 

connaisse 

connaisses 

connaisse 

commissions 

connaissiez 

connaissent 

construis 

construis 

construit 

construisons 

construisez 

construisent 

construise construises construise construisions construisiez construisent 

couds 

couds 

coud 

cousons 

cousez 

cousent 

couse 

couses 

couse 

cousions 

cousiez 

cousent 


8 Imperative va (vas before y or en). 

assoie; Imper. assoyais; Fut. assoirai, asseyerai, 




284 


TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS 


Infinitive 

Pres. Par. Past Par. Pres. Ind. 

Past Def. 

Courir, run 

courant 

couru 

cours 

courus 

courrai 

courais 

avoir 

— 

courusse 

Couvrir, cover (like ouvrir) 




Craindre, fear 

craignant 

craint 

crains 

craignis 

fut. reg. 

craignais 

avoir 

— 

craignisse 

Croire, believe 

croyant 

cru 

crois 

crus 

fut. reg. 

croyais 

avoir 

— 

crusse 

Croitre, grow 

croissant 

crd 

crois 

crds 

fut. reg. 

croissais 

avoir 

i 

crdsse 



etre 

I 


Cueillir, gather 

cueillant 

cueilli 

cueiUe 

cueillis 

cueillerai 

cueillais 

avoir 


cueillisse 

Cuire, cook 

cuisant 

cuit 

cuis * 

cuisis 

fut. reg. 

cuisais 

avoir 


cuisisse 

Decevoir, deceive (like concevoir) 




Dechoir, fall 


dechu 

dechois 

dechus 

decherrai 

dechoyais 

avoir! 


dechusse 

(dechoirai) 


etre ] 



Deduire, deduce (like conduire) 




Detruire, destroy 

detruisant 

detruit 

detruis 

detruisis 

fut. reg. 

detruisais 

avoir ■ 


d6truisisse 

Devoir, owe 

devant 

da 

dois 

dus 

devrai 

devais 

avoir 


dusse 

Dire, say 

disant 

dit 

dis 

dis 

fut. reg. 

disais 

avoir- 


disse 

Dissoudre, dissolve (like resoudre) 1 




Dormir, sleep 

dormant 

dormi 

dors 

dormis 

fut. reg. 

dormais 

avoir- 


dormisse 

Echoir, fall (like dechoir) 2 




Ecrire, write 

ecrivant 

ecrit 

ecris 

ecrivis 

fut. reg. 

dcrivais 

avoir- 


6crivisse 


Empreindre, imprint (like atteindre) 

Enduire, coat (like conduire) 

Enfreindre, infringe (like atteindre) 

Envoyer, send ( reg . except Fut. enverrai) 

Eteindre, extinguish (like atteindre) 

Etre, be etant ete suis fus ' 

serai N etais avoir— fusse 

£treindre, bug (like atteindre) 


1 Past partioiple: dissous, dissoute. 


TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS 


285 


Present Indicative and Subjunctive 


cours 

cours 

court 

coure 

coures 

coure 

crains 

crains 

craint 

craigne 

craignes 

craigne 

crois 

crois 

croit 

croie 

croies 

croie 

crois 

crois 

croit 

croisse 

croisses 

croisse 

cueille 

cueiUes 

cueille 

cueille 

cueilles 

cueille 

cuis 

cuis 

cuit 

cuise 

cuises 

cuise 

[ d6chois 

dechois 

1 dechoit 
[d4chet 

ld4choie 

dechoies 

dechoie 

d6truis 

detruis 

detruit 

detruise 

detruises 

detruise 

dois 

dois 

doit 

doive 

doives 

doive 

dis 

dis 

dit 

dise 

dises 

dise 

dors 

dors 

dort 

dorme 

dormes 

dorme 

[6cris 

6cris 

^crit 

[ecrive 

derives 

derive 

'suis 

es 

est 

sois 

sois 

soit 

. Imper. : 

sois 



courons 

courez 

courent 

courions 

couriez 

courent 

craignons 

craignez 

craignent 

craignions 

craigniez 

craignent 

croyons 

croyez 

croient 

croyions 

croyiez 

croient 

croissons 

croissez 

croissent 

emissions 

croissiez 

croissent 

cueillons 

cueillez 

cueillent 

cueillions 

cueilliez 

cueillent 

cuisons 

cuisez 

cuisent 

cuisions 

cuisiez 

cuisent 

dechoyons 

dechoyez 

dechoient 

dechoyions 

ddchoyiez 

dechoient 

detruisons 

detruisez 

detruisent 

detruisions 

detruisiez 

detruisent 

devons 

devez 

doivent 

devions 

deviez 

doivent 

disons 

dites 

disent 

disions 

disiez 

disent 

dormons 

dormez 

dorment 

dormions 

dormiez 

dorment 

icrivons 

ecrivez 

ecrivent 

ecrivions 

6criviez 

ecrivent 


sommes 

^tes 

sont 

soyons 

soyez 

soient 

soyons 

soyez 



2 Present participle: 6cheant. 







286 


TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS 


Infinitive Pres. Par. Past Par. Pres. Ind. Past Def. 

Exclure, exclude (like conclure) 


Faillir, 1 fail, miss 

faillant 

failli 

faux 

faillis 

faudra 

faillais 

avoir — 


faillisse 

Faire, do, make 

faisant 

fait 

fais 

fis 

ferai 

faisais 

avoir — 


fisse 

Falloir, be necessary 


fallu 

il faut 

il fallut 

il faudra 

il fallait 

avoir — 


il faMt 

Feindre, feign (like atteindre) 




Frire, fry (like rire 2 ) 
Fuir, flee 

fuyant 

fui 

fuis 

fuis 

fut. reg. 

fuyais 

avoir — 


fuisse 

Geindre, groan (like atteindre) 




Gesir, lie 

gisant 

gisais 




Hair, hate 



hais 


Induire, induce (like conduire) 




Inscrire, inscribe 

inscrivant 

inscrit 

inscris 

inscrivis 

fut. reg. 

inscrivais 

avoir — 


inscrivisse 

Instruire, instruct (like consiruire) 




Introduire, introduce (like conduire) 



Joindre, join 

joignant 

joint 

joins 

joignis 

fut. reg. 

joignais 

avoir — 


Joignisse 

Lire, read 

lisant 

lu 

Us 

lus 

fut. reg . 

lisais 

avoir — 


lusse 

Luire, shine 

luisant 

lui 

luis 

[luisisj 

fut. reg. 

luisais 

avoir — 


[luisisse] 

Maudire, curse 

maudissant 

maudit 

maudis 

maudis 

fut. reg. 

maudissais 

avoir — 


maudisse 

Mentir, lie 

mentant 

menti 

mens 

mentis 

fut. reg. 

mentais 

avoir — 


mentisse 

Mettre, put 

mettant 

mis 

mets 

mis 

fut. reg. 

mettais 

avoir — 


misse 

Moudre, grind 

moulant 

moulu 

mouds 

moulus 

fut. reg. 

moulais 

avoir — 


moulusse 

Mourir, die 

mourant 

mort 

meurs 

mourus 

mourrai 

mourais 

6tre — 


mourusse 

Mouvoir, move 

mouvant 

mu 

mens 

mus 

mouvrai 

mouvais 

avoir — 


musse 


1 Most forms are obsolete. 


TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS 287 

Present Indicative and Subjunctive 


[faux 

faux 

faut 

faillons 

faillez 

faillent 

(faille 

failles 

faille 

faillions 

failliez 

faillent 

[fais 

fais 

fait 

faisons 

faites 

font 

[fasse 

fasses 

fasse 

fassions 

fassiez 

fassent 

I 


il faut 




i 


il faille 




(fuis 

fuis 

fuit 

fuyons 

fuyez 

fuient 

[fuie 

fuies 

fuie 

fuyions 

fuyiez 

fuient 



git 

gisons 

gisez 

gisent 

hais 

hais 

hait 

[all other forms are regular] 

inscris 

inscris 

inscrit 

inscrivons 

inscrivez 

inscrivent 

inscrive 

inscrives 

inscrive 

inscrivions 

inscriviez 

inscrivent 

joins 

joins 

joint 

joignons 

joignez 

joignent 

joigne 

joignes 

joigne 

joignions 

joigniez 

joignent 

lis 

lis 

lit 

lisons 

lisez 

lisent 

lise 

lises 

lise 

lisions 

lisiez 

lisent 

luis 

luis 

luit 

luisons 

luisez 

luisent 

luise 

luises 

luise 

luisions 

luisiez 

luisent 

maudis 

maudis 

maudit 

maudissons 

maudissez 

maudissent 

maudisse 

maudisses 

maudisse 

maudissions 

maudissiez 

maudissent 

mens 

mens 

ment 

mentons 

mentez 

mentent 

mente 

mentes 

mente 

mentions 

mentiez 

mentent 

mets 

mets 

met 

mettons 

mettez 

mettent 

mette 

mettes 

mette 

mettions 

mettiez 

mettent 

mouds 

mouds 

moud 

moulons 

moulez 

moulent 

moule 

moules 

moule 

moulions 

mouliez 

moulent 

meurs 

meurs 

meurt 

mourons 

mourez 

meurent 

meure 

meures 

meure 

mourions 

mouriez 

meurent 

meus 

meus 

meut 

mouvons 

mouvez 

meuvent 

meuve 

meuves 

meuve 

mouvions 

mouviez 

meuvent 


* Past participle: frit. Many forms obsolete. 



288 TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS 


Infinitive 

Pres. Par. Past Par. 

Pres. Ind. 

Past Def. 

Naitre, be bom 

naissant 

ne 

nais 

naquis 

fut. reg. 

naissais 

etre — 


naquisse 

Nuire, injure 

nuisant 

nui 

nuis 

nuisis 

fut. reg. 

nuisais 

avoir — 


nuisisse 

Offrir, offer 

offrant 

offert 

offre 

offris 

fut. reg. 

offrais 

avoir — 


offrisse 

Oindre, anoint (like joindre) 




Ouvrir, open 

ouvrant 

ouvert 

ouvre 

ouvris 

fut. reg. 

ouvrais 

avoir — 


ouvrisse 

Paitre, pasture (like paraitre) 




Paraitre, appear 

paraissant 

paru 

parais 

parus 

fut. reg. 

paraissais 

avoir — 


parusse 

Partir, depart 

partant 

parti 

pars 

partis 

fut. reg. 

partais 

etre — 


partisse 

Peindre, paint 

peignant 

peint 

peins 

peignis 

fut. reg. 

peignais 

avoir — 


peignisse 

Percevoir, perceive (like concevoir) 
Plaindre, pity (like craindre) 




Plaire, please 

plaisant 

plu 

plais 

plus 

fut. reg. 

plaisais 

avoir — 


plusse 

Pleuvoir, rain 

pleuvant 

plu 

il pleut 

il plut 

il pleuvra 

il pleuvait 

avoir — 


il plfffc 

Poindre” pierce (like joindre) 




Pouvoir, be able 

pouvant 

pu 

peux, puis 

pus 

pourrai 

pouvais 

avoir — 


pusse 

Prendre, take 

prenant 

pris 

prends 

pris 

fut. reg. 

prenais 

avoir—• 


prisse 

Prescrire, prescribe (like inscrire) 
Produire, produce (like conduire) 
Proscrire, proscribe (like inscrire) 




Recevoir, receive 

(like concevoir 




Reduire, reduce (like conduire) 
Repentir (se), repent (like sentir) 
Requerir, require (like acquerir) 




Resoudre, resolve 

resolvant 

resolu 

rtsous 

resolus 

fut. reg. 

r6solvais 

avoir — 


resolusse 

Restreindre, restrain (like atteindre) 




1 From the participial 


TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS 


289 


Present Indicative and Subjunctive 


'nais 

nais 

nait 

naissons 

naissez 

naissent 

L naisse 

naisses 

naisse 

naissions 

naissiez 

naissent 

nuis 

nuis 

nuit 

nuisons 

nuisez 

nuisent 

nuise 

nuises 

nuise 

nuisions 

nuisiez 

nuisent 

offre 

offres 

offre 

offrons 

offrez 

offrent 

offre 

offres 

offre 

offrions 

offriez 

off^ent 

ouvre 

ouvres 

ouvre 

ouvrons 

ouvrez 

yuvrent 

[ouvre 

ouvres 

ouvre 

ouvrions 

ouvriez 

ouvrent 

parais 

parais 

paralt 

paraissons 

paraissez 

paraissent 

paraisse 

paraisses 

paraisse 

paraissions 

paraissiez 

paraissent 

pars 

pars 

part 

partons 

partez 

partent 

parte 

partes 

parte 

partions 

partiez 

partent 

peins 

peins 

peint 

peignons 

peignez 

peignent 

peigne 

peignes 

peigne 

peignions 

peigniez 

peignent 

plais 

plais 

plait 

plaisons 

plaisez 

plaisent 

plaise 

plaises 

plaise 
il pleut 
il pleuve 

plaisions 

plaisiez 

plaisent 

pleuvent 

fpeux or 
| puis 

peux 

peut 

pouvons pouvez 

(no imperatives) 

peuvent 

Ipuisse 1 

puisses 

puisse 

puissions 

puissiez 

puissent 

J prends 

prends 

prend 

prenons 

prenez 

prennent 

(prenne 

prennes 

prenne 

prenions 

preniez 

prennent 


fr^sous r6sous r^sout rSsolvons rSsolvez resolvent 

{resolve resolves resolve resolvions resolviez resolvent 


adjective puissant. 





290 


TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS 


Infinitive 

Pres. Par. Past Par. 

Pres. Ind. 

Past Dep. 

Rire, laugh 

riant 

ri 

ris 

ris 

fut. reg. 

riais 

avoir — 


risse 

Savoir, know 

sachant 

su 

sais 

sus 

saurai 

savais 

avoir — 


susse 

Seduire, seduce (like conduire) 




Sentir, feel 

sentant 

senti 

sens 

sentis 

fut. reg. 

sentais 

avoir — 


sentisse 

Seoir, suit, fit (like asseoir) 1 




Servir, serve 

servant 

servi 

sers 

servis 

fut. reg. 

servais 

avoir — 


servisse 

Sortir, go out 

sortant 

sorti 

sors 

sortis 

fut. reg. 

sortais 

etre — 


sortisse 

Souffrir, suffer 

souffrant 

souffert 

souffre 

souffris 

fut. reg. 

souffrais 

avoir — 


souffrisse 

Souscrire, subscribe (like inscrire) 




Suffire, suffice 

suffisant 

suffi 

sufis 

suffis 

fut. reg. 

suffisais 

avoir — 


suffisse 

Suivre, follow 

suivant 

suivi 

suis 

suivis 

fut. reg. 

suivais 

avoir — 


suivisse 

Taire, keep still 

taisant 

tu 

tais 

tus 

fut. reg. 

taisais 

avoir — 


tusse 

Teindre, dye (like atteindre) 




Tenir, 2 hold 

tenant 

tenu 

tiens 

tins 

tiendrai 

tenais 

avoir — 


tinsse 

Traduire, translate (like conduire) 




Traire, milk 

trayant 

trait 

trais 

— 

fut. reg. 

trayais 

avoir — 


— 

Transcrire, transcribe (like inscrire) 




Tressaillir, start 

tressaillant 

tressailli 

tressaille 

tressaillis 

fut. reg. 

tressaillais 

avoir — 


tressailhsse 

Vaincre, 3 vanquish 

vainquant 

vaincu 

vaincs 

vainquis 

fut. reg. 

vainquais 

avoir — 


vainquiese 

Valoir, be worth 

valant 

valu 

vaux 

valus 

vaudrai 

valais 

avoir — 


valusse 

Venir, 2 come 

venant 

venu 

viens 

vins 

viendrai 

venais 

etre — 


vinsse 


1 Few forms in use. Si6ent occurs in Ind. Pres. 3d. PL and sfiant as present 

2 Tenir and venir, alike throughout, circumflex the past definite plurals tinmes, 
s Vaincre is irregular only in spelling. 


TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS 


291 


Present Indicative and Subjunctive 


[ris 

ris 

rit 

rions 

riez 

rient 

[rie 

ries 

rie 

riions 

riiez 

rient 

rsais 

sais 

sait 

savons 

savez 

savent 

jsache 

saches 

sache 

sachions 

sachiez 

sachent 

l Imper. : 

sache 


sachons 

sachez 


Jsens 

sens 

sent 

sentons 

sentez 

sentent 

\ sente 

sentes 

sente 

sentions 

sentiez 

sentent 

Jsers 

sers 

sert 

servons 

servez 

servent 

[ serve 

serves 

serve 

servions 

serviez 

servent 

Jsors 

sors 

sort 

sortons 

sortez 

sortent 

[sorte 

sortes 

sorte 

sortions 

sortiez 

sortent 

J souffre 

souffres 

souffre 

souffrons 

soufrez 

souffrent 

[souffre 

souffres 

souffre 

souffrions 

souffriez 

souffrent 

fsuffis 

suffis 

suffit 

suffisons 

sujffisez 

suffisent 

[ suffise 

sufiL^es 

suffise 

suffisions 

suffisiez 

suffisent 

suis 

suis 

suit 

suivons 

suivez 

suivent 

suive 

suives 

suive 

suivions 

suiviez 

suivent 

tais 

tais 

tait 

taisons 

taisez 

taisent 

taise 

taises 

taise 

taisions 

taisiez 

taisent 

J tiens 

tiens 

tient 

tenons 

tenez 

tiennent 

[tienne 

tiennes 

tienne 

tenions 

teniez 

tiennent 

f trais 

trais 

trait 

trayons 

trayez 

traient 

[traie 

traies 

traie 

trayions 

trayiez 

traient 

tressaille 

tressailles 

tressaille 

tressaillons 

tressaillez 

tressaillent 

tressaille 

tressailles 

tressaille 

tressaillions 

tressailliez 

tressaillent 

vaincs 

vaincs 

vainc 

vainquons 

vainquez 

vainquent 

vainque 

vainques 

vainque 

vainquions 

vainquiez 

vainquent 

Jvaux 

vaux 

vaut 

vcdons 

valez 

valent 

[vaille 

vailles 

vaille 

valions 

valiez 

vaillent 

Jviens 

viens 

vient 

venons 

venez 

viennent 

[vienne 

viennes 

vienne 

venions 

veniez 

viennent 

participle. 






vinmes; tintes, vintes, and the subjunctive third person 

i singular tint, vmt. 




292 TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS 


Infinitive 

Pres. Par. 

Past Par. 

Pres. Ind. 

Past Def. 

Vetir, clothe 

vetant 

vetu 

v£ts 

vetis 

fut. reg. 

vetais 

avoir- 


vetisse 

Vivre, live 

vivant 

vecu 

vis 

vecus 

fut. reg. 

vivais 

avoir - 


v^cusse 

Voir, see 

voyant 

vu 

vois 

vis 

verrai 

voyais 

avoir — 


visse 

Vouloir, wish 

voulant 

voulu 

veux 1 

voulus 

voudrai 

voulais 

avoir — 


voulusse 


i The imperative forms are hardly used, but veuillez 


TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS 


293 


Present Indicative and Subjunctive 


vets 

vets 

vet 

vetons 

vetez 

vetent 

v£te 

vetes 

vete 

vetions 

vdtiez 

vetent 

vis 

vis 

vit 

vivons 

vivez 

vivent 

vive 

vives 

vive 

vivions 

viviez 

vivent 

vois 

vois 

voit 

voyons 

voyez 

voient 

voie 

voies 

voie 

voyions 

voyiez 

voient 

veux 

veux 

veut 

voulons 

voulez 

veulent 

veuille 

veuilles 

veuille 

voulions 

vouliea 

veuillent 


<+infinitive), please, be good enough to, is common. 



294 


COMPOUND VERBS 


Compound Verbs 

These are conjugated like the simple verbs (printed in 
black type). See pages 282-293. 


abstenir, abstain 
abstraire, abstract 
accourir, run up 
accroitre, increase 
accueillir, receive 
admettre, admit 
advenir, happen 
apercevoir, perceive 
apparaitre, appear 
appartenir, belong 
apprendre, learn, teach 
asseoir, seat 
attraire, attract 
commettre, commit 
comparaitre, appear 
complaire, be complaisant 
comprendre, comprehend 
compromettre, compromise 
concourir, cooperate, compete 
consentir, consent 
contenir, contain 
contredire, contradict 

Note, disez not dites in present 
indicative and imperative 
contrefaire, counterfeit 
contrevenir, contravene 
convaincre, convince 
convenir, agree, suit 
deconfire, discomfit 
decoudre, unsew 
decouvrir, discover 
decrire, describe 
decroitre, decrease 
dddire, unsay (see contredire) 


defaillir, fail, faint 
defaire, undo 
dementir, give the lie 
demettre, put out 
departir, distribute 
depeindre, depict 
deplaire, displease 
desapprendre, unlearn 
desservir, clear (table) 
deteindre, fade 
detenir, detain 
devenir, become 
devetir, undress 
disconvenir, disagree 
discourir, discourse 
disjoindre, disjoin 
disparaitre, disappear 
distraire, distract 
6clore, hatch 

(eclosent, eclora, ecloront occur 
in the present and future) 
6conduire, show out (politely) 
61ire, elect 
emettre, emit 
6mouvoir, move 
encourir, incur 
endormir, put to sleep 
enfuir, flee 
enjoindre, enjoin 
s’ensuivre, follow 
entreprendre, undertake 
entretenir, maintain 
entrevoir, catch a glimpse of 
s’6prendre, be enamored 


COMPOUND VERBS 


295 


6quivaloir, be equivalent 
extraire, extract 
forfaire, offend 
inter dire, interdict 
(See contredire) 
intervenir, intervene 
maintenir, maintain 
meconnaitre, fail to know 
medire, speak ill of 
(See contredire) 
mefaire, do wrong 
meprendre, mistake 
obtenir, obtain 
omettre, omit 
parcourir, run through 
parvenir, reach 
permettre, permit 
poursuivre, pursue 
pourvoir, provide 

Note. fut. pourvoirai, past, 
def. pourvus 

predire, predict 
(See contredire) 
pressentir, have a presentiment 
prevaloir, prevail 
prevenir, forestall 
prevoir, foresee (fut. prevoirai) 
promettre, promise 
provenir, be derived 
rapprendre, re-learn 
rasseoir, reseat 
reconduire, reconducU 
reconnaitre, recognize 
reconquerir, reconquer 
reconstruire, reconstruct • 
recoudre, resew 
recourir, have recourse 
recouvrir, re-cover 


recrire, write again 
recueillir, gather up 
redevenir, become again 
redire, repeat 
reelire, reelect 
refaire, make again 
rejoindre, rejoin 
relire, reread 
reluire, shine 
remettre, remit 
rendormir, put to sleep again 
renaitre, be born again 
renvoyer, send away 
repaitre, feast 
repartir, depart again { 
repeindre, repaint 
reprendre, retake, resume 
ressentir, feel, resent 
ressortir, go out again 
se ressouvenir, remember 
retenir, retain 
revenir, come back 
revetir, clothe 
revivre, revive 
revoir, see again 
rouvrir, reopen 
satisfaire, satisfy 
secourir, succor 
soumettre, submit 
sourire, smile 
soustraire, take away 
soutenir, sustain 
se souvenir, remember 
surfaire, overrate 
surprendre, surprise 
survenir, come up 
survivre, survive 
transmettre, transmit 


I 

Class-room Words and Phrases 


1. Do you know? 

2. I don’t know 

3. Do you understand? 

4. I don’t understand 

5. Do you wish —? Will you 

— ? 

6. Don’t forget! 

7. I have forgotten 

8. Rise! 

9. Sit down! 

10. Tell me! 

11. Pronounce! repeat! 

12. Translate! read! 

13. Notice! listen! 

14. Begin! go on! 

15. Answer! explain! 

16. Study! prepare! 

17. Correct! tell! 

18. Go! wait! 

19. Write! erase! 

20. Open! close! 

21. Pay attention to —! 

22. Raise your hand! 


Savez-vous? [save vu] 

Je ne sais pas [39 n9 se pa] 
Comprenez-vous? [koprone vu] 

Je ne comprends pas [39 n9 kopra 
pa] 

Voulez-vous—? [vule vu] 

N’oubliez pas! [nublie pa] 

J’ai oublie [3e ublie] 

Levez-vous! [lave vu] 
Asseyez-vous! [aseje vu] 
Dites-moi! [dit mwa] 

Prononcez! [pronose]; repetez! [re- 
pete] 

Traduisez! [tradyize]; lisez! [lize] 
Remarquez! [ramarke]; ecoutez! 
[ekute] 

Commencez! [komase]; continuez! 
[kotinye] 

Repondez! [repode]; expliquez! 
[eksplike] 

Etudiez! [etydje]; preparez! [pre¬ 
pare] 

Corrigez! [kor^ej; racontez! [ra- 

kote] 

Allez! [ale]; attendez! [atade] 
Ecrivez! [ekrive]; effacez! [efase] 
Ouvrez! [uvre]; fermez! [ferme] 
Faites attention a—! [fet zatasjo 
a] 

Levez la main! [love la me] 

296 


APPENDIX 


297 


23. What does — mean? 

24. How do you say — in 

French? 

25. How do you spell —? 

26. What is the lesson for —? 

27. To-day; to-morrow 

28. Aloud 

29. Please 

30. Very well; that’s enough; 

that’s right 

31. That’s all 

32. At the top of the page 

33. At the bottom of the page 

la ligne [lip], line 
la partie [parti], part 
la regie [regl], rule 
la locution [lokysjo], expression 
Pexamen [legzame] (ra.), examina¬ 
tion 

l’etudiant [letydja] (m.), student 
la feuille de papier [fce:j do papje], 
sheet of paper 

le vocabulaire [vokabyleir], vo¬ 
cabulary 

la grammaire [grame:r], grammar 
la traduction [tradyksjo], transla¬ 
tion 

en franfais [a frase], in French 
en anglais [a nagle], in English 
le theme [tern], translation into 
French 

la version [versjo], translation in¬ 
to Engiish 

la lecture [lektyir], reading 
Pexercice [legzersis] ( m .), exercise, 
drill 


Que veut dire—? [ko vo di:r] 
Comment dit-on—en franfais? 

[koma di to a frase] 

Comment ecrit-on —? [koma 
tekri to] 

Quelle est la leson pour —? [kel e 
la los5 pu:r] 

Aujourd’hui [o 3 urdyi]; demain 
[dome] 

A haute voix [a ot vwa] 

S’il vous plait [sil vu pie] 

C’est bien [se bje] 

C’est tout [se tu] 

Au haut de la page [o o do la pa: 3 ] 
Au bas de la page [o ba do la pa: 3 ] 

oral [oral], oral 
ecrit [ekri], written 
le tableau noir [tablo nwa:r], 
blackboard 
la craie [kre], chalk 
la conversation [koversasjo], con¬ 
versation 

l’orthographe [lortograf] (/.), spell¬ 
ing 

l’apostrophe [lapostrof] (/.), apos¬ 
trophe 

majuscule [ma 3 yskyl], capital (let¬ 
ter) 

minuscule [minyskyl], small (let¬ 
ter) 

la prononciation [pronosjasjo], pro¬ 
nunciation 

la voyelle Ivwajel], vowel; la — 
breve [breiv], longue [lo:g], na- 
sale [nazal], short, long, nasal 
vowel 

la consonne [koson], consonant 
l’accent [laksa] (m.), accent 



298 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


la levre [Ie:vr], lip 
la langue [la:g], tongue 
la syllabe [silab], syllable 
trop vite [tro vit], too fast 
lentement [latma], slowly 
l’elision [lelizjo] (/.), elision 
la liaison [ljezo], linking 
l’h muette [laS myet], h mute 
l’h aspiree [la$ aspire], h aspi¬ 
rate 

le genre [3a:r], gender 
le nombre [no:br], number 
le masculin [maskyle], masculine 
le feminin [femine], feminine 
le singulier [segylje], singular 
le pluriel [plyrjel], plural 
la premiere personne [promjeir 
person], first person 
la forme [form], form 
la formation [formasjo], formation 
le gallicisme [galisism], Gallicism 
l’idiotisme [lidjotism] (ra.), idiom 
1’accord [lako:r] (m.), agreement 
l’emploi [laplwa] (m.), use 
la terminal son [terminezo], ending 
le partitif [partitif], partitive 
la syntaxe [setaks], syntax 
regulier [regylje], regular 
irregulier [iregylje], irregular 
negatif [negatif], negative 
le nom [no], noun 
la preposition [prepozisjo], prepo¬ 
sition 

l’article [lartikl] (m.), article 
defini [defini], definite 
indefini [edefini], indefinite 
la conjonction [ko3oksjo], conjunc¬ 
tion 

l’adverbe [ladverb] (m.), adverb 
l’adjectif [lad3ektif (m.), adjective 
la comparaison [koparezo], com¬ 
parison 


le positif [pozitif], positive 
le comparatif [koparatif],compara- 
tive 

le superlatif [syperlatif], superla¬ 
tive m 

les nombres [no:br], numbers 
cardinaux [kardino], cardinals 
ordinaux [ordino], ordinals 
le pronom [prono], pronoun 
personnel [person cl], personal 
possessif [posesif], possessive 
demonstrate [demostratif], de¬ 
monstrative 
relatif [rolatif], relative 
interrogatif [eterogatif], interroga¬ 
tive 4 

conjoint [ko3we], conjunctive 
disjoint [dis3we], disjunctive 
le regime direct [re3im direkt], 
direct object 

indirect [edirekt], indirect 
le pronom sujet [sy3e], subject 
pronoun 

le pronom regime [re3im], object 
pronoun 

le verbe [verb], verb 
transitif [trazitif], transitive 
intransitif [etrazitif], intransitive 
la conjugaison [ko3ygezo], conju¬ 
gation 

la voix [vwa], voice 
actif, -ve [aktif, aktisv], active 
passif, -ve [pasif, pasiiv], passive 
le mode [mod], mood 
l’infinitif [lefinitif] (m.), infinitive 
l’indicatif [ledikatif] (m.), indica¬ 
tive 

l’imperatif [leperatif] (m.), impera¬ 
tive 

le subjonctif [syb3oktif], subjunc¬ 
tive 

le temps [td], tense 


APPENDIX 


299 


le present [preza], present 
1’imparfait [leparfe] (m.), imperfect 
le passe defini [pase defini], past 
definite 

le passe indefini [pase edefini], 
past indefinite 


le futur [fytyir], future 
le conditionnel [kodisjonel], con¬ 
ditional 

compose [kopoze], compound 
auxiliaire [oksiljeir], auxiliary 
reflechi [refle$i], reflexive 


II 

Useful Phrases for Memorizing 


1. Good morning!? 
Good day! ) 

2. Good evening! 

3. Good-by! 

4. How are you? 

How do you do? 
How’s your health? 

5. How’s your sister? 

6. I’m very well 

7. How goes it? 


8. Remember me to — 

9, What’s your name? 

10. My name is — 

11. It is three weeks since — 

12. What is the way to —? 

13. Straight ahead 


Bonjour! [ bo 3 u:r] 

Bonsoir! [boswarr] 

Au re voir! [o ravwair] 

’ Comment vous portez-vous? [ko- 
ma vu parte vu] 

Comment allez-vous? [koma tale 
vu] 

Comment se porte (or comment 
va) Mademoiselle votre sceur? 
[koma sa port (va) madmwazel 
votra soeir] 

Je me porte tres bien [ 3 a ma porta 
tre bje] 

Comment fa va? (familiar ) [koma 
sa va] 

Bien des choses a — [bje de $o:z 
a] 

Mes compliments a — [me kopli- 
ma za] 

Comment vous appelez-vous? [ko¬ 
ma vu zaple vu] 

Je m^ppelle — [39 mapel] 

II y a trois semaines que — [il ja 
trwa samen ka] 

Quel est le chemin pour aller a 

—? [kel e la Same pu:r ale a] 

Tout droit [tu drwa] 




BEGINNING FRENCH 


300 

14. What’s that? 

15. What did you say? (-Please 

repeat) 

16. What do you mean? 

17. What? What! 

18. What’s the use? 

19. What’s — good for? 

20. He uses a pen 

21 . What’s to be done? ) 

22. What shall I do? J 

23. What’s your number? 

24. What’s the matter? j 

25. Nothing j 

26. What’s up? 

27. What news? 

28. Nothing new 

29. Have you heard from —? 

30. I have not heard from — 

31. It makes no difference 

32. That will do, that’s enough 

33. I beg your pardon 

34. Excuse me! 

35. I should like — 

36. When does the train leave? 

37. How far is it to —? 

38. Beside me 

39. On the other side of — 


Qu’est-ce que c’est que cela? [kes 
ka se ka sala] 

Comment? or Plait-il? [kama; pie 
til] 

Que voulez-vous dire? [ka vule 
vu di:r] 

Quoi? Quoi! [kwa] 

A quoi bon? [a kwa bo] 

A quoi sert —? [a kwa se:r] 

II se sert d’une plume [il sa se:r 
dyn plym] 

Que faire? [ka fe:r] 

Quel est votre numero? [kel e 
votra nymero] 

Qu’est-ce que vous avez (qu’il 
a, etc.)? [kes ka vu zave] 

Je n’ai rien [3a ne rje] 

Qu’est-ce qu’ily a? [kes kil ja] 
Quoi de nouveau? [kwa da nuvo] 
Rien de nouveau [rj e da nuvo] 
Avez-vous des nouvelles de —? 

[ave vu de nuvel da] 

Je n’ai pas de nouvelles de — [3a 
ne pa da nuvel da] 

Cela ne fait rien [sala na fe rj e] 
Cela suffit [sala syfi] 

Pardon! or Je vous demande par¬ 
don [3a vu damaid pardo] 
Pardon! or Excusez-moi! [ekskyze 
mwa] 

Je voudrais — [3a vudre] 

Quand part le train? [ka pair la tre] 
A quelle distance est —? [a kel 

distais e] 

A cdte de moi [a kote da mwa] 

De l’autre c6te de — [da loitra 
kote da] 


APPENDIX 


301 


40. Does that suit you? 

41. That's just what I want 

42. I'm very sorry 

43. That's none of my business 

44. I think so 

45. I said so 

46. He looks well (French, 

funny, etc.) 

47. It's a pity \ 

It's too bad J 

48. Look out! 

49. The right book 

50. The wrong thing 

51. That's quite proper 

52. That's improper 

53. So much the better! 

54. So much the worse! 

55. Of course 

56. Have the kindness to — 

57. Let's see! 

58. Come! Come now! 

59. All the same 

60. Not at all 

61. Nothing at all 

62. All right! 

63. Be so good as to — 

64. Don’t mention it (=You're 

welcome) 

65. Will you do me a favor? 


Est-ce que cela vous convient? [es 

ka sala vu kovj e] 

Voila mon affaire [vwala mo 
nafe:r] 

Je suis bien fache [ 3 a syi bje fa- 

Sel 

Cela ne me regarde pas [sala na 
ma ragard pa] 

Je le pense [3a la pais] 

Je l’ai dit [3a le di] 

II a Pair bien (franfais, drole, etc.) 
[il a leir bje, frase, droil] 

C’est dommage [se domar3] 

Attention! [atasjo] 

Le livre qu’il faut [la liivr kil fo] 

La chose qu’il ne faut pas [la $o:z 
kil na fo pa] 

C’est comme il faut [se kom il fo] 
Ce n’est pas comme il faut [sa ne 
pa kom il fo] 

Tant mieux! [ta mjo] 

Tant pis! [ta pi] 

Naturellement [natyrelma] 

Ayez la bonte de — [eje la b5te 
da] 

Voyons! [vwajo] 

Voyons! [vwajo] 

Tout de meme [tu da meim] 

Pas du tout [pa dy tu] 

Rien du tout [rje dy tu] 

Tres bien! [tre bj e] 

Veuillez — [vceje] 

Il n’y a pas de quoi [il nja pa da 
kwa] 

Voulez-vous me rendre un ser¬ 
vice? [vule vu ma raidr <£ ser- 
vis] 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


302 


66. I had a good time 

67. A good trip to you! 

68. To be ten feet long (wide) 

69. Ten feet deep 

70. He is six feet tall 

71. Never mind! 

72. Some more meat (bread) 

73. Do you want some more? 

74. Keep still ( = Don’t talk)! 

75. My native tongue 

76. You are lucky 

77. Reserve two seats for me 

78. This way, gentlemen! 

79. On the way to France 

80. Abroad 

81. As for — 

82. He has just arrived 

83. To go away 

84. He went away 

85. The question is to know 

whether — 

86. He asks in vain 

87. In the French manner 

88. With blue eyes 

89. With a gray beard 

90. He has a house built 


Je me suis bien amuse [39 ma syi 
bj e namyze] 

Bon voyage! [bo vwaja: 3 ] 

Avoir dix pieds de long (large) 
[avwair di pje do lo, lar 3 ] 

Dix pieds de profondeur [prof5- 
doeir] 

II a six pieds de taille [il a si pje 
do taij] 

N’importe! [neport] 

Encore de la viande (du pain) 
[akoir do la vjaid, dy pe] 

En voulez-vous encore? [a vule vu 
zakoir] 

Taisez-vous! [teze vu] 

Ma langue matemelle [ma la:g 
maternel] 

Vous avez de la chance [vu zave 
do la §a:s] 

Retenez deux places pour moi 
[rotne do plas pu:r mwa] 

Par ici, messieurs! [pair isi mesjo] 
En route pour la France [a rut 
purr la frais] 

A, l’etranger [a letra 3 e] 

Quant a — [ka ta] 

II vient d’arriver [il vje darive] 
S’en aller* [sa nale] 

Il s’en est alle [il sa ne tale] 

Il s’agit de savoir si — [il sa 3 i do 
savwair si] 

Il a beau demander [il a bo do- 

made] 

A la franfaise [a la fraseiz] 

Aux yeux bleus [o zjo bio] 

A barbe grise [a barbo griiz] 

Il fait batir une maison [il fe ba- 

tiir yn mezo] 


APPENDIX 


303 


91. He has the doctor come 

92. He has a grudge against 

his friend 

93. He has a grudge against 

him 

94. He starts to run 

95. He is (busy) writing 

96. That is not worth while 

97. I agree with you 

98. Neither she nor he is . . . 

99. Nor I either 

100. So be it! all right! 

101. To stand 

102. Somewhere 

103. Nowhere 

104. He approaches him 

105. He makes fun of them 

106. He is a member of — 


II fair venir le medecin [il fe va- 
ni:r la medse] 

II en veut a son ami [il a vo ta so 
nami] 

Il lui en veut [il lyi a vo] 

Il se met a courir [il sa me ta ku- 
ri:r] 

Il est en train d’ecrire [il e ta tre 
dekriir] 

Cela ne vaut pas la peine [sala na 
vo pa la pen] 

Je suis d’accord avec vous [ 3 a syi 
dakoir avek vu] 

Ni elle ni lui n’est [ni el ni lyi 
nej . . . 

Ni moi non plus [ni mwa no ply] 

Soit! [swat] 

Rester debout [reste dabu] 

Quelque part [kelka pair] 

Null'e part [nyl pair] 

Il s’approche de lui [il sapro$ da 

lyi] 

Il se moque d’eux [il sa mok do] 

Il fait partie de — [il fe parti da] 














SUMMARY OF GRAMMAR 


NOUNS 


481. Gender. 1 

Masculine: those designating males. 

Feminine: those designating females, and most nouns 
ending in -e: porte, ville; -e: bonte (kindness), amitie 
(friendship); -eur: chaleur (heat), hauteur (height); -ion: 
nation, confusion. 

1 For more extensive rules for gender see §§ 557-559. 


482. Number. To form the plural, add s to the singular: 

ecole, ecoles. 

Exceptions to the general rule: 

Nouns ending in 

1. -s, -x, -z remain unchanged: temps, voix (voice), 
nez (nose). 

2. -au, -eu 1 add -x: tableaux, jeux. 

3. -al 2 change -al to -aux: cheval, chevaux. 3 

4. Unclassified: Pceil, les yeux. 

le del, les cieux (but les dels = skies 
in pictures). 

Paieul, les aieux, ancestors (but les 
aieuls=grandfathers). 
le betail, les bestiaux (cattle). 

1 And the following seven in -ou: bijou (jewel), caillou (pebble), chou 
(cabbage), genou (knee), hibou (owl), joujou (plaything), pou (louse). 
]But clou (nail), clous; trou (hole), trous etc. 

2 And a few in -ail: travail, travaux; bail (lease), corail (coral), email 
(enamel), vitrail (stained glass window). 

3 Except: bal (ball, i.e. danse), bals; carnaval, carnavals; chacal 
(jackal), chacals; regal (treat), regals. 

305 


306 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 483 


483. Articles. Definite (the): 


Contractions with de Contractions with a 


le livre du livre 

la table de la table 

l’ecole de l’ecole 

les livres, les tables, les ecoles des livres, etc. 


au livre 
a la table 
a l’ecole 
aux livres, etc. 


Indefinite (a, an ): un homme, une femme. 

Note. The article and the prepositions are repeated before each 
noun they modify: un homme et une femme, du livre et de la table. 


GENERAL AND PARTITIVE NOUN 

484. With the general noun in English the definite article 
is sometimes used: the dog is an animal; it is regularly 
used in French: 

J’aime les pommes, I like apples. 

Le courage est une vertu, Courage is a virtue. 

The partitive words in English are some , any {no, none = 
not any). These words are frequently omitted in English 
but may usually be supplied: he has (some) apples. 

485. The partitive word in English (some, any, etc.) may 
be an adjective or a pronoun. 

1. If some or any is an adjective it is expressed in French 
be de + the definite article (= of the ): du courage, des 
pommes. 

Note. The article is omitted, de standing alone: 

(а) After a negative: 1 

Je n’ai pas d’argent. 

(б) When an adj. precedes the noun. (See Permissible Devi¬ 
ations § 560 , 1 ): 

J’ai de belles fleurs. 

But: J’ai des fleurs blanches. 

1 With ni (neither) ... ni (nor) both de and the article are omitted: 

il n’a ni amis ni ennemis. 


§ 486] 


USE OF THE ARTICLES 


307 


Cases c) and d) do not trouble English-speaking students: 

(c) In expressions of quantity and number: assez de pain; 1 une 
grande quantite de pain; un metre de soie (silk). 

(d) In the construction noun modifying noun: a gold watch, une 
montre d’or; a kitchen table, une table de cuisine. 

2. If some or any is a pronoun, it is expressed by en, 
which is placed directly before the verb: II en a, En avez- 
vous? See § 518. 

Note. Do not omit en with numerals and adverbs of quantity: 

H en a six, II en a assez. 


NOTES ON THE USE OF THE ARTICLES 

486. Definite Article omitted in English. The definite 
article is employed in French in the following cases where it 
is omitted in English: 

1. With general nouns (see § 484). 

2. With proper names preceded by a title 2 or by an adjec¬ 
tive: le capitaine Fracasse, le petit Jean. 

3. With names of languages, except after en and with 

parler: II etudie le fran^ais, Dites cela en frangais, II 
parle frangais or le frangais. 

4. With names of countries: la France, le Canada. 
Except before en and de with feminine countries: II va 

en France, II vient d’ltalie ; but: II va au Canada, II vient 
des Etats-Unis. 

1 So with all the adverbs of quantity: see § 496. 

But the article is not omitted with bien des = beaucoup de and la plu- 
part de; bien du travail, much work; bien des homines, many men, la 
plupart des Americains, most Americans. 

2 In direct address the article is omitted (Docteur Morot, voulez-vous 
me dire . . . ); or Monsieur (Madame, etc.) is prefixed and the name is 
omitted (Je vous prie, monsieur le capitaine, de vouloir bien . . .). 


308 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


C§487 


5 . With names of the days of the week except when “next ” 
or “ last ” is expressed or understood : Le dimanche est un 
jour de repos, II vient le dimanche (every Sunday), but II 
viendra dimanche ( next Sunday); and in dates: le quinze 
avril, April 15 (See §509). 

6 . With names of seasons, unless they are preceded by 

en: L’ete est beau. But en ete, en automne, en hiver 
(c/. au printemps). 

7. In the following expressions and some others: 

a Pecole, a l’eglise, au college, au marche (market). 

Pannee demiere (prochaine). Cf. § 493,3. 

il est le bienvenu, he is welcome. 

faire la guerre (paix), garder le silence, avoir le temps, 
cet habit sent la fumee, this coat smells of smoke. 

487. Definite Article omitted in French. The definite 
article is omitted in French: 

1 . With numerical titles (see § 503, Note 2). 

2. Usually with nouns in apposition: Jean, fils du general. 

488. Indefinite Article omitted in French. The indefinite 
article is omitted in French: 

1 . Before an unmodified predicate noun which is virtually 
an adjective. Such nouns are those indicating profession, 
religion or nationality: II est medecin (Americain, chretien). 
But : Mon ami est un medecin tres bien connu. 

Note that with c’est, ce sont (which are used instead of il est, etc. 
when the noun is the logical subject and hence not used adjectively) 
the article is not omitted: c’est un medecin, ce sont des Americains. 
See § 525. 

2. Usually with nouns in apposition: les Plaideurs, 
comedie de Racine. 

3. In the expressions mettre fin (put an end), rendre 
service (do a favor), faire signe (give a signal) and others. 


§ 489] 


ADJECTIVES 


309 


4. Cent = a hundred; mille = a thousand: see p. 314, 
footnote. Quel = what a: see § 528, 9. 

489. Two Idiomatic Uses of the Definite Article. The 

definite article is used: 

1. Instead of the indefinite article in expressions of 
measure, weight, number: cinquante sous la livre (le metre, 
la douzaine). 

But in expressions of time use par: dix francs par jour. 

2. Instead of a possessive adjective when the meaning 
cannot be doubtful, especially with parts of the body: 

il me donne la main, il s’est casse le bras, elle a une bague 
(ring) sur le doigt, il a perdu la vie, il a la memoire courte 

(short). 

ADJECTIVES 

490. Gender. To form the feminine add -e: petit, petite, 
grand, grande. 

Exceptions to the general rule: 

1. If the masculine ends in -e, it remains unchanged in the 
feminine: facile, difficile. 

2. Final f becomes v, x becomes s: vif, vive (lively); 
heureux, heureuse (happy). 

3. Final -el, -eil, -ien, -on, -s and -t 1 usually double the 
consonant: tel, telle (such); pared, pareille (similar); 
ancien, ancienne (old); bon, bonne (good); bas, basse 
(low); muet, muette (mute). 

4 . Final -eur becomes -euse in adjectives derived from 
verbs; in others it is regular: flatteur, flatteuse (flattering); 
trompeur, trompeuse (deceptive). 

But: meilleur, meilleure; exterieur, exterieure. 

5. Final -er becomes -ere: cher, chere; familier, familiere. 

1 Some adjectives ending in -et have -ete instead of -ette: coriiplet, 
complete; so inquiet, inquiete (worried); secret, secrete, etc. 


310 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 491 


6 . Common exceptions: 
blanc, blanche (white) 
bref, breve (short) 
doux, douce (sweet, soft) 


franc, tranche (frank) 
gentil, gentille (pretty, kind) 
long, longue (long) 
public, publique (public) 
sec, seche (dry) 


faux, fausse (false) 
frais, fraiche (fresh) 


7. The following form their feminines from a special 
masculine form in -1 (bel, fol, etc.) which is used before a 
vowel or non-aspirate h : le bel arbre, un vieil ami. 

beau, bel, belle (beautiful) nouveau, nouvel, nouvelle (new) 


ion, fol, folle (mad) 


vieux, vieil, vieille (old) 


mou, mol, molle (sof) 

The plurals, (whether before vowel or consonant), are 

beaux, belles; fous, folles; mous, molles; nouveaux, nou- 
velles; vieux, vieilles. Cf. §491. 

491. Number. The plural of adjectives is formed like 
that of nouns: 

bon, bons : see § 482. 

-s and -x: frais, frais (fresh); creux, creux (hollow). 

see § 482,1. 

-au: 1 beau, beaux: see § 482, 2. 

-al: royal, royaux: see §482,3. 

492. Agreement. Adjectives — including past and pres¬ 
ent participles used adjectively — are varied in ending to 
agree in gender and number with the noun or pronoun 
which they modify. 

Note. If an adjective modifies more than one noun or pronoun it 
is plural, and if any one of the nouns is masculine, it is also masculine: 

la langue et la litterature franfaises; Marie et Henri sont bons. 

493. Position. The position of the adjective is deter¬ 
mined mainly by usage. In general it follows the noun. 


1 But those in -eu are regular : bleu, bleus. 


§ 494] 


ADJECTIVES 


311 


1. The following short , common adjectives precede the 

noun: beau, grand, joli, mechant, bon, gros, long, petit, 
court, jeune, mauvais, vieux. 

2. The following adjectives follow the noun: 

(a.) Those denoting 

(1) Color: un cheval noir. 

(2) Nationality: la langue frangaise. 

(3) Physical quality: Feau chaude, un nuage epais 

(a thick cloud), une table carree (square). 

(i b .) Present and past participles used adjectively: 
une femme tremblante, le frangais parle. 

3. Many adjectives change in meaning according as they 
precede or follow the noun; for example: 

f homme bon, good-natured man 
\ bon homme, simple, worthy man, old chap 
j homme grand, tall man 
\ grand homme, great man 
j homme brave, brave man 
\ brave homme, worthy, honest man 
f homme honnete, polite man 
\ honnete homme, honest man 
J homme pauvre, impecunious man 
\ pauvre homme, poor man (implies pity) 
j la meme chose, the same thing 
\ la chose meme, the thing itself (see § 530, 7) 
j la derniere semaine, the last week (of a series) 

\ la semaine derniere, last week (just expired). See § 486 , 7. 


ADVERBS 

494. Formation. Adverbs are formed from adjectives by 
adding -ment to the masculine if it ends in a vowel, other¬ 
wise to the feminine. 


312 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§495 


Adjectives ending in -ant or -ent have adverbial forms in 

-amment and -emment. 

facile, facilement, easily 
modere, moderement, moderately 
infini, infiniment, infinitely 
excessif, excessivement, exceedingly 
heureux, heureusement, happily 
constant, constamment, constantly 
prudent, prudemment, prudently 


495. Position. The position of the adverb is decided 
mainly by usage. In general it comes after the verb. With 
compound tenses, it usually comes between the auxiliary 
and the participle: 

il parle bien he speaks well 

il a bien parle he has spoken well 

a proprement parler to speak properly 


496. Adverbs of Quantity (see §485, 1, c, and footnote): 


beaucoup 


much; 

many; 



little; 

few; 


assez, enough; 

/ too much; 
trop < ’ 

{ too many; 

plus, more; 


moins j 
combien 


less; 

fewer; 

f how much; 
\ how many; 


tant 


so much; 
so many; 


autant 


as much 
as many 


beaucoup de viande, much meat 
beaucoup d’amis, many friends 
peu de lait, little milk 
peu de voyageurs, few travelers 
assez de billets, enough tickets 
trop de vin, too much wine 
trop d’histoires, too many stories 
plus de colis, more packages 
moins d’encre, less ink 
moins de chapeaux, fewer hats 
combien de creme, how much cream 
combien de mots, how many words 
tant de beurre, so much butter 
tant de malles, so many trunks 
autant de pain, as much bread 
autant de livres, as many books 


§ 497] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS 313 


COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS 


49,7. Comparison of adjectives: 

Positive Comparative 

?. grand (e) 


Superlative 

le (la) plus grand (e) 1 
le (la) moins grand (e) 
les plus grands (es) 
les moins grands (es) 


plus grand (e) 
moins grand (e) 
pi. grands (es) plus grands (es) 

moins grands (es) 

Elle est plus grande que 2 moi, She is taller than I. 

Ce sont les plus belles villes du 3 monde, They are the most beautiful 
cities in the world. 

Donnez-moi les pommes les plus mfires, Give me the ripest apples. 4 


498. Comparison of adverbs: 

souvent, plus (moins) souvent, le plus (moins) souvent. 

II vient moins souvent que vous, He comes less often than you. 

II vient le plus souvent, He comes the most often. 


499. aussi grand que = as great as 
aussi souvent que = as often as 

Note. In a negative sentence aussi is usually replaced by si: II 

n’est pas si grand que moi; 11 ne vient pas si souvent que vous. 


500. The following adjectives are irregularly compared: 


bon, meilleur, le meilleur, good, better, best 


bad, worse, worst 


{ mauvais, pire, le pire 
mauvais, plus mauvais, le plus mauvais 

{ petit, moindre, le moindre, small, lesser, least 
petit, plus petit, le plus petit, small, smaller, smallest 


1 When the comparative is preceded by the definite article, it has the 
same form as the superlative: the greater = the greatest. 

2 Que, than , is replaced by de before numerals: J’en ai plus de dix, I 
have more than ten. 

3 With superlatives in is translated de. 

4 Note the extra article with the superlative of adjectives that follow 
their nouns. After possessives the article is omitted unless the adjective 
follows the noun: 

Mes plus beaux livres, My finest books. 

But : Mes livres les plus uses, My most worn books. 


314 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 501 


501. The following adverbs are irregularly compared: 


bien, mieux, le mieux, well, better, best 
/ mal, pis, le pis f 


badly, worse, worst 


\ mal, plus mal, le plus mal ( 
peu, moins, le moins, little, less, least 
beaucoup, plus, le plus, much, more, most 


NUMERALS 

502. Cardinal. 


1 un, une (/.) 

2 deux 

3 trois 

4 quat>©s 

5 cinq 

6 six 

7 se^t 

8 huit 

9 neuf 

10 dix 

11 onze 

12 douze 

13 treize 

14 quatorze 

15 quinze 

16 seize 

17 dix-sept 

18 dix-huit 

19 dix-neuf 

20 vingU 

21 vingt et un 

22 vingt-deux 

23 vingt-trois 

24 vingt-quatre 

25 vingt-cinq, etc. 

1 A (one) is omitted with 100, 
see § 509. 


30 trente 

31 trente et un 

32 trente-deux 

33 trente-trois, etc. 

40 quarante 

50 cinquante 
60 soixante 
70 soixante-dix 
/ soixante et onze 
l soixante-onze 
72 soixante-douze, etc. 

80 quatre-vingts 

81 quatre-vingt-un 

82 quatre-vingt-deux 

90 quatre-vingt-dix 

91 quatre-vingt-onze, etc. 

100 cent 1 

101 cent un, etc. 

200 deux cents 

201 deux cent un, etc. 

1000 mille (mil in dates) 1 

1001 mille (et) un 
4000, quatre mille, etc. 
1000,000, un million 
1,000,000,000, un milliard 

0: II a lu cent (mille) pages. For mil 


§ 503] 


NUMERALS 


315 


Note 1. Multiples of vingt and cent add -s unless a number follows: 
quatre-vingts (deux cents) personnes, but quatre-vingt-dix, deux cent 
trois. See Permissible Deviations 560, 3. 

Note 2. For permitted omission of the hyphen in numerals 
see § 560, 5. 

503. The Ordinals (except premier, first, second, second) 
are formed by adding -ieme to the cardinals: troisieme, 
quatrieme, etc. Final -e is dropped (quatre, quatrieme, 
onze, onzieme, etc. u is inserted in cinquieme, and f be¬ 
comes v in neuvieme and its compounds. 

Note 1. Deuxieme is used more commonly than second in a series 
including more than two, and is used exclusively in compounds: le 
second volume (of two), la deuxieme page (of more than two); la 
vingt-deuxieme page. 

Note 2. Excepting premier, the ordinals are replaced by the car¬ 
dinals after names of sovereigns, and in dates: Louis Quatorze, Louis 
the Fourteenth; Francois Premier, Francis the first; le premier mai, 
May the first; le six mai, May the sixth. Note that the article is 
omitted after names of sovereigns. Note the word order in dates. 

504. Remarks on the Pronunciation of Numerals. 

1. Pronunciation of cinq, six, sept, huit, neuf, dix: 

1. Used alone: [sek], [sis], [set], [yit], [noef], [dis] 

2. Before a word beginning 

with a consonant [se], [si], [se], [yi], [n0], [di] 

3. Before a word beginning 

with a vowel [sek], [siz], [set], [yit], [noev], [diz] 

2. dix-huit [di zyit] 18; dix-neuf [diz noef] 19; vingt [ve] 20; 
vingt-deux [vet dd] 22, etc., to vingt-neuf [vet noef] 29; but in quatre- 
vingt-un 81, to quatre-vingt-dix-neuf 99, vingt is pronounced [ve]. 

3. The t of cent is not sounded in cent un, deux cent un, etc. 

4. x is pronounced [z] in deuxieme, sixieme, dixieme, and [s] in 
soixante. 

5. c = [g] in second [sa-g5], second, and its derivatives: secondaire, 
etc. 


316 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 505 


6. Do not elide nor link before huit , 1 eight; huitieme, 1 eighth; onze 
eleven; onzieme, eleventh; le onzieme livre [le ozjem li:vr], the eleventh 
hook. 

505. Adverbs. Numerical adverbs are formed regularly: 

premierement, deuxiemement, etc. 

506. Collective numerals. 

1. The suffix -aine which may be added to huit, dix, douze, 
quinze, vingt, trente, etc., is equivalent to English some, 
about ; une dixaine de livres, some (about) ten books. 

2. Millier is the collective of mille: un millier d’hommes, 
about 1000 men. 

3. Both is tous (fern, toutes) les deux. 

Once, twice, etc. = une fois, deux fois. 

507. Fractions: 

un demi 2 i un quart 

-J- un tiers i un cinquieme 

f deux tiers £ un sixieme, etc. 

Note. When demi precedes its noun, it is invariable and is joined 
to it by a hyphen; when it follows its noun it agrees with it. 
(See Permissible Deviation, § 560, 2.) 
une demi-heure 
deux heures et demie 

508. Time of Day. 

Quelle heure est-il? What time is it? 

II est une heure, It is one o’clock. 

H est quatre heures, It is four o’clock. 

II est huit heures dix, It is 8:10. 

II est sept heures (et) un quart, It is 7:15. 

1 But link in compound numerals: dix-huit (di zyit), vingt-huitieme 
(ve tyitjem). 

2 Half as a noun is la moitie: la moitie de la pomme. 


§ 509 ] 


NUMERALS 


317 


II est neuf heures et demie, It is 9:30. 

II est neuf heures moins dix, It is 8:50. 

II est neuf heures moins un quart, It is 8:45. 

II est midi; il est minuit, It is 12 (noon); it is 12 (midnight). 

II est midi dix, It is 12:10 (noon). 

II est minuit et demi, It is 12:30 (night). 

A quelle heure allez-vous? At what time do you go?, 

509. Dates. 

Mil 1 neuf cent vingt-deux, 1922. 

Quel jour du mois est-ce (or sommes-nous) aujourd’hui? What date 
is it? 

C’est aujourd’hui le quinze (see § 503, Note 2) avril. It is April 15. 
Ce sera demain le premier (see § 503, Note 2) avril. Tomorrow will 
be April 1. 

Dans huit jours, d’aujourd’hui en huit, in a week. 

II y a quinze jours, two weeks ago. 

II arrivera le quinze, he will arrive on the 15th. 


510. Age. 

Quel age avez-vous? 

J’ai vingt ans. 

Je suis age de vingt ans. 

J’ai plus de (see p. 313, footnote 2 ) vingt ans, I am more than 20. 
Je suis plus age de vingt ans, I am older by twenty years. 


How old are you? 

I am 20 years old. 


PERSONAL PRONOUNS 

511. Subject Pronouns: 

je, I nous, we 

tu, thou vous, you 

il, he, it; elle, she, it ils, elles, they 

Note 1 Tu and vous. In French tu is used in familiar address 
between members of a family, or very intimate friends; also in 
addressing young children and animals. 

The agreement with tu and vous is logical: tu (a man) es arrive; 
vous (one person) etes riche; vous (more than one person) etes riches. 

1 Mil replaces mille in dates. See Permissible Deviations § 560,4. 


318 BEGINNING FRENCH [§ 512 

Note 2. The subject must ordinarily be repeated before each verb 
to which it refers: j’irai et je chercherai. 

Note 3. * A plural pronoun referring to masculine and feminine sin¬ 
gulars is m asculine: J’ai vu votre frere et votre sceur. Ils se portent 
bien. 


512. Object Pronouns. 
Conjunctive Pronouns 

Direct object Indirect object 


1. me, me 

2. te, thee 

3. le, him, it 
3. la, her, it 

3. se, himself, herself, 
itself, oneself 

1. nous, us 

2. vous, you 

3. les ( m .), them 
3. les (/.), them 

3. se (m./.), themselves 


me, to me 
te, to thee 
lui, to him 
lui, to her 
se, to himself, etc. 

nous, to us 
vous, to you 
leur (m.), to them 
leur (/.), to them 
se ( m.f .) to them¬ 
selves 


Disjunctive 

Pronouns 

moi, me 
toi, thee 
lui, him 
elle, her 

soi, himself, oneself, 
etc. (see § 519) 
nous, us 
vous, you 
eux, them 
elles, them 
(lacking; see § 519) 


Note 1. Direct and indirect object pronouns are alike except in the 
third person. 

Note 2. In English the preposition to before indirect objects of 
persons is omitted after certain verbs: Give him a book = give to him; 
Sell him = sell to him. The indirect object pronoun is always used 
here in French. Of course, as in English, direct object pronouns are 
also used with these verbs: Give him it = give it to him. See § 541. 

Je le donne, I give it. 

Je lui donne, I give him, her ( = to him, to her). 

Je le lui donne, I give him it. 


Like donner are treated demander (ask), montrer (show), per- 
mettre (allow), and other verbs. See § 541. 


513. Conjunctive pronouns are always objects of verbs. 
Disjunctive pronouns are used: 

1. After prepositions: avec moi, sans lui, chez eux, etc. 


§5142 


PERSONAL PRONOUNS 


319 


2. After c’est, it is: c’est moi, c’est lui, etc. 1 See § 525. 

3. Where the pronoun is u'sed alone, i. e. neither as subject 
nor object of a verb: 

Qui partira? Moi, Who will go? I. 

4. Where the pronoun is used as part of a compound subj ect: 

Lui et Jean se parlent, He and John are speaking to each other. 

5. In the intensive pronouns: 

moi-meme, myself 

I vous-meme, yourself 
toi-meme, thyself < A , 

( vous-memes, yourselves 

lui-meme, himself eux-memes, themselves (m.) 

elle-meme, herself elles-memes, themselves (/.) 

soi-meme, itself, oneself, himself ( reflexive) 

Note. For permitted omission of the hyphen see § 560,6. 


/ nous-meme, ourself 
\ nous-memes, ourselves 


514. The conjunctive indirect object is replaced by a + a 
disjunctive pronoun in the following cases: 

1. When there is more than one indirect object: 

II le donne a elle (a son pere) et a moi, He gives it to her (to her 
father) and to me. 

2. When the direct object is any other pronoun than 

le, la, les: 

Je vous presenterai a lui, I will introduce you to him. But: 

Je vous le presenterai, I will introduce him to you. 

3. To emphasize the indirect object: 

II le donne a moi, He gives it to me. 

4. After penser, songer and verbs of motion: 

Je pense (songe) a lui, I think of him. 

Je vais (viens) a elle, I am going (coming) to her. 


1 The French say: 

c’est moi, it is I 
c’est toi, it is thou 
c’est lui, it is he 
c’est elle, it is she 

See Permissible Deviations, § 560,8. 


c’est nous, it is we 
c’est vous, it is you 
ce sont eux, it is they 
ce sont elles, it is they 


320 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 515 


515. Order of pronoun objects. Pronoun objects precede 
their verb in the following order: 


me 

te 

se 

nous 

vous 


precede 



precede 


fiui 1 
1 leur J 


precede y 


II me le dit, He says it to me. 

II le lui dit, He says it to him. 

II se le dit, He says it to himself. 


precede (s) en 


Order with compound tenses: pronoun, auxiliary, participle: 
II nous les a donnes, He gave them to us. 

II les leur a donnes, He gave them to them. 

II m’en a donne, He gave me some. 


Order with negative: ne, pronoun, verb, pas. 

ne, pronoun, auxiliary, pas, participle: 
II ne leur en donne pas, He does not give them any. 

II n’y en a pas, There are none. 

II ne leur en a pas donne, He gave them none. 


516. Order of Pronouns with imperatives. 

1. With negate imperatives the regular rules are followed: 

Ne lui en donnez pas, Do not give him any. 

2. With positive imperatives the order is as in English. 
Note the hyphens: 

Donnez-les-lui, Give them to him (her). 

Donnez-le-nous, Give it to us. 

Donnez-leur-en, Give them some. 

Envoyez-les-y, Send them there. 

Note. Moi and toi are used instead of me and te except before en: 
Dites-moi, Tell me; Va-t’en, Go away; Donnez-m’en; Give me some. 

517. Pleonastic le. 

This le is neuter and invariable (it). It must usually be 
omitted in translation: 

!Etes-vous content? Je le suis, Are you glad? I am. 




§518] 


PERSONAL PRONOUNS 


321 


Sont-elles contentes? Elle le sont, Are they glad? They are. 

Je le pense, I think so. 

Voulez-vous? Je le veux, Do you want to? I do. 

518. En and y. In speaking of things (rarely of persons ), 
en replaces de + a disjunctive third person pronoun. 

y replaces a + a disjunctive third person pronoun: 

J’en parle, I speak of it (en = de lui). 

But : Je parle de lui, I speak of him. 

J’y pense, I think of it (y = a lui). 

But: Je pense a lui, I think of him. 

Note. En used in the partitive construction (see § 485,2) is equiv¬ 
alent likewise to de + a disjunctive third person pronoun: 

Avez-vous de l’encre? J’en ai. (En = d’elle). 

Avez-vous des livres? J’en ai. (En = d’eux). 

519. Reflexive Pronouns. 

1. Conjunctives and disjunctives of the first and second 
persons (me, te, nous, vous; moi, toi, nous, vous) may be 
used reflexively: 

Je me vois, I see myself; tu paries de toi, you speak of yourself. 

2. In the third person, se is the conjunctive form for sin¬ 
gular and plurals of both genders, direct and indirect: 

II (elle) se flatte, He (she) flatters himself (herself). 

Ils (elles) se parlent, They talk to themselves. 

The disjunctive form is the appropriate disjunctive pronoun 

(lui, elle, eux, elles): 

II parle de lui {or de lui-meme), He speaks of himself. 

Ils parlent d’eux (or d’eux-memes), They speak of themselves; ' 

except that soi is used for the singular when the subject 
is indefinite (on, tout l*e monde, chacun) : 

On pense a soi, We think of ourselves. 

3. The plural reflexive pronouns may be translated each 
other, one another: 

Nous nous aimons, We love ourselves, We love one another. 

Ils se parlent, They are talking to themselves (one another). 


322 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 520 


520. Possessives. 

Sing. 


m. mon 
f. ma 
m. ton 
f. ta 

m. son 
f. sa 


Plur. 
mes, my. 

tes, thy. 


ses, 


j his, her, 

J its, one’s 


m. 

f. 

m. 

f. 


notre nos, our. 


votre 


m. 

f. 


leur 


vos, your, 
leurs, theirs. 


Sing. Plur. 

m. le mien les miens 
f. la mienne les miennes 
m. le tien les tiens 
f. la tienne les tiennes 

m. le sien les siens 
f. la sienne les siennes 

m. le notre 1 , 

f. landtre] lesnotres ’ ours ' 
m. le votre j 



mine. 


thine. 


les votres, yours, 
les leurs, theirs. 


f. la votre j 
m. le leur 1 

j ■ ' f. la leur J 

Note 1 . Before a vowel or non-aspirate h, mon, ton, son are used 
instead of ma, ta, sa. (cf. §§ 490,7; 523 Note 1.) 


Mon ame est immortelle, My soul is immortal. 
Son excellente ecole, His (her) excellent school. 
Note 2. De and a contract with le and les: 

II parle du mien, He speaks of mine. 

Faites-le aux votres, Do it to yours. 


521. Agreement. Possessives have the gender and 
number of the noun they modify, not of the antecedent as 
in English: 

Son defaut, his (her, its) fault. 

Ses vertus et les miennes, his (her, its) virtues and mine. 

Note. To avoid ambiguity, a + a personal pronoun may be added: 
Son defaut a elle, Her fault. 

Sa vertu a lui, His virtue. 


522. Remarks on possessive adjectives: 

1. The possessive adjective is repeated before successive 
nouns: mon livre et ma plume. 

2. Possession is indicated more commonly by the use of 


§ 523] 


DEMONSTRATIVES 


323 


a + a personal pronoun than by the possessive pronoun; 
the latter implies emphasis or opposition. 

A qui 1 est ce livre? Whose book is this? 

II est a moi, It is mine. 

Non, c’est le mien! No, it is mine. 

3. For the use of the definite article instead of the pos¬ 
sessive pronoun in speaking of parts of the body (Je me 

brosse les cheveux), see § 489,2. 

2. Idiomatic expressions: 

Le mien, le tien, etc., my property, thy property, etc. 

Les miens, the members of my immediate family, my relatives. 


DEMONSTRATIVES 


523. This , that used as an Adjective = ce (m.), cette (/.), 
ces (pi.), these, those. 

Note 1. Before a masculine noun or adjective beginning with a 
vowel or aspirate h use cet: cet ami, this (or that) friend; cet homme, 
this or that man (cf. § 520, Note 1). 

Note 2. To distinguish this and that before nouns, or for emphasis, 
add to the noun -ci (here) for this and -la (there) for that. 
ce livre-ci et cette plume-la, this book and that pen. 
ces livres-ci et ces plumes-la, these books and those pens, 
cet homme-la ne me plait pas, I don’t like that man. 


524. Pronouns. 

(a) ce, this, that, it 



ceci, this 
cela, that 


(i b ) m. celui, the one, this or that (one), he 
/. celle, the one, this or that (one), she 
m. ceux, the ones, these or those, they 
/. celles, the ones, these or those, they 

1 For a qui? and de qui ? = whose? see § 528,6. 


324 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§525 


Celui qui le trouve le gardera, He (the one) who finds it will keep it. 

Preferez-vous mes fleurs ou celles de mon ami? Je prefere celles 
de votre ami. Do you prefer my flowers or those of my friend? 
I prefer your friend’s. 

Note 1. -ci and -la may be added to the last four forms 
(see § 523, Note 2): 

celui-ci, celle-ci = this one; ceux-ci, celles-ci = these. 

celui-la, celle-la = that one; ceux-la, celles-la = those. 

Celui-ci est bon, celui-la est mauvais, This one is good, that one is 
bad. 

Celles-ci sont bonnes, celles-la sont mauvaises, These are good, 
those are bad. 

Note 2. Celui-la answers to the former; celui-ci, to the latter. 

Napoleon et Cesar — de ces deux heros je prefere celui-ci, Napo¬ 
leon and Caesar — of these two heroes I prefer the latter. 

Celui-la etait Frangais, celui-ci Romain, The former was French, 
the latter Roman. 

525. Ce, ceci and cela are neuters (i. e. used in reference 
to an indefinite antecedent); = this, that when one could not 
be added. 

Ceci (cela) m’interesse, This (that) interests me. 

But : Celui-ci m’interesse, This one interests me. 

The commonest use of ce is in place of the personal 
pronouns il, elle, ils, elles or a demonstrative pronoun as 
subject of etre 1 when followed by a noun which is the logical 
subject of the verb (cf. §488,1), or by a pronoun: 

C’est mon ami (noun), He is my friend. 

C’est lui (pronoun; see § 513,2), It is he. 

But: II est aimable (adjective), He is agreeable. 

II est facile (adjective) de faire cela, It is easy to do that. 2 k 

Exceptions: 1. II est is always used in expressions of 
time: il est cinq heures. 

1 Note the use of ce for ceci or cela with devoir and pouvoir; Ce peut 
(doit) etre vrai, That may (must) be true. 

2 C’est -1 -adjective +d is used when the infinitive has no object: C’est 
facile d faire, It (that) is easy to do. 


§ 526] 


INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 


325 


2. C’est, ce sont are used when the adjective is in the 
superlative: 

Ce sont les meilleurs que nous ayons, They are the best we have. 

3. C’est frequently replaces il est in colloquial discourse 
and even in the literary language. 

526. Interrogative Adjectives (which? what?) 

Sing. Plural 

M Quel livre? Quels livres? 

F Quelle plume? Quelles plumes? 

Note. When which? = which one?, it is a pronoun and is translated 
by lequel (see §527,8,15): 

527. Interrogative and Relative Pronouns. 

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 

I. Persons (who? whom?) 

Subject: 

2. {a) Qui est ici? 3. Qui est-ce qui est ici? 

Who is here? 

Object: 

4. (b) Qui (voyez-vous) ? 5. Qui (est-ce que vous voyez) ? 

Whom do you see? 

Object of prep.: 

6. (c) Avec qui (allez-vous) ? 7. Avec qui (est-ce que vous allez) ? 

With whom are you going? 

8. Note that which (one)? = lequel?: Lequel (des hommes) est 

ici? Which (of the men) is here? Lequel (voyez-vous)? Lequel (est- 

ce que vous voyez)? Avec lequel (allez-vous)? Avec lequel (est-ce 
que vous allez)? See 15. (cf. § 526 Note.) 

II. Things (what?) 

Subject: 

9. (a) (lacking; see § 528,4). 10. Qu f est-ce qui est sur la table? 

What is on the table ? 

Object: 

11. (h) Que (voyez-vous)? 12. Qu’ (est-ce que vous voyez) ?* 

What do you see ? 

1 Qu’est-ce que? may be lengthened to Qu’est-ce que c’est que? 
Qu’est-ce que c’est que vous voyez? (Cf. 16, 19 note.) 


326 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§527 


Object of prep.: 

13. (c) Avec quoi (ecrivez-vous) ? 14. Avec quoi ( est-ce que vous 

ecrivez) ? 

With what do you write? 


15. Note that which (one)? = lequel?: Lequel (des crayons) est 

sur la table? Which (of the pencils ) is on the table? etc. See 8. 


III. What ? (asking for a definition) 

16. What kind of thing is ... ? Qu’est-ce que c’est qu’ un chameau? 
What is a camel ? 

17. Compare: What is your opinion ? Quelle est votre opinion? 
See interrogative adjectives above. 


IV. What = that which 

Subject: 

18. (a) Je sais ce qui est ici. I know what is here. 

Object: 

19. (b) Je sais ce que vous voyez. 1 I know what you see. 
Predicate with etre (see §528,5): 

20. (c) Je sais ce que vous etes. I know what you are. 


RELATIVE PRONOUNS 

I. Persons (who, whom) 

Subject: 

21. (a) L’enfant qui est ici est The child who is here is good. 

sage. 

Object: 

22. (b) L’enfant que vous voyez The child whom you see is good. 

est sage. 

Object of prep.: 

23. (c) L’enfant avec qui vous The child with whom you go is 

allez est sage. good. 

24. (d) L’enfant dont je parle est The child of whom I speak is good. 

sage. (See § 529,1.) 

1 May be lengthened to ce que c’est que (Cf. p. 325 footnote). 

Je sais ce que c’est que vous voyez. 

Je sais ce que c’est qu’un chameau. 


§ 528] 


INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 


327 


II. Things (which) 


Subject: 

25. (a) Le livre qui est ici est bon. 
Object: 

26. (6) Le livre que vous voyez 

est bon. 

Object of prep.: 

27. (c) Le crayon avec lequel 

vous ecrivez est bon. 

28. (d) Le livre dont vous parlez 

est bon. 


The book which is here is good. 
The book which you see is good. 


The pencil with which you write 
is good. 

The book of which you speak is 
good. (See § 529,1.) 


528. Remarks on Interrogative Pronouns (§ 527): 

1. Where parentheses are used (see § 527 4, 5, 6, 7, etc.) all 
the student has to remember is the equivalence of the inverted 
and est-ce que forms. 

Note. Usage is determined by the models in § 536: 

Pronoun : Quivoit-z'Z. ? Whom does he see? 

Noun : Qui est-ce que Vhomme voit? Whom does the man see? 

2. Both parts of lequel are declined (lequel, laquelle, les- 
quels, lesquelles). Combined with a and de: 


auquel a laquelle auxquels auxquelles 

duquel de laquelle desquels desquelles 


3. Note that the i of qui is never elided. 

4. Note that what ?, subject of a verb, must be translated 
qu’est-ce qui? (10). There is no form for 9. But que? and 
qu’est-ce que? are used instead of qu’est-ce qui? as nomina¬ 
tive predicate of a few verbs such as etre, devenir, and with 
impersonal verbs: 


What is it? 


Qu’est-ce? 

Qu’est-ce que c’est? 

Que devenez-vous? 

Qu’est-ce que vous devenez? 
Que faut-il? 

Qu’est-ce qu’il faut? 


What is becoming of you? 
What is necessary? 


5. Add devenir and impersonal verbs to etre mentioned 
in § 527, 20. 


328 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 529 


Je sais ce que vous devenez, I know what you are becoming. 

Je sais ce qu’il faut, I know what is necessary. 

6. whose? (interrogative) usually = a qui? or de qui? 
whose (relative) = dont (of whom, of which), both of 
persons and things. See § 522,2. 

Whose book is this? A qui est ce livre? 

Whose son are you? De qui etes-vous le fils? 

I know the man whose son has gone, Je connais Phomme dont le fils 

est parti. 

Here is the flag whose color is blue! Voici le drapeau dont la couleur 
* est bleue! 


7. Quel? before etre may mean who? 

Qui est cet homme? 


Quel est cet homme? 


Who is that man ? 


8. (a) What = that which when object (cf. 19) of a prep¬ 
osition (except of), is ce ... quoi: 

Dites-moi ce a quoi vous pensez, Tell me what you are thinking of. 
Note. Ce may be omitted: 

Vous savez a quoi je pense, You know what I am thinking of. 


(6) When the preposition is of, use ce dont. If ce is 
omitted, dont becomes de quoi: 

Vous savez ce dont je parle, You know what I am speaking of. 

Vou savez de quoi il parle, You know what he speaks of. 


Compare: 

II a de quoi vivre, He has enough to live on. 

9. Note the following exclamatory forms: 

Quel! What a! Quelle belle femme! What a beautiful woman! 
Que! How! Que cela me plait! 

Que de! How many ! How much ! Que de livres! Que de courage! 
Quoi! What ! Quoi! c’est vous! 


529. Remarks on Relative Pronouns (See § 527) 

1. Note dont (24, 28). With prepositions other than of, 
use qui for persons (23) and lequel for things (27). 


§530] INDEFINITE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES 329 

2. Lequel may be used of persons to replace the forms 
used in 21, 22, 23, 24, especially where ambiguity would result 
from the use of qui: 

Les soeurs du capitaine auquel (or The sisters of the captain whom 
auxquelles) je rendis visite hier. I visited yesterday. 

La sceur de mon ami, laquelle My friend’s sister, who lives at 
demeure chez nous. our house. 

3. Ou (lit. where), is occasionally used of things as a 
virtual relative pronoun, replacing dans lequel, auquel. 

Le temps oh nous vivons est tres The age in which we live is very 
prosai'que. prosaic. 

La cabane d’oh il est sorti. The hut from which he came out. 

530. Indefinite pronouns and adjectives: 

1. On (Latin homo , man) = one, they, you, people, etc. 
It is frequently used to translate an English passive. Its 
verb is in the singular. 

Ici on parle franfais, One speaks French here. French is spoken here. 
Note. L’on usually replaces on after si, et, oh, que: Si l’on vous voit. 

2. Tout (toutes; pi. tous, toutes), adjective or pronoun 
= all, every: tout homme, every man; tous les hommes, 
all men. 

Note. Tout le monde le sait, Everybody knows it. 

Tous (toutes) les deux etaient la, Both were there, cf. § 530,6. 
Tout me plait, Everything pleases me. 

Tous ont peri, They all 1 perished. 

Tout ce qui est bon, Everything that is good. 

Tout ce que vous voulez, Everything you like. 

3. chaque (adjective), each, every: chaque homme, each 
(every) man; chacun, -e (pronoun), each one, every one; 
chacun croit, each (every) one believes. 

4. Quelque, some {plural = a few; plusieurs (inde¬ 
clinable) = several): 


1 Sound the -s of tous when it is a pronoun. 


330 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§530 


quelqu’un (quelqu’une, quelques-uns, quelques-unes), some one, some 
ones. 

quelque chose, something. 

Note: quelque (indeclinable when followed by an adjective or ad¬ 
verb) .. . que (with subjunctive; see § 550,3) = however, whatever: 
Quelque braves qu’ils soient, However brave they may be. 
Quelques desirs que vous ayez, Whatever desires you may have. 
When it is followed immediately by etre, quelque is resolved into 
the appropriate form of quel + que: 

Quels que soient vos desirs, whatever your desires may be. 

5. aucun (no, nobody), nul (no, nobody), personne 
(nobody), rien (nothing): see § 532. 

6. autre: adjective or pronoun, other: 

L’autre cheval, the other horse. 

Les autres sont meilleurs, The others are better. 

Note: When not preceded by the, others (pronoun) is usually 
d’autres (subject or object): 

D’autres vous le diront, Others will tell it to you. 

Donnez-m’en d’autres, Give me others. 

Autrui may here be used after a preposition, but only of persons: 
Le bonheur d’autrui (or des autres), the happiness of others. 
Attendez d’autrui ce que vous faites a autrui, Expect from others what 
you do to others. 

L’un ... l’autre, les uns ... les autres: (the) one ... the 

other; the ones . . . the others: 

L’un l’aime, l’autre le deteste, (The) one loves him, the other hates him. 

Note: Ils le font l’un et l’autre, Both do it. Cf. § 530,2. 

Aimez-vous les uns les autres, Love one another. Cf. § 519,3. 

7. meme, same, even, very, self : 

C’est la meme chose, It’s the same thing. 

Vos amis memes, (note word-order ), Even your friends or Your friends 
themselves or Your very friends. 

Moi-meme, etc., myself, etc. (see § 513,5) 

Note meme, adverb, = even: II vole meme, He even flies. 


§531] 


NEGATION 


331 


8. Tel (telle, tels, telles) such: 

Telle etait sa crainte, Such was his fear. 

Note. Un tel homme, Such a man. 

Chez Monsieur un tel, At the home of Mr. So and So. 

II est tellement riche, He is so rich. 

9. Indefinite Relatives: 

(a) Adjectives. 

Quelconque, any, whatever, has a plural in -s, and 
always follows its noun: 

Un homme quelconque, Any man whatever. 

Des hommes quelconques, Any men whatever. 

Note. For quelque ... que, quel... que, see § 530, 4. 

( b ) Pronouns. 

Quiconque ( invariable ), whoever: 

Quiconque le dit a tort, Whoever says it is wrong. 

Qui que with subjunctive of etre replaces quiconque: 

Qui que ce soit, Whoever it is. 

Quoi que with subjunctive, whatever: 

Quoi que ce soit, Whatever it is. 

Quoi que vous fassiez, Whatever you do. 


NEGATION 

531. The verb is rendered negative by putting ne before 
it and pas after it. (Point is a more emphatic substitute for 

pas): Je ne donne pas (or point). 

Note 1. In compound tenses the auxiliary is similarly negatived, the 
participle following pas. 11 n’a pas fini. 

Note 2. With infinitives ne pas is usually grouped before the verb: 
ne pas parler, not to speak; ne pas avoir fini, not to have finished. 

Note 3. With interrogative verbs followed by a subject-pronoun 
pas follows the latter: Ne finit-il pas? N’a-t-il pas fini? 

Note 4. Ne is regularly separated from the verb by personal ob¬ 
ject-pronouns governed by it: Je ne la donne pas, I do not give it. 


332 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 532 


532. Like ne — pas are used: 1 

ne — jamais, never 

ne — rien, nothing 

ne — personne, nobody 

ne — aucun, -e, not any 

ne — guere, scarcely 

ne — nul, -le, not any 

ne — plus, no more, no longer 

ne — que, only, not more than 

ne — ni — ni, neither, nor 

II ne finit jamais. He never ends. 

II n’a que deux freres. He has only two brothers. 

Je n’ai ni pere ni mere. I have neither father nor mother. 

Je n’ai rien vu. I have seen nothing. 

Note 1. Rien, personne, aucun, and nul, when used as subjects, 
precede ne and the verb. 

Rien n’est arrive. Nothing has happened. 

Personne n’a parle. No one has spoken. 

Note 2. As ne cannot be used except before a verb, it is omitted 
when the latter is not expressed, and the jamais, rien, personne, pas, 
etc., have negative value. 

Qui est venu? Personne! Who came? Nobody! 

Que dit-il? Rien. What does he say ? Nothing. 

Plus de pain dans la maison! No more bread in the house ! 


533. Pas omitted: Pas is often omitted with the verbs 
pouvoir, savoir, oser, cesser, after si, if, and regularly in 
connection with ni, nor. 

II n’ose le faire. He dares not do it. 

Si je ne me trompe. If I do not deceive myself. 

Ce bebe ne marche ni ne parle. This baby neither walks nor talks. 


1 Position with compound tenses or 
Same as pas (je n’ai pas cherche): 
rien; Je n’ai rien cherche 
jamais; Je n’ai jamais cherche 
plus; Je n’ai plus cherche 
Same as in English: 
personne; Je n’ai cherch6 personne 
que; Je ne l’ai trouve qu’apr&s avoir 
cherche 


with complementary infinitive: 

Je ne peux rien comprendre 
Je ne peux jamais comprendre 
Je ne peux plus comprendre 

Je ne peux chercher personne 
Je ne peux chercher que mes amis 


§ 534] 


INTERROGATION 


333 


534. Ne redundant. The redundant ne occurs with 
comparatives (the principal clause being affirmative), after 
affirmative verbs of fearing, preventing, avoiding, after 
negative verbs of doubting, after a moins que, unless , and 
sometimes after avant que, before: 

Jean lit mieux qu’il n’ecrit. John reads better than he writes. 

II craint que je ne parle. He fears I may speak. 

II parlera a moins qu’on ne le lui He will speak unless they forbid 
defende. him. 

Note. See Permissible Deviations § 560,10. 

535. Use of non , not. Non, no, not is used chiefly to nega¬ 
tive individual words in a sentence, or to negative a clause 
or phrase as a whole — but never in negative conjugation 
of a verb. 

Les mots non soulignes. The words not underscored. 

Est-il riche? Non. Is he rich? No. 

INTERROGATION 

536. Models for Questions: 

1. If the subject is je: Est-ce que je donne? 1 

2. If the subject is a pronoun other than je: 2 Donnez- 
vous? or Est-ce que vous donnez? 

Note. For permitted omission of the hyphen see § 560,7. 

3. If the subject is a noun: Est-ce que le livre est sur la 
table? 3 

4. With ou? and some other interrogative words: 4 Ou 

est le livre? 5 

1 The est-ce que form is to be used in the first person singular, and may 
be used in all persons and numbers. 

2 When il or elle follows its verb, t (between hyphens) intervenes, if 
the verb ends in a vowel: donne-t-il? a-t-elfe? 

3 Or Le livre est-il sur la table? (less used). 

4 Such are qui? que? quel? comment? de qui? 

6 Or Le livre ou est-il? (less used). This construction or the est-ce que 
form must be used if the subject of the verb is a noun and the verb has a 
direct object. 

Ou est-ce que le maitre trouve le livre? \ Where does the master find the 
Le maitre ou trouve-t-il le livre? J book? 


334 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 537 


VERBS 


537. Principal parts and Rules for the Formation of 
tenses: 

1. Infinitive: donner 

Future : add -ai, 1 -as, -a; -ons, -ez, -ont 2 to the infinitive: 3 
je donner ai, etc. 

Conditional : change -ai, as etc. of the future to -ais, 1 
-ais, -ait; -ions, -iez, -aient 2 

2. Present participle: donnant 

Imperfect : change ending (-ant) to -ais, -ais, ait; -ions, 
-iez, -aient 4 

Present subjunctive: change ending (-ant) to -e, -es, -e; 
-ions, -iez, -ent. 4 

3. Past participle: donne 

All compound tenses: j’ai donne, j’avais donne; je suis 
alle, nous serons arrives, etc. 

4. Present indicative, first person singular: je donne, 5 
je finis 5 


-ais as verb ending is 


1 -ai as verb ending is pronounced like a in mate; 
pronounced like e in met. 

2 The endings of the future are the present indicative of avoir (the av- of 
avons, avez having been dropped). The endings of the conditional are the 
imperfect of avoir (av- having been dropped); consequently imperfect 
and conditional endings are identical. Observe carefully the difference 
in the stem: donn + ais, imperfect; donner + ais conditional. 

There are no exceptions to the rule for the formation of the conditional even 
in the case of irregular verbs. 

3 Infinitives ending in -re drop -e; vendre + ai gives vendrai: so all 
verbs of the second conjugation. 

4 Compare the endings of the present subjunctive with those of the 
present indicative ( first conjugation) and imperfect indicative. 

6 Notes on endings of the present indicative: 

-e, -es, -e (first conj.) \ 

-s(-x), -s(-x), -t (other conj.) j ’ ' 

(2) In verbs of the third conjugation the third person singular normally 
ends in t; il rompt. This t is omitted if the consonant preceding is d; il 
rend. So also if the consonant preceding is t (il parait.) 

(3) Exceptional endings in 2nd pers. plu.: always -ez, except dites, etes, 
faites. 

(4) Exceptional endings in 3rd pers. plu.: always -ent, except font, ont, 
sont, vont. 


(1) Regular endings) 


§ 538] 


VERBS 


335 


Imperative = second person of present indicative, the 
pronoun being omitted: (tu) finis, 6 (vous) finissez. 7 

5. Past definite, first person singular: je donnai. 8 

Imperfect subjunctive: to the second person singular add 
-se, -ses,-; -sions, -siez, -sent. For the 3 rd sing, sub¬ 

stitute t for the s of the past definite and put a circumflex 
over the vowel: tu donnas, il donnat. 9 


538. Irregular verbs. Irregular verbs are irregular in 
only a few forms. It is a great mistake to learn them as if 
they presented difficulties at every turn. If the student 
observes the rules for the formation of tenses (§ 537) and 
the rules given below he will find that in irregular verbs 
very few forms need be learned. For instance, in 

pouvoir: learn only pu, je peux, je pourrai, je puisse 

venir: learn only je viens, venant, venu, ils viennent, je viendrai, je 

vienne 

dire: learn only disant, dit, vous dites 
ecrire: learn only ecrivant, ecrit 
conduire: learn only conduisant, conduit 
croire: learn only croyant, cru, je croie 

vouloir: learn only voulant, voulu, je veux, je voudrai, je veuille 

The following rules will be of great aid in learning the pres¬ 
ent indicative and the present subjunctive of irregular verbs: 

6 In verbs of the first conjugation the final -s of the pres. ind. 2nd sing, 
is dropped except before y and en; pres, ind., tu donnes: imperative, donne; 
donnes-en. See also the verbs listed in the next note. 

7 The imperative of the following verbs is formed not from the present 
indicative but from the present subjunctive: avoir (aie, ayez), etre (sois, 
soyez), savoir (sache, sachez), vouloir (veuille, veuillez.) On the dropping 
of -s see the preceding note. 

8 Regular endings of the past definite: 

First conjugation: -ai, -as, -a, -&mes, -ates, -&rent 

Other conjugations: -is, -is, -it, -lines, -Ites, -irent. In a few verbs i is 
replaced by u; je voulus, tu voulus, etc. 

9 There are no exceptions even in the case of irregular verbs; therefore the 
student who has learned these endings knows the whole tense if he knows the 
first person singular. 


336 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§539 


1. the first, second, third singular and the third plural 
have the same stem (e.g. pouvoir: peu-); 

2. the first and second plural have the stem of the present 
participle (pouv-); 

3. the consonant which follows the stem of the third 
plural (peu-) is that which precedes the ending (-ant) of 
the present participle (-v): 

je peux gives the stem of the third plural: ils peu-; 
pouvant gives the consonant: ils peuv-; 

-ent (' unpronounced ) is the regular ending: ils peuvent. 

je peux nous pouvons 

tu peux vous pouvez 

il peut ils peuvent 

539. Prepositions governing verbs. Prepositions, except 
en, govern the Infinitive: pour aller, for going; sans partir, 
without departing ; apres avoir repondu, after having 
answered ; avant de finir, before finishing. But en allant, 
in going ; en repondant, etc. 

540. Verbs followed by Infinitives. In English the infini¬ 
tive is sometimes preceded by to and sometimes not. We 
say ‘ I dare to go/ but ‘ you dare not go/ ‘ he is able to go/ 
but 1 he can go.’ In French the infinitive (1) may stand alone, 
(2) may be preceded by de, (3) may be preceded by a. 

(1) Nous allons partir, We are going to leave 

(2) II a oublie de venir, He forgot to come 

(3) II apprend a lire, He is learning to read 

This usage can be learned only by observation. Some 
verbs fall into two or even all three of these classes. The 
following are some of the common verbs in each class: 

1. aller, compter, croire, desirer, devoir, entendre, en- 
voyer, esperer, faire, falloir, laisser, oser, paraitre, preferer, 
pouvoir, savoir, sembler, Venir, voir, vouloir. 


§541] 


VERBS 


337 


2. avertir, blamer, cesser, se charger, commander, con- 
seiller, craindre, defendre, se depecher, dire, ecrire, em- 
pecher, s’empresser, entreprendre, essayer, eviter, se hater, 
jurer, menacer, negliger, ordonner, oublier, permettre, per¬ 
suader, se presser, prier, promettre, proposer, recommander, 
refuser, regretter, remercier, souhaiter, tacher. 

3. aider, aimer, s’amuser, apprendre, avoir, chercher, 
condamner, consentir, se decider, demander, enseigner, 
s’habituer, hesiter, inviter, se mettre, parvenir, renoncer, 
reussir, songer, tenir, travailler. 

541. Transitive and intransitive verbs (see § 512, Note 2). 

Verbs transitive (i.e. taking a direct object) in French 

and intransitive (and followed by a preposition) in English: 
attendre, chercher, demander (ask for), ecouter, regarder: 
Je l’attends, I am waiting for him. 

Verbs intransitive in French and transitive in English: 
approcher de, assister a (be present at), convenir a 
(suit, fit), demander a (ask a 'person), douter de, entrer 
dans, jouir de, nuire a, obeir a, pardonner a, plaire a, re- 
pondre a (answer), ressembler a, se servir de, se souvenir de. 

542. Reflexive verbs. Verbs which are reflexive in French 
but not in English: s’arreter, s’asseoir, se coucher, s’ecrier, 
s’en aller, s’endormir, s’eveiller, s’habiller, se lever, se 
plaindre, se promener, se sauver (run away), se taire. 

543. Auxiliaries. Compound tenses are usually formed 
by avoir and the past participle (j’ai aime, j’avais aime, 
etc:) But etre replaces avoir in the following cases: 

(1) With all reflexive verbs: Je me suis flatte, I flattered 
myself. 

(2) With many verbs (mostly of motion) of which the 
following are the most common: aller, arriver, descendre, 


338 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 544 


entrer, monter, mourir, naitre, partir, sortir, venir: 1 Je 
suis alle, I went. 

544. Agreement of Present Participles. The present 
participle is invariable when used as a verb (to express 
action), but it is varied when used as an adjective (to de¬ 
scribe a state). 

Une bete, vivant dans l’eau, An animal, living in the water, 
s’amuse peu, has a dull time. 

J’ai trouve une bete vivante dans I have found a living animal in 
le lait, the milk. 

545. Agreement of Past Participles: 

1. If the verb is conjugated with avoir, the participle 
agrees with the direct object when the object precedes {order; 
ob j ect; verb; participle): 

Quelle lecon avez-vous apprise ? What lesson have you learned ? 2 

Otherwise no agreement {order: verb; participle; object); 

J’ai appris la lef on, I have learned the lesson 

2. If the verb is conjugated with etre (§ 543), the par¬ 
ticiple agrees with the subject: 

Elle est venue, She has come 
Elies sont aimees, They are loved 

Note. Though reflexive verbs are conjugated with etre, the past 
participle agrees not with the subject but with a preceding direct object 
as in the case of verbs conjugated with avoir: Elle s’est lavee, She 
washed herself. 

With Elle s’est lavee compare: 

Elle s’est lave les mains, She washed her hands 
Elle s’est casse le bras, She broke her arm 

1 Verbs conjugated with etre are intransitive (that is, they have no direct 
object). Some may be used also transitively (that is, with a direct object). 
In the second case they are conjugated with avoir : 

Je suis descendu (monte), I went down (went up) 

J’ai descendu (monte) l’escalier, I went down (went up) the stairs 
J’ai descendu (monte) la malle, I carried the trunk down (up) 

2 With en the participle remains invariable: Avez-vous choisi des livres? 
— Pen ai choisi. 


§ 546] 


VERBS 


339 


In the sentence Elle s’est lavee, She washed herself , s* (se) 
is the direct object; since it precedes the participle, the par¬ 
ticiple agrees with it. In the sentences Elle s’est lave les 
mains, Elle s’est casse le bras, s* (se) is the indirect object 
(She washed the hands to herself; She broke the arm to herself); 
the direct objects are mains, bras, and since they follow the 
participles, the participles do not agree with them, but are 
invariable. 

Similarly in Elle s’est parle, She spoke to herself, the par¬ 
ticiple does not agree with s’ (to herself) since it is the in¬ 
direct, not the direct, object. 


SYNTAX OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE 


546. Present and future tenses in the principal clause 
govern the subjunctive verb or auxiliary in the present; and 
past and conditional tenses govern the subjunctive verb or 
auxiliary in the past. 


Je desire qu’il parte. 

Je desirais qu’il partit. 
Croyez-vous qu’il soit parti? 

Je ne pensais pas qu’il fut parti. 


I desire that he go. 

I desired that he might go. 
Do you believe he has gone ? 
I did not think he had gone. 


Note. In colloquial style, the past subjunctive is becoming obso¬ 
lete, the present ungrammatically usurping its place. See Permissible 
Deviations, § 560,9. 

II etait temps que je vous dise It was time that I should say 
cela. this to you. 


547. Subjunctive used Independently. Though the sub¬ 
junctive is properly a subjoined, and therefore a dependent 
or governed mood, it is in a few cases used independently — 
though a governing verb may usually be understood: 

1. In wishes: 

Dieu vous garde (or preserve) ! God guard you! 

A Dieu ne plaise qu’il vienne ! May it not please God that he 

come! 


340 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§548 


Puisse-t-il etre heureux ! May he be happy ! 

Vive le roi! Long live the king! 

Plut a Dieu que cela fut vrai! Would to God that this might be 

true! 

Note. Soit! So be it. 

2. To supply the lacking third persons imperative (occa¬ 
sionally also the first person); it is preceded by que: 

Qu’il reponde! Qu’ils repondent! Let him answer! Let them 

answer! 

Que je sois pendu si j’en sais le May I be hanged if I know any- 
premier mot! thing about it! 

3. In purely literary style to express with special empha¬ 
sis a condition or concession — si, if, being omitted and the 
subject-pronoun following its verb. 

Eut-il cent fois raison, je ne Were he right a hundred times, 
cederais point. I would not yield. 

Dusse-je mourir, je le ferais quand Were I to die, I would do it 
meme. nevertheless. 

4. To replace the conditional in compound tenses: 

Je l’eusse fait volontiers. I would have done it willingly. 

Avec une dot, elle se fut mariee With a dowry, she would have 
plus tot. got married sooner. 


548. Subjunctive after a Governing Verb. The subjunc¬ 
tive is used after: 


(1) Verbs expressing an act of will, i.e. verbs like to wish , 
like, prefer, demand, order, beg, permit, forbid, 1 approve, 


prevent, 1 etc. 

Nous voulons qu’il sorte. 

Je prefererais qu’il regnat. 

Je defends qu’on le fasse. 
J’empecherai qu’on ne le fasse. 


We wish that he go. 

I should prefer that he should 
reign. 

I forbid that one do it. 

I will prevent its being done. 


(2) Verbs expressing emotions, such as joy, sorrow, sur¬ 
prise, doubt, 1 fear, 1 anger, shame: 


1 For the redundant ne with these verbs see § 534. 


§ 549] 


SYNTAX OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE 


341 


Je regrette que cela soit arrive. 

Je serais bien aise que cela arrivat. 

Je crains que vous ne vous trom- 
piez. 


I regret that this has happened. 

I should be very glad to have that 
happen. 

I fear you may be deceiving 
yourself. 


(3) Impersonal verbs, unless they express certainty or 
probability. When negative or interrogative all impersonal 
verbs govern the subjunctive. 


II faut qu’il parte. 

II semble que cela soit facile a faire. 
11 convient que vous le fassiez. 

II est vrai (certain, sftr, probable, 
clair) que c’est facile. 

But : 

II n’est pas vrai (certain, sur, etc.) 
que ce soit facile. 


He must go. 

It seems that that is easy to do. 
It is proper you should do it. 

It is true (certain, sure, probable, 
clear) that it is easy. 

It is not true (certain, sure, etc.) 
that it is easy. 


(4) Verbs of saying and thinking, when used negatively 
or interrogatively (the indicative may be used): 


Je dis qu’il a menti. 

Je ne dis pas qu’il ait menti (or a 
menti). 

Je ne crois pas qu’il mente. 
Pensez-vous qu’il mente? 

J’espere qu’il le fera. 

Je n’espere pas qu’il le fasse (or 
fera). 


I say that he has lied. 

I do not say he has lied. 

I do not believe he lies. 

Do you think he lies? 

I hope he will do it. 

I do not hope he will do it. 


549. Subjunctive after Conjunctions: 

1. The following regularly govern the subjunctive: 

f 0iqUe ) although 

bien que J 

pourvu que, provided that 
sans que, without 

a moins que, unless (with redundant ne; cf. § 534) 

a ^ n ^ Ue 1 in order that, so that 

pour que J 

avant que, before (for redundant ne see § 534) 
Quoiqu’il ait soixante ans, il est Although he is sixty years old, 
plus fort que moi. he is stronger than I. 

Venez avant qu’il parte. Come before he gets away. 


342 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§550 


2. Certain compound conjunctions govern the subjunctive 
when the following verb suggests purpose or anticipation, 
and hence uncertainty. They govern the indicative when 
they introduce a mere statement of fact. 

Such are de maniere que, de fagon que, de sorte que, all 
meaning so that: 

II agit en (or de) sorte que tous le He acts so that all will hate him. 
hairont. 

Agissez de sorte qu’on vous benisse. Act so that people may bless you. 


550. Subjunctive in Relative Clauses: 

1. The subjunctive is used in a relative clause when it 
expresses a characteristic which may not be fulfilled: 


11 n’avait pas d’outil dont il put se 
servir. 

II y a peu de livres qui soient bien 
ecrits. 

Quel est le poete qui ait egale 
Horn ere? 

Je cherche un domestique qui soit 
fidele. 

But : 

J’ai un domestique qui est tres 
fidele. 


He had no tool of which he could 
make use. 

There are few books that are 
well written. 

Who is the poet that has equaled 
Homer? 

I seek a servant who may be 
faithful (;purpose and desire ). 

I have a servant who is very 
faithful (a mere fact). 


2. The relative clause following a superlative is usually 
subjunctive. 

Napoleon est le plus grand general Napoleon is the greatest general 
qui ait jamais existe. that ever existed. 

Note. Le premier, le dernier, le seul, personne, rien, etc., being 
virtual superlatives, govern the relative clause accordingly: 

II n’y a personne qui soit sur. There is no one who is safe. 

De tous mes anciens amis c’est le Of all my old friends he is the 
seul qui se souvienne de moi. only one who remembers me. 

But : 

De cette grande armee c’etaient Of this great army they were the 
les seuls qui survivaient. only ones who survived. 

3. Owing to their hypothetical or concessive value, the 


USE OF TENSES 


343 


§ 551] 

French equivalents for the English whoever, whatever, however, 
and wherever, require a verb in the subjunctive (cf. § 530,4): 

Quelle que soit la provocation, ne Whatever be the provocation, do 
vous battez point. not fight. 

Quelques peines qu’il eut, il les Whatever griefs he felt, he hid 
cachait. them. 

Quelque bons qu’ils fussent, ils ne However good they were, they 
lui pardonnerent jamais. never pardoned him. 

USE OF TENSES 

551. Present tense with depuis: 

Depuis quand etes-vous ici? How long have you been here? 

Je suis ici depuis huit jours 
Voila (il y a) huit jours que je suis ici 

Note. As the present is used here for the past indefinite, so the 
imperfect is used for the pluperfect: Depuis quand etiez-vous ici? 
How long had you been here? 

552. Use of the past tenses. 

The past indefinite is the narrative tense, the most 
frequently used past tense. 

The imperfect is the descriptive tense, corresponding 
roughly to the English past in -ing, I was giving. It is used: 

(1) of an action conceived as continuing in past time, 
especially when another action takes place during the con¬ 
tinuance of the first: I was walking (imperfect) in the garden 
when I saw (past indefinite) him; 

(2) of customary or repeated action: I used to give, I 
(repeatedly, always, usually, etc.) gave. 

The past definite replaces the past indefinite in literary 
style. 

Enfin il a parle (conversational) 1 w , , 

Enfin il parla (literary) J Me Sp ° ke at laSt * 

Il allait a l’ecole, He was going to school, he used to go to school, he 
usually went to school. 

Il allait a Pecole lorsque l’orage a eclate (eclata), He was going to 
school when the storm burst. 


11 have been here for a week. 


344 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§553 


553. The future and the conditional are often used to 
express probability or conjecture: 

Sera-ce lui? Serait-ce lui? Can it be he? Could it be he? 

II l’aura dit. He probably said it. 

Aurait-il dit cela? Could he have said that? 

554. Note the future with quand, lorsque, aussitot que, 
apres que, etc., where the present is used in English: 

Je viendrai quand je pourrai, I shall come when I can. 

555. Conditions. Conditions follow the normal English 
forms: 

If he speaks, I shall speak, S’il parle {present), je parlerai {future). 

If he spoke, I should speak, S’il parlait {imperfect), je parlerais {con¬ 
ditional). 

Note. The future and conditional may be used in English in the 
if clause (if “he will speak,” “if he would speak”) but not in French 
except when si means whether: 

Savez-vous s’il parlera (parlerait) ? Do you know if he will (would) 
speak ? 

556. Passive. The passive voice corresponds to the Eng¬ 
lish forms, the participle agreeing with the subject since the 
auxiliary is etre (see § 545,2): elle est aimee, she is loved; 

elle sera aimee, elle a ete aimee, etc. 

Note 1. The passive voice is not so commonly used in French as 
in English. Two frequent substitutes are: 

(1) On: Ici on parle frangais, French is spoken here. 

(2) The reflexive: Cela se dit, That is said. 

La lutte se termina, The struggle ended. 

Note 2. The agent is introduced by par when the action is specific, 
by de when the action is general or habitual: 

II fut tue par un brigand, He was killed by a bandit. 

Un pere est aime de ses enfants, A father is loved by his children. 

Note 3. Observe the passive force of a transitive infinitive following 
faire (have, cause) voir, entendre, and some other verbs: 

J’ai fait batir une maison, I had a house built. 

Je l’ai vu (entendu) punir, I saw (heard) him punished. 



§ 557] 


RULES FOR GENDER 


345 


But: 

J’ai fait venir (intransitive) le medecin, I had the doctor come. 

If the infinitive has an object, the agent is the indirect object. Par 
may be used to avoid ambiguity: 

Faites-lui faire son devoir, Have him do his duty. 

Faites faire son devoir a votre fils, Have your son do his duty. 

II a fait vendre sa maison par un ami, He had his house sold by a friend. 


RULES FOR GENDER 
(Supplementary to § 481) 

557. I. Gender determined by meaning. 

A. Masculine: 

1. Males: homme, fils, coq. 

Except la sentinelle, la recrue. 1 

2. Trees, shrubs, metals: chene, saule, argent, cuivre. 

Except la ronce, l’epine, la vigne. 

3. Seasons, months, days: printemps, ete, janvier, dimanche. 

4. Winds, points of compass: zephyr, aquilon, nord. 

Except la bise, la brise. 

5. Countries not ending in -e: Etats-Unis, Canada, Portugal. 

6. Mountains: Vesuve, Parnasse. 

Except Alpes, Pyrenees, Vosges. 

7. Adjectives, infinitives and other parts of speech used as nouns: 
le blanc, le dormir, le pourquoi. 

B. Feminine: 

1. Females: mere, fille, poule. 

2. Fruits and flowers ending in -e: pomme, cerise; tulipe, rose. 

3. Countries, cities, rivers ending in -e: France, Russie; Rome, 
Venise; Seine, Loire. 

Except: le Mexique, le Rhone, le Tibre. 

4. Holidays (file de is understood): la Toussaint (la fete de Tous- 
saint), la Saint-Jean. 

1 These and connaissance, dupe, personne, victime are feminine whether 
they refer to males or females. 


346 


BEGINNING FRENCH 


[§ 558 


558. II. Gender determined by endings. 

A. Feminine: 

1. Nouns ending in neutral -e: 1 porte, ville, place, huile. 

Except those ending in 

-acle: spectacle, oracle, miracle 
-age: 2 voyage, village, courage 
-aire: 3 dictionnaire 
-ege: college, privilege, manege 
-sme: patriotisme, enthousiasme 

2. Abstract nouns ending in 

-eur: 4 chaleur, hauteur, grandeur 

Note: When -eur denotes an agent the noun is masculine: 
laboureur, senateur, facteur 

3. Nouns ending in 

-ie: moitie, pitie, amitie 

-ion: nation, confusion, possession 

-te: 6 cite, sante, liberte 

-aison: 6 maison, raison, conjugaison 

B. Nouns ending otherwise are generally masculine. 

559. III. Gender of compound nouns. 

1. Those composed of two nouns have the gender of the first: 

le chou-fleur. 

2. Those composed of a noun and another part of speech have the 
gender of the noun: une basse-cour. 

Except those composed of a noun and a verb which are always 
masculine: le porte-plume, toume-vis. 

3. Those of which neither component part is a noun are masculine: 
le passe-partout. 

1 The following are among the common exceptions to this rule: age, 
automne, centime, cigare, costume, crime, exemple, legume, linge, livre {book), 
metre, signe, silence, sucre, timbre, tonnerre, verre, vice. 

2 Feminine are cage, image, page, plage, rage. 

3 Feminine are grammaire, paire. 

4 Except bonheur, malheur, honneur, labeur. 

6 Except cote, ete. 

6 Nouns in-on are masculine: bouillon, poison, poisson; except boisson, 
chanson, fajon, leyon. 


§560: 


PERMISSIBLE DEVIATIONS 


347 


560. Permissible Deviations. 

A decree of the French Minister of Public Instruction, 
dated February 26, 1901, orders that the following devia¬ 
tions from established orthography be tolerated in public 
schools: 

1. The article need not be dropped in partitive construc¬ 
tions when the noun is preceded by an adjective: 

du bon pain, de la bonne viande, des bons fruits. 

See § 485, 1, Note, ( b ). 

2. Demi may agree with its noun even when it precedes: 
une demie heure. See § 507, Note. 

3. Vingt and cent may be written with an -s even when a 
number follows: quatre vingts dix. See § 502, Note 1. 

4. Mille may be used in dates: Pan mille huit cents 
quatre vingts dix. See § 509. 

5. The hyphen may be omitted in numerals: dix sept. 
See § 502, Note 2. 

6. The hyphen may be omitted in moi meme, etc. See 
§ 513, 5. 

7. The hyphen may be omitted between the verb and a 
pronoun subject placed after it: est ce, avez vous. 
See § 536. 

8. C’est may be used instead of ce sont: c’est eux. 
See p. 319, footnote. 

9. The present subjunctive may be used instead of the 
imperfect in a clause depending upon a conditional: 

il faudrait qu’il vienne. See § 546, Note. 

10. The redundant ne may be omitted: il craint qu’on 
vienne, l’annee a ete meilleure qu’on l’esperait, a 
moins qu’on accorde le pardon. See § 534. 



VOCABULARIES 


The numbers following the word defined refer to the lessons in which the word is 
first used. 

The asterisk * after verbs denotes that they are conjugated with etre in the com¬ 
pound tenses. 

The feminine form of the adjective is given only when it offers some special difficulty. 
The following abbreviations are used: 


adj. 

adjective 

V- p. 

past participle 

adv. 

adverb 

pi. 

plural 

conj. 

conjunction 

prep. 

preposition 

/• 

feminine 

pron. 

pronoun 

m. 

masculine 

rel. 

relative 


FRANQAIS - ANGLAIS 


Ame 


a 

a [a], to, at, in, 2. 
absolu [apsoly], absolute, 34. 
l’achat [laSa], m., purchase, 23. 
acheter [a$te], to buy, 17. 
admirer [admire], to admire, 27. 
l’adresse padres],/., address, 31. 
afin que [afe ka], in order that, 41. 
Page [la: 3 ], m ., age, 29 
agreable [agreabl], agreeable, 42. 


aimable [emabl], amiable, kind, 42. 
aimer [erne], to like, love, 16. 
allemand [alma], German, 3. 
aller* [ale], to go, 14 (to feel), 41. 
Pallumette palymet],/., match, 22. 
americain [amerike], American, 
42. 

PAmerique [lamerik],/., America, 
32. 


a 


ENGLISH-FRENCH ami 


a, an, un, une. 

to be able, pouvoir. 

about (=on one’s person), sur. 

absolute, absolu. 

acquaintance, la connaissance. 

across, a travers. 

address, Padresse, /. 

to admire, admirer. 

to be afraid, avoir peur, craindre. 

after, apres. 

afternoon, Papres-midi, /. 
again, encore, 
ago, il y a. 


agreeable, agreable. 
all, tout, -e, tous, toutes. 
to allow, permettre. 
almost, presque. 
alone, seul. 
already, d6jA 
also, aussi. 

although, quoique, bien que. 
always, toujours, 
am to, devoir, § 447. 
America, PAmerique, /. 
American, americain. 
amiable, aimable. 

349 




ami 


FRAN QAIS-ANGLAIS 


bai 


I’ami [lami], m., l’amie,/., friend, 
9, 16. 

amuser [amyze], to amuse, 34. 
l’an [la], m., year, 29; le jour de 
F—, New Year’s Day, 34. 
anglais [agle], English, 2. 

Fanimal [lanimal], m., animal, 28. 
l’annee [lane],/., year, 27. 
l’anniversaire [laniverseir], m., 
birthday, 34. 
aout [u], August, 34. 
appeler [aple], to call, 16. 
apporter [aporte], to bring, 13. 
apprendre [apraidr], to learn. 32. 
apres [apre], after, 3. 

Fapres-midi [lapre midi],/., after¬ 
noon, 23. 

Fargent [lar 3 &], m., silver, money, 
16. 

Farme [larm],/., weapon, 39. 
Farmee [larme],/., army, 39. 
s’arreter* [sarete], to stop, 38. 
arriver* [arive], to arrive, 14. 
assez [ase], enough, 17. 

Fassiette [lasjet],/., plate, 43. 
assis [asi], seated, 32, 


asseyez-vous! [aseje vu], sit down! 
44. 

attendre [ata:dr], to wait (for), 32. 
attraper [atrape], to catch, 36. 
aujourd ’hui [o 3 urdyi], to-day, 22. 
aussi [osi], also, 3; as, 28. 
Fautomne [loton], m., autumn, 27. 
Fautomobile [lotomobil], /., auto¬ 
mobile, 36. 

autour (de) [otu:r (do)], around, 
43. 

autre [otr], other, 22. 
avancer [avase], to advance, be 
fast (clock), 24. 

avant [ava] (prep, of time), beforej 
23; (conj.), —que, before, 41. 
avec [avek], with, 9. 
l’avocat [lavoka], m., lawyer, 29. 
avoir [avwa:r], to have, 7; il y a [il 
ya], there is, there are, 7; ago, 29. 
avril [avril], April, 34. 


le bagage [baga: 3 ], baggage, 14. 
le bain [be], bath, 38; la salle de 
—s, bath-room, 38. 


amu ENGLISH-french bad 


to amuse, amuser. 
an, un, une. 
and, et. 

animal, l’animal, m. 
another, un autre, 
to answer, repondre (k). 
any, du, etc., § 123. 
anything, quelque chose, 
apple, la pomme. 

April, avril. 

are, sont; — to, devoir, § 447. 
arm, le bras, 
army, Farmee, /. 
around, autour (de). 
to arrive, arriver*. 


as, comme, aussi; — ... —, aussi 
. . . que. 

to ask, ask for, demander (k). 
to astonish, etonner. 

at, a; — last, enfin; — once, tout 
de suite. 

August, aoht. 
aunt, la tante. 
automobile, Fautomobile, /. 
autumn, Fautomne, m. 


back (to come), revenir*. 
bad, mauvais. 
badly, mal. 



ban 


FRAN 9 AIS-AN GL AIS 


bou 


le banc [ba], bench, 2. 
bas [ba], low; en—, downstairs, 7. 
le bas [ba], stocking, 17. 
la bataille [bataij], battle, 39. 
la bateau [bato], boat, 44. 
le batiment [batima], building, 11. 
batir [batiir], to build, 11. 
se battre* [so batr], to fight, 39. 
beau, belle [bo, bel], beautiful, 
fine, handsome, 8. 
beaucoup (de) [boku (do)], much, 
many, 17. 

le besoin [bozwe], need; avoir—, 
to need, 36. 

bete [be:t], foolish, stupid, 36. 
le beurre [boe:r], butter, 13. 
bien [bje], well, 23; very, 44; — 
que, although, 41. 
bientot [bjeto], soon, 16. 


le billet [bije], note, 14. 
blanc, blanche [bla, bla:$] ,white, 
8 . 

la blanchisseuse [bla$iso:z], laun¬ 
dress, 37. 

blesser [blese], to wound, hurt, 38. 
bleu [bio], blue, 4. 
boire [bwa:r], to drink, 22. 
la boite [bwa:t], box, 22, 31; — 
auxlettres, letter-box, 31. 
bon, bonne [bo, bon], good, 2, 8. 
les bonbons [bobo], candy, 43. 
bon jour [bo 3 u:r], good morning, 
21 . 

la bonne [bon], maid, servant, 7. 
a bord [a boirj, on board, 44. 
la bouche [bu$], mouth, 41. 
le boucher [bu$e], butcher, 26. 
le boulanger [bula 3 e], baker, 26. 
la bouteille [buteij], bottle, 22. 


bag ENGLISH-FRENCH boy 


baggage, le bagage. 
baker, le boulanger. 
barracks, la caserne. 

bath, le bain;-room, la salle de 

bains. 

battle, la bataille. 
to be, 6tre; {health), aller* (§419). 
beautiful, beau, belle, 
because, parce que. 
bed, le lit; to go to —, se coucher*. 
bedroom, la chambre k coucher. 
before {of time), avant; {of place), 
devant; {conj.), avant que. 
to beg, prier. 
to begin, commencer. 
beginning, le commencement, 
behind, derri£re. 
to believe, croire. 
bell, la sonnette. 
to belong, etre k. 
bench, le banc. 


beside, k cot6 (de). [meiux. 

best {adj.), le meilleur; {adv.), le 
better {adj.), meilleur; {adv.), 
mieux; it is —, il vaut mieux. 
between, entre. 
big, grand, 
bill, la note, 
bill-of-fare, la carte, 
bird, l’oiseau, m. 
birthday, 1’anniversaire, m. 
black, noir; to —, cirer. 
blue, bleu. 

board (on), k bord (de). 

boarding-house, la pension. 

boat, le bateau. 

book, le livre. 

born, ne*. 

both, tous les deux. 

bottle, la bouteille. 

box, la boite. 

boy, le garqon. 



bra 


FRAN §AIS-ANGLAIS 


cha 


le bras [bra], arm, 37. 
briller [brije], to shine, 27. 
brosser [brose], to brush, 32. 
bu [by], drunk, 22; (p. p . o/boire, 
to drink). 

le buffet [byfe], lunch-counter, 14. 


la cabine [kabin], cabin, 44. 
le cadeau [kado], present, gift, 34. 
le cafe [kafe], coffee, 13; caf6, 22. 
le cahier [kaje], copy-book, 1. 
la campagne [kapaji], country, 
28. 

le capitaine [kapiten], captain, 39. 
la carte [kart], bill-of-fare, 16; 
card, 31. 

la carte-postale [kart postal], post¬ 
card, 31; — illustree, picture 
post-card, 31. 

la caserne [kazem], barracks, 39. 
causer [koze], to chat, 42. 


ce, cet, cette [so, set], this, that, 
23; ce qui, ce que, what ( rel .), 
36. 

ceci [sosi], this, 23. 
cela [sola], that, 23. 
celle [sel],/., that, this, the one, 43. 
celui [solyi], m. } that, this, the 
one, 43. 

cent [sa], hundred, 29. 
le centime [satim], centime, 17. 
certain [serte], certain, 33. 
chacun [$akoe], each one, 43. 
la chaise [$e:z], chair, 7. 
la chambre [S&ibr], room, 6; — 
a coucher [ku$e], bedroom, 7. 
le champ [$a], field, 28. 
chanter [Sate], to sing, 3. 
le chapeau [Sapo], hat, 11. 
chaque [Sak], each, 43. 
charmer [Sarme], to charm, 43. 
chaud [So], hot, warm, 27; avoir 
—, to be warm, 36. 


bre ENGLISH 

bread, le pain, 
to break, casser. 

breakfast, le dejeuner; to —, de¬ 
jeuner. 

to bring, apporter. 
brother, le frere. 
to brush, brosser. 
to build, batir. 
building, le batiment. 
but, mais. 

butcher, le boucher. 
butter, le beurre. 
to buy, acheter. 
by, par. 

cabby, le cocher. 
cabin, la cabine. 
cafe, le cafe. 


FRENCH Che 

cake, le gateau, 
to call, appeler. 
can (= to be able), pouvoir. 
candy, les bonbons, m. 
captain, le capitaine. 
car, la voiture (railway). 
card, la carte, 
carpenter, le menuisier. 
carriage, la voiture. 
to carry, porter, 
to catch, attraper. 
centime, le centime, 
certain, certain, 
chair, la chaise, 
chambermaid, la femme de 
chambre. 

to charm, charmer, 
to chat, causer, 
cheap, bon march6. 


352 



cha 


FRAN 5 AIS-AN GLAIS 


COS 


le chauffeur [SofceirJ, chauffeur, 

36. 

la chaussette [$oset], sock, 37. 
le chemin [Same], way, road, 12. 
la chemise [$8mi:z], shirt, 37, 
cher, chere [$e:r],dear, 18. 
chercher [$er$e], to seek, look for, 
4. 

le cheval [$aval], horse, 28, 
les cheveux ftovo], m., hair, 38. 
chez [$e], at (in, to) the house 
(shop, etc.) of, 18. 
choisir [$wazi:r], to choose, 8. 
la chose [$o:zJ, thing, 17. 

-ci [si], here, 23. 
le del [sjel], sky, heaven, 27. 
le cigare [siga:r], cigar, 22. 
la cigarette [sigaret], cigarette, 22. 
le cinema [sinema], moving-picture 
show, 36. 

cinq [sek], five, 16. 
cinquante [seka:t], fifty, 17. 
cirer [sire], to black (shoes), 32. 
clair [kleir], light (of colors), 33; 
clear, 36. 

la classe [klas], class, 3; salle de 
—, class-room, 1. 


le client [klia], customer, 33. 
le cocher [ko$e], coachman cabby, 
16. 

le coin^fkws], corner, 12. 
le colis [koli], package, parcel, 14; 
— postal, parcel-post package, 
31. 

le college [kole: 3 ], school, 28. 
combien [kobje], how much, how 
many, 17; — de temps, how 
long, 34. 

la come die [komedi], comedy, 36. 
commander [komade], to order, 18. 
comme [kom], as, like, how, 32,37. 
le commencement [komasmd], be¬ 
ginning, 28. 

commencer [komase], to begin, 36. 
comment [koma], how, 37. 
comprendre [kopraidr], to under¬ 
stand, 32. 

conduire [kodyhr], to conduct, 
drive, 21. 

la connaissance [konesais], ac¬ 
quaintance, 43. 

connaitre [koneitr], to know, 42. 
content [k5ta], glad, 42. 
le costume [kostym], suit, 18. 


Chi ENGLISH-FRENCH CODL 


child, F enfant, m. or f. 
to choose, choisir. 

Christmas, Noel, m.) Merry —, 
joyeux Noel, 
church, Feglise, /. 
cigar, le cigare. 
cigarette, la cigarette, 
city, la ville. 
class, la classe. 
class-room, la salle de classe. 
clean, propre. 
clerk, Femploye, m. 
clock, la pendule. 
to close, fermer. 
clothes, les v&tements, m. 


cloud, le nuage. 
coach, la voiture. 
coachman, le cocher. 
coffee, le cafe. 

cold, froid; (illness), le rhume; to 
be —, avoir froid; to catch —, 
attraper un rhume. 
color, la couleur. 
to comb, peigner. 
to come, venir*; — back, revenir*; 
— in, entrer*; — down, des- 
cendre*. 

comedy, la comedie. 
to complain, se plaindre*. 
to conduct, conduire. 

353 



cot 


FRAN ^AIS-AN GL AIS 


dev 


le cote [kote], side; a—de, beside,d 

22 . 

le coton [koto], cotton, 17. 
se coucher* [so ku$e], to go to 
bed, 38. 

la couleur [kulce:r], color, 33 
la cour [ku:r], yard, 4. 
la course [kurs], errand, 26. 
le cousin [kuze], -e [kuzin], /., 
cousin, 9. 

le couteau [kuto], knife, 43. 
couter [kute], to cost, 19. 
couvrir [kuvrhr], to cover, 44. 
craindre [kre:dr], to fear, 44. 
la cravate [kravat], cravat, 19. 
le crayon [krejo], pencil, 1. 
la creme [krnm], cream, 13. 
croire [krwair], to believe, 37. 
la cuiller [kyje:r], spoon, 43. 
la cuisine [kyizin], kitchen, 7. 
la cuisiniere [kyizinje:r], cook, 7. 

la dame [dam], lady, 21. 

dans [da], in, into, 1. 

de [do], of, from, 1. 

decembre [desaibr], December, 34 

deja [de 3 a], already, 21. 

dejeuner [de 3 cene], tobreakfast, 7. 


COO ENGLISH 

cook, la cuisiniere. 
copy-book, le cahier. 
corner, le coin, 
to cost, codter. 
cotton, le coton. 

country, le pays, la campagne; in 
the —, a la campagne. 
cousin, le cousin, la cousine. 
cow, la vache. 
cream, la creme, 
cravat, la cravate. 
to cover, couvrir. 
to cross, traverser, 
cup, la tasse. 


demain [dome], to-morrow, 34. 
demander (k) [domade (a)], to ask 
(for), 16. 

demeurer [damcere], to live, 29. 
demi [domi], half, 24. 
la dent [da.], tooth, 38. 
la dentelle [datel], lace, 19. 
se depecher* [so depe$e], to 
hurry, 37. 

depuis [dapyi], since, from, 34;— 
quand, how long, 34. 
dernier, -ere [dernje, dernjeir], 

last, 32. 

derriere [derje:r], behind, 23. 
descendre* [desa:dr], to come 
(get) down, 11. 

se deshabiller* [so dezabije], to 
undress, 38. 

desirer [dezire], to wish, 17. 
deux [do], two, 11; tous les—, 
both, 29. 

deuxieme [dozjem], second, 32. 
devant [dova], in front of, 1. 
devoir [dovwair], to owe, must, 
ought, am to, 43. 
le devoir [dovwair], paper, exer¬ 
cise, 2. 

devouer [devwe], to devote, 44. 


FRENCH Dec 

customer, le client, 
custom-house, la douane. 


dark (of colors), fonc6. 
daughter, la fille. 

day, le jour; every —, tous les 
jours. 

dead, mort. 

a great deal, beaucoup. 
dear, cher, chere. 
death, la mort. 
to deceive, tromper. 

December, decembre. 


354 



dif 


FRAN 9 AIS-ANGLAIS 


env 


difficile [difisil], difficult, 2. 
le dimanche Idima:$], Sunday, 19. 
diner [dine], to dine, 7. 
dire [di:r], to say, 19. 
dit [di], said, 21; (p. p. of dire, to 
.say). 

dix [dis], ten, 24. 
dix-huit [di zyit], eighteen, 28. 
dix-neuf [diz ncef], nineteen, 28. 
dix-sept [dis set], seventeen, 28. 
done [do:k or do], then, so, there¬ 
fore, 22. 

donne [don], gives, 2. 
donner [done], to give, 3. 
dont [do], of which, of whom, 
whose, 44. 

dormir [dormi:r], to sleep, 38. 
la douane [dwan], custom-house, 
44. 

douter [dute], to doubt, 42. 
douze [du:z], twelve, 24. 
le drapeau [drapo], flag, 39. 
droit [drwa], right; a —e, to (on) 
the right, 31. 
drole [dro:l], funny, 36. 


l’eau [lo],/„ water, 13. 
l’eclair [lekleir], m., lightning, 27. 
l’ecole [jekol],/., school, 1. 
ecouter [ekute], to listen, 23. 
ecrire [ekriir], to write, 31. 
l’eglise [legliiz],/., church, 12. 
eh bien! [e bje], well! 
l’eleve [leleiv], m. orf., pupil, 1. 
elle [el],/., she, her, it, 3. 
l’employe [laplwaje], m., em¬ 
ployee, 17. 

en [a], some, any; of it, of them, 13. 
en [a], in, 21; —bas, downstairs, 
7;—haut, upstairs, 7. 
encore [ako:r], still, yet, again, 19. 
l’encre [la:kr],/., ink, 4. 
l’enfant [lafa], m. orf., child, 4. 
enfin [afe], at last, finally, 23. 
enseigner (a) [asejie],to teach, 4. 
ensemble [asa:bl], together, 24. 
entendre [ata:dr], to hear, 11. 
entre [a:tr], between, 12. 
entrer* (dans) [atre (da)], to go in, 
enter, 6. 

envelopper [avlope], to wrap, 33. 


dec 

deck, le pont. 
to depart, partir*. 
to devote, devouer. 
to die, mourir*. 
difficult, difficile, 
to dine, diner, 
dining-room, la salle k manger, 
dirty, sale, 
to do, faire. 
doctor, le m6decin. 
door, la porte. 
to doubt, douter. 
downstairs, en bas. 
drawing-room, le salon, 
dress, la robe; to —, habiller. 
to drink, boire. 
to drive, conduire. 


ent 

during, pendant, 
dust, la poussiere. 


each, chaque; — one, chacun. 
early, de bonne heure. 

Easter, Piques, m. 
easy, facile, 
to eat, manger, 
eight, huit. 
eighteen, dix-huit. 
eleven, onze. 
employee, Temploy^, m. 
end, la fin. 

English, anglais, 
enough, assez. 
to enter, entrer* (dans). 


ENGLISH - FRENCH 


355 



env 


FRAN § AIS-AN GLAIS 


fin 


envoyer [avwaje], to send, 31. 
l’epee [lepe],/., sword, 39. 
l’epicier [lepisje] m., grocer, 26. 
epouser [epuze], to marry, 29. 
l’escalier [leskalje], m., staircase, 7. 
essayer [eseje], to try, 33. 
est [e], is, 1; (belongs), 26; n’est-ce 
pas? [nes pa], is it not (so);? 
est-ce que [es ko] {introduces a 
question), 2. 
et [e], and, 3. 

les Etats-Unis [le zeta zyni], m., 
the United States, 32. 
l’ete [lete], m., summer, 27. 
etonner [etone], to astonish, 21. 
l’etranger [letra 3 e], m., stranger, 
foreigner, 32. 

etre [e:tr], to be, 14; —to be¬ 
long to, 26. 

l’etude [letyd],/ , study, 2. 
eux [ 0 ], they, them, 22. 

facile [fasil], easy, 2. 
le facteur [faktce:r], porter, 14; 
postman, 31. 


faible [febl], weak, 41. 
la faim [fe], hunger; avoir—, to be 
hungry, 24. 

faire [fe:r], to do, make, 26; — 
beau (temps), to be fine (weath¬ 
er), 27. 

la famille [famiij], family, 9. 
fatiguer [fatige], to tire, 37. 
il faudra [fodra], it will be neces¬ 
sary, 44. 

il faut [il fo], it is necessary, must, 
42. 

le faux-col [fo kol], collar, 19. 
la femme [fam], woman, wife, 9. 
la fenetre [faneitr], window, 1. 
la ferine [ferm], farm, 28. 
fermer [ferme], to shut, close, 6. 
la fete [fe:t], holiday, 34. 
fevrier [fevrie], February, 34. 
le fiance [fjase], fiancd, 29. 
la figure [figy:r], face, 38. 
la fille [fi:j], daughter, girl, 4, 9. 
le fils [fis], son, 9. 
la fin [f e], end, 28. 
finir [finirr], to finish, 8. 


err English-french fin 


errand, la course, 
evening, le soir. 
every, tout; chaque. 
everybody, tout le monde 
evil, le mal. 
exercise, le devoir, 
eye, l'ceil, m.; pi. yeux. 

face, la figure, 
to fall, tomber*. 
family, la famille. 
far, loin, 
farm, la ferme. 
fashion, la mode, 
fashionable, a la mode, 
fast, vite; to be — {watch), avan- 
cer. 


father, le p&re. 
to fatigue, fatiguer. 
fear, la peur. 

to fear, craindre, avoir peur. 
February, fevrier. 
to feel, sentir; to — well, etc., se 
sentir* bien, etc. 
few, peu. 
fewer, moins. 
fiance, le fiancd. 
field, le champ, 
fifteen, quinze. 
fifty, cinquante. 
to fight, se battre*. 
finally, enfin. 
to find, trouver. 
fine, beau. 


356 



fle FRANQAIS 

la fleur [flceir], flower, 8. 
la fois [fwa], time, 23. 
fonce [fose], dark (of colors ), 33. 
fort [fo:r], strong, 41. 
la fourchette [turret], fork, 43. 
le franc [fra], franc (20 cents), 17. 
fr a n cais [frase], French, 2. 
la France [fra:s], France, 
frapper [frape], to strike, knock, 11. 
le frere [fre:r], brother, 9. 
froid [frwa], cold, 27; avoir —, to 
be cold, 36. 

fumer [fyme], to smoke, 22. 
le fusil [fyzi], gun, 39. 


gagner [gape], to gain, win, 39. 
le gant [ga], glove, 33. 


■ANGLAIS ' gUJ 

le garfon [garso], boy, 4; waiter. 
13. 

la gare Tga:r], railway station, 14. 
le gateau [gato], cake, 23. 
gauche [go$], left; a—, to (on) 
the left, 31. 

le general, pi. generaux general, 
3 enero], general, 39. 
la glace [glas], ice, 27; mirror, 38. 
grand [gra], large, great, big, 4. 
la grand’mere [grameir], grand¬ 
mother, 29, 

le grand-pere [grapeir], grand¬ 
father, 29. 
gris fgrij, gray, 18. 
la guerre [ge:r], war, 39. 
le guichet [giSe], ticket- or stamp- 
wmdow, 14. 


fin ENGLISH-FRENCH gra 


to finish, finir. 
first, premier, -&re. 
five, cinq, 
flag, le drapeau. 

floor, plancher; on the second —, 
au premier, 
flower, la fleur. 
foolish, bete. 

foot, le pied; on —, & pied, 
for, pour. 

foreigner, l’etranger, m. 
to forget, oublier. 
fork, la fourchette. 
forty, quarante. 
four, quatre. 
franc, le franc. 

French, frangais. 

Frenchman, le Franyais. 

Friday, le vendredi. 
friend, l’ami, m.; ramie, /. 
from, de. 

in front of, devant. 
funny, drole. 


to gain, gagner. 
garden, le jardin. 
gate, la porte. 
general, le general. 

German, allemand. 
to get, chercher; — down, des- 
cendre*; — out, sortir*, des- 
cendre*; — into, monter*; — 
up, se lever*, 
gift, le cadeau. 
girl, la fille. 

to give, donner; — back, rendre. 
glad, content. 

glass, le verre, la glace (mirror). 
glove, le gant. 

to go, aller*; — away, partir*; — 
in, entrer*; — out, sortir*; — to 
bed, se coucher*; — up, mon¬ 
ter*; — (right) (of clocks), mar¬ 
cher (bien);— down,descendre*. 
good, bon, -ne; — morning, bon- 
jour. 

grandfather, le grand-p&re. 

357 



hab 


FRAN 9 AIS-ANGLAIS 


il 


habiller [abije], to dress, 37. 
l’habit [labi], m. } coat, 18. 

‘haut [o], high; en —, upstairs, 7. 
Henri [ciri], Henry, 23. 

Henriette [arjet], Henrietta, 26. 
l’herbe [lerb],/., grass, 8, 
l’heure [loe:r], hour, time, 
o’clock, 23, 24; de bonne —, 
early, 21; de meilleure —, ear¬ 
lier, 37. 

heureux, -se, [cero, oero:z], hap¬ 

py, 31. 


hier [jerr], yesterday, 26. 
l’histoire [listwa:r], /., story, 2. 
l’hiver [liveir], m., winter, 27. 
Phomme [lorn], m., man, 23. 
l’hotel [lotel], m., hotel, 32. 
‘huit [yit], eight, 24. 


ici [isi], here, 7. 
il [il], m., he, it, 3. 
il y a [il ja], there is, there are, 7; 
ago, 29. 


gra ENGLISH-FRENCH if 


grandmother, la grand’mere. 

grass, 1’herbe, /. 

ground-floor, le rez-de-chauss6e. 

gray, gris. 

green, vert. 

grocer, l’epicier, m. 

to grow, pousser. 

guest, l’invite, m. 

to guide, mener. 

gun, le fusil. 


hair, les cheveux, m. 
half, demi, la moitie; — past, et 
demie. 

hand, la main, 
handkerchief, le mouchoir. 
handsome, beau, belle, 
happy, heureux, -se. 
hat, le chapeau. 

to have, avoir; — to, devoir, § 447. 
he, il. 

head, latete; —ache, mal 4 latete. 
health, la sante. 
to hear, entendre, 
heaven, le ciel. 

Henry, Henri. 

Henrietta, Henriette. 
her (pron.), elle, la; to —, lui; 
( adj .), son, sa, ses. 


here, ici; — is, — are, voici. 

hers, le sien. 

herself, se, elle. 

him, le, lui. 

himself, se, lui. 

his (adj.), son, sa, ses; ( pron .), le 
sien. 

to hold, tenir. 

holiday, la f§te. 

at home, chez . . . 

horse, le cheval, pi. les chevaux. 

hot, chaud; to be —, avoir chaud. 

hotel, l’hbtel, m. 

hour, l’heure, /.; at what —, a 
quelle heure. 

house, la maison; at (in, to) the — 
of, chez . . . 

how, comment; — are you? com¬ 
ment allez-vous?; — much, com- 
bien (de). 
however, pourtant. 
hunger, la faim; to be hungry, 
avoir faim. 

to hurry, se dep^cher*. 
to hurt, blesser; faire mal k . . . 
husband, le mari. 


ice, la glace, 
if, si. 


358 



ill 


FRAN 9 AIS-ANGLAIS 


illustre [ilystrd], see carte-postale. 
impossible [eposibl], impossible, 
42. 

l’invite [levite], m., guest, 43. 
inviter [evite], to invite, 42. 


jamais [ 3 ame], ever; ne . . . —, 
never, 32. 

janvier [ 3 dvje], January, 34. 
le jardin fearde], garden, 8 . 
jaune [ 3 on], yellow, 33. 
je [ 30 ], I, 3. 

Jean [ 3 d], John, 7. 
le jeudi [ 3 oedi], Thursday, 23. 
jeune [ 3 cen], young, 29. 
joli [soli], pretty, 23. 
jouer [ 3 we], to play, 4. 
le jour [ 3 u:r], day, 21 ; tous les—s, 
every day, 21 . 


leg 

le journal pi. joumaux [surnal, 
5 urno], newspaper, 38. 
joyeux -se [ 3 wajo, 3 wajo:z], joy¬ 
ful, 34. 

juillet [ 3 yije], July, 34. 
juin [ 3 yd], June, 34. 
jusqu’a [ 3 yska], as far as, up to, 
till, 34. 


la [la], the, 1; her, it, 18. 

la [la], there, 7. 

la laine [len], wool, 18 

laisser [lcse], to let, leave, 16. 

le lait [le], milk, 13. 

lalangue [la:g], tongue, language, 4. 

large [lar 3 ], broad, wide, 33. 

laver [lave], to wash, 37. 

le [la], the, 1 ; him, it, 18. 

la legon [lasa], lesson, 2 . 


ill 


ENGLISH - FRENCH 


les 


ill ( adj .), malade; ( adv .), mal. 

illness, la maladie. 

immediately, tout de suite. 

impossible, impossible. 

in, dans, en. 

ink, l’encre, f. 

into, dans. 

to introduce, presenter, 
to invite, inviter. 

is, est; — to, devoir, § 447. 

it, il, elle, le, la; of —, en. 

January, janvier. 

John, Jean, 
journey, le voyage, 
joyous, joyeux, -se. 

July, juillet. 

June, juin. 

to kill, tuer. 
kind, bon, aimable. 


kitchen, la cuisine, 
knife, le couteau. 
to knock, frapper. 
to know, connaitre, savoir. 

lace, la dentelle. 
lady, la dame, 
land, la terre. 
language, la langue. 
large, grand, 
last, dernier, demiere. 
late, tard. 

laundress, la blanchisseuse. 

lawyer, l’avocat. 

to lead, conduire. 

to learn, apprendre. 

least, le moins; at —, au moins. 

to leave (go away), partir*. 

left, gauche. 

less, moins. 

lesson, la legon. 

359 




leg 


FRAN 9 AIS-AN GLAIS 


man 


le legume [legym], vegetable, 23. 
lent [la], slow, 36. 
lequel, laquelle [lokel, lakel], 
which, 44. 
les [le], the; them, 
la lettre [letr], letter, 31. 
leur [loe:r], to them, 19; their, 9; le 
—, theirs, 43. 

lever [love], to raise, 37; se —*, 
to rise, get up, 37. 
le lieutenant [ljoetna], lieutenant, 
39. 

le linge [le:3], linen (washing), 37. 
lire [li:r], to read, 36. 
le lit [li], bed, 32. 
le livre [liivr], book, 1. 
loin [lwe], far, 42. 
longtemps [lota], a long time, long, 
27. 

louer [lwe], to rent, 42. 
lui [lyi], to him, to her, to it, 18; 
him, he, 19. 

le lundi [lcedi], Monday, 23. 


Madame [madam], Madam, Mrs., 
16. 

Mademoiselle [madmwazel], Miss, 

21 . 

le magasin [magaze], store, 12. 
mai [me], May, 34. 
la main [me], hand, 38. 
maintenant [metna], now, 12. 
mais [me], but, 8. 
la maison [mezo], house, 6. 
le maitre [meitr], master, teacher, 
1 . 

la maitresse [metres], mistress, 1. 
le mal, pi. maux [mal, mo], evil, 
pain, 41. 

mal [mal], ill, badly, 24; faire —, 
to hurt, 41; avoir —a la tete, 
to have a head ache, 41. 
malade [malad], ill, sick, 41. 
la maladie [maladi], illness, 41. 
la malle [mal], trunk, 14. 
le mandat [mada], money-order, 31. 
manger [ma 3 e], to eat, 6. 


let ENGLISH-FRENCH mat 


let {him, her, them), que, § 418, 1. 
to let, laisser. 

letter, la lettre;-box, la boite 

aux lettres;-carrier, le fac- 

teur. 

lieutenant, le lieutenant. 

life, la vie. 

light {of colors ), clair. 

lightning, 1’eclair, m. 

like, comme. 

to like, aimer. 

linen, le linge. 

to listen, ecouter. 

little {adj.), petit; {adv.), peu. 

to live, demeurer. 

living-room, le salon. 

long: a — time, longtemps. 

no longer, ne . . . plus. 

to look at, regarder;—for, chercher. 


to lose, perdre. 
to love, aimer, 
to lunch, dejeuner, 
lunch-counter, le buffet. 


maid, la bonne, 
to make, faire. 
man, bhomme, m. 
many, beaucoup; too —, trop; so 
—, tant; how—, combien. 
March, mars, 
to march, marcher, 
to marry, epouser, se marier*. 
Mary, Marie, 
master, le maitre. 
match, l’allumette, /. 
matter: what is the — with you? 
qu’avez-vous? 



mar 


FRAN QAIS-ANGLAIS 


mot 


le marchand [mar$a], dealer, 
merchant, 22. 

marcher [mar$e], to walk, go, 
march, 12. 

le marche [mar$e], market; bon 
—, cheap, 18. 

le mardi [mardi], Tuesday, 18. 
le mari [mari], husband, 9. 
marier [marje], to marry, 29; se 
—*, to get married, 37. 
mars [mars], March, 34. 
le matelot [matlo], sailor, 44. 
le matin [mate], morning, 21. 
mauvais [move], bad, 27. 
me [ma], me, to me, 18, 19. 
le medecin [medse], doctor, 29. 
meilleur [mejceir], better (ad;.), 28. 
meme [me:m], same, 29. 
menuisier [manyizje], cabinet¬ 
maker, carpenter, 26. 
la mer [men], sea, 44. 
merci [mersi], thank you, 16. 
le mercredi [merkradi], Wednes¬ 
day, 23. 

la mere [me:r], mother, 9. 
le metier [metje], trade* 26. 
le metre [me:tr], meter, 33. 
mettre [metr], to put, put on, 
place, set, 11. 


midi [midi], m., noon, 23. 
le mien [mje], mine, 43. 
mieux [mjo], better ( adv .), 28. 
minuit [minyi], m., midnight, 24. 
la minute [minyt], minute, 24. 
la mode [mod], fashion, 33; H la 
—, fashionable, 33. 
la modiste [modist], milliner, 19. 
moi [mwa], me, to me, 19. 
moins [mwe], less, fewer, 17; a —• 
que, unless, 41; au —, at least, 
29. 

le mois [mwa], month, 27. 
la moitie [mwatje], half, 31. 
mon, ma, mes [mo, ma, me], my, 9* 
le monde [maid], world, 28; peo- 
pel, 21; tout le —, everybody, 
28. 

Monsieur [masjo], Sir, Mr., gen¬ 
tleman, 13. 

monter* [mote], to go up, 7. 
la montre lmo:tr], watch, 24. 
montrer [motre], to show, 19. 
morceau [morso], piece, 43. 
la mort [mo:r], death, 39. 
mort* [mo:r], dead, 29; (p . p. of 
mourir*, to die), 
le mot [mo], word, 3. 


May 


ENGLISH - FRENCH 


mov 


May, mai. 
me, me, moi. 
meal, le repas. 
to mean, vouloir dire, 
meat, la viande. 
to meet, rencontrer. 
to mend, raccommoder. 
merchant, le marchand. 
meter, le metre, 
midnight, minuit, m. 
milk, le lait. 
milliner, la modiste, 
mine, le mien, 
minute, la minute. 


mirror, la glace. 

mistake: to make a —, se trom- 
per*. 

mistress, la maitresse. 

Monday, le lundi. 

money, l’argent, m.;-order, le 

mandat, 
month, le mois. 

more, plus; no —, ne . . . plus, 
morning, le matin, 
most, le plus, 
mother, la mere, 
mouth, la bouche. 
moving-picture show, le cinema 
361 



mou 


FRAN 9AIS-ANGLAIS 


cel 


le mouchoir [mu§wa:r], handker¬ 
chief, 19. 

la musique [myzik], music, 21. 


la nappe [nap], table-cloth, 43. 
naturel, -le [natyrel], natural, 33. 
n’est-ce pas? [nes pa], isn’t that 
so? 23. 

ne . . . pas [no pa], not, 6. 
ne . . . personne [person], nobody, 
no one, 32. 

ne . . . plus [ply], no longer, 32. 
ne . . . que [ko], only, nothing but, 
32. 

ne [ne], born, 29; ( p . p. of naitre*, 
to be born). 

la neige [neis], snow, 29. 
neuf [ncef], nine, 24. 
le neveu [novo], nephew, 29. 


la niece [njes], niece, 29. 

Noel [noel], m. f Christmas, 34. 
noir [nwa:r], black, 4. 
non [no], no, not, 2. 
la note [not], bill, 23. 
notre, nos [notr, no], our, 9. 
le notre [no:tr], ours, 43. 
nous [nu], we, 3; us, to us, 18, 19; 
ourselves, 37. 

novembre [novaibr], November, 
34. 

le nuage [nya: 3 ], cloud, 27. 
la nuit [nyi], night, 36. 
le numero [nymero], number, 32. 


obliger [obli 3 e], to oblige, 26. 

1’occasion [lokazjo], /., opportu¬ 
nity, 42. 

l’oeillet [loeje], m., pink, 8. 


mUC ENGLISH-FRENCH old 


much, beaucoup (de); as —, au- 
tant; too —, trop; how —, com- 
bien. 

music, la musique. 
must, il faut que, § 429; devoir, 
§447. 

my, mon, ma, mes. 


napkin, la serviette, 
natural, naturel, -le. 
near, pres de. 
nearly, presque. 
it is necessary, il faut, § 429. 
necktie, la cravate. 
to need, avoir besoin de. 
nephew, le neveu. 
never, ne . . . jamais. 

New Year’s Day, le jour de l’an; 

Happy New Year, bonne annee. 
newspaper, le journal, 
niece, la niece. 


night, la nuit. 
nine, neuf. 
nineteen, dix-neuf. 
no, non; — longer, — more, ne 
. . . plus; — one, ne . . . per¬ 
sonne; no . . ., § 248. 
nobody, ne . . . personne. 
noon, midi, m. 
notie, § 123. 
not, ne . . . pas. 
nothing, ne . . . rien. 

November, novembre. 
now, maintenant. 
number, le numero. 


to oblige, obliger. 
o’clock, l’heure, /. 
October, octobre. 
of, de. 

often, souvent. 
old, vieux, vieille. 
362 



Ol'S 


FRAN 9AIS-ANGLAIS 


pen 


l’oiseau [Iwazo], m., bird, 28. 
on [5], one, people, we, you, they, 
24. 

I’oncle [lo:kl], m., uncle, 9. 
onze [5:z], eleven, 24. 
ou [u], or, 9. 
oh [u], where, 1. 
oublier [ublie], to forget, 23. 
oui [wi], yes, 2. 

ouvert [uveir], open, 27; ( p . p. of 
ouvrir, to open). 

l’ouvrier [luvrie], m., workman, 
26. 

ouvrir [uvriir], to open, 26, 44. 

la paille [paij], straw, 33. 
le pain [pe], bread, 13. 
la paire [peir], pair, 33. 
la paix [pe], peace, 39. 
le pantalon [patalo], trousers, 18. 
le paquebot [pakbo], steamer, 44. 
Paques [pa:k], m., Easter, 34. 
le paquet [pake], parcel, bundle, 
33. 


par [pair], by, through, 43. 
le pare [park], park, 12. 
parce que [pars ka], because, 16. 
le pardessus [pardasy], overcoat, 
18. 

le parent [para], relative, 9. 
parfait [parfe], perfect, 38. 

Paris [pari], Paris, 14. 
parisien, -ne [parizje, parizjen], 
Parisian, 32. 

parler [parle], to speak, 3. 
la partie [parti], part, 42. 
partir* [partiir], to depart, go 
away, leave, 14. 
pas [pa], not, not any. See ne. 
passer [pase], to pass; to spend, 33. 
pauvre [poivr], poor, 19. 
payer [peje], to pay, 23. 
le pays [pei], country, 41. 
le paysan [peiza], peasant, 28. 
peigner [pejie], to comb, 38. 
pendant [pada], during, 27;—que, 
while, 27. 

la pendule [padyl], clock, 24. 
penser [pase], to think, 26. 


On ENGLISH-FRENCH pea 


on, sur. 

on board, a bord. 
once, une fois; at —, tout de suite, 
one, un, une; ( pron .), on; the —, 
celui, celle. 

only, seulement, ne . . . que. 
to open, ouvrir. 
open, ouvert. 
opportunity, Poccasion, /. 
or, ou. 

to order, commander, 
in order that, afin que, pour que. 
other, autre, 
ought, devoir, § 447. 
our, notre, nos. 
ours, le notre. 

363 


overcoat, le pardessus. 
to owe, devoir. 


package, le colis. 
pair, la paire. 
paper, le devoir, 
parcel, le colis. 

parcel-post package, le colis postal. 

Parisian, parisien, -ne. 

park, le pare. 

part, la partie. 

to pass, passer. 

to pay, payer. 

peace, la paix. 

peasant, le paysan. 



pen 


FRAN 9 AIS-AN GL AIS 


pre 


la pension tpasjo], pension; board¬ 
ing-house, 42, 
perdre [perdr], to lose, 12. 
le pere [pe:r], father, 9. 
permettre [permetr], to permit, 43. 
la personne [person], person; ne 
... —, nobody, no one, 32. 
petit [poti], little, small, 4. 
peu [po], little, few, 16. 
la peur [pce:r], fear; avoir —, to be 
afraid, 36. 

peut-etre [pot-etr], perhaps, 16. 
la phrase [fra:z], sentence, 3. 
la piece [pjes], play, 36. 
le pied [pje], foot, 36. 

Pierre [pje:r], Peter, 9. 
la pipe [pip], pipe, 22. 
la place [plas], place, seat, 14. 
plaindre [pleidr], to pity, 44; se 
—*, to complain, 44. 
le plaisir [pleziir], pleasure, 21. 
s’il vous plait [sil vu pie], if you 
please, 33. 

pleuvoir [plcevwa:r], to rain, 27. 
la pluie [plyi], rain, 27. 
la plume [plym], pen, 2 


plus [ply], more, most, 28; ne . . . 
—, not again, no more, no 
longer, 32. 

plusieurs [plyzjoe:r], several, 44. 
poll [poli], polite, 32. 
la pomme [pom], apple, 13; —de 
terre, potato, 13. 
le pont [p5], bridge, deck, 44. 
la porte [port], door, gate, 6. 
porter[ porte], to carry, 16; wear, 
18. 

poser [poze], to place, 26. 
possible [posibl], possible, 28. 
la poste [post], post-office, 31. 
le potage [pota: 3 ], soup, 13. 
pour [pu:r], for, 12; —que, in or¬ 
der that, 41. 

le pourboire [purbwair], tip, 31. 
pourquoi [purkwa], why, 26. 
pourtant [purta], however, 29. 
pousser [puse], to grow, 8. 
la poussiere [pusierr], dust, 28. 
pouvoir [puvwair], to be able, 6. 
premier, -ere [promje, promje:r] 
first, 32; au —, on the second 
floor, 32 


pen 


ENGLISH - FRENCH 


pre 


pen, la plume, 
pencil, le crayon, 
people, le monde. 
perfect, parfait. 
perhaps, peut-etre. 
to permit, permettre. 

Peter, Pierre, 
piece, le morceau. 
pink, l’ceillet, m. 
pipe, la pipe, 
to pity, plaindre. 
place, la place, 
to place, mettre, poser, 
plate, l’assiette, /. 
play, la pi&ce. 
to play, jouer. 

364 


pleasant, agreable. 
if you please, s’il vous plait, 
pleasure, le plaisir. 
polite, poli, -e. 
poor, pauvre. 
porter, le facteur. 
possible, possible, 
postal-parcel, le colis postal, 
post-card, la carte postale; picture 
—, la carte postale illustree. 
postman, le facteur. 
post-office, la poste. 
potato, la pomme de terre. 
to prefer, aimer mieux. 
present, le cadeau. 
to present, presenter. 



pre 


FRAN 9 AIS- ANGL AIS 


rap 


prendre [pra:dr], to take, catch, 
32. 

pres (de) [pre (da)], near, 22. 
presenter [prezate], to present, in¬ 
troduce, 43. 

presque [presko], almost, 21. 
prier [prie], to pray, beg, 26. 
le printemps [preta], spring, 27. 
le prix [pri], price, 17. 
le professeur [profesoer], professor, 
2 . 

se promener* [sa promne], to take 
a walk, 37. 

prononcer [pronose], ta pronounce, 
3. 

propre [propr], clean, 37. 
la provision [provizjo], supply, 44. 
puis [pyi], then, 21. 

le quai [ke], wharf, 44. 
la qualite [kalite], quahty, 33. 
quand [kci], when, 24. 
quarante [kara:t], forty, 29. 
quart [kar], quarter, fourth, 24; 
—d’heure, quarter of an hour, 
24. 

quatorze [katorz], fourteen, 28. 


quatre [katr], four, 24. 
quatre-vingts [katrave], eighty, 29. 
que [ka], whom, which, that, let 
(§ 418), than, as; ( interrog .), 
what; ne . . . —, only, 32. 
quel [kel], what; which; what 
a .. .! 8. 

quelque [kelka], some, any, 31;— 
chose, something, 31, 
quelqu’un [kelkoe], some one, 38. 
quelquefois [kelkafwa], sometimes, 
31. 

qu’est-ce qui? [kes ki], what? 44. 
la question [kestjo], question, 26. 
qui [ki], who, which, that, 7; (in¬ 
terrog. or after prep.), who, 
whom, 11. 

quinze [ke:z], fifteen, 28. 
quoi [kwa], which, what, 44. 
quoique [kwak], although, 41. 

raccommoder [rakomade], to mend, 
37. 

la raison [rezo], reason; avoir —, 
to be right, 36. 

se rappeler* [sa raple], to remem¬ 
ber, 38. 


pre 


ENGLISH - FRENCH 


ren 


pretty, joli. 
price, le prix. 
professor, le professeur. 
to pronounce, prononcer. 
pupil, l’eleve, m. or f. 
purchase, 1’achat, m. 
to put, put on, mettre. 


quality, la quality, 
quarter le quart, 
queer, drole. 
question, la question, 
quick, vite. 


railroad, le chemin de fer. 
railway car, le wagon, 
railway station, la gare. 
rain, la pluie; to —, pleuvoir. 
to raise, lever, 
to read, lire, 
reason, la raison, 
to receive, recevoir. 
red, rouge, 
to regret, regretter. 
relative, le parent, 
to remain, rester*. 
to remember, se rappeler*. 
to rent, louer. 


365 



rec 


FRAN QAIS-AN GLAIS 


san 


recevoir [rasavwair], to receive, 43. 
regarder [ragarde], to look at, 24. 
regretter [ragrete], to regret, be 
sorry, 42. 

rencontrer [rakatre], to meet, 11. 
rendre [raidr], to give back, 39. 
le repas [rapa], meal, 42. 
repondre (a) [repaidr (a)], to an¬ 
swer, 17. 

se reposer* [sa rapoze], to rest, 37. 
le restaurant [restara], restaurant, 
16. 

rester* [reste], to remain, 42. 
retarder [ratarde], to be slow (of 
clocks), 24. 

revenir* [ravaniir], to come back, 
28. 

le rez-de-chaussee [re da Sose], 
ground-floor, 32. 
le rhume [rym], cold, 36. 


rien [rj e]: ne . .. —, nothing, 32. 
la robe [rob], dress, 17. 
la rose [ro:z], rose, 8. 
rouge [ru: 3 ], red, 4. 
le ruban [ryba], ribbon, 19. 
la rue [ry], street, 11. 


saisir [sezi:r], to seize, 8. 
la saison [seza], season, 27. 
sale [sal], dirty, 37. 
salir [saliir], to soil, 28. 
la salle [sal], room, 1; — a manger 
[md 3 e], dining-room, 6;— d’at- 
tente [data:t], waiting-room, 14; 
—de bains [be], bath-room, 38; 
-—de classe [klas], class-room, 1. 
le salon [sala], drawing-room, 6. 
le samedi [samdi], Saturday, 23. 
sans [sa], without, 21. 


rep ENGLISH-FRENCH set 


to reply, r6pondre. 
to rest, se reposer*, 
restaurant, le restaurant, 
to return, revenir*. 
ribbon, le ruban. 

right, droit; to the —, k droite; to 
be —, avoir raison, 
to ring, sonner. 
to rise, se lever*, 
road, le chemin. 

room, la chambre; la salle; bed- 
—, la chambre 4 coucher; 

dining -, la salle a manger; 

class -, la salle de classe; bath- 

—, la salle de bains; waiting-, 

la salle d’attente. 
rose, la rose. 

to run, courir, marcher (of clocks). 

sailor, le matelot. 
same, meme. 

366 


Saturday, le samedi. 
to say, dire. 

school, l’ecole, /.; at —, k l’ecole. 
school-master, le mattre d’4cole. 
school-mistress, la maitresse 
d^cole. 
sea, la mer. 
season, la saison. 
seat, la place, 
seated, assis. 

second, deuxi&me; — floor, le 
premier, 
to see, voir, 
to seek, chercher. 
to seize, saisir. 
to sell, vendre. 
to send, envoyer. 
sentence, la phrase. 

September, septembre. 
sermon, le sermon, 
servant, la bonne, 
to set, mettre. 



san 


FRAN 9 AIS-ANGLAIS 


son 


la sante [sate], health, 41. 
savoir [savwair], to know, 26. 
le savon [savo], soap, 37, 
la scene [sen], stage, 36, 
ce [so], (to) himself, herself, itself, 
oneself, themselves, 37. 
seize [se:z], sixteen, 28. 
la semaine [somen], week, 23. 
sentir [satiir], to feel, 38. 
sept [set], seven, 24. 
septembre [septaibr], September, 
34. 

le sermon [sermo], sermon, 21. 
la serviette [servjet], towel, 37; 

napkin, 43. 
seul [soel], alone, 22. 
seulement [soelma], only, 23. 
si [si], if, 18; so, 23. 


le sien [sje], his, hers, its, 42. 
six [sis], six, 24. 
la sceur [sce:r], sister, 9. 
la soie [swa], silk, 17. 
la soif [swaf], thirst; avoir—, to 
be thirsty, 24. 
le soir [swa:r], evening, 23. 
soixante [swasait], sixty, 29. 
soixante-dix [dis], seventy, 29. 
le soldat [solda], soldier, 39. 
le soleil [soleij], sun, 27. 
le sommeil [somerj], sleep; avoir 
—, to be sleepy, 36. 
son, sa, ses [so, sa, se], his, her, 
its, 9. 

la sonnette [sonet], bell, 6. 
sonner [sone], to ring, 6. 
sont [so], are, 2. 


sev ENGLISH-FRENCH Spe 


seven, sept. 

seventy, soixante-dix. 

several, plusieurs. 

to shine, briller. 

shirt, la chemise. 

shoe, le soulier. 

shop: to the — of, chez . . . 

to show, montrer. 

to shut, fermer. 

sick, malade. 

sickness, la maladie. 

side, le c6te. 

sidewalk, le trottoir. 

silk, la soie. 

since, depuis; — when, depuis 
quand, depuis combien de temps, 
to sing, chanter, 
sir, monsieur, 
sister, la sceur. 
sit down! asseyez-vous! 
six, six. 
sixteen, seize, 
sky, le ciel. 
to sleep, dormir. 


sleep, le sommeil. 
to be sleepy, avoir sommeil. 
slow, lent; to be — (of clocks ), re¬ 
tarder, 
small, petit, 
to smoke, fumer. 
snow, la neige. 

so, done, si; — many, — much, 
tant; — that, afin que. 
soap, le savon. 
sock, la chaussette. 
to soil, salir. 
soldier, le soldat. 
some, du, § 123, quelque. 
some one, quelqu’un. 
something, quelque chose, 
sometimes, quelquefois. 
son, le fils, 
soon, bientot. 

sorry, fache; to be —, 6tre fach6 
de; regretter. 
soup, le potage. 
to speak, parler. 
to spend (time), passer. 


367 



sor 


FRAN 9 AIS-ANGLAIS 


tor 


cortir* [sortin'], to go out, 14. 
le soulier [sulje], shoe, 32. 
cous [su], under, 37. 
souvent [suva], often, 22. 
le sucre [sykr], sugar, 26. 
tout de suite [tu do syit], at once, 
19. 

sur [sy:r], on, 1. 


le tabac [taba], tobacco, 22. 
la table [tabl], table, 1. 
le tailleur [tajceir], tailor, 18. 
tant [ta], so much, so many, 17. 
la tante [ta.it], aunt, 9. 
tard [ta:r], late, 21. 


la tasse [tas], cup, 43. 
le taxi [taksi], taxi, taxicab, 36. 
le temps [ta], time, 31; weather, 
32; a—, in time, 36; combien 
de—, how long, 34. 
tenir [taniir], to hold, 33. 
la terre [te:r], land, 44. 
la tete [teit], head, 41. 
le the [te], tea, 26. 
le theatre [tea:tr], theater, 36. 
le timbre [te:br], stamp, 31. 
la toilette [twalet], toilette, 38. 
tomber* [tobe], to fall, 27. 
le tonnerre [tone:r], thunder, 27. 
le tort [to:r], wrong; avoir—, to 
be wrong, 36. 


SpO ENGLISH-FRENCH .. the 


spoon, la cuiller. 
spring, le printemps. 
stage, la scene, 
stairs, Fescalier, m. 

stamp, le timbre;-window, le 

guichet. 

to start, partir*. 
station, la gare. 
to stay, rester*. 
steamer, le paquebot. 
still, encore, 
stocking, le bas. 
store, le magasin. 
to stop, s’arreter*. 
story, Fhistoire, /. 
stranger, Fetranger, m. 
straw, la paille. 

street, la rue;-car, le tramway. 

to strike, frapper. 
strong, fort, 
stupid, b6te. 
study, F etude, /. 
sugar, le sucre, 
suit, le costume, 
summer, Fete, m. 
sun, le soleil. 


Sunday, le dimanche. 
sword, l’epee, /. 


table, la table;-cloth, la nappe. 

tailor, le tailleur. 
to take, prendre, 
to talk, parler. 
taxi, taxicab, le taxi, 
tea, le the. 
to teach, enseigner. 
teacher, le maitre, la maitresse. 
to tell, dire, 
ten, dix. 
than, que. 
thank you, merci. 
that ( adj .), ce, cet, cette; ( pron .), 
celui, celle; celui-la, celle-la; 
cela; ( rel . pron.), qui, que; 
(< conj .), que. 
the, le, la, les. 
theater, le theatre, 
their, leur. 
theirs, le leur. 

them, les, eux, elles; to—, leur. 
themselves, se, eux. 



tou 


FRAN 9 AIS-ANGL AIS 


tro 


toujours [tu 3 u:r], always, 18. 
tout, -e, tous, toutes [tu, tut], 
all, 9; tous les deux, both, 29; 
tous les .. every . . 21; 

tout de suite, at once, 19. 
la tragedie [tra 3 edi], tragedy, 36. 
le train [tre], train, 14. 
le tramway [tramwe], street-car, 
12 . 

le travail [travaij], work, 8. 
travailler [travaje], to work, 26. 


a travers [a traveir], across, 26. 
traverser [traverse], to cross, 44. 
treize [tre:z], thirteen, 28. 
trente [trait], thirty, 29. 
tres [tre], very, 7. 
trois [trwa], three, 22. 
tromper [trope], to deceive, 37; se 
—*, to be mistaken, 37. 
le trottoir [trotwair], sidewalk, 12. 
trop [tro], too much, too many, 
too, 17. 


the ENGLISH-FRENCH Uni 


then, puis. 

there, la, y; — is, — are, il y a, 
voila. 

therefore, done. 

these ( adj .), ces; (pron.), ceux-ci, 
celles-ci. 
they, ils, on. 
thing, la chose, 
to think, penser. 
third, troisieme. 

thirst, la soif; to be thirsty, avoir 
soif. 

thirty, trente. 

this (adj.), ce, cet, cette; (pron.), 
celui, celle; celui-ci, celle-ei; ceci. 
those (adj.), ces; (pron.), ceux-la, 
celles-la. 
three, trois. 
through, par. 
thunder, le tonnerre. 

Thursday, le jeudi. 

ticket, le billet;-window, le 

guichet. 
till, jusqu’a. 

time, le temps; la fois; Theure, /. 
tip, le pourboire. 
to tire, fatiguer. 
to, a. 

tobacco, le tabac. 

tobacconist, le marchand de tabac. 

to-day, aujourd’hui. 


together, ensemble, 
to-morrow, demain. 
tongue, la langue. 
too, aussi; trop; — much, trop. 
tooth, la dent; — ache, mal aux 
dents. 

towel, la serviette, 
town, la ville; in —, en ville. 
trade, le metier, 
tragedy, la tragedie. 
train, le train, 
to travel, voyager, 
traveler, le voyageur. 
trousers, le pantalon, 
true, vrai. 
trunk, la malle. 
to try, essayer. 

Tuesday, le mardi. 
tulip, la tulipe. 

twelve, douze; — o’clock, midi, 
minuit. 
twenty, vingt. 
twice, deux fois. 
two, deux. 

uncle, l’oncle, m 
under, sous. 

to understand, comprendre. 
to undress, deshabiller*. 

United States, les Etats-Unis, m. 
unless, a moins que. 

369 



tro 


FRAN 9 AIS-ANGLAIS 


vit 


trouver [truve], to find, 4. 
tuer [tye], to kill, 39. 
la tulipe [tylip], tulip, 8. 


un, une [de, yn], a, an, one, 3. 


les vacances [vakais], vacation, 
28, 

la vache [va$], cow, 28, 
la valise fvaliiz], valise, 14. 
il vaut [il vo], it is worth, 33;— 
mieux, it is better, 39, 
le velours [voluir], velvet, 19. 
vendre [vaidr], to sell, 11. 


le vendredi [vadrodi], Friday, 23. 
venir* [voniir], to come, 14. 
le vent [vd], wind, 27. 
le verre [ve:r], glass, 18. 
vert [ve:r], green, 4. 
les vStements [vetma]. m., clothes, 
19. 

la viande [vja:d], meat, 13. 
la vie [vi], life, 42. 
vieux, vieille [vjo, vje:j], old, 8. 
le village [vila: 3 ], village, 28. 
la ville [vil], city, 12. 
le vin [ve], wine, 13. 
vingt [ve], twenty, 19. 
la visite [vizit], visit, 34. 
vite [vit], quickly, 36. 


Ullt ENGLISH-FRENCH win 


until, jusqu’a. 
upstairs, en haut. 
us, to us, nous, 
to use to, § 262. 


vacation, les vacances, /. 

valise, la valise. 

vegetable, le legume. 

velvet, le velours. 

very, tres; — much, beaucoup. 

village, le village. 

visit, la visite. 


to wait (for), attendre. 
waiter, le gargon. 
waiting-room, la salle d’attente. 
to walk, marcher; to take a —, se 
promener*. 
to want, vouloir. 
war, la guerre. 

warm, chaud; to be —, avoir 
chaud. 

to wash, laver. 
watch, la montre. 


water, l’eau, /. 
way, le chemin. 
we, nous; on. 
weak, faible. 
weapon, l’arme, /. 
to wear, porter, 
weather, le temps. 

Wednesday, le mercredi. 
week, la semaine. 
well, bien; to be —, aller* bien. 
wharf, le quai. 

what, quel, ce qui, que, qu’est-ce 
qui. 

when, quand. 
where, oh; from —, d’oh. 
which, que; lequel; quel, 
while, pendant que. 
white, blanc, blanche, 
who, qui. 

whose, dont, a qui. 
why, pourquoi. 
wide, large, 
wife, la femme, 
to win, gagner. 
wind, le vent. 

windy: it is —, il fait du vent. 


370 



voi 


FRAN 9 AIS-AN GLAIS 


y 


void [vwasi], here is, here are, 26. 
voil& [vwala], there is, there are, 7. 
voir [vwa:r], to see, 21. 
la voiture [vwatyjr], carriage, 12 
votre, pi. vos [votr, vo], your, 9. 
le votre [vo:tr], yours, 43. 
vouloir [vulwair], to wish, 6;— 
dire, to mean, 39. 
vous [vu], you, 3; to you, 19; your¬ 
self, 37. 

le voyage [vwaja: 3 ], journey, 44. 


voyager [vwaja 3 e], to travel, 44. 
le voyageur [vwaja 3 oe:r], traveler, 
16, 

vrai [vre], true, 29. 
vu [vy], seen, 21; (p. p. of voir, to 
see). 

le wagon [vago], railway car, 14. 


y [i], to it, to them, there, 22. 


win 

window, la fenetre. 
wine, le vin. 
winter, l’hiver, m. 
to wish, desirer, vouloir. 
with, avec. 
without, sans, 
woman, la femme, 
wool, la laine. 
woolen, de laine. 
word, le mot. 
work, le travail; to —, travailler. 
workman, l’ouvrier, m. 
world, le monde. 
it is worth, il vaut. 
to wound, blesser. 
to wrap, envelopper. 


you 

to write, ecrire. 

to be wrong, avoir tort. 


yard, la corn*; le metre, 
year, Fan, m.; Fannee,/. 
yellow, jaune. 
yes, oui. 
yesterday, hier. 

yet (still), encore; (however), pour- 
tant. 

you, vous; on. 
young, jeune. 
your, votre, vos. 
yours, le votre. 


ENGLISH - FRENCH 


371 







INDEX 


Numbers refer to sections 


d contracted with definite article, 
483; with infinitive after verbs, 
540; expressing possession, 522, 
2 . 

accent (stress), page 16, § 53. 
accents (acute, etc.), page 18, § 57. 
adjectives, feminine (formation), 
490; (irregular), 490, 6, 7; 
plural (formation), 491; agree¬ 
ment, 492;' possessive, 520; 
agreement, 521; repeated, 522, 
1; demonstrative, 523; com¬ 
parison, 497 ff; position, 493. 
adverbs, formation (-merit), 494; 
position, 495; comparison, 
497 ff; of quantity, 496; nu¬ 
merical, 505. 
age, 510. 

alphabet (names of letters, etc.), 
page 19, §58. 
any, see some. 

article, after etre to express pos¬ 
session, 522, 2; definite and 
indefinite, 483; definite, con¬ 
tracted with de and a, 483; defi¬ 
nite with general nouns, 484; 
definite with proper names, 486, 
2; definite with languages, 486, 
3; definite with countries, 486, 
4; definite with week-days, 486, 
5; definite with seasons, 486, 6 
and 263; definite in various 
idioms, 486, 7; definite omitted 
in titles, 487,1; definite omitted 
with appositive nouns, 487, 2; 
definite in idiomatic uses, 489; 


definite in expressions of meas¬ 
ure, weight, etc., 489, 1; definite 
with parts of body, 489, 2.; in¬ 
definite, 483; omitted with 
predicate nouns, 488, 1; omitted 
with appositive nouns, 488, 2; 
omitted with cent, mille, 488, 4. 
as, in comparisons, 499. 
aucun (ne), 532. 

££,}»*«. 

auxiliary verbs, conjugation (avoir, 
itre), page 278; use, 543; use 
in compound tenses, page 277. 
avant, distinguished from devant, 
page 126, footnote. 
avoir, see auxiliary verbs. 

bien ( + de + article), 486, note 1. 


cedilla, page 18, § 57. 
c'est, ce sont, page 120, footnote; 
525, 2. 

ce, cet, cette, 523. 

ce and il, distinguished, 525. 

ceci, cela, 524, 525. 

celui, celle, 524. 

celui-d, celui-la, 524, note 1. 

chaque, 530, 3 

chez, 173. 

-ci (-Id), 523, note 2; 524, note 1. 
clock, 508, 525; exceptions: 1. 
comme and comment, distinguished, 
page 209, footnote, 
comparison, see adjectives and 
adverbs. 

conditional, formation, use, 303. 


373 


374 


INDEX 


conditions, 555, 305. 
conjectural future or conditional, 

553. 

conjugations, of regular verbs (in 
full), page 275; of irregular 
verbs, pages 281-293; inter¬ 
rogative, 26; negative, 54. 
conjunctive pronouns, see pro¬ 
nouns. 

connaitre, distinguished from 
savoir, page 243, footnote. 

dates, 509. 

days of the week (list), 222. 
de, contracted with definite article, 
483; with infinitive after verbs, 
540; partitive use, 485; after 
adverbs of quantity, 496; 485, 
1, c; = in (after superlative), 
page 313, footnote 3; with 
names of countries, 486, 4. 
definite article, see article. 
demonstrative adjectives or pro¬ 
nouns, see adjectives, pronouns, 
depuis (tenses after), 551. 
devant, distinguished from avant, 
page 126, footnote, 
deviations permissible, 560. 
devoir (translation), 447. 
dieresis, page 18, § 57. 
disjunctive pronouns, .see pro¬ 
nouns. 

elision, page 17, § 56. 
en (prep.), with names of coun¬ 
tries, 486, 4, and 319; (pro¬ 
noun), uses, 518; ( = some, any, 
etc.), 485, 2; with numerals 
and with adverbs of quantity, 
485, 2, Note. 
est-ce que, use, 536. 
fare, conjugation, page 278; aux¬ 
iliary in compound tenses, 543; 
with passive voice, 556. 

floor (1st, 2d, etc.), page 177, 
footnote. 


fois (; temps, heure), distinguished, 
page 126, footnote, 
fractions, 507. 

future ( = English present), 554; 
(or conditional), to express 
conjecture or probability, 553. 

gender (of nouns), rules for, 557, 

£58. 

guere ine — guere), 532. 

heure, see fois; used to tell time, 
508. 

i (final) elision, page 18, Note 2. 
il and ce, distinguished, 525. 
il y a and voild, 66. 
imperative, forms, 537, 4; third 
person (how rendered), 547, 2; 
with object pronouns, 516. 
imperfect tense (indicative), use, 
552; (subjunctive), formation, 
537, 5; (subjunctive), sequence 
of tenses, 546. 

in (before places or countries), 
319. 

indefinite adjective or pronoun, 
530. 

indefinite article, see article. 
infinitive (following verbs), 540. 
interrogation, models for ques¬ 
tions, 536. 

interrogative adjectives, see ad¬ 
jectives. 

interrogative pronouns, see pro¬ 
nouns. 

irregular verbs, tabulated, pp. 
281-293; stem, 538. 

jamais (ne — jamais), 532. 

-la, 523, Note 2; 524, Note 1. 
le (pleonastic), 517. 
lequel, declined, 528, 2; (and 
quel), 526, 527 ff. 
linking (of words), page 17, § 55. 


INDEX 


375 


meilleur and mieux, distinguished, 
page 153, footnote, 
mime, use, 530, 7. 
mon for ma, 520, Note 1. 
months (list of), 347. 

ne (with pas, point), 531; posi¬ 
tion, 531, 4; redundant, 534. 
n’est-ce pas, page 130, footnote, 
negation, 531. 

ni — ni (with ne), 523; (with 
partitive), 485, Note 1. 
non, use, 535. 

nouns, gender, 481, 557-559; 
number, 482; rules for gender, 
557-558; gender (compound 
nouns), 559; used as adjectives, 
485, 1, d. 
nul {ne), 532. 

numerals, 502; pronunciation, 
504; collective, 506; fractions, 
507. 

on, use, 530, 1. 

ou ( = relative pronoun), 529, 3. 

participle (present), agreement, 
544; (past), agreement, 545; 
(past), agreement with reflexive 
pronoun, 545. 

partitive, use, 485; (see some), 
pas, use, 531; position, 531, 
1, 2, 3; omitted, 533. 
passive voice, 556. 
past definite tense, use, 552. 
past indefinite tense, use, 552 (2). 
permissible deviations, 560. 
personal pronouns, see pronouns, 
personne {ne — personne), 532. 
plupart, use, page 307, footnote 1. 
plus {ne — plus), 532. 
possession, how expressed, 522, 2. 
possessive adjective, see adjectives. 
possessive pronouns, see pronouns. 
prepositions with infinitive, 539- 
541; see also a and de. 


present subjunctive, formation, 
537, 2; sequence of tenses, 546. 
principal parts of verbs (formation 
of tenses), 537. 

probability or conjecture, (in 

future or conditional), 553. 
pronouns, conjunctive, 512; use, 
513; order, 515, 516; demon¬ 
strative, 524 ff; disjunctive, 
512; use, 513, 514; interroga¬ 
tive, summary of uses, 517; re¬ 
marks on, 528; personal (sub¬ 
ject), 511 ff; (object), 512 ff; 
possessive, 520; relative, 527, 
529; reflexive, 519; as recip¬ 
rocals, 519, 3. 
pronunciation, pages 3-23. 

que {ne — que), 523. 
quel and lequel, 526, 527 ff. 
quelconque, 530, 9, a. 
quelque, 530, 4. 
questions, models for, 536. 
jqui ? and qui, 527 ff. 
quiconque, 530, 9, b. 
quoi, 527 ff. 

regular verbs, paradigms, page 
275. 

reflexive pronouns, see pronouns. 
reflexive verbs, see verbs, 
rien {ne — rien), 532. 

savoir, distinguished from con- 
nattre, page 243, footnote, 
seasons, 263 and 486, 6. 
si, elision of i, page 101, footnote; 
= aussi in comparison, 499, 
Note. 

some (any), 485; before a noun, 
485, 1; with negative, 485, 1, 
Note; before an adjective, 
485, 1, Note; as pronoun, 
485, 2. 

son for sa, 520, Note 1. 
stress (accentuation), page 16, 
§53. 


376 


INDEX 


subjunctive, sequence of tenses, 
546; uses, 547 ff. 
superlative, formation, 497. 
syllables, division of, page 17, 
§54. 

temps, see fois. 

tenses, formation from principal 
parts, 537; compound (synop¬ 
sis of), page 277; compound 
(with avoir or etre), 543; com¬ 
pound (verbs of motion), 543, 2; 
compound (reflexive verbs), 
543, 1; use of (with depuis), 
551; use of past tense, 552; 
sequence in subjunctive, 546. 

• -tes (instead of -ez), as ending of 
2d person plural, 537 (3). 
than, before numerals, page 313, 
footnote 2. 
time of day, 508. 
ton for ta, 520, Note 1. 
tons, pronunciation, page 329, 
footnote. 
tout , 530, 2. 


tu and vous, distinguished, 511, 
Note. 

verbs, regular (paradigms), page, 
275; stem of irregular verbs, 
538; irregular (table of), pages 
281-293; irregular (compounds) 
pages 294-295; principal parts 
and formation of tenses, 537; 
compound tenses (paradigm), 
537; compound tenses (aux¬ 
iliaries used with), 543, 1; 
reflexive verbs, 542; prepo¬ 
sitions used with verbs, 539; 
followed by infinitive, 540; 
transitive and intransitive (dif¬ 
fering from English use), 541. 
void and voild, distinguished 
page 141, footnote. 
voild and il y a, distinguished, 66. 
vous and tu, distinguished, 511, 
~Note 1. 

weather, 264. 

y (pronoun), uses, 518. 




r 





























i 


' x ' 

' 









































\ 

• . 

I i i « - • 





. 

' 3H 98 












* • ' 





















V 









































































/ 

* 

■ 












■ 





























- 








f 


















































. ■ 


v 



✓ 











■ 














» 








Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

111 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
( 724 ) 779-2111 




























